Omron SYSDRIVE 3G3MX2-A4007, SYSDRIVE 3G3MX2-A4022 User Manual
Anuncio
Anuncio
Cat. No. I570-E1-02
USER’S MANUAL
SYSDRIVE MX2
SERIES
Multi-function Compact Inverter
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the multi-function Inverter 3G3MX2. This User's Manual (hereinafter called "this manual") describes the parameter setting methods required for installation/wiring and operation of the 3G3MX2 model, as well as troubleshooting and inspection methods.
z This manual should be delivered to the actual end user of the product.
z After reading this manual, keep it handy for future reference.
z This manual describes the specifications and functions of the product as well as the relations between them. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible with the product.
z Intended readers
This manual is intended for those with knowledge of the workings of electricity (qualified electric engineers or the equivalent), and also in charge of:
Introducing the control equipment
Designing the control system
Installing and/or connecting the control equipment
Field management
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 1
Read and Understand this Manual
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your
OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR
STRICT LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
2 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Read and Understand this Manual
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3
Read and Understand this Manual
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON
Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
4 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Indications and Meanings of Safety Information
In this user's manual, the following precautions and signal words are used to provide information to ensure the safe use of the 3G3MX2 Inverter.
The information provided here is vital to safety. Strictly observe the precautions provided.
Meanings of Signal Words
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in minor or moderate injury, or may result in serious injury or death. Additionally there may be significant property damage.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.
Alert Symbols in this Document
WARNING
Turn off the power supply and implement wiring correctly. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire.
(200 V class: type-D grounding, 400 V class: type-C grounding)
Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff.
Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated.
Do not change wiring, slide switches, or optional devices while power is being supplied.
Always turn off the power supply to the Inverter before changing wiring, changing the slide switches, or attaching/removing options.
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Do not connect resistors to the terminals (+1, P/+2, N/ − ) directly.
Doing so might result in a small-scale fire, heat generation or damage to the unit.
Install a stop motion device to ensure safety. Not doing so might result in a minor injury. (A holding brake is not a stop motion device designed to ensure safety.)
Be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. In case of a braking resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature of the resistor. Not doing so might result in a moderate burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor/regenerative braking unit.
The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to itself or other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring.
Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) that matches the
Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load.
Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product.
Doing so may result in an injury.
6 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Precautions for Safe Use
Precautions for Safe Use
Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places.
Locations subject to direct sunlight.
Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Transporting, Installation, and Wiring
Do not drop or apply strong impact on the product. Doing so may result in damaged parts or malfunction.
Do not hold by the terminal block cover, but hold by the fins during transportation.
Do not connect an AC power supply voltage to the control input/output terminals. Doing so may result in damage to the product.
Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely.
Wiring work must be done after installing the unit body.
Do not connect any load other than a three-phase inductive motor to the U, V, and W output terminals.
Take sufficient shielding measures when using the product in the following locations. Not doing so may result in damage to the product.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong magnetic fields.
Locations close to power lines.
Main Circuit Power Supply
Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as AC power supply voltage.
Operation and Adjustment
Be sure to confirm the permissible range of motors and machines before operation because the
Inverter speed can be changed easily from low to high.
Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Maintenance and Inspection
Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures. Refer to the diagram of product life specified in the manual. When the capacitor stops operating at the end of the product's life, the
Inverter must be replaced.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7
Precautions for Correct Use
Precautions for Correct Use
Installation
Mount the product vertically on a wall with the product's longer sides upright.
The material of the wall has to be nonflammable such as a metal plate.
Restart after Trip
Do not come close to the machine when using the Restart During Momentary Power Interruption function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm.
Be sure to confirm the RUN signal is turned off before resetting the alarm because the machine may abruptly start.
Operation Stop Command
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed.
When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
Maintenance and Parts Replacement
The Inverter consists of many parts, and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use of the designed functions of the Inverter. Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Product Disposal
Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
8 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Precautions for Correct Use
Warning Labels
Warning labels are located on the Inverter as shown in the following illustration.
Be sure to follow the instructions.
Warning Description
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9
Checking Before Unpacking
Checking Before Unpacking
Checking the Product
On delivery, be sure to check that the delivered product is the Inverter 3G3MX2 model that you ordered.
Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales representative or OMRON sales office.
Checking the Nameplate
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications
Checking the Model
3 G 3 M X 2 - A 2 0 5 5
Maximum applicable motor capacity (CT rating)
001
002
004
007
015
022
030
037
040
055
075
110
150
0.1 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
3.7 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
Voltage class
B
2
4
1-phase 200 V AC (200 V class)
3-phase 200 V AC (200 V class)
3-phase 400 V AC (400 V class)
Enclosure rating
A
Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models
Checking the Accessories
Note that Instruction manual is the only accessory included with the 3G3MX2 model.
Mounting screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user.
10 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Revision History
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number located at the lower left of the front and back covers.
Cat.No. I570-E1-02
Revision code
Revision code
01
02
Revision date
Changes and revision pages
September 2009 First printing
March 2010
Revised information on the simple position control function and revised/corrected manual contents.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 11
About This Manual
About This Manual
This User's Manual is compiled chapter by chapter for user's convenience as follows.
Understanding the following configuration ensures more effective use of the product.
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 2 Design
Chapter 3 Operation
Overview
Describes features and names of parts.
Provides external dimensions, installation dimensions, peripheral device design/selection instructions, and other information necessary for design.
Describes names of parts, the Inverter's operations, including how to use the keys on the Digital Operator, and the monitor function.
List of parameters set via Digital Operator.
Describes the functions of the Inverter.
Chapter 4 Parameter List
Chapter 5 Functions
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Communication
Function
Maintenance
Operations
Inspection and
Maintenance
Chapter 9
Appendix
Specifications
Describes the Modbus-RTU communication.
Describes the causes and their countermeasures if the Inverter fails, including the solutions to possible troubles (troubleshooting).
Describes items for periodical inspection and/or maintenance for the
Inverter.
Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices.
Describes the derating chart, capacitor life curve, compliance with international standards and index.
12 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................
Read and Understand this Manual ..................................................
Safety Precautions...........................................................................
Precautions for Safe Use.................................................................
Precautions for Correct Use ............................................................
Checking Before Unpacking ............................................................
10
Revision History...............................................................................
11
About This Manual...........................................................................
12
5
7
1
2
8
Chapter1 Overview
1-1 Functions......................................................................................................1-1
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts .................................................................1-4
Chapter2 Design
2-1 Installation ....................................................................................................2-1
2-2 Wiring ...........................................................................................................2-6
Chapter3 Operation
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator ..........................................................3-1
3-2 Operation Method.........................................................................................3-7
3-3 Test Run.....................................................................................................3-10
3-4 Tripping ......................................................................................................3-12
Chapter4 Parameter List
4-1 Monitor Mode ...............................................................................................4-1
4-2 Function Mode..............................................................................................4-4
Chapter5 Functions
5-1 Monitor Mode ...............................................................................................5-1
5-2 Basic Functions ..........................................................................................5-13
5-3 Input/Output Terminals...............................................................................5-29
5-4 Analog Signal .............................................................................................5-37
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method...........................................................5-46
5-6 Operation Functions ...................................................................................5-56
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions.........................................................5-84
5-8 Restart Functions .......................................................................................5-94
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals......................................................................5-110
5-10 Brake Settings ..........................................................................................5-135
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control........................................................................5-144
5-12 Simple Position Control Function .............................................................5-158
5-13 Safety Function ........................................................................................5-170
5-14 Other Functions........................................................................................5-174
14 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Contents
Chapter6 Communication Function
6-1 Communication Specifications..................................................................... 6-1
6-2 RS-485 Port Specifications and Connection................................................ 6-2
6-3 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Parameters ....................... 6-3
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol ....................................... 6-4
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.............................................................. 6-8
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command)............... 6-19
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication....................................................................... 6-22
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data ................................ 6-27
Chapter7 Maintenance Operations
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions ............................................................ 7-1
7-2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 7-10
Chapter8 Inspection and Maintenance
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance........................................................................ 8-1
Chapter9 Specifications
9-1 Standard Specification List .......................................................................... 9-1
9-2 External Dimensions.................................................................................... 9-6
Appendices
Appendix-1 Derating Table .................................................................................App-1
Appendix-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve......................................................App-7
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output.............................................................................App-8
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards...App-9
INDEX
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 15
Overview
Describes the features, operating procedures, performance specifications and other aspects of this Unit.
1
1-1 Functions............................................................................... 1-1
3G3MX2 Inverter Models ................................................................ 1-1
International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards) .... 1-2
High-performance, Multi-function Compact Inverter Supporting
Wide-ranging Applications .............................................................. 1-2
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts......................................... 1-4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
1-1 Functions
1-1 Functions
1
3G3MX2 Inverter Models
Rated voltage
3-phase 200 VAC IP20
Enclosure ratings
3-phase 400 VAC IP20
1-phase 200 V AC IP20
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
0.1 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
Max. applicable motor capacity
CT: Heavy load VT: Light load
0.1kW
0.2 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
3.7 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
0.75 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
18.5 kW
0.2 kW
0.4 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
Model
3G3MX2-A2001
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-A4004
3G3MX2-A4007
3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
3G3MX2-AB001
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
1-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
1-1 Functions
International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)
The 3G3MX2 Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.
EC Directives
UL/cUL Standards
Classification
EMC directive
Low-voltage directive
Applicable standard
EN61800-3: 2004
EN61800-5-1: 2003
UL508C
1
High-performance, Multi-function Compact Inverter Supporting Wide-ranging Applications
Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications
High starting torque
With the sensorless vector control and auto-tuning functions, this Unit ensures high starting torque of 200% at 0.5 Hz.
Note. The frame may have to be raised depending on the condition.
Overload limit/Overcurrent Suppression function
(1) The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation in order to lower output frequency automatically.
(2) This function suppresses significant change in current caused by rapid acceleration, etc.
Acceleration will be suppressed temporarily if the output current reaches approx. 180% of the rated current during acceleration.
Various Applications
Safety Function
Conforming to stop category 0 under IEC60204-1 and the ISO13849-1: 2006 (PLd) standard
(certification pending)
Simple Position Control Function
(1) Comes standard with the pulse input functions.
(2) Supporting simple positioning to a maximum of 8 points by setting the position command, speed reference and acceleration/deceleration time to parameters.
Comes Standard with RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
(1) Comes standard with the Modbus-RTU communication function to communicate with, and also read/write various parameters from/to, the host equipment.
Broadcasting from the host equipment is also supported.
(2) Transfer Speed: Supporting speeds up to 115.2 kbps
(3) Co-inverter communication is also supported.
Side-by-Side (Zero Clearance) Installation
Since the Inverter can be installed with its right or left face contacting a wall or other structure, the installation space can be reduced.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 1-2
1
1-1 Functions
Note. The carrier frequency, etc. must be derated depending on the model.
Password Function
Comes with the password function to prevent reading or changing of parameters without proper access privileges.
1-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
1-phase 200 V 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 kW
3-phase 200 V 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.75 kW
Even if the W
×
H dimension is the same, the
D dimension for the cooling fin varies depending on the capacity.
H
D
(3)
W
(5)
(6)
(4)
1
(7)
1-phase 200 V 0.75, 1.5, 2.2 kW
3-phase 200 V 1.5, 2.2 kW
3-phase 400 V 0.4, 0.75, 1.5, 2.2, 3.0 kW
(1)
(2)
(3)
Even if the W
×
H dimension is the same, the
D dimension for the cooling fin varies depending on the capacity.
H
D
(6)
(5)
(4)
(7)
W
(1) Cooling fan cover
(2) Cooling fan
(3) Cooling fin
(4) Main housing
(5) Terminal block cover
(6) Optional board cover
(7) Backing plate
Note: • 3-phase 200 V/0.75 kW models come with a cooling fan.
• 1-phase 200 V/0.75 kW models and 3-phase 400 V/0.4 kW/0.75 kW models do not come with a cooling fan.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 1-4
1
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
3-phase 200 V 3.7 kW
3-phase 400V 4.0 kW
(6)
(5)
3-phase 200 V 5.5, 7.5 kW
3-phase 400 V 5.5, 7.5 kW
(7)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(1) Cooling fan cover
(2) Cooling fan
(3) Cooling fin
(4) Main housing
(7)
(5) Terminal block cover
(6) Optional board cover
(7) Backing plate
1-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
1-2 Appearance and Names of Parts
3-phase 200 V 11 kW
3-phase 400 V 11, 15 kW
(6)
(5)
3-phase 200 V 15 kW
(7)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
1
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Cooling fan cover
(2) Cooling fan
(3) Cooling fin
(4) Main housing
(5) Terminal block cover
(6) Optional board cover
(7) Backing plate
(4)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 1-6
Design
Describes the name and function of each part, installation method, wiring method, etc.
2
2-1 Installation............................................................................. 2-1
Precautions for Safe Use ................................................................ 2-1
Precautions for Correct Use............................................................ 2-2
Installation Environment.................................................................. 2-2
Backing Plate .................................................................................. 2-3
Installation/Removal Method of the Terminal Block Cover ............. 2-4
Names of Parts Inside the Terminal Block Cover ........................... 2-5
2-2 Wiring..................................................................................... 2-6
Connection Diagram ....................................................................... 2-6
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals ................................................. 2-10
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................................... 2-18
Connection to Programmable Controller (PLC) ............................ 2-22
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-1 Installation
2-1 Installation
2
Precautions for Safe Use
Installation and Storage
Do not store or use the product in the following places.
Locations subject to direct sunlight.
Locations subject to ambient temperature exceeding the specifications.
Locations subject to relative humidity exceeding the specifications.
Locations subject to condensation due to severe temperature fluctuations.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Transportation, Installation, and Wiring
Do not drop or apply any strong impact to the Inverter to avoid damage to the parts and/or the Inverter.
When transporting the Inverter, hold the fin, not the front cover or terminal block cover.
Do not connect an AC power supply to the control I/O terminals. Doing so may cause damage to the Inverter.
Be sure to tighten the screws on the terminal block securely. Perform the wiring after installing the Inverter.
Do not connect any load other than the 3-phase induction motor to the output terminals (U/
T1, V/T2, W/T3) of the Inverter.
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when using the Inverter in the following locations. Not doing so may result in damage to the Inverter.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
Locations close to power supplies.
Main Circuit Power Supply
Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter matches the AC power supply voltage.
2-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Precautions for Correct Use
Installation
Install the Inverter vertically on a wall.
Install the Inverter on a nonflammable wall surface material, like metal.
2-1 Installation
2
Installation Environment
Make sure the ambient temperature remains within the rated range ( − 10 to 50 ° C). Take note that if the ambient temperature reaches or exceeds 40 ° C, the carrier frequency and output current must be derated. If the Inverter is used in an environment exceeding the allowable operating temperature range, the product life of the Inverter (specifically, the capacitor) will be shortened.
Measure and check the temperature approx. 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter body.
Provide sufficient space around the Inverter because it can become very hot (up to 150 ° C or so).
Keep the Inverter away from heating elements (such as a Braking Resistor, reactor, etc.).
Although side-by-side installation is possible. The ambient temperature of the installation site must not exceed 40 ° C and the carrier frequency and output current must be derated if side-byside installation is used.
100 mm or more
Air flow
Wall
Provide sufficient space so that the top and bottom wiring ducts, etc. will not obstruct the flows of cooling air.
50 mm or more
100 mm or more
Do not install the Inverter in hot, humid sites or other sites subject to frequent bedewing.
Make sure that the humidity in the installation site is within the allowable operating range (20% to 90% RH), as defined in the standard specifications.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-2
2
2-1 Installation
In particular, make sure that the installation site is free from condensation. If condensed water adheres to the Inverter's internal parts, the electronic components may short-circuit, causing failure of the Inverter. In addition to avoiding condensation, avoid installing the Inverter under direct sunlight.
Avoid an environment where the Inverter may be exposed to dust, gases (corrosive, explosive, and/or flammable), grinding fluid mist, or salt. If a foreign object (e.g. dust) enters the Inverter, it could result in failure of the Inverter. If using the Inverter in a dusty place, take appropriate measures. (For example, place the Inverter in a closed panel.)
When several Inverters are installed in a panel and a ventilation fan is mounted in the panel, be careful about the layout of the Inverters and the air intake apertures. Depending on the layout, the Inverter's cooling effect may deteriorate, resulting in an increase in the ambient temperature.
Ventilation fan Ventilation fan
Inverter Inverter
(Good example) (Bad example)
Heat Radiation from Inverter
1-phase/3-phase 200 V
Inverter capacity (kW)
Load with 100% loss (W)
0.1
12
0.2
22
Efficiency at rated output (%) 89.5
90
0.4
30
93
0.75
48
94
1.5
79
95
2.2
104
95.5
3.7
154
96
5.5
229
96
7.5
313
96
11
458
96
15
625
96
3-phase 400 V
Inverter capacity (kW)
Load with 100% loss (W)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
35
Efficiency at rated output (%) 92
56
93
96
94
116
95
125
96
167
96
229
96
296 411
15
528
96.2 96.4 96.6
Backing Plate
With a model of 5.5 kW or higher capacity, cut off the connection points between the backing plate and unnecessary portions with nippers or a wire cutter when running cables.
Unnecessary portions
Connection points
2-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-1 Installation
Installation/Removal Method of the Terminal Block Cover
1. Removal method
Loosen the screw(s) (1 or 2 locations) securing the terminal block cover.
While pressing the bottom of the terminal block cover in the direction of the arrow, pull the terminal block cover downward to remove.
2
While pressing here in the direction of the arrow, pull the terminal block cover downward to remove.
The terminal block cover is secured with one screw at the bottom right for 3.0 kW and smaller models, or with two screws on both sides for 3.7 kW and larger models.
The optional board cover is affixed with screws onto the terminal block cover, but it is not affixed onto the main unit. Accordingly, the terminal block cover can be removed without removing the optional board cover.
8.8.8.8.
Optional board cover
Terminal block cover
8.8.8.8.
Terminal block cover screw
(1 location for 3.0 kW and smaller models)
Terminal block cover screw
(2 locations for 3.7 kW and larger models)
2. Installation method
Follow the removal procedure in reverse. Set the top side of the terminal block cover onto the main unit and push in the cover until you hear a "click" sound.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-4
2-1 Installation
2
Names of Parts Inside the Terminal Block Cover
Modbus-RTU Termination resistor selector switch
OFF
(Factory default)
ON
Connector for optional board
Safety function selector switch
Disable
(Factory default)
Enable
USB connector (mini-B)
Connector for Digital Operator (RJ45)
Multi-function contact terminal block
EDM function selector switch
P1 terminal
(Factory default)
EDM output
Control circuit terminal block A
Control circuit terminal block B
CHARGE indicator
Main circuit terminal block
2-5
Name
Modbus-RTU
Termination resistor selector switch
Safety function selector switch
EDM function selector switch
USB connector
Description
Use this Terminal Resistor selector switch for RS-485 terminals on the control circuit terminal block. When this switch is turned ON, the internal 200 Ω Resistor is connected.
Turn this switch ON when using the safety function. Turn OFF the power before turning this switch ON/OFF.For details, refer to "Safety Function" on page 5-170.
Turn this switch ON when using the EDM output of the safety function. Turn OFF the power before turning this switch ON/OFF. For details, refer to "Safety Function" on page 5-170.
Use this mini-B USB connector to connect a PC.
Even when the Inverter is being operated by a PC, etc., via USB connection, it can still be operated using the Digital Operator.
Use this connector to connect the Digital Operator. Connector for
Digital Operator
Connector for optional board
Control circuit terminal blocks A and B
Multi-function contact terminal block
Main circuit terminal block
CHARGE indicator (Charge indicator LED)
Use this connector to mount the optional board.
Communications Units and other options can be connected.
These terminal blocks are used to connect various digital/analog input and output signals for inverter control, etc.
Use this SPDT contact terminal block for relay outputs.
Use this terminal block to connect an output to the motor and Braking Resistor, etc.
Also, use this terminal block to connect the inverter to the main power supply.
This LED indicator is lit if the DC voltage of the main circuit (between terminals P/
+2 and N/ − ) remains approx. 45 V or above after the power has been cut off. Before wiring, etc. confirm that the Charge LED indicator is turned OFF.
Note. Refer to Chapter 3 "Operation" for the display and operating controls.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
2-2 Wiring
Connection Diagram
ON
MC
OFF
AX
MC AX
Single-phase
3-phase power supply
ELB
If any source-logic external output devices or external power supply is used, refer to
"Connection to
Programmable Controller
(PLC)" on page 2-22.
Multi-function inputs
(7 contact inputs)
Thermistor
MC
R/L1 (L1) *1
S/L2
T/L3 (N) *1
Shorting bar
P24
PSC
SC
S7/EB
S6
S5/TH
S4/GS2
S3/GS1
S2
S1
24 VDC
SC
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
+1
M
3~
Motor
Shorting bar
DC reactor
Remove the short bar when connecting a
DC reactor. P/+2
RB
N/
−
Braking Resistor
*2
MC
MA
MB
P2
Multi-function relay output
Power: 1/4 W min.
Resistance: 2 kΩ min.
10 VDC power supply
(7 mA Max.)
FS
10 VDC
Analog voltage input
0 to 10 V (10 bits)
FV
Analog current input
4 to 20 mA (10 bits)
Pulse input
5 to 24 VDC
(32 kHz Max.)
FI
Approx.
100 Ω
Approx.
10 k Ω
SC
RP
Analog voltage output 0 to 10 V
(10 bits)
Pulse output
0 to 10 VDC
(32 kHz Max.)
AM
MP
SC
SC
Terminal
Resistor
Terminal Resistor selector switch
SC
SC
P1/EDM
Multi-function outputs (2 outputs)
PC
RS+
RS −
Serial communication port
(RS-485/Modbus-RTU)
When using a Regenerative Braking Unit
RB
N/
−
Regenerative
Braking Unit *2
Braking Resistor *2
P P
N RB
SC
Optional board connector
Communications Option Unit *2
*1 Connect to terminals L1 and N on a single-phase, 200-V Inverter (3G3MX2-AB @@@ ).
*2 Optional.
Ground to 100
Ground to 100
Ω
Ω
or less for 200-V class
or less for 400-V class
2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-6
2
2-2 Wiring
Main Circuit Terminals
+1
P/+2
P/+2
RB
P/+2
Terminal symbol
Terminal name
R/L1 L1 Main power supply
S/L2 input terminal
T/L3 N
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Inverter output terminal
DC reactor connection terminal
Braking Resistor connection terminal
N/
G
−
Regenerative braking unit connection terminal
Ground terminal
Description
Connect the input AC power supply. Connect to terminals L1 and N on a single-phase, 200-V Inverter (3G3MX2-AB @@@ ).
Connect a 3-phase motor.
Remove the shorting bar between terminals +1 and P/+2, and connect the optional DC reactor.
Connect optional braking resistors. (If a braking torque is required)
Connect optional regenerative braking units. (When braking torque is required or the built-in braking circuit is not sufficient)
This is a ground terminal. Connect this terminal to the ground.
Provide Class D grounding for 200 V class models, and class C grounding for 400 V class models.
On 200 V class models of 3.7 kW or below and 400 V class models of 4.0 kW or below, the ground terminal is located on the cooling fin.
Control Circuit Terminals
Power supply
Frequency setting input
Terminal symbol
SC
FS
FV
Terminal name
Input signal common
Description
This is a common terminal used by the internal power supply, digital input and analog input/output terminals.
10 VDC power supply for the FV terminal.
Frequency reference power supply
Frequency reference input terminal (analog voltage input)
Use this terminal if the frequency reference is provided by 0 to 10 VDC voltage input.
FI Frequency reference terminal (analog current input)
Use this terminal if the frequency reference is provided by 4 to 20 mA current input.
Specifications
Allowable max. current:
7 mA
Input impedance
Approx. 10 k Ω
Allowable input voltage range
− 0.3 to +12 VDC
Input impedance
100 Ω
Allowable input range
0 to 24 mA
2-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Sensor input
Output
Power supply
Terminal symbol
S5/TH
Terminal name
External thermistor input
(also used as multi-function input terminal)
AM
SC
P24
PSC
S7/EB
S6
S5/TH
S4/GS2
S3/GS1
S2
S1
S4/GS2
S3/GS1
Multi-function analog output
(voltage)
Input signal common
Power supply terminal for input signal
Power supply terminal for input terminal
Multi-function input terminal
Safety input
Description
Connect an external thermistor between the
SCs, to trip the Inverter when a temperature error occurs. (The inverter will trip when the input from thermistor is approx. 3 k Ω or higher.) Since this input is also used as the multifunction input terminal, setting of C005 is required.
For details, refer to
"Thermistor Trip Function" on page 5-120.
Specified signals can be output using voltage signals of 0 to 10 VDC.
This is a common terminal used by the internal power supply, digital input and analog input/output terminals.
24 VDC power supply for contact input signal. This is used as a common terminal if the source logic is input.
Sink logic input: Shorted with P24
Source logic input: Shorted with SC
To drive the contact input using an external power supply, remove the shorting bar. For details, refer to
"Connection to
Programmable Controller
(PLC)" on page 2-22.
Select 7 functions from among 59, and allocate them to terminals S1 through S7/EB. Both sink and source logics are supported. For details, refer to "Connection to
Programmable Controller
(PLC)" on page 2-22.
Enabled when the safety function selector switch is turned ON. For details, refer to "Safety Function" on page 5-170.
Specifications
PTC type
AM
Allowable max. current:
100 mA
Voltage between each input and PSC
ON voltage: 18 V min.
OFF voltage: 3 V max.
Allowable max. voltage: 27
VDC
Load current: 5 mA (at 24
V)
2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-8
2
2-2 Wiring
Terminal symbol
Terminal name
Pulse input-A
RP
S7/EB
P1/EDM
P2
P1/EDM
MA
MB
MC
MP
RS+
RS −
Description Specifications
A pulse input for frequency setting. (Take note that the internal circuit is different from input terminals S7/
EB.)
Input pulse 32 kHz max.
Voltage between input and
SC
ON voltage: 4 V min.
OFF voltage: 1 V max.
Allowable max. voltage: 27
VDC
Input pulse 1.8 kHz max. Pulse input-B A pulse input for frequency setting. (Take note that the internal circuit is different from input terminal RP.)
Multi-function output terminal
Select 2 functions from among 43, and allocate them to terminals P1 through P2. Both sink and source logics are supported. For details, refer to "Connection to
Programmable Controller
(PLC)" on page 2-22.
Safety monitor Enabled when the EDM function selector switch is
ON. For details, refer to
"Safety Function" on page
5-170.
Relay output terminal
Relay output common
Pulse output
Select the desired functions from among 43 functions, and allocate them to these terminals.
SPDT contact.
The factory default of Relay
Output (MA, MB) Contact
Selection (C036) is NC contact between MA-MC, and NO contact between
MB-MC.
Pulses are output.
Modbus port
(RS-485)
ON voltage: 18 V min.
OFF voltage: 3 V max.
Allowable max. voltage: 27
VDC
Load current: 5 mA (at 24
V)
Open collector output
Between each terminal and
PC
Allowable max. voltage: 27
V
Allowable max. current: 50 mA
Voltage drop when ON: 4 V max.
Max. contact capacity
MA-MC:
250 VAC, 2 A (resistance)
0.2 A (induction)
MB-MC:
250 VAC, 1 A (resistance)
0.2 A (induction)
Contact min. capacity
100 VAC, 10mA
5 VDC, 100mA
RS-485 port
RS+ RS-485 differential (+) signal
RS- RS-485 differential ( − ) signal
Output pulse: 32 kHz max.
Output voltage: 10 VDC
Allowable max. current: 2 mA
Max. speed: 115.2 kbps
Built-in Terminal Resistor:
200 Ω
Slide switch selection
2-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
Before wiring, make sure that the CHARGE indicator is OFF.
Once the power supply is turned on, the capacitor in the Inverter is charged with high voltage for a while even after the power supply is turned off and regardless of whether the Inverter is running or not.
If you are going to change cable connections after the power supply is turned off, wait for at least
10 minutes. Before wiring, check for a residual voltage between terminals "P/+2" and "N/ − " with a circuit tester to ensure safety.
Main power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Use an earth leakage breaker for circuit (wiring) protection between the power supply and the main power supply terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
An earth leakage breaker may malfunction at high frequency. Use an earth leakage breaker with a large high-frequency sensitive current rating.
As a guide for leakage current, if a CV wire is used and routed through a metal pipe, the leakage current is 30 mA/km. Due to the higher specific inductive capacity of the H-IV wire, the leakage current increases about eight times. Use a wire with a sensitivity current one-level higher. The leakage current mentioned here is the effective value of the fundamental wave, and high-frequency currents are excluded.
Inverter-motor distance
100 m max.
300 m max.
800 m max.
Sensitivity current of earth leakage breaker
30 mA
100 mA
200 mA
2
When the Inverter protective function is activated, your system may fail or an accident may occur. Connect a magnetic contactor to turn off the Inverter power supply.
Do not start or stop the Inverter by switching ON/OFF the magnetic contactor provided in the
Inverter power supply input (primary) circuit and output (secondary) circuit. To start or stop the
Inverter via an external signal, use the operation command terminals (FW, RV) on the control circuit terminal block.
Do not use this Inverter with an input phase loss connection. Doing so may damage the
Inverter.
The Inverter operates with 1-phase input during input phase loss, causing a trip (due to undervoltage, overcurrent, etc.) or damage to the Inverter. Even if an input phase is open, the internal capacitor is charged with voltage, and electric shock or injury may occur.
When changing the cable connections, refer to "Precautions for Use."
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-10
2
2-2 Wiring
In the following cases, the internal converter module may be damaged:
Imbalance ratio of power supply voltage is 3% or more.
Power supply capacity is ten times or more than the Inverter capacity, and 500 kVA or more.
Rapid change in power supply voltage
Example) When several inverters are connected with a short bus.
When the phase advance capacitor is turned on/off.
Do not turn on the power and then turn it off again more than once every 3 minutes. Doing so may damage the Inverter.
Inverter output terminal (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
For connection of the output terminal, use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger diameter. Otherwise, the output voltage between the Inverter and the motor may drop.
Particularly during low-frequency output, a voltage drop occurs with the cable, resulting in motor torque reduction.
Do not mount a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber, because these devices may cause the Inverter to trip or cause damage to the capacitor or surge absorber.
If the cable length exceeds 20 m (particularly, with 400 V class), a surge voltage may be generated at the motor terminal depending on stray capacitance or inductance of the cable, causing the motor to burn out.
To suppress surge voltage, we offer a special filter (3G3AX-NFxxx). For details, contact our authorized dealer.
To connect several motors, provide a thermal relay for each.
The RC value of each thermal relay should be 1.1 times larger than the motor rated current.
The relay may trip earlier depending on the cable length. In this case, connect an AC reactor to the Inverter output.
DC Reactor Connection Terminal (+1, P/+2)
This terminal is used to connect the optional DC reactor.
By factory default, a shorting bar has been connected between terminals +1 and P/+2. Before connecting the DC reactor, remove this shorting bar.
The length of the DC reactor connection cable should be 5 m or shorter.
If the DC reactor is not being used, do not remove the shorting bar.
If you remove the shorting bar without connecting the DC reactor, no power is supplied to the
Inverter main circuit, disabling operation.
2-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
External Braking Resistor Connection Terminal (P/+2, RB)/Regenerative Braking Unit Connection Terminal (P/+2, N/ − )
All models in the 3G3MX2 Series have a built-in regenerative braking circuit.
To improve braking capacity, mount the optional braking resistor to this terminal.
Do not mount a resistor whose resistance is lower than the specified value. Doing so may damage the regenerative braking circuit.
The cable length should be 5 m or shorter. Twist the two wires.
Do not connect any device other than the optional Regenerative Braking Unit or Braking
Resistor to this terminal.
Ground Terminal
To prevent electric shock, be sure to ground the Inverter and the motor.
The 200 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class D grounding conditions (conventional Class 3 grounding conditions: 100 Ω or less ground resistance), The
400 V class should be connected to the ground terminal under Class C grounding conditions
(conventional special Class 3 grounding conditions: 10 Ω or less ground resistance).
For the ground cable, use the compatible cable or a cable with a larger diameter. Make the cable length as short as possible.
When several Inverters are connected, the ground cable must not be connected across several
Inverters, and must not be looped. Otherwise, the Inverter and surrounding control machines may malfunction.
2
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Your ground bolt
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-12
2
2-2 Wiring
Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminal Block
Open the terminal block cover and wire the main circuit terminal blocks.
Applicable model
3G3MX2-A2001 to
A2007
Terminal arrangement
RB +1 P/+2 N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
3G3MX2-AB001 to
AB004
3G3MX2-A2015,
A2022
3G3MX2-A4004 to
A4030
Ground terminal
(M4) × 2
From power supply To motors
L1
RB +1 P/+2 N/-
N U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Ground terminal
(M4) × 2
From power supply To motors
(Connect to L1 and N for 1-phase)
RB +1 P/+2 N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
2-13
3G3MX2-AB007,
AB015, AB022
Ground terminal (M4) × 2
From power supply To motors
L1
RB +1 P/+2 N/-
N U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Ground terminal (M4) × 2
From power supply To motors
(Connect to L1 and N for 1-phase)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Applicable model
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A2055,
A2075
3G3MX2-A4055,
A4075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2- A4110 to
A4150
3G3MX2-A2150
2-2 Wiring
Terminal arrangement
RB +1 P/+2 N/ −
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Ground terminal (M4)
×
2
From power supply To motors
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+1 P/+2 N/ − RB G G
2
From power supply To motors
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+1 P/+2 N/
−
RB G G
From power supply To motors
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
+1 P/+2 N/
−
RB G G
From power supply To motors
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-14
2-2 Wiring
2
2-15
Recommended Cable Size, Wiring Device and Crimp Terminal
Voltage class
Motor output
(CT) kW
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
Inverter model
3G3MX2-A2001
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-A4004
3G3MX2-A4007
3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
Power cable mm
M5
(13)
M6
(17.5)
M8
(23)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M5
(13)
Wiring
Terminalblock screw size (terminal block width) mm
M3.5
(7.6)
M3.5
(7.6)
M3.5
(7.6)
M3.5
(7.6)
M4
(10)
M5
(13)
M5
(13)
M6
(17.5)
M6
(17.5)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
Tightening torque
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.0
3.9 to 5.1
5.9 to 8.8
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.0
3.9 to 5.1
3.9 to 5.1
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG14
(2.0)
AWG14
(2.0)
AWG6
(14)
AWG4
(22)
AWG2
(38)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG12
(3.5)
AWG10
(5.5)
AWG10
(5.5)
AWG6
(14)
AWG6
(14)
AWG14
(2.0)
AWG12
(3.5)
AWG10
(5.5)
AWG6
(14)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
EX50
(20A)
EX50
(30A)
EX50
(50A)
EX60B
(60A)
EX100B
(75A)
EX50
(10A)
EX50
(10A)
EX50
(15A)
EX50
(15A)
EX100
(75A)
EX100
(100A)
EX100
(100A)
EX50
(5A)
EX30
(20A)
EX30
(20A)
EX50
(50A)
EX60
(60A)
Applicable device
Earth
Leakage
Breaker
(ELB)
Magnetic contactor
(MC)
Fuse size
(class J)
Rated
600 V AIC
200kA
EX30
(5A)
EX30
(5A)
EX30
(10A)
EX30
(10A)
H10C
H10C
H10C
H10C
10A
10A
10A
15A
H20
H20
H25
H35
H50
H65C
H65C
H10C
15A
20A
30A
30A
40A
60A
80A
10A
H10C
H10C
H20
H20
H20
H25
H35
H35
H65C
10A
10A
10A
15A
15A
15A
20A
30A
40A
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Voltage class
1-phase
200 V
Motor output
(CT) kW
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Inverter model
3G3MX2-AB001
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
Power cable mm
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG16
(1.25)
AWG12
(3.5)
AWG10
(5.5)
AWG10
(5.5)
Wiring
Terminalblock screw size (terminal block width) mm
M3.5
(7.6)
M3.5
(7.6)
M3.5
(7.6)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
M4
(10)
Tightening torque
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
Applicable device
Earth
Leakage
Breaker
(ELB)
Magnetic contactor
(MC)
Fuse size
(class J)
Rated
600 V AIC
200kA
EX30
(5A)
EX30
(5A)
EX30
(10A)
EX30
(15A)
EX30
(20A)
EX30
(20A)
H10C
H10C
H10C
H10C
H20
H20
10A
10A
10A
15A
20A
30A
Note 1: Applicable devices assume use of a standard 3-phase, 4-pole motor.
Note 2: Select an applicable circuit breaker by also considering the cutoff capacity. (Use an inverter type.)
Use one circuit breaker for one inverter according to the applications shown in the above table.
Note 3: If the wiring distance exceeds 20 m, the power cable size must be increased.
Note 4: A H-IV wire (75 ° C) is recommended.
Note 5: Use an earth leakage breaker (ELB) to ensure safety.
Note 6: To meet the UL standards, always insert a UL-standard fuse of class J type on the power supply side.
Note 7: Use a ground wire with a larger diameter than that of the power cable shown above.
Note 8: Tighten the terminal-block screws with the specified torque. If the screws are not tightened securely, short-circuiting or fire may occur. Excessive tightening may cause damage to the terminal block or the Inverter.
Note 9: Choose the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker (ELB) depending on the total distance between the Inverter and the power supply, and the Inverter and the motor. Also, use an earth leakage breaker of time-delay type. Use of a high-speed type may result in malfunction.
Note 10: If a CV wire is used and routed through a metal pipe, the leakage current becomes 30 mA/km.
Note 11: Due to the higher specific inductive capacity of the IV wire, the leakage current increases about eight times. Accordingly, use a wire with a sensitivity current of eight times the applicable level shown in the table below. Also, use a CV wire if the total wiring length exceeds 100 m.
Total wiring length
100 m max.
300 m max.
Sensitivity current (mA)
50
100
2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-16
2
2-2 Wiring
Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Power supply
(1) (2) (3)
Name Function
Refer to "Recommended Cable Size, Wiring
Device and Crimp Terminal" on page 2-15.
(1)
(2)
ELB
(3)
Magnetic contactor
(4)
(5)
(6)
(4) AC reactor
(5) Input noise filter
(6) Radio noise filter
(7) DC reactor
Apply this reactor as a harmonic suppression measure, or when the imbalance ratio of power supply voltage is 3% or more, power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more, or power supply voltage changes suddenly. It also helps improve the power factor.
This noise filter reduces the conducted noise generated by the Inverter and traveling through the wires. Connect it to the primary
(input) side of the Inverter.
When the Inverter is used, noise may generate in a nearby radio, etc. through the power wiring, etc. Use this noise filter to reduce such noise (= reduce radiated noise).
This reactor suppresses the harmonics generated by the Inverter.
R S T
+1
P/+2
RB
N/ −
U V W
(10)
(11)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(8)
(8) Braking Resistor
(9) Regenerative braking unit
Use this Unit to increase the braking torque of the Inverter to permit frequent ON/OFF switchings, or decelerate a load whose inertial moment is large.
(10) Output noise filter
(11) Radio noise filter
This noise filter is installed between the
Inverter and motor to reduce the radiated noise emitted from the wires. Use it to reduce radio interference in radios and TVs, or prevent malfunctioning of measuring equipment, sensors, etc.
Apply this noise filter to reduce the noise generating on the output side of the Inverter
(both the input side and output side).
M
2-17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring and Arranging a Control Circuit Terminal Block
Terminals SC and PC are common terminals for input/output signals. They are isolated each other. Do not short-circuit or ground these common terminals.
Do not ground these common terminals via external equipment and check the external equipment ground conditions.
Connect diodes when wiring input/output signals for multiple inverters, because sneak circuit paths are created.
For wiring of each control circuit terminal, use a twisted-pair shielded cable and connect the shielded cable to each common terminal.
The control circuit terminal connection cable should be 20 m or shorter. Separate the control circuit terminal connection cables from the main circuit cable (power cable) and the relay control circuit cable. If the two cables must be crossed with each other, make sure they bisect at right angles. Otherwise, the Inverters may malfunction.
For connection of the thermistor input terminal, connect the twisted wires to terminal SC individually, and separate them from other SC common cables. Since a weak current flows through the thermistor, the thermistor connection cable must be separated from the main circuit cable (power cable).The thermistor connection cable should be 20 m or shorter.
When providing contacts for control circuit terminals (multi-function input terminals, etc.), use a relay that will not cause contact failure even when the current or voltage is weak, such as a relay with cross-bar twin contacts.
To use a relay for a multi-function output terminal, connect a surge-absorbing diode in parallel with the coil.
Do not short-circuit the analog power supply terminals (FS-SC) and/or the interface power supply terminals (P24 and SC). Doing so could result in failure of the Inverter.
The control circuit terminal block has two rows of terminals at top and bottom. Since wiring the top terminals first makes it difficult to wire the bottom terminals, wire the bottom terminals first.
After the wiring, gently pull the wires to confirm that they are securely connected.
2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-18
2
2-2 Wiring
Wiring Example (Sink Logic)
Shorting bar
(sink logic)
RS+
RS
−
S7/EB S6 S5/TH S4/GS2 S3/GS1 S2
MP RP FS FV FI SC AM
S1
PC
SC PSC P24
P2 P1/EDM
RY RY
Variable Resistor
Frequency reference
(1 to 2 k Ω ) Signal during
RUN
Frequency reading
Frequency arrival signal
(27 VDC 50 mA max.)
When connecting a relay to the multi-function output terminal, install a surge-absorbing diode in parallel with the relay. The output circuit can break down due to surge voltage when the relay is switched on/off.
Switching Method for Input Control Logics
Multi-function input terminals are set to sink logic at the factory.
To switch the input control logic to source logic, remove the shorting bar between terminals
P24 and PSC on the control circuit terminal block, and connect it between terminals PSC and
SC.
(1) Sink logic (2) Source logic
S2 S1 SC PSC P24 S2 S1 SC PSC P24
Shorting bar Shorting bar
Communication
RS-485 Logic input
Logic common and power supply
Relay output
RS
− S7
/EB
RS+ MP RP
S6 S5
/TH
S4
/GS2
S3
/GS1
S2
FS FV
S1 SC PSC P24
FI SC AM PC P2 P1
/EDM
Shorting bar
MB MA MC
Communication Pulse Pulse Analog input and
RS-485 output input power supply
Analog output
Logic output
2-19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Wire Sizes for Control Circuit Terminal Block and Relay Output Terminal Block
Control circuit terminal block
Relay output terminal block 8 mm
Stripping length for single/stranded wires:
Approx. 8 mm
Control Circuit Terminal
Block
Relay output terminal block
Single wire mm
2
(AWG)
0.2 to 1.5
(AWG 24 to 16)
0.2 to 1.5
(AWG 24 to 16)
Applicable wire
Stranded wire mm
2
(AWG)
0.2 to 1.0
(AWG 24 to 17)
0.2 to 1.0
(AWG 24 to 17)
Ferrules mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 to 0.75
(AWG 24 to 18)
0.25 to 0.75
(AWG 24 to 18)
2
Recommended Terminal
To improve the ease of wiring and reliability of connection, use of ferrules of the following specifications is recommended for signal wires:
Wire size mm 2 (AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.34 (22)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
Ferrules type*
AI 0.25-8YE
AI 0.34-8TQ
AI 0.5-8WH
AI 0.75-8GY
L [mm]
12.5
12.5
14
14
φ d [mm]
0.8
0.8
1.1
1.3
φ D [mm]
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.8
8
φ d
φ
D
L
* Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
Crimp tool CRIPMFOX UD 6-4 or CRIMPFOX ZA 3
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-20
2
2-2 Wiring
Wiring Method
1. Use a slotted screwdriver (width: 2.5 mm or less) to push in the orange part of the control circuit terminal block. (The wire insertion part opens.)
2. With the slotted screwdriver pushed in, insert the wire or ferrule in the wire insertion part (round hole).
3. Pull out the slotted screwdriver, and the wire will be fixed.
2.5 mm
Use a slotted screwdriver to push in the part.
Insert the wire.
Note: When pulling out a wire, do so by also pushing in the part denoted by
Pull out the slotted screwdriver, and the wire will be fixed.
with a slotted screwdriver.
2-21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Connection to Programmable Controller (PLC)
Connection of Multi-function Input Terminal and Programmable Controller
When the Inverter's internal interface power supply is used
When an external power supply is used
(Remove shorting bar on the control terminal block.)
S
Shorting bar
P24
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
S P24
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
S7
COM
Output module Inverter
COM
Output module
S7
24VDC
Inverter
COM COM
Shorting bar
P24
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
S7
S
Output module Inverter
S
Output module
24 VDC
P24
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
S7
Inverter
Shorting bar
P24
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
P24
Shorting PSC bar
SC
S1
P24
24 VDC
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
P24
24 VDC
PSC
SC
S1
24 VDC
S7 S7 S7 S7
2
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 2-22
2
2-2 Wiring
Connection of Multi-function Output Terminal and Programmable Controller
P1/EDM
P2
COM
PC 24 VDC
Inverter Input module
PC
24 VDC COM
P1/EDM
P2
Inverter Input module
2-23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
2-2 Wiring
Note on Use of Multiple Inverters
If multiple Inverters are using a common input (switch, etc.) and the Inverters are turned on at different timings, a sneak current path will be generated as shown below and the input may be recognized as ON when it is actually OFF. In this case, be sure to insert a diode (rating: 50 V/
0.1 A) in the location shown below or use external power supply circuits to prevent the sneak current path.
1. For Sink Logic
Power ON
Shorting line
P24
PSC
Power ON
P24
PSC
SC SC 2
Input ON
S1
Shorting line
P24
Power OFF
PSC
SC
Add diodes.
Input OFF
S1
P24
Power OFF
PSC
SC
S1 S1
Switch OFF
Without this diode, a sneak current path is generated and the input turns ON when the switch is OFF.
24-VDC power supply
Switch OFF
Install a diode instead of the shorting bar to prevent the sneak current path.
P24
Power ON
PSC
SC
Change to an external power supply.
Input OFF
S1
P24
Power OFF
PSC
SC
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
S1
Switch OFF
A sneak current path will not occur if the short bar is removed and an external power supply is used.
2-24
2
2-2 Wiring
2. For Source Logic
P24
Power ON
Shorting line PSC
SC
Input ON
S1
P24
Power OFF
PSC
Shorting line
SC
S1
Add diodes.
P24
Power ON
PSC
SC
Input OFF
S1
P24
Power OFF
PSC
SC
S1
Switch OFF
Without this diode, a sneak current path is generated and the input turns ON when the switch is OFF.
24-VDC power supply
Switch OFF
Install a diode instead of the shorting bar to prevent the sneak current path.
P24
Power ON
PSC
SC
Change to an external power supply.
Input OFF
S1
P24
Power OFF
PSC
SC
S1
Switch OFF
A sneak current path will not occur if the short bar is removed and an external power supply is used.
2-25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Operation
Describes the operating procedures including procedures for trial operation.
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator................................. 3-1
Names of Parts and their Descriptions ........................................... 3-1
Key Operation System .................................................................... 3-3
3-2 Operation Method ................................................................. 3-7
RUN Command/Frequency Reference Input .................................. 3-7
3-3 Test Run............................................................................... 3-10
Procedure for Test Run................................................................. 3-10
3-4 Tripping................................................................................ 3-12
Overview of Operation upon Tripping ........................................... 3-12
3
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
3
Names of Parts and their Descriptions
USB connector
Data display
RUN Command enabled
LED indicator
Operation key
8.8.8.8.
RJ45 connector
Name
POWER LED
Description
Lit (green) while the Inverter is receiving power.
8.8.8.8.
ALARM LED
PROGRAM LED indicator
RUN (during
RUN) LED indicator
Lit (red) when the Inverter trips.
For information on how to reset the trip, refer to "Method for
Resetting Trip" on page 7-1.
Lit (green) when the displayed data (set value) can be changed.
Blinks if the set value is invalid. Refer to "Warning Display" on page 7-7.
Lit (green) when the Inverter is running. (Lit when there is either a "valid RUN command" or "inverter output."
Accordingly, it is also lit when a RUN command is issued at a set frequency of 0 Hz or while the motor is decelerating after the RUN command is turned OFF.)
Lit (green) when the displayed data is frequency. Monitor LED indicator (Hz)
Monitor LED indicator (A)
RUN Command enabled LED indicator
Display
Lit (green) when the displayed data is current.
Lit (green) when the RUN command is set to the Digital
Operator.
(The RUN key on the Digital Operator is enabled.)
Various parameters, frequency/set value and other data are displayed (red).
RUN key Runs the Inverter. Take note that this key is enabled only when the RUN command destination is the Digital Operator.
STOP/RESET key
This key decelerates the Inverter to a stop. (Although the
STOP/RESET key is enabled even when a RUN command is issued to a destination other than the Digital Operator (factory default), it can be disabled by a Setting (b087).)
If the Inverter is already tripped, the trip will be reset (return from the tripping).
3-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
Name
Mode key
Description
Parameter is displayed: Move to the beginning of the next function group.
Data is displayed: Cancel the setting and return to the parameter display.
Individual input mode: Move the blinking digit to the left.
Regardless of the displayed screen, pressing and holding this key (for 1 second or more) displays the data for Output
Frequency Monitor (d001).
Increment key
Decrement key
These keys are used to increment/decrement a parameter or set data. Pressing and holding each key increases the incrementing/decrementing speed.
Pressing the Increment and Decrement keys together activates the "Individual Input MODE" where each digit can be edited independently.
Enter key Parameter is displayed: Move to the data display.
Data is displayed: Confirm/store the setting (in the
EEPROM) and return to the parameter display.
Individual input mode: Move the blinking digit to the right.
USB connector Use this connector (mini-B type) to connect a PC.
The Inverter can still be operated from the Digital Operator even when it is being operated using a PC, etc., via USB communication.
RJ45 connector Use this connector (RS-422) to connect the optional
Remote Operator. Once the Remote Operator is connected, the keys on the main unit become disabled. In this case, use b150 to set the item to be displayed.
3
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-2
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
3
Key Operation System
The following describes the key operation system of the Digital Operator.
Function group "d"
Parameter display
When parameter is displayed
: Move to data display
Data display
* Because the function group "d" is a monitor mode, data cannot be changed.
dk0k0k1 0.0k0
d001: Output Frequency Monitor dk0k0k2
When parameter is displayed
: Increases/decreases parameters by Increment/Decrement keys. Pressing the Increment key at the end returns to the beginning of the same function group.
When parameter is displayed
: Move to the next function group dk1k0k4
Function group "F"
Parameter display fk0k0k1
Store
Data display
5k0.0k0
F001: Output Frequency Setting fk0k0k2 fk0k0k4
Function group "A"
Parameter display ak0k0k1
5k0.0k1
When data is displayed (F001 to F*03)
Since changed are reflected the moment they are changed, the display does not blink when any of these parameters is changed.
: Store the value in the EEPROM and return to the parameter display
: Return to the parameter display without storing the value in the EEPROM
Data display
0k0 A001: Frequency Reference Selection ak0k0k2 ak1k6k5
Function group "b" bk0k0k1
Function group "C" ck0k0k1
Function group "H" hk0k0k1
Function group "P" pk0k0k1
Function group "U" uk0k0k1
Function group "d" dk0k0k1
Return to d001
0k1
When data is displayed
If data is changed, all digits will blink.
The new data is not yet reflected while its digits are still blinking.
: Confirm and store the changes and return to the parameter display
: Cancel the change and return to the parameter display
Pressing the Increment/Decrement keys simultaneously in the parameter display or data display can change the values quickly and with ease.
For details, refer to the next page.
* Return to the function group "d" after the function group "U."
3-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
Example of Basic Operations
An example of basic parameter change operations is given below.
<Operation example of changing RUN Command Selection (A002) from Digital
Operator (02) to Terminal Block (01) when "0.00" is shown on the output frequency monitor screen after the power has been turned ON>
(2) Press the Mode Key to display the parameters.
(1) The d001 (Output Frequency Monitor) data is displayed during power ON time.
(Default setting)
Output Frequency
Monitor dk0k0k1 0.0k0
fk0k0k1
(3) Press the Mode Key to move the function group.
3 ak0k0k1
(5) Press the Increment key to increment the parameter by 1.
RUN Command Selection ak0k0k2
(4) Press the Mode Key to move the function group.
(6) Press the Enter key to move to the data display.
0k2
When the display first appears, all data digits are lit.
(9) Pressing and holding the Enter key
(for 1 second or more) jumps to the output frequency monitor display.
(7) Press the Decrement key to decrement the data by 1.
0k1
If data is changed, all digits will blink.
The new data is not yet reflected while its digits are still blinking.
(8) Press the Enter key to confirm and store the value.
Since F parameters other than F004 are reflected in real time the moment they are changed, the display does not blink when any of these parameters is changed.
Key arrangement
Key name
Mode key
Enter key
Increment key
Decrement key
Increment/Decrement are pressed simultaneously
Function code is displayed Data is displayed
Move to the next function group Value is cancelled and return to the parameter display
Proceed to the data display Value is confirmed/stored and return to the parameter display
Parameter is incremented by 1 Data is incremented by 1
Parameter is decremented by 1 Data is decremented by 1
Move to the individual input mode
Move to the individual input mode
Reference
Regardless of the Digital Operator display, pressing and holding the Mode key (for 1 second or more) displays the data for Output Frequency Monitor (d001) again. However, the selected mode continues to cycle among the function groups while the Mode Key is held, according to the designed operation of the key. (Example: A001 → F001 → b001 → C001 → ...Elapse of 3 seconds, followed by display of "50.00")
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-4
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
3
Operation Example in the Individual Input Mode
If the parameter or data to be changed is far away from the currently displayed value, use the individual input mode to change the parameter efficiently.
Step1: Increment/Decrement keys are pressed simultaneously.
Step2: Move the blinking digit to the left/right using the Mode Key and
Enter key, and change the value using the Increment/Decrement keys.
+1
Step3: Press the Enter key while the least significant bit is blinking, to confirm the setting.
bk0k8k3 bk0k8k1 dk0k0k1
The most significant digit blinks.
Move to left −
1 Move to right
3.0
The individual input mode is effective regardless of whether a parameter or data is currently displayed.
Parameter display fk0k0k1
Pressed simultaneously
(A) fk0k0k1 fk0k0k1 fk0k0k1
(A) fk0k0k1 ak0k0k1
The symbol digit blinks, so increase/decrease the parameter using the
Increment or Decrement key.
Data display
5k0.0k0
fk1k0k1
The 100's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the parameter using the
Increment or Decrement key. fk0k1k1
The 10's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the parameter using the
Increment or Decrement key. fk0k0k2
The 10's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the parameter using the
Increment or Decrement key.
If the specified parameter does not exist, the data display is not shown and the blinking digit returns to the one at the far left.
Pressed simultaneously
(B) 5k0.0k0
5k0.0k0
5k0.0k0
(B)
5k0.0k0
6k0.0k0
5k1.0k0
5k0.1k0
5k0.0k1
The 10's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the parameter using the
Increment or Decrement key.
The 1's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the value using the Increment or Decrement key.
The 0.1's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the value using the Increment or Decrement key.
The 0.01's digit blinks, so increase/decrease the value using the Increment or Decrement key.
Note 1: Pressing the Mode Key while the cursor (blinking digit) is at the far left moves the cursor to the far right.
Note 2: Pressing the Increment and Decrement keys together in the individual input mode restores the normal input mode.
Note 3: While the displayed data is blinking, the change has not yet reflected even when the function group is "F."
3-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-1 Name of Parts of the Digital Operator
Operation Example When the Digital Operator is Connected to the Conventional Model
Although operations can be performed by connecting the conventional Digital Operator model
(3G3AX-OP01) to the 3G3MX2, the operations associated with the Mode key and Enter key vary from that of the conventional key operation system. To switch to the parameter display to data display, use the Enter key instead of the Mode key. Take note that pressing the FUNC key while a parameter is displayed means moving the function group.
Key Operation System When the Conventional Digital Operator Model (3G3AX-OP01) is Connected to the 3G3MX2
Conventional model 3G3AX-OP01
Move to data display
Return without saving the changes ak0k0k1 ak0k0k1 0k2
Move the function group bk0k0k1
0k1
Return after saving the changes
3G3MX2
3
(Reference) Key Operation System of the 3G3MX2 Digital Operator
Move to data display
Return without saving the changes
3G3MX2 Digital Operator ak0k0k1 0k2 ak0k0k1
Move the function group bk0k0k1
0k1
Return after saving the changes
(Reference) Key Operation System When the Conventional Digital Operator Model (3G3AX-
OP01) is Connected to the Conventional Model
Move to data display ak-k-k-
Return without saving the changes
Conventional model 3G3AX-OP01 ak0k0k1 0k2 ak0k0k1
No applicable function bk0k0k1
0k1
Return after saving the changes
Conventional model
3G3MX, etc.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-6
3-2 Operation Method
3-2 Operation Method
To operate the Inverter, two commands are required including a RUN command and frequency reference. Take note that the Inverter does not operate if only one of these commands is issued, such as when a RUN command is issued but not a frequency reference (0 Hz setting), or a frequency reference is issued but not a RUN command.
3
RUN Command/Frequency Reference Input
Command/Reference Input From the Digital Operator
Operates the Inverter via the key operation of the standard Digital Operator or optional Remote
Operator.
Setting
Parameter
No.
Function name
A001
A002
F001
F004
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 1
Output
Frequency
Setting
RUN Direction
Selection
Data
02 (Digital Operator)
02 (Digital Operator)
0.0 to Max. frequency
00 (Forward)
01 (Reverse)
Default value
02
02
6.00
00
Note
The RUN command enabled LED indicator is lit.
Parameters cannot be changed while the Inverter is operating.
Change the following parameters, if necessary:
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
F002
F003
Acceleration
Time Setting 1
Deceleration
Time Setting 1
0.01 to 99.99 s 100.0 to 999.9 s
1,000. to 3,600. s
0.01 to 3,600 s 100.0 to 999.9
1,000. to 3,600. s
Default value
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
Lit when the RUN key is pressed to start operation.
Lit when the frequency data is displayed.
The RUN key is enabled and the RUN command enabled LED indicator is lit when A002 is set to 02.
5k0.0k0
3-7
Operation
Refer to "Test Run" on page 3-10.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-2 Operation Method
Command/Reference Input From the Control Circuit Terminal Block
Operates the Inverter by connecting the external signals (frequency setting volume, switch, etc.) to the control circuit terminal block.
<Setting the Forward/Reverse Direction Using the FW/RV Input Terminal and Setting the Frequency Using the Frequency Volume>
Setting
Default value
Note
Parameter
No.
A001
A002
C001
C002
Function name
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 1
Multi-function
Input 1 Selection
Multi-function
Input 2 Selection
Data
01 (Control circuit terminal block)
01 (Control circuit terminal block)
00 (FW: Forward)
01 (RV: Reverse)
02
02
00(FW)
01(RV)
If other input terminal is used, the parameter number becomes different.
If other input terminal is used, the parameter number becomes different.
3
Change the following parameters, if necessary:
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
F002
F003
Acceleration
Time Setting 1
Deceleration
Time Setting 1
0.01 to 99.99 s 100.0 to 999.9 s
1,000. to 3,600. s
0.01 to 99.99 s 100.0 to 999.9 s
1,000. to 3,600. s
Default value
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal Block
F/R setting
STP setting
STA setting
10 VDC 24 VDC
FS FV FI SC S3/GS1 S2 S1 SC PSC P24
Frequency setting volume
*1
*2
Reverse Forward input input
*1 Allocate 16: FV/FI (Analog input switch) to a multi-function input to use as the voltage setting. If terminal
FV/FI is not allocated, the frequency reference becomes the sum of voltage input (FV) and current input
(FI). To use only one of voltage or current, therefore, short the other analog input to the SC terminal.
*2 This wiring diagram shows an example of using the built-in power supply of the Inverter. If an external power supply is used, refer to "Connection to Programmable Controller (PLC)" on page 2-22.
Operation
Refer to "Test Run" on page 3-10.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-8
3-2 Operation Method
3
3-9
<Running/Stopping the Inverter via 3-wire Input and Setting the Frequency Using an
Analog Current Signal>
Setting
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default value
Note
A001
A002
C001
C002
C003
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 1
Multi-function
Input 1 Selection
Multi-function
Input 2 Selection
Multi-function
Input 3 Selection
01 (Control circuit terminal block)
01 (Control circuit terminal block)
20 (STA: 3-wire start)*
21 (STP: 3-wire stop)
22 (F/R: 3-wire forward/reverse)
*
*
02
02
00 (FW)
01 (RW)
18 (RS)
If other input terminal is used, the parameter number becomes different.
If other input terminal is used, the parameter number becomes different.
If other input terminal is used, the parameter number becomes different.
* For details on the 3-wire input method, refer to "3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R)" on page 5-56.
Change the following parameters, if necessary:
Parameter
No.
F002
F003
Function name
Acceleration
Time Setting 1
Deceleration
Time Setting 1
Data
0.01 to 99.99 s 100.0 to 999.9 s
1,000. to 3,600. s
0.01 to 99.99 s 100.0 to 999.9 s
1,000. to 3,600. s
Default value
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
10.00 s
(30.00 s)
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal Block
F/R setting
STP setting
STA setting
10 VDC 24 VDC
FS FV
*1
FI SC S3/GS1 S2 S1 SC PSC P24
*2
Frequency setting
(4 to 20 mA)
Forward/ reverse
Stop
(NC contact)
Operate
(NO contact)
*1 Allocate 16: FV/FI (Analog input switch) to a multi-function input to use as the current setting. If terminal
FV/FI is not allocated, the frequency reference becomes the sum of voltage input (FV) and current input
(FI). To use only one of voltage and current, therefore, short the other analog input to the SC terminal.
*2 This wiring diagram shows an example of using the built-in power supply of the Inverter. If an external power supply is used, refer to "Connection to Programmable Controller (PLC)" on page 2-22.
Operation
Refer to "Test Run" on page 3-10.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-3 Test Run
3-3 Test Run
An example of basic connection is given below. Refer to "Operation Method" on page 3-7 when issuing a RUN command/frequency reference from the control circuit terminal block.
Refer to "Name of Parts of the Digital Operator" on page 3-1 for the parameter setting method.
ELB
3-phase power supply
R/L1(L1)*
S/L2
T/L3(N)*
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
M
Motor
Inverter
G
* Connect to terminals L1 and N on a single-phase, 200-V Inverter (3G3MX2-AB @@@ ).
Procedure for Test Run
Command/Reference Input From the Digital Operator
1. Check if the wires are connected correctly.
2. Turn on the power of the Inverter.
3. Set Frequency Reference Selection (A001) to "02" (Digital Operator).
4. Set RUN Command Selection (A002) to "02" (Digital Operator).
5. Set Output Frequency Setting (F001). It is recommended to set a low speed of approx.
10 Hz first to ensure safety.
6. Set RUN Direction Selection (F004).
7. Display Output Frequency Monitor (d001) and press the Enter key.
Confirm that "0.00" (Hz) is displayed.
8. Press the RUN key. The RUN (during RUN) LED indicator is lit and the motor starts to turn.
9. Confirm the output frequency and motor rotation direction displayed on the Digital
Operator, and check if the Invertor is free from errors. For the motor rotation direction, refer to Rotation Direction Monitor (d003).
10. If no problem is found, gradually increase the output frequency using Output
Frequency Setting (F001).
11. After checking the operation, press the STOP/RESET key. The motor starts to decelerate and once it stops, the RUN (during RUN) LED indicator turns OFF.
Command/Reference Input From the Control Circuit Terminal Block
1. Check if the wires are connected correctly.
2. Turn on the power to the Inverter.
3. Set Frequency Reference Selection (A001) to "01" (Control circuit terminal block).
4. Set RUN Command Selection (A002) to "01" (Control circuit terminal block).
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-10
3
3
3-3 Test Run
5. Display Output Frequency Monitor (d001) and press the Enter key.
Confirm that "0.00" (Hz) is displayed.
6. After confirming that the analog voltage/current value for frequency reference is 0, turn the RUN command ON. The RUN (during RUN) LED indicator is lit.
7. Gradually increase the analog voltage/current value for frequency reference.
* The frequency reference can be set first, before setting the RUN command in 6.
The motor accelerates/decelerates according to the acceleration/deceleration time set in F002/F003.
8. The motor starts to turn. Confirm the output frequency and motor rotation direction displayed on the Digital Operator, and check if the Inverter is free from errors.
9. After checking the operation, turn the RUN command OFF (turn the STP input ON in the case of 3-wire input). The motor starts to decelerate and once it stops, the
RUN (during RUN) LED indicator turns OFF.
Check for tripping during acceleration/deceleration, and also check if the rotation speed and frequency readings are correct.
If an overcurrent or overvoltage tripping occurs during trial operation, try to increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
Confirm by Output Current Monitor (d002) and DC Voltage Monitor (d102) to confirm that the current/voltage values are sufficiently away from the tripping values.
3-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3-4 Tripping
3-4 Tripping
Upon detecting an error (overcurrent, overload, etc.) during operation, the Inverter cuts off the output to the motor to protect the motor and Inverter. At the same time, the ALARM LED indicator is lit and an error code is displayed. "Tripping" refers to this series of operations.
When a tripping occurs, the motor goes into free-run status. Identify the cause of the error from the displayed error code, and remove the cause.
A RUN command is not accepted during a tripping. To reset a tripping, press the STOP/RESET key. If a Reset (18: RS) is allocated to the multi-function input terminal, switching the reset input from ON to OFF resets a tripping.
Note, however, that a tripping may not be reset depending on the cause of the tripping. In such case, reconnect the power.
Also, confirm the RUN command and various other input signals thoroughly before executing a reset. If the RUN command signal remains ON, the Inverter will restart immediately after the reset.
3
Overview of Operation upon Tripping
Error detection
Normal operation
→
Error occurred
M
Alarm
Display example
A L M
For details on error codes, refer to "Error Code List" in page 7-2.
Output shut off
Free run
M
Reset or
* Perform a reset after identifying and removing the cause of the error and checking the various signals such as RUN Command.
RS terminal input
ON → OFF
M
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 3-12
3
3-4 Tripping
RUN command FW, RV
Motor rotation speed
RS (reset) input
AL (alarm) output
(alarm signal)
Alarm occurred
Free run
3-13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
3
Parameter List
Describes the parameters used by this Unit.
4-1 Monitor Mode ........................................................................ 4-1
4-2 Function Mode ...................................................................... 4-4
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4
4-1 Monitor Mode
4-1 Monitor Mode
The description in "d001" is always displayed in the default setting at power-on. To fix the optional display, change the setting in "b038".
The displayed parameters are limited in the default setting. To display all parameters, set Display
Selection (b037) to "00 (Complete display)".
Setting Soft Lock Selection (b031) to "10" permits data change during RUN.
Data ranges given in parentheses are for high-frequency mode. Refer to page 5-178 for details.
Parameter
No. d001 d002 d003 d004 d005
Function name Monitor or data range
Output
Frequency
Monitor
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 1,000. (High-frequency mode)
Output Current
Monitor
Rotation
Direction
Monitor
PID Feedback
Value Monitor
0.0 to 655.3
F: Forward o: Stop r: Reverse
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999(10000 to 99990)
100 to 999(100000 to 999000)
Multi-function
Input Monitor
ON
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
OFF
(Example)
Terminal S1, S2: ON
Terminal S3 to S7: OFF
Default setting
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during
RUN
Unit Page
−
−
−
−
− yes
−
−
−
− yes
−
−
−
−
Hz
A
−
−
−
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3 d006 d007 d008 d009 d010 d012 d013
Multi-function
Output Monitor
Output
Frequency
Monitor (after conversion)
Real Frequency
Monitor
MA P2 P1
ON
(Example)
OFF
Terminal P1, P2: ON
Terminal AL: OFF
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 4000 (9999)
1000 to 4000 (9999/ 100)
( − 100/ − 999.) − 400. to − 100.
− 99.9 to − 10.0
− 9.99 to − 0.00
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (400.1 to 999.9/1000.)
Torque
Reference
Monitor
Torque Bias
Monitor
Output Torque
Monitor
Output Voltage
Monitor
−
−
−
200. to +200.
200. to +200.
200. to +200.
0.0 to 600.0
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
− yes
−
−
−
−
−
− yes
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Hz
%
%
%
V
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
4-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-1 Monitor Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name Monitor or data range d014
Input Power
Monitor
0.0 to 100.0
d015 d016
Integrated
Power Monitor
Total RUN
Time d017 Power ON Time
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
100 to 999 (100000 to 999000)
0.0 to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
100 to 999 (100000 to 999000)
0.0 to 9999.
1000 to 9999 (10000 to 99990)
100 to 999 (100000 to 999000) d018
Fin
Temperature
Monitor
− 20.0 to 150.0
d022
Life
Assessment
Monitor
2 1
1: Capacitor on main circuit board
2: Cooling fan d023 d024 d025 d026 d027
(Reserved) − d029 d030 d050
Position
Command
Monitor
Current
Position
Monitor
User Selection
Monitor (2 types)
− 268435455 to 268435455
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "
− 268435455 to 268435455
(Displays MSB 4 digits including "
Monitor data selected by b160/b161 is displayed.
−
−
")
") d060 d080
Inverter Mode
Monitor
Fault Counter
The currently set mode is displayed.
I-C (IM motor heavy load)
I-V (IM motor light load)
H-I (IM motor high frequency)
0. to 9999.
1000 to 6553 (10000 to 65530) d081
Fault Monitor 1
(Latest) d082 Fault Monitor 2 d083 Fault Monitor 3 d084 Fault Monitor 4 d085 Fault Monitor 5 d086 Fault Monitor 6
Cause
→ Frequency (Hz)
→ Current (A)
→ Voltage between PNs (V)
→ RUN time (h)
→ Power ON time (h)
Default setting
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during
RUN
Unit Page
− − − kW 5-7
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
°
− h h
C
−
−
−
−
−
−
Time 5-11
−
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
−
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-2
4
4-1 Monitor Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name Monitor or data range d090 d102 d103 d104
Warning
Monitor
DC Voltage
Monitor
Regenerative
Braking Load
Rate Monitor
Electronic
Thermal Load
Rate Monitor
Warning code
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
Default setting
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during
RUN
Unit Page
− − − − 5-11
− − − V 5-12
− − − % 5-12
− − − % 5-12
4-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter
No.
Function name
F001
F002
F202
F003
F203
F004
Output
Frequency
Setting
Acceleration
Time Setting 1
Acceleration
Time Setting 2
Deceleration
Time Setting 1
Deceleration
Time Setting 2
RUN Direction
Selection
Monitor or data range
Default setting
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during
RUN
Unit Page
0.0
Starting frequency to maximum frequency 1/2
0.0 to 100.0 (PID function enabled)
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
00: Forward
01: Reverse
6.00
10.00
(30.00)
10.00
(30.00)
10.00
(30.00)
10.00
(30.00)
00 yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no
Hz
% s s s s
−
5-15
5-24
5-23
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-4
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
A001
A201
A002
A202
A003
A203
A004
A204
A005
A011
A012
A013 FV Start Ratio 0. to FV end ratio
A014 FV End Ratio FV start ratio to 100.
A015
A016
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
Frequency
Reference
Selection 2
RUN Command
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 2
Base
Frequency 1
Base
Frequency 2
Maximum
Frequency 1
Maximum
Frequency 2
FV/FI Selection
FV Start
Frequency
FV End
Frequency
FV Start
Selection
Analog Input
Filter
(FV, FI
Sampling)
A017 (Reserved)
00: Digital Operator (volume)
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator (F001)
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Do not set.
10: Operation function output
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
30.0. to Maximum Frequency
1 [A004]
30.0 to Maximum Frequency
2 [A204]
Base Frequency 1 [A003] to
400.0 (1000.)
Base Frequency 2 [A203] to
400.0 (1000.)
00: Switch between FV
(voltage)/FI (current)
02: Switch between FV
(voltage)/volume
*1
03: Switch between FI
(current)/volume
*1
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
00: Start Frequency A011
01: 0 Hz
1. to 30.
31. (with 500 ms filter ±0.1 Hz hysteresis)
Do not change.
02
02
02
02
60.0
(1000.0)
60.0
(1000.0)
60.0
(1000.0)
60.0
(1000.0)
00
0.00
0.00
0.
100.
01
8
00
*1. Enabled when the Digital Operator with Volume 3G3AX-OP01 is connected.
no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
− no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
−
−
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
−
Hz
Hz
%
%
−
−
−
5-15
5-22
5-26
5-28
5-38
5-40
5-38
−
4-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
A019
A020
A220
A021
A022
A023
A024
A025
A026
A027
A028
A029
A030
A031
A032
A033
Multi-step
Speed
Selection
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 7
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 8
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 9
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 10
Multi-step
Speed
Reference11
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 12
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 13
Multi-step
Speed 1
Reference 0
Multi-step
Speed 2
Reference 0
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 1
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 2
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 3
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 4
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 5
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 6
Monitor or data range
00: Binary (16-step selection with 4 terminals)
01: Bit (8-step selection with 7 terminals)
0.00
Starting frequency to
Maximum Frequency 1
0.00
Starting frequency to
Maximum Frequency 2
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
6.00
6.00
no yes yes no yes yes
−
Hz
Hz
0.00
Starting frequency to
Maximum Frequency
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
yes yes Hz
5-63
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-6
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A034
A035
A038
A039
A041
A241
A042
A242
A043
A243
A044
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 14
Multi-step
Speed
Reference 15
Jogging
Frequency
0.00
Starting frequency to
Maximum Frequency
Starting frequency to 9.99
Jogging Stop
Selection
Torque Boost
Selection 1
Torque Boost
Selection 2
Manual Torque
Boost Voltage 1
Manual Torque
Boost Voltage 2
Manual Torque
Boost
Frequency 1
Manual Torque
Boost
Frequency 2
00: Free run on jogging stop/
Disabled during operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/Disabled during operation
02: DC injection braking on jogging stop/Disabled in operation
03: Free run on jogging stop/
Enabled in operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/Enabled in operation
05: DC injection braking on jogging stop/Enabled in operation
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
0.0 to 20.0 (Percentage of motor voltage A082)
0.0 to 20.0 (Percentage of motor voltage A282)
0.0 to 50.0 (Ratio to base frequency A003)
0.0 to 50.0 (Ratio to base frequency A203)
Control Method
1
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>)
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
(heavy load only)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
0.00
0.00
0.00
04
00
00
1.0
1.0
5.0
5.0
00 yes yes no no no yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes no
Hz
Hz
−
−
−
%
%
%
%
−
5-63
5-59
5-49
5-46
5-144
4-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A244
A045
A245
A046
A246
A047
A247
Control Method
2
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>)
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
(heavy load only)
Output Voltage
Gain 1
Output Voltage
Gain 2
Automatic
Torque Boost
Voltage
Compensation
Gain 1
Automatic
Torque Boost
Voltage
Compensation
Gain 2
Automatic
Torque Boost
Slip
Compensation
Gain 1
Automatic
Torque Boost
Slip
Compensation
Gain 2
20. to 100.
20. to 100.
0. to 255.
0. to 255.
0. to 255.
0. to 255.
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
100.
no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes
-
%
%
−
−
−
−
5-46
5-144
5-72
5-49
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-8
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A051
A052
A053
A054
A055
A056
A057
A058
Internal DC
Injection
Braking
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Enabled
(Operates only on set frequencies.)
Internal DC
Injection
Braking
Frequency
DC Injection
Braking Delay
Time
DC Injection
Braking Power
DC Injection
Braking Time
DC Injection
Braking Edge/
Level Selection
Startup DC
Injection
Braking Power
Startup Internal
DC Injection
Braking Time
0.00 to 60.00
0.0 to 5.0
0. to 100./70.
(heavy load/light load)
0.0 to 60.0
00: Edge operation
01: Level operation
0. to 100./70. (heavy load/light load)
0.0 to 60.0
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
0.50
0.0
50
0.5
01
0.
0.0
yes no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
Hz s
% s
−
% s
5-135
A059
DC Injection
Braking Carrier
Frequency
2.0 to 15.0/10.0
(heavy load/light load or high frequency )
5.0/2.0
no yes kHz
5-135
4-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A061
A261
A062
A262
A063
A064
A065
A066
A067
A068
A069
A070
Frequency
Upper Limit 1
Frequency
Upper Limit 2
Frequency
Lower Limit 1
Frequency
Lower Limit 2
Jump
Frequency 1
Jump
Frequency
Width 1
Jump
Frequency 2
Jump
Frequency
Width 2
Jump
Frequency 3
Jump
Frequency
Width 3
Acceleration
Stop Frequency
Acceleration
Stop Time
0.00
Frequency Lower Limit 1 to
Maximum Frequency 1
0.00
Frequency Lower Limit 2 to
Maximum Frequency 2
0.00
Starting Frequency to
Frequency Upper Limit 1
0.00
Starting Frequency to
Frequency Upper Limit 2
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 10.00(100.0)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.0 to 60.0
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
0.00
no yes Hz
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.0
no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz s
5-60
5-61
5-62
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-10
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A071 PID Selection
A072 PID P Gain
A073 PID I Gain
A074 PID D Gain
A075 PID Scale
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
0.00 to 25.00
0.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0.01 to 99.99
A076
PID Feedback
Selection
00: FI (current)
01: FV (voltage)
02: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
A077
A078
PID Deviation
Reverse Output
PID Variable
Range Limit
0.0 to 100.0
A079
PID
Feedforward
Selection
00: Disabled
01: FV (voltage)
02: FI (current)
A081 AVR Selection 1 00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
A281 AVR Selection 2
02: OFF during deceleration
A082
A282
A083
A084
Motor Incoming
Voltage
Selection 1
Motor Incoming
Voltage
Selection 2
AVR Filter Time
Parameter
AVR
Deceleration
Voltage Gain
200V class: 200/215/220/230/
240
400V class: 380/400/415/440/
460/480
0.000 to 10.00
50. to 200.
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
1.00
1.0
0.00
1.00
00
00
0.0
00
02
02
200/
400
200/
400
0.300
100.
no yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no yes yes
−
− s s
Time
−
−
%
−
−
V
V s
%
5-73
5-27
5-26
5-148
5-27
4-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
A085
RUN Mode
Selection
00: Normal operation
01: Energy-saving operation
00 no no −
5-79
A086
Energy-saving
Response/
Accuracy
Adjustment
0.0 to 100.0
50.0
yes yes −
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-12
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
A092
A292
A093
A293
A094
A294
A095
A295
A096
A296
1st
Acceleration
Time 2
2nd
Acceleration
Time 2
1st
Deceleration
Time 2
2nd
Deceleration
Time 2
2-step
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Selection 1
2-step
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Selection 2
2-step
Acceleration
Frequency 1
2-step
Acceleration
Frequency 2
2-step
Deceleration
Frequency 1
2-step
Deceleration
Frequency 2
Monitor or data range
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 3600.
00: Switched via 2CH terminal
01: Switched by setting
02: Enabled only when switching forward/reverse
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
10.00
(15.00)
10.00
(15.00)
10.00
(15.00)
10.00
(15.00)
00
00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
yes yes yes yes no no no no no no yes yes yes yes no no no no no no s
−
Hz
5-66
A097
Acceleration
Pattern
Selection
A098
Deceleration
Pattern
Selection
00: Linear
01: S shape
02: U shape
03: Reverse-U shape
04: EL-S shape
01
01 no no no no
− 5-68
4-13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A101
A102
FI Start
Frequency
FI End
Frequency
A103 FI Start Ratio
A104 FI End Ratio
A105
FI Start
Selection
A131
Acceleration
Curve
Parameter
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0. to FI end ratio
FI start ratio to 100.
00: Use Start Frequency
[A101]
01: 0 Hz
A132
Deceleration
Curve
Parameter
01 (small curve) to 10 (large curve)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
0.00
no yes
Hz
0.00
no yes
20.
100.
no no yes % yes %
5-40
00
02
02 no no no yes yes yes
−
− 5-68
4
A141
A142
Operation
Frequency
Selection 1
Operation
Frequency
Selection 2
00: Digital Operator
01: Digital Operator (volume)
*1
02: FV (voltage) input
03: FI (current) input
04: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
05: Optional board
07: Pulse train frequency
02
03 yes yes
*1. Enabled when the Digital Operator with Volume 3G3AX-OP01 is connected.
no no
− 5-70
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-14
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
A143
A145
Operation
Function
Operator
Selection
Frequency
Addition
Amount Setting
00: Addition (A141+A142)
01: Subtraction (A141 − A142)
02: Multiplication (A141 ×
A142)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
A146
Frequency
Addition Sign
Selection
00: Frequency reference +
A145
01: Frequency reference −
A145
A150
A151
A152
A153
A154
A155
EL-S Shape
Acceleration
Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape
Acceleration
Curve Ratio 2
EL-S Shape
Deceleration
Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape
Deceleration
Curve Ratio 2
Deceleration
Stop Frequency
Deceleration
Stop Time
0. to 50.
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.0 to 60.0
A156
A157
A161
A162
PID Sleep
Function
Operation Level
PID Sleep
Operation
Delay Time
VR Start
Frequency
VR End
Frequency
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.0 to 25.5
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
A163 VR Start Ratio 0. to VR End Ratio
A164 VR End Ratio VR Start Ratio to 100
A165
VR Start
Selection
00: Use Start Frequency
[A161]
01: 0 Hz
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
0.00
00
10.
10.
10.
10.
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.
100.
01 no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
Hz
−
%
Hz s
Hz s
Hz
Hz yes % yes %
Hz
5-70
5-71
5-68
5-62
5-73
5-40
4-15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range b001 Retry Selection
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz restart
02: Frequency matching restart
03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart b002
Allowable
Momentary
Power
Interruption
Time
0.3 to 25.0
b003
Restart
Standby Time
0.3 to 100.0
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
1.0
1.0
no no no yes yes yes
− s s
5-96
5-96
5-100
5-103
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-16
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name b004 b005 b007 b008 b010 b011 b012 b212 b013 b213
Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
Momentary Power
Interruption/
Undervoltage Trip
During Stop
Selection
Restart During
Momentary
Power
Interruption
Count Selection
Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit
Frequency
Setting
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Disabled during stop and deceleration stop
00: 16 times
01: Unlimited
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart
Selection
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz restart
02: Frequency matching restart
03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart Count
Selection
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart
Standby Time
1 to 3
0.3 to 100.0
Electronic
Thermal Level 1
0.20 × Rated current to 1.00 ×
Rated current
Electronic
Thermal Level 2
Inverter rated current
Inverter rated current
Electronic
Thermal
Characteristics
Selection 1
Electronic
Thermal
Characteristics
Selection 2
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
00
00
0.00
00
3
1.0
01
01 no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
−
Hz
−
Time s
A
−
5-96
5-97
5-100
5-103
5-97
5-110
4-17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can
Data can be be set during
RUN changed during RUN
Unit Page b015 b016 b017 b018 b019
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 1
Free-electronic
Thermal Current 1
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 2
Free-electronic
Thermal Current 2
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 3
0. to Free-electronic Thermal
Frequency 2
0.00 to Rated current
Free-electronic Thermal
Frequency 1 to Freeelectronic Thermal Current 3
0.00 to Rated current
Free-electronic Thermal
Frequency 2 to 400. (1000.)
0.
0.00
0.
0.00
0.
b020 b021 b221 b022 b222 b023 b223 b024 b025
Free-electronic
Thermal
Current 3
Overload Limit 1
Selection
Overload Limit 2
Selection
Overload Limit 1
Level
Overload Limit 2
Level
0.00 to Rated current
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled during acceleration/constant speed operation
(accelerated during regeneration)
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × rated current (heavy load setting)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.50 × rated current (light load setting)
0.00
01
01
Rated current ×
1.50
(heavy) or 1.20
(light)
Overload Limit 1
Parameter
Overload Limit 2
Parameter
0.1 to 999.9
1000. to 3000.
1.0
1.0
Overload Limit 1
Selection 2
Overload Limit 1
Level 2
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled during acceleration/constant speed operation
(accelerated during regeneration)
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × rated current (heavy load setting)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.50 × rated current (light load setting)
01
Rated current ×
1.50
(heavy) or 1.20
(light) no no no no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Hz
A
Hz
A
Hz
A
−
A
A s
−
A
5-112
5-112
5-114
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-18
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name b026 b027 b028 b029 b030 b033 b034 b035
Monitor or data range
Overload Limit 1
Parameter 2
Overcurrent
Suppression
Selection
Frequency Pullin Restart Level
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 × rated current (heavy load setting)
0.20 × Rated current to 1.50 × rated current (light load setting)
Frequency Pullin Restart
Parameter
Starting
Frequency at
Frequency Pullin Restart
Selection
0.1 to 999.9
1000. to 3000.
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
0.1 to 999.9
1000. to 3000.
00: Frequency at interruption
01: Maximum frequency
02: Set frequency
00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is ON.
01: Data other than b031 and set frequency cannot be changed when terminal
SFT is ON.
02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed.
03: Data other than b031 and set frequency cannot be changed.
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
Motor Cable
Length Code
Selection
5. to 20.
RUN Time/Power
ON Time Level
Rotation
Direction Limit
Selection
0. to 9999. (0 to 99990)
1000 to 6553 (100000 to
655350)
00: No direction limit
01: Only Forward is enabled
(Reverse is limited)
02: Only Reverse is enabled
(Forward is limited)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
1.0
no yes s 5-114
00
Inverter rated current
0.50
00
01
10.
0.
00 no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no
−
A s
−
−
− h
−
5-116
5-97
5-100
5-103
5-84
5-145
5-124
5-23
4-19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range b036 b037 b038 b039 b040 b041 b042 b043 b044 b045 b046 b049
Reduced
Voltage Startup
Selection
Display
Selection
Initial Screen
Selection
Torque Limit 1
(Four-quadrant
Mode Forward
Power
Running)
Torque Limit 2
(Four-quadrant
Mode Reverse
Regeneration)
Torque Limit 3
(Four-quadrant
Mode Reverse
Power
Running)
Torque Limit 4
(Four-quadrant
Mode Forward
Regeneration)
Torque
LADSTOP
Selection
Reverse
Rotation
Prevention
Selection
Heavy Load/
Light Load
Selection
0 (Reduced voltage startup time: short) to 255 (Reduced voltage startup time: long)
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting + b037
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
05: Monitor display only
000: Screen on which the
Enter key was last pressed
001 to 060: d001 to d060
201: F001
202: Do not use this setting.
User Parameter
Automatic
Setting
Function
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Torque Limit
Selection
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switching
02: Analog voltage input
03: Optional board
0. to 200.
no (Torque limit disabled)
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00: Heavy load mode
01: Light load mode
Default setting
Set data
Data can
Data can be be set during
RUN changed during RUN
Unit Page
2 no yes − 5-58
04
001
00
00
200.
200.
200.
200.
00
00
00 no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no
−
−
−
−
%
−
−
−
5-88
5-86
5-177
5-153
5-155
5-157
5-13
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-20
4
4-2 Function Mode
4-21
Parameter No. Function name ss b050 b051 b052 b053 b054 b060 b061 b062 b063 b064 b065 b070 b071
Monitor or data range
Controlled
Deceleration on
Power Loss
00: Controlled deceleration on power loss disabled.
01: Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled
(deceleration stop)
02: Controlled deceleration on power loss (constant voltage, without recovery)
03: Controlled deceleration on power loss (constant voltage, with recovery)
DC Bus Voltage
Trigger Level of
Ctrl. Decel.
Deceleration
Hold Level of
Ctrl. Decel
Deceleration
Time of Ctrl.
Decel
Freq. Drop to
Start Ctrl. Decel
Window
Comparator FV
Upper Limit
Level
Window
Comparator FV
Lower Limit
Level
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
0.0 to 999.9
1000.
0.01 to 3600.00
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
Window
Comparator FV
Hysteresis
Width
Window
Comparator FI
Upper Limit
Level
Window
Comparator FI
Lower Limit
Level
Window
Comparator FI
Hysteresis Width
Set an upper limit level.
Setting range: 0. to 100.
Lower limit: Lower limit level +
Hysteresis width × 2
Set a lower limit level. Setting range: 0. to 100.
Upper limit: Upper limit level −
Hysteresis width × 2
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0. to 10.
Upper limit: (Upper limit level −
Lower limit level)/2
Set an upper limit level.Setting range: 0. to 100.
Lower limit: Lower limit level +
Hysteresis width × 2
Set a lower limit level.
Setting range: 0. to 100.
Upper limit: Upper limit level −
Hysteresis width × 2
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels.
Setting range: 0. to 10.
Upper limit: (Upper limit level −
Lower limit level)/2
Analog
Operation Level at FV
Disconnection
Analog
Operation Level at FI
Disconnection
0. to 100.
no (ignore)
0. to 100.
no (ignore)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
220.0/
440.0
360.0/
720.0
1.0
0.00
100.
0.
0.
100.
0.
0.
no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
V
V s
Hz 5-106
%
%
%
%
%
%
−
−
5-106
5-132
5-132
5-132
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range b075 b078 b079 b082
Ambient
Temperature
Integrated
Power Clear
Integrated
Power Display
Scale
Starting
Frequency
− 10. to 50.
Cleared with the Enter key after changing to 01
1. to 1000.
0.10 to 9.99 (100.) b083 b084
Carrier
Frequency
Initialization
Selection
2.0 to 15.0/10.0
(heavy load/light load or high frequency)
* With derating
00: Initialization disabled
01: Fault monitor clear
02: Initializes data
03: Fault monitor clear + Data initialization
04: Do not set. b085 b086
Initialization
Data Selection
Frequency
Conversion
Coefficient
00: Do not change.
0.01 to 99.99
b087 b088 b089
STOP Key
Selection
Free-run Stop
Selection
Automatic
Carrier
Reduction
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
02: Only reset is enabled
00: 0 Hz restart
01: Frequency matching restart
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00: Disabled
01: Enabled/depends on current
02: Enabled/depends on fin temperature b090
Usage Rate of
Regenerative
Braking
0.0 to 100.0
b091 Stop Selection b092 b093
Cooling Fan
Operation
00: Deceleration stop
01: Free-run stop
00: Always
01: Only during operation
(including 5 minutes after power on/stop)
02: Depends on the fin temperature
Cooling Fan
Total Operation
Time Clear
00: Total operation time count
01: Clear total operation time
Default setting
Set data
Data can
Data can be be set during
RUN changed during RUN
Unit Page
40.
yes yes ° C 5-127
00
1.
0.50
10.0/
2.0
(5.0)
00
00
1.00
00
00
01
0.0
00
01
00 yes yes no no no no yes no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes no yes yes yes no
−
−
Hz kHz
−
−
−
−
−
−
%
−
−
−
5-7
5-57
5-51
5-174
5-4
5-84
5-103
5-52
5-141
5-24
5-127
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-22
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name b094 b095
Initialization
Target
Selection
Regenerative
Braking
Selection
Monitor or data range
00: All data
01: All data other than terminals/communication
02: U*** registration function only
03: Other than U*** registration function and
Display Selection (b037)
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Disabled while stopped)
02: Enabled (Enabled while operating and stopped)
330 to 380
660 to 760
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
00
360/
720 no no no no yes yes
−
−
V
5-174
5-141 b096 b100 b101 b102 b103 b104 b105 b106 b107 b108 b109 b110 b111 b112 b113
Regenerative
Braking ON
Level
Free V/f
Frequency 1
Free V/f
Voltage 1
Free V/f
Frequency 2
Free V/f
Voltage 2
Free V/f
Frequency 3
Free V/f
Voltage 3
Free V/f
Frequency 4
Free V/f
Voltage 4
Free V/f
Frequency 5
Free V/f
Voltage 5
Free V/f
Frequency 6
Free V/f
Voltage 6
Free V/f
Frequency 7
Free V/f
Voltage 7
0. to Free V/f Frequency 2
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 1 to Free
V/f Frequency 3
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 2 to Free
V/f Frequency 4
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 3 to Free
V/f Frequency 5
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 4 to Free
V/f Frequency 6
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 5 to Free
V/f Frequency 7
0.0 to 800.0
Free V/f Frequency 6 to 400.
(1000.)
0.0 to 800.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
0.
0.0
no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
Hz
V
5-47
5-47
4-23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can
Data can be be set during
RUN changed during RUN
Unit Page b120
Brake Control
Function
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled b121 b122
Brake Release
Wait Time
Acceleration
Wait Time
0.00 to 5.00
0.00 to 5.00
b123 Stop Wait Time 0.00 to 5.00
b124 b125
Brake Wait
Time for
Confirmation
Brake Release
Frequency
0.00 to 5.00
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
b126 b127 b130 b131 b132 b133 b134 b145 b150 b160 b161 b163
Brake Release
Current
Break ON
Frequency
Overvoltage
Suppression
Function
Selection
During
Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression
Level During
Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression
Parameter
Overvoltage
Suppression
Proportional
Gain Setting
Overvoltage
Suppression
Integral Time
Setting
GS Input
Operation
Selection
Main Panel
Display
Selection d050 Monitor
Target 1 d050 Monitor
Target 2 d001/d007
Frequency
Setting Mode
Selection
0.00 to 2.00 current
00: Not tripped (cut off by hardware)
01: Tripped
001 to 060 (corresponding to d001 to d060)
001 to 030 (corresponding to d001 to d030)
001 to 030 (corresponding to d001 to d030)
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
× Inverter rated
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC voltage kept constant)
02: Enabled (Acceleration enabled)
200V class: 330. to 395.
400V class: 660. to 790.
0.10 to 30.00
0.00 to 5.00
0.0 to 150.0
00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Inverter rated current
0.00
00
380/
760
1.00
0.20
1.0
00
001
001
002
00 no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
− s s s s
Hz
A
Hz
−
V s
− s
−
−
−
−
−
5-143
5-117
5-171
5-87
5-10
5-1
5-4
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-24
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name b164 b165 b171 b180 b190 b191 b192 b193
Monitor or data range
Initial Screen
Automatic
Switching
Function
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Selection of
Operation on
Digital Operator
Disconnection
Inverter Mode
Selection
Perform
Initialization/
Mode Selection
Password A
Setting
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignored
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
00: Selection disabled
01: Induction motor
02: High-frequency induction motor
00: Initialization disabled
01: Perform initialization/ mode selection
0000: Password function disabled
0001 to FFFF: Password
Password A
Authentication
0000 to FFFF
Password B
Setting
0000: Password function disabled
0001 to FFFF: Password
Password B
Authentication
0000 to FFFF
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
02
00
00
0000
0000
0000
0000 yes yes no no no no no no yes yes no no no no no no
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-87
5-86
5-178
5-174
5-91
4-25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can
Data can be be set during
RUN changed during RUN
Unit Page
C001
C002
C003
Multi-function
Input 3
Selection
*1
C004
C005
C006
C007
Multi-function
Input 1
Selection
Multi-function
Input 2
Selection
Multi-function
Input 4
Selection
*1
Multi-function
Input 5
Selection
Multi-function
Input 6
Selection
Multi-function
Input 7
Selection
00: FW (Forward)
01: RV (Reverse)
02: CF1 (Multi-step speed 1)
03: CF2 (Multi-step speed 2)
04: CF3 (Multi-step speed 3)
05: CF4 (Multi-step speed 4)
06: JG (Jogging)
07: DB (External DC injection braking)
08: SET (Motor 2 control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
11: FRS (Free-run stop)
12: EXT (External trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (Commercial switch)
15: SFT (Soft lock)
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
18: RS (Reset)
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (Forced operator)
32: SF1 (Multi-step speed bit 1)
33: SF2 (Multi-step speed bit 2)
34: SF3 (Multi-step speed bit 3)
35: SF4 (Multi-step speed bit 4)
36: SF5 (Multi-step speed bit 5)
37: SF6 (Multi-step speed bit 6)
38: SF7 (Multi-step speed bit 7)
39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
40: TL (Torque limit enabled/disabled)
41: TRQ1 (Torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (Torque limit switching 2)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (Position deviation clear)
50: ADD (Frequency addition)
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
52: ATR (Torque reference input permission)
53: KHC (Integrated power clear)
56: Reserved.
57: Reserved.
58: Reserved.
59: Reserved.
60: Reserved.
61: Reserved.
62: Reserved.
65: AHD (Analog command held)
66: CP1 (Position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (Position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (Position command selection 3)
69: ORL (Zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (Zero return startup signal)
73: SPD (Speed/position switching)
77: GS1 (GS1 input (C003 only))
78: GS2 (GS2 input (C004 only))
81: 485 (Start co-inverter communication)
82: Reserved.
83: HLD (Retain output frequency)
84: ROK (Permission of RUN command)
85: EB (Rotation direction detection (C007 only))
86: DISP (Display fixed) no: NO (Not assigned)
00
(FW)
01
(RV)
18 (RS)
12
(EXT)
02
(CF1)
03
(CF2)
06 (JG) no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
− 5-29
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-26
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
C011
C012
C013
C014
C015
C016
C017
Multi-function
Input Terminal 1
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 2
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 3
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 4
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 5
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 6
Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Input Terminal 7
Operation
Selection
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00 no yes
00
00
00
00
00
00 no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes
− 5-31
4-27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
C021
C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P1/EDM
Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P2 Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
(MA, MB)
Function
Selection
Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00: RUN (During RUN)
01: FA1 (Constant speed reached)
02: FA2 (Set frequency min. reached)
03: OL (Overload warning)
04: OD (PID excessive deviation)
05: AL (Alarm output)
06: FA3 (Set frequency only)
07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque)
09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (During torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power on time over)
13: THM (Thermal warning)
19: BRK (Brake release)
20: BER (Brake error)
21: ZS (0Hz)
22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (Position ready)
24: FA4 (Set frequency min. reached
2)
25: FA5 (Set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
27: FVdc (Analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIdc (Analog FI disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (Communication disconnection detection)
33: LOG1 (Logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (Logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (Logic operation output 3)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (Starting contact signal)
42: OHF (Fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (Low current signal)
44: Reserved.
45: Reserved.
46: Reserved.
50: IRDY (Operation ready)
51: FWR (During forward operation)
52: RVR (During reverse operation)
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (Window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (Window comparator FI)
58: FREF (Frequency command source)
59: REF (RUN command source)
60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)
63: OPO (Optional board) no: NO (Not assigned)
00
(RUN)
01 (FA1)
05 (AL) no no no yes yes yes
− 5-32
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-28
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
C027 MP Selection
C028 AM Selection
C030
Digital Current
Monitor
Reference Value
Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque (heavy load only)
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
10: Cooling fin temperature
12: Do not set.
15: Pulse train input monitor
16: Optional board
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque (heavy load only)
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
10: Cooling fin temperature
11: Output torque (signed)
(heavy load only)
16: Optional board
0.20 × rated current to 2.00 × rated current (current value at digital current monitor output 1,440 Hz)
07
07
Rated current no no yes yes yes yes
−
−
A
5-42
5-44
5-43
C031
C032
C036
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P1/EDM Contact
Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P2 Contact
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
(MA, MB)
Contact
Selection
00: NO contact at P1, P2,
MA, NC contact at MB
01: NC contact at P1, P2,
MA, NO contact at MB
00
00
01 no no no yes yes yes
− 5-34
4-29 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
C038
C039
C040
C041
C241
Low Current
Signal Output
Mode Selection
Low Current
Detection Level
Overload
Warning Signal
Output Mode
Selection
Overload
Warning Level 1
Overload
Warning Level 2
Monitor or data range
00: Enabled during acceleration/deceleration and constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
01 no yes −
5-129
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current
Rated current yes yes A
00: Enabled during acceleration/deceleration and constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
01 no yes −
0.0 to 2.00 × Rated current
Rated current
× 1.15
Rated current
× 1.15
yes yes yes yes
A
5-115
C042
C043
C044
C045
C046
C047
C052
C053
Arrival
Frequency
During
Acceleration
Arrival
Frequency
During
Deceleration
PID Deviation
Excessive Level
Arrival
Frequency
During
Acceleration 2
Arrival
Frequency
During
Deceleration 2
Pulse Train
Output
Coefficient
Feedback
Comparison
Signal Off Level
Feedback
Comparison
Signal On Level
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.0 to 100.0
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0 (1000.)
0.01 to 99.99
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.00
0.00
3.0
0.00
0.00
1.00
100.0
0.0
no no no no no yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Hz
Hz
%
Hz
Hz
−
%
%
5-122
5-73
5-122
5-43
5-73
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-30
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
C054
C055
C056
C057
C058
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Selection
Overtorque/ undertorque level (Forward
Power Running)
Overtorque/ undertorque level (Reverse
Regeneration)
Overtorque/ undertorque level (Reverse
Power Running)
Overtorque/ undertorque level (Forward
Regeneration)
00: Overtorque
01: Undertorque
0. to 200.
C059
C074
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Signal Output
Mode Selection
Communication
Parity Selection
00: Enabled during acceleration/deceleration and constant speed
01: Enabled only during constant speed
C061
C063
C064
Electronic
Thermal
Warning Level
0 Hz Detection
Level
Cooling Fin
Overheat
Warning Level
C072
Communication
Station No.
Selection
0. to 100.
0.00 to 99.99
100.0
0. to 110.
C071
Communication
Speed Selection
03: 2,400 bps
04: 4,800 bps
05: 9,600 bps
06: 19.2 kbps
07: 38.4 kbps
08: 57.6 kbps
09: 76.8 kbps
10: 115.2 kbps
1. to 247.
00: No parity
01: Even
02: Odd
C075
Communication
Stop Bit
Selection
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
100.
100.
100.
100.
01
90.
0.00
100.
05
1.
00
1 no no no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
°
−
%
−
%
−
−
−
5-152
5-113
Hz 5-125
C
−
5-129
6-3
4-31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
C076
Operation
Selection on
Communication
Error
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignored
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
0.00: Timeout disabled
0.01 to 99.99
C077
C078
C091
Communication
Error Timeout
Time
Communication
Wait Time
C081 FV Adjustment
C082 FI Adjustment
C085
Thermistor
Adjustment
Debug Mode
Selection
0. to 1000.
0.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 200.0
Use "00". *Do not change.
C096
Communication
Selection
00: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
01: Co-inverter communication
02: Co-inverter communication
(management inverter)
C098
C099
C100
Co-inverter
Communication
Starting Station
Number
Co-inverter
Communication
Ending Station
Number
Co-inverter
Communication
Start Selection
1. to 8.
1. to 8.
00: 485 terminal
01: Always started
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
02
0.00
0.
100.
100.
100.0
00
00
1.
1.
00 no no no yes ms yes yes % yes yes %
5-40 yes yes % 5-120 yes no no no no yes yes yes no no no no
− s
−
−
−
−
−
6-3
−
6-22
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-32
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
C101
UP/DWN
Storage
Selection
C102 Reset Selection
C103
Reset Restart
Selection
00: Do not store frequency data
01: Store frequency data
00: Trip reset at power-on
01: Trip reset at power-off
02: Enabled only during trip
(Reset when the power is
ON.)
03: Trip reset only
00: 0 Hz restart
01: Frequency matching restart
02: Frequency pull-in restart
C104
UP/DWN Clear
Terminal Mode
00: 0 Hz
01: EEPROM data at poweron
C105 MP Gain Setting 50. to 200.
C106
AM Gain
Adjustment
50. to 200.
C109 AM Bias Setting 0. to 100.
C111
Overload 1
Warning Level 2
0.00 to 2.00 × Rated current
00
00
00
00
100.
100.
0.
Rated current
× 1.15
no yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
−
−
−
%
%
%
A
5-71
5-100
5-71
5-43
5-45
5-45
5-115
4-33 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
C130
C131
C132
C133
C140
C141
Output P1/EDM
ON Delay Time
Output P1/EDM
OFF Delay Time
Output P2 ON
Delay Time
Output P2 OFF
Delay Time
Output RY ON
Delay Time
Output RY OFF
Delay Time
0.0 to 100.0
C142
C143
Logic Output
Signal 1
Selection 1
Logic Output
Signal 1
Selection 2
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
C144
Logic Output
Signal 1
Operator
Selection
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
C145
C146
Logic Output
Signal 2
Selection 1
Logic Output
Signal 2
Selection 2
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
C147
Logic Output
Signal 2
Operator
Selection
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
C148
C149
Logic Output
Signal 3
Selection 1
Logic Output
Signal 3
Selection 2
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
Same as the options for C021
(33 (LOG1), 34 (LOG2), 35
(LOG3), 62 (EDM), 63
(OPO), and "no" cannot be selected.)
C150
Logic Output
Signal 3
Operator
Selection
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
0.0
no yes
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00 no no no no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes s
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-36
5-125
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-34
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
C160
C161
C162
C163
C164
C165
C166
C169
H001
H002
H202
Monitor or data range
Input Terminal 1
Response Time
Input Terminal 2
Response Time
Input Terminal 3
Response Time
Input Terminal 4
Response Time
Input Terminal 5
Response Time
Input Terminal 6
Response Time
Input Terminal 7
Response Time
Multi-step
Speed/Position
Determination
Time
0. to 200. (
0. to 200. (
×
×
2 ms)
10 ms)
Auto-tuning
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (motor does not rotate)
02: Enabled (motor rotates)
Motor Parameter
1
Motor Parameter
2
00: Standard motor parameter
01: Auto-tuning parameter
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
1.
no yes
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
0.
00
00
00 no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no ms ms
−
−
5-32
5-63
5-146
H003 Motor Capacity 1
H203 Motor Capacity 2
0.1/0.2/0.4/0.55/0.75/1.1/1.5/
2.2/3.0/3.7/4.0/5.5/7.5/11.0/
15.0/18.5
Default setting
Default setting no no no no kW kW
5-145
H004
H204
H005
H205
Motor Pole
Number 1
Motor Pole
Number 2
Speed
Response 1
Speed
Response 2
2/4/6/8/10
1. to 1000.
4
4
100.
100.
no no yes yes no no yes yes pole
−
4-35 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
H006
H206
Stabilization
Parameter 1
Stabilization
Parameter 2
H020
Motor 1
Parameter R1
H220
Motor 2
Parameter R1
H021
Motor 1
Parameter R2
H221
Motor 2
Parameter R2
H022
Motor 1
Parameter L
H222
Motor 2
Parameter L
H023
Motor 1
Parameter Io
H223
Motor 2
Parameter Io
H024
Motor 1
Parameter J
H224
Motor 2
Parameter J
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
0. to 255.
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
100.
yes yes
− 5-81
100.
yes yes
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
Ω mH
A kgm
2
5-145
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-36
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
H030
H230
H031
H231
H032
H232
H033
H233
H034
H234
H050
H051
Motor 1
Parameter R1
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 2
Parameter R1
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 1
Parameter R2
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 2
Parameter R2
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 1
Parameter L
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 2
Parameter L
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 1
Parameter Io
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 2
Parameter Io
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 1
Parameter J
(Auto-tuning
Data)
Motor 2
Parameter J
(Auto-tuning
Data)
V/f Control with
Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation
Proportional
Gain
V/f Control with
Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation
Integral Gain
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 65.53
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.01 to 99.99
100.0 to 655.3
0.001 to 9.999
10.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 999.9
1000. to 9999.
0.00 to 10.0
0.0. to 100.0
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
Depends on the capacity no no Ω
Depends on the capacity no no Ω
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity no no no no
Ω no no no no no no no no no no no no mH
A kgm
2
5-145
0.20
2 yes yes yes yes
Time s
5-83
5-160
4-37 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
P001
Operation
Selection on
Option Error
00: Trip
01: Continue operation
P003
P004
Pulse Train Input
Terminal RP
Selection
Feedback Pulse
Train Input Type
Selection
00: Frequency setting
(including PID)
01: Feedback pulse (enabled only when motor 1 control is selected)
02: Do not set.
00: Single-phase pulse train
01: Dual-phase pulse train 1
02: Dual-phase pulse train 2
03: Single-phase pulse train
+ direction
P011
Number of
Encoder Pulses
32. to 1024.
P012
Simple Position
Control
Selection
00: Simple position control disabled
02: Simple position control enabled
P015
P026
P027 hers P031
Creep Speed
Setting
Overspeed Error
Detection Level
Speed Deviation
Error Detection
Level
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Time Input Type
Starting frequency to 10.0
(100.0)
0.0 to 150.0
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 120.0
00: Digital Operator
03: Do not set.
P033
Torque
Reference Input
Selection
00: Terminal FV
01: Terminal FI
03: Digital Operator
06: Optional board
P034
Torque
Reference
Setting
0. to 200.
P036 Torque Bias Mode
00: Disabled
01: Set via the Digital
Operator
05: Optional board
P037 Torque Bias Value − 200. to +200.
P038
Torque Bias
Polarity Selection
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
00
00
00
512.
00
5.00
115.0
10.00
00
00
0.
00
0.
00 no no no no no no no no no no yes no yes no yes no no no no yes yes yes no no yes no yes no
−
−
−
Pulse
−
Hz
%
Hz
−
−
%
−
%
−
−
5-82
5-160
5-160
5-24
5-156
5-156
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-38
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range l P039
P040
P041
Speed Limit
Value in Torque
Control
(Forward)
Speed Limit
Value in Torque
Control
(Reverse)
Speed/Torque
Control
Switching Time
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 120.0
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 120.0
0 to 1000
P044
P045
Communications
Error Detection
Timer Setting
0.00 to 99.99 (S)
Operation at
Host
Communications
Error Selection
00: Trip
01: Deceleration stop and then trip
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
P046
Assembly Instance
Number
00 to 20
P048
Operation at Idle
Mode Detection
Setting
00: Trip
01: Deceleration stop and then trip
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
P049
P055
Number of Poles for Rotation
Speed Setting
Pulse Train
Frequency Scale
0/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/
22/24/26/28/30/32/34/36/38
1.0 to 32.0
P056
Pulse Train
Frequency Filter
Time Parameter
0.01 to 2.00
P057
Pulse Train Bias
Amount
− 100. to +100.
P058 Pulse Train Limit 0. to 100.
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
0.00
0.00
1.00
01
00
01
0
25.0
0.10
0.
100.
yes yes no no no no no no no no no yes yes no no no no no yes yes yes yes
Hz
Hz ms
− kHz s
%
%
5-156
−
5-82
4-39 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
P060
P061
P062
P063
P064
P065
P066
P067
P068
P069
P070
P071
P072
P073
P075
P077
Multi-step
Position
Command 0
Multi-step
Position
Command 1
Multi-step
Position
Command 2
Multi-step
Position
Command 3
Multi-step
Position
Command 4
Multi-step
Position
Command 5
Multi-step
Position
Command 6
Multi-step
Position
Command 7
Zero Return
Mode
Zero Return
Direction
Selection
Zero Return Mode
1 Frequency
Zero Return Mode
2 Frequency
Position Range
Setting (Forward
Side)
Position Range
Setting (Reverse
Side)
Positioning
Mode Selection
Encoder
Disconnection
Detection Time
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting
(forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
00: Zero return mode 1
01: Zero return mode 2
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
0.00 to 99.99
100.0 to 400.0
0 to 268,435,455
(Displays MSB 4 digits)
− 268,435,455 to 0
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
00: Limit
01: Not limited
0.0 to 10.0
Default setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
01
5.00
5.00
268435455
− 268435455
00
1.0
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Unit Page
−
− yes yes − yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes no yes
Hz
Hz
− yes yes −
− s
5-164
5-168
5-160
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-40
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
P116
P117
P118
P119
P120
P121
P110
P111
P112
P113
P114
P115
P100
P101
P102
P103
P104
P105
P106
P107
P108
P109
P122
P123
P124
P125
P126
P127
P128
P129
P130
P131
(Reserved) −
Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
− − − − −
4-41 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
P140
P141
P142
P143
P144
Number of Sent
Data of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
Recipient
Station Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
1
Recipient
Register of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
1
Sender Register of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
1
Recipient
Station Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
2
1. to 5.
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
5.
1.
0000
0000
2.
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
−
−
−
−
6-22
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-42
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
P145
P146
P147
P148
P149
P150
P151
P152
Sender Register of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
3
Recipient
Station Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
4
Recipient
Register of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
4
Sender Register of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
4
Recipient
Register of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
2
Sender Register of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
2
Recipient
Station Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
3
Recipient
Register of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
3
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000
0000
3.
0000
0000
4.
0000
0000 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
6-22
4-43 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page
P153
P154
P155
P177
P178
P179
P180
P181
P182
P171
P172
P173
P174
P175
P176
P185
P186
P160
P161
P162
P163
P164
P165
P166
P167
P168
P169
P170
(Reserved)
Recipient
Station Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
5
Recipient
Register of All
Stations in Coinverter
Communication
5
Sender Register of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication
5
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
−
5.
0000
0000
− yes yes yes
− yes yes yes
−
−
−
−
−
6-22
−
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-44
4
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name Monitor or data range
U001 User 1 Selection
U002 User 2 Selection
U003 User 3 Selection
U004 User 4 Selection
U005 User 5 Selection
U006 User 6 Selection
U007 User 7 Selection
U008 User 8 Selection
U009 User 9 Selection
U010
User 10
Selection
U011
U012
User 11
Selection
User 12
Selection
U013
U014
U015
User 13
Selection
User 14
Selection
User 15
Selection
U016
U017
U018
U019
U020
U021
U022
U023
U024
User 16
Selection
User 17
Selection
User 18
Selection
User 19
Selection
User 20
Selection
User 21
Selection
User 22
Selection
User 23
Selection
User 24
Selection no d001 to P186 no no no no no no no no no
Default setting
Set data no
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN yes yes
Unit Page no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes no yes yes no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes
− 5-177 yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
4-45 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
4-2 Function Mode
Parameter No. Function name
U025
U026
U027
U028
U029
U030
U031
U032
User 25
Selection
User 26
Selection
User 27
Selection
User 28
Selection
User 29
Selection
User 30
Selection
User 31
Selection
User 32
Selection
Monitor or data range no d001 to P186 no no no no
Default setting
Set data
Data can be set during
RUN
Data can be changed during RUN
Unit Page no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
− 5-177 no no yes yes yes yes yes yes
4
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 4-46
Functions
Describes the details of each parameter.
5-1 Monitor Mode ........................................................................ 5-1
Output Frequency Monitor [d001] ................................................... 5-1
Output Current Monitor [d002] ........................................................ 5-1
Rotation Direction Monitor [d003] ................................................... 5-2
PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004] ............................................... 5-2
Multi-function Input Monitor [d005].................................................. 5-3
Multi-function Output Monitor [d006]............................................... 5-3
Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007] ..................... 5-4
Real Frequency Monitor [d008]....................................................... 5-5
Torque Reference Monitor [d009] ................................................... 5-5
Torque Bias Monitor [d010]............................................................. 5-6
Output Torque Monitor [d012]......................................................... 5-6
Output Voltage Monitor [d013] ........................................................ 5-6
Input Power Monitor [d014]............................................................. 5-7
Integrated Power Monitor [d015]..................................................... 5-7
Total RUN Time [d016] ................................................................... 5-8
Power ON Time [d017] ................................................................... 5-8
Fin Temperature Monitor [d018] ..................................................... 5-8
Life Assessment Monitor [d022]...................................................... 5-9
Position Command Monitor [d029].................................................. 5-9
Current Position Monitor [d030] ...................................................... 5-9
User Selection Monitor (2 Types) [d050] ...................................... 5-10
Inverter Mode Monitor [d060]........................................................ 5-10
Fault Counter [d080] ..................................................................... 5-11
Fault Monitors 1 to 6 [d081 to 086] ............................................... 5-11
Warning Monitor [d090]................................................................. 5-11
DC Voltage Monitor [d102]............................................................ 5-12
Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103].......................... 5-12
Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor [d104] .............................. 5-12
5-2 Basic Functions .................................................................. 5-13
Heavy Load/Light Load Selection ................................................. 5-13
Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting... 5-15
RUN Command Selection............................................................. 5-22
RUN Direction Selection ............................................................... 5-23
Rotation Direction Limit Selection ................................................. 5-23
Stop Selection............................................................................... 5-24
Acceleration/Deceleration Time .................................................... 5-24
Base Frequency............................................................................ 5-26
AVR Function................................................................................ 5-27
Maximum Frequency .................................................................... 5-28
5-3 Input/Output Terminals ...................................................... 5-29
Multi-function Input Selection........................................................ 5-29
Multi-function Input Operation Selection ....................................... 5-31
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5
5
Input Terminal Response Time ..................................................... 5-32
Multi-function Output Terminal Selection ...................................... 5-32
Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection......................... 5-34
Output Signal Delay/Hold Function ............................................... 5-36
5-4 Analog Signal...................................................................... 5-37
Analog Input (FV, FI)..................................................................... 5-37
Analog Input Filter (FV, FI Sampling)............................................ 5-38
Analog Command Held Function (AHD) ....................................... 5-39
Analog Input Adjustment............................................................... 5-40
External Frequency Start/End....................................................... 5-40
MP Terminal (Pulse/PWM Output)................................................ 5-42
AM Terminal (Analog Output) ....................................................... 5-44
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method ................................ 5-46
Control Method (V/f Characteristics)............................................. 5-46
Torque Boost ................................................................................ 5-49
Carrier Frequency ......................................................................... 5-51
Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function ........................ 5-52
Motor 2 Control Function (SET) .................................................... 5-54
5-6 Operation Functions .......................................................... 5-56
3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R) ......................................... 5-56
Starting Frequency........................................................................ 5-57
Reduced Voltage Startup Selection .............................................. 5-58
Jogging Operation (JG)................................................................. 5-59
Frequency Limit ............................................................................ 5-60
Frequency Jump Function ............................................................ 5-61
Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function...................................... 5-62
RUN Permission Signal ................................................................ 5-63
Multi-step Speed Operation Function (CF1 to CF4, SF1 to SF7) .....5-63
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function (2CH)......................... 5-66
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern ................................................ 5-68
Frequency Operation Function ..................................................... 5-70
Frequency Addition Function ........................................................ 5-71
Remote Operation Function (UP, DWN) ....................................... 5-71
Output Voltage Gain ..................................................................... 5-72
PID Function ................................................................................. 5-73
Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function .............................. 5-79
Commercial Switch (CS) ............................................................... 5-79
Stabilization Parameter................................................................. 5-81
Pulse Train Frequency Input......................................................... 5-82
V/f Control with Speed Feedback ................................................. 5-83
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions .............................. 5-84
STOP Key Selection ..................................................................... 5-84
Soft Lock Function (SFT) .............................................................. 5-84
Forced Operator Function (OPE) .................................................. 5-85
Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM) ....................................... 5-85
Selection of Operation upon Digital Operator Disconnection........ 5-86
Initial Screen Selection (Screen at Power-ON) ............................. 5-86
Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function ................................. 5-87
Main Panel Display Selection ....................................................... 5-87
Display Selection .......................................................................... 5-88
Display Fixed (DISP)..................................................................... 5-91
Password Function ....................................................................... 5-91
5-8 Restart Functions ............................................................... 5-94
Frequency Matching Restart and Frequency Pull-in Restart ........ 5-94
Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage, Overvoltage/Overcurrent .... 5-96
Reset (RS) .................................................................................. 5-100
Free-run Stop Function (FRS) .................................................... 5-103
Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function (USP) ................. 5-105
Deceleration Stop at Power-off (Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function) ...5-106
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals ..... 5-110
Electronic Thermal Function ....................................................... 5-110
Overload Limit/Overload Warning ............................................... 5-114
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Overcurrent Suppression Function ............................................. 5-116
Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration ............ 5-117
Alarm Signal (AL)........................................................................ 5-119
External Trip (EXT) ..................................................................... 5-120
Thermistor Trip Function............................................................. 5-120
Signal During RUN (RUN) .......................................................... 5-121
Frequency Arrival Signal (FA1 to FA5) ....................................... 5-122
RUN Time/Power ON Time Over (RNT/ONT) ............................ 5-124
0 Hz (ZS)..................................................................................... 5-125
Output Signal Logic Operation (LOG1 to LOG3) ........................ 5-125
Capacitor Life Warning (WAC).................................................... 5-126
Cooling Fan Operation................................................................ 5-127
Cooling Fan Life Signal (WAF) ................................................... 5-127
Communication Disconnection Detection Signal (NDc).............. 5-128
Starting Contact Signal (FR) ....................................................... 5-128
Fin Overheat Warning (OHF)...................................................... 5-129
Low Current Signal (LOC)........................................................... 5-129
Operation Ready (IRDY)............................................................. 5-130
Signal During Forward Operation (FWR).................................... 5-130
Signal During Reverse Operation (RVR) .................................... 5-131
Fatal Fault Signal (MJA) ............................................................. 5-131
Window Comparator ( WCFV/WCFI) (Disconnection Detection FVdc/FIdc) .......5-132
Frequency Command Source (FREF) ........................................ 5-133
RUN Command Source (REF).................................................... 5-133
Motor 2 Selection (SETM)........................................................... 5-134
5-10 Brake Settings................................................................... 5-135
DC Injection Braking (DB)........................................................... 5-135
Regenerative Braking Function................................................... 5-141
Brake Control Function ............................................................... 5-142
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control............................................... 5-144
Sensorless Vector Control .......................................................... 5-144
Motor Parameter Selection ......................................................... 5-145
Offline Auto-Tuning Function ...................................................... 5-146
Torque Monitor Function............................................................. 5-151
Overtorque/Undertorque Selection (OTQ) .................................. 5-152
Torque Limit Function ................................................................. 5-153
Torque LADSTOP Function ........................................................ 5-155
Torque Control ............................................................................ 5-156
Torque Bias Function.................................................................. 5-156
Reverse Rotation Prevention Function ....................................... 5-157
5-12 Simple Position Control Function ................................... 5-158
Encoder Connection ................................................................... 5-158
Simple Position Control Mode..................................................... 5-160
Multi-step Position Switching Function (CP1/CP2/CP3) ............. 5-164
Speed/Position Switching Function (SPD).................................. 5-167
Zero Return Function .................................................................. 5-168
5-13 Safety Function................................................................. 5-170
Overview of Safety Function ....................................................... 5-170
Safety Function Setting............................................................... 5-170
How to Wire for/Use Safety Function.......................................... 5-171
Wiring Example........................................................................... 5-172
5-14 Other Functions ................................................................ 5-174
Initialization Setting ..................................................................... 5-174
User Parameter Manual Setting Function................................... 5-177
User Parameter Automatic Setting Function............................... 5-177
Inverter Mode Selection .............................................................. 5-178
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
5-1 Monitor Mode
The following explains the Inverter's display functions such as the output frequency monitor and fault monitor.
5
Output Frequency Monitor [d001]
Displays the output frequency of the Inverter. During stop, "0.00" is displayed.
The monitor LED indicator "Hz" is lit while the d001setting is displayed.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d001 b163
Output Frequency
Monitor
0.00 to 400.0
0.00 to 1000.
High-frequency mode d001/d007
Frequency Setting
Mode Selection
00: Disabled
(The output frequency cannot be changed using d001/d007.)
01: Enabled
(The output frequency can be changed using d001/d007.)
Related functions A001, F001
Default setting
−
00
Unit
Hz
−
Reference
If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator (A001 = 02), enabling d001/d007
Frequency Setting Mode Selection (b163 = 01) lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor
(d001) setting using the Increment/Decrement keys only during operation.
Changed Output Frequency Monitor (d001) will be reflected to the Output Frequency Setting
(F001). Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM.
Since F001 is rewritten while d001 is still displayed, there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration/deceleration time.
While the PID function is activated or being stopped, the output frequency cannot be changed.
The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment/
Decrement keys simultaneously.
Output Current Monitor [d002]
Displays the output current value of the Inverter. During stop, "0.0" is displayed.
The monitor LED indicator "A" is lit while the d002 setting is displayed.
Parameter
No.
d002
Function name
Output Current
Monitor
Data
0.0 to 655.3
The minimum unit varies depending on the capacity.
Default setting
−
Unit
A
5-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
Rotation Direction Monitor [d003]
Displays the rotation direction of the Inverter.
The RUN LED indicator is lit during forward/reverse rotation.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit d003
Rotation Direction
Monitor
F: Forward o: Stop r: Reverse
− −
In general, the forward direction of the motor is the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the axial direction.
Forward
PID Feedback Value Monitor [d004]
When "01: Enabled" or "02: Reverse output enabled" is selected in PID Selection (A071), the
PID feedback value can be monitored.
Also, conversion is possible using PID Scale (A075).
"d004 display" = "Feedback value [%]" × PID Scale (A075)
Parameter
No.
d004
Function name
PID Feedback
Value Monitor
A075 PID Scale
Related functions
Data
0.00 to 99.99 (Displayed in increments of
0.01.)
100.0 to 999.9 (Displayed in increments of 0.1.)
1,000. to 9,999. (Displayed in increments of 1.)
1,000 to 9,999 (Displayed in increments of 10.)
100 to 999 (Displayed in increments of
1,000.)
0.01 to 99.99 (Displayed in increments of
0.01.)
A071, A075
Default setting
−
1.00
Unit
−
Time
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-2
5-1 Monitor Mode
Multi-function Input Monitor [d005]
The LED lighting position indicates the input status of the multi-function inputs.
The item that the built-in CPU recognizes to be "input" is indicated as being ON. This does not depend on the NO/NC contact setting.
Example) Multi-function input terminals S7/EB, S2, S1 : ON
RP terminal, multi-function input terminals S6, S5/TH, S4/GS2, S3/GS1 : OFF
ON
OFF
Display
: Lit
: Turned OFF
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
(ON)(OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(OFF)(ON) (ON)
If the input terminal response time function is used, the recognition of "input" is delayed. (Refer to
"Input Terminal Response Time" on page 5-32.)
Monitoring cannot be performed even when TH (thermistor) is allocated to the multi-function input terminal S5 and a digital signal is input.
5
Multi-function Output Monitor [d006]
The LED lighting position indicates the output status of the multi-function output terminals.
The output status of the built-in CPU is indicated. This is not the status of the control circuit terminal.
This does not depend on the NO/NC contact setting.
Example) Multi-function output terminals P2, P1/EDM : ON
Relay output terminal MA : OFF
ON
OFF
Display
: Lit
: Turned OFF
MA P2 P1
(OFF)(ON) (ON)
5-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
Output Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) [d007]
Displays a conversion value based on the coefficient set in Frequency Conversion Coefficient
(b086).
This monitor is used to change the unit of displayed data (e.g. motor rpm).
"Display of the Output Frequency Monitor (d007)" = "Output Frequency Monitor (d001)" ×
"Frequency Conversion Coefficient (b086)"
Example) Displaying rpm of 4-pole motor.
Motor rpm N [min-1] = (120 × f [Hz])/P [pole] = f [Hz] × 30
As such, when b086 = 30.0, a motor rpm of 1800 (60 × 30.0) is displayed at 60 Hz.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d007 b086 b163
Output Frequency
Monitor (after conversion)
0.00 to 99.99 (Displayed in increments of
0.01.)
100.0 to 999.9 (Displays in increments of
0.1.)
1000. to 4000 (9999) (Displays in increments of 1.)
Frequency
Conversion
Coefficient
1,000 to 9,999 (Displayed in increments of 10.)
( 100) (Displays in increments of 1000.)
0.01 to 99.99
Set in increments of 0.01.
(d007 = d001 × b086)
00: Disabled
(The output frequency cannot be changed using d001/d007.) d001/d007
Frequency Setting
Mode Selection
01: Enabled
(The output frequency can be changed using d001/d007.)
Note: Data in ( ) indicates the value when the high-frequency mode is selected.
Default setting
−
1.00
00
Unit
−
−
−
5
If Frequency Reference Selection is set to Digital Operator (A001 = 02), enabling d001/d007
Frequency Setting Mode Selection (b163 = 01) lets you change the Output Frequency Monitor
(d001) setting using the Increment/Decrement keys only during operation.
Changed Output Frequency (d001) will be reflected to the Output Frequency Setting (F001).
Pressing the Enter key stores the setting in the EEPROM.
Since F001 is rewritten while d007 is still displayed, there may be a time gap between the key operation and display change depending on the acceleration/deceleration time.
While the PID function is activated or being stopped, the output frequency cannot be changed.
The frequency cannot be changed in the individual input mode by pressing the Increment/
Decrement keys simultaneously.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-4
5-1 Monitor Mode
5
Real Frequency Monitor [d008]
Displays the real motor frequency, when Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Selection is set to "01:
Feedback pulse."
The display does not depend on the control method.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d008
Real Frequency
Monitor
Related functions
0.00 to 99.99
Forward. Displayed in increments of
0.01 Hz.
100.0 to 400.0 (999.9)
Forward. Displayed in increments of
0.1 Hz.
(1000.)
Forward. Displayed in increments of
1 Hz.
− 9.99 to − 0.00
Reverse. Displayed in increments of
0.01 Hz.
− 99.9 to − 10.0
Reverse. Displayed in increments of
0.1 Hz.
− 400. ( − 999.) to − 100.
Reverse. Displayed in increments of
1 Hz.
( − 100)
Reverse. Displayed in increments of
10 Hz.
P011, H004
Note: Data in ( ) indicates the value when the high-frequency mode is selected.
Default setting
−
Unit
Hz
Set Number of Encoder Pulse (P011) and Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) correctly.
For connections, etc., refer to "Simple Position Control Function" on page 5-158.
Torque Reference Monitor [d009]
Displays the currently entered torque reference value, when torque control is selected for sensorless vector control.
Torque control becomes active when "52: ATR" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the ATR terminal is turned ON.
For details, refer to "Torque Control" on page 5-156.
Parameter
No.
Function name d009
Torque Reference
Monitor
Related functions
− 200. to 200.
Data
Default setting
−
A044, C001 to C007, P033, P034
Unit
%
5-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
Torque Bias Monitor [d010]
During sensorless vector control, the currently set torque bias amount is displayed.
Parameter
No.
d010
Function name
Torque Bias Monitor
Related functions
− 200. to 200.
Data
Default setting
−
A044, P036, P037, P038
Unit
%
Output Torque Monitor [d012]
Displays an estimated value of the Inverter's output torque.
Parameter
No.
Function name d012
Output Torque
Monitor
Related functions
− 200. to 200.
Data
Default setting
−
Unit
%
A044/A244
Note: The power running direction is positive and regeneration direction is negative during forward rotation, while the power running direction is negative and regeneration direction is positive during reverse rotation.
5
This display is shown only when the sensorless vector control is selected. If any other control mode is selected, the correct value is not displayed.
Output Voltage Monitor [d013]
Displays the output voltage of the Inverter.
Parameter
No.
d013
Function name
Output Voltage
Monitor
0.0 to 600.0
Data
Default setting
−
Unit
V
Set Motor Incoming Voltage Selection (A082/A282) correctly. The correct value may not be displayed.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-6
5-1 Monitor Mode
Input Power Monitor [d014]
Displays the input power (instantaneous value) of the Inverter.
Parameter
No.
d014
Function name
Input Power
Monitor
0.0 to 100.0
Data
Default setting
−
Unit kW
5
Integrated Power Monitor [d015]
Displays the integrated power (electric energy) of the Inverter.
The conversion of displayed data is performed with Integrated Power Display Scale (b079).
"d015 display" = "Actual integrated power [kWh]"/"Integrated Power Display Scale (b079)"
Example) If b079 = 100 and the displayed value is 1,000, the actual integrated power is
100,000 [kWh].
The integrated power value can be cleared by setting Integrated Power Clear (b078) to "01."
The integrated power value can also be cleared via terminal input, if "53: KHC (Integrated power clear)" is allocated to any of the multi-function inputs.
When Integrated Power Display Scale (b079) is set to "1000", up to "999,000,000" [kWh] can be displayed.
This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Default setting
Unit d015 b078 b079
C001 to C007
Integrated Power
Monitor
Integrated Power
Clear
Integrated Power
Display Scale
Multi-function Input
Selection
Data
0.0 to 9999.
Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1 kW × (b079).
1000 to 9999
Displayed in increments of the setting unit 10 kW × (b079).
100 to 999
Displayed in increments of the setting unit 1,000 kW × (b079).
00: Normal
01: Perform integrated power clear (01 is reset to 00 after the clear.)
1. to 1000.
53: KHC (Integrated power clear)
−
00
1.
−
−
−
−
−
5-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
Total RUN Time [d016]
Displays the total RUN time of the Inverter.
This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d016 Total RUN Time
0.0 to 9,999. (Displays in increments of 1 hour.)
1,000 to 9,999 (Displays in increments of
10 hours.)
100 to 999 (Displayed in increments of
1,000 hours.)
Note: Initialization will not clear the setting.
Default setting
−
Unit h
Power ON Time [d017]
Displays the total power ON time of the Inverter.
This parameter is saved in the EEPROM when the power is shut off.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d017 Power ON Time
0.0 to 9,999. (Displays in increments of 1 hour.)
1,000 to 9,999 (Displays in increments of
10 hours.)
100 to 999 (Displayed in increments of
1,000 hours.)
Note: Initialization will not clear the setting.
Default setting
−
Unit h
5
Fin Temperature Monitor [d018]
Displays the temperature of the cooling fin inside the Inverter.
Parameter
No.
d018
Function name
Fin Temperature Monitor − 20.0 to 150.0
Data
Default setting
−
Unit
° C
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-8
5-1 Monitor Mode
Life Assessment Monitor [d022]
The LED lighting position indicates the status of life assessment signal.
The following two items can be monitored:
1: Main circuit board capacitor service life
2: Cooling fan life
ON
OFF
2 1
The capacitor service life is calculated every 10 minutes. If the Inverter is turned on/off frequently within this interval, the capacitor service life cannot be correctly diagnosed.
The cooling fan life assessment function is not available for 1-phase 200V class motors of 0.4 kW max. and 3-phase 200V class motors of 0.75 kW max., because these motors are not equipped with a cooling fan.
5
Position Command Monitor [d029]
Position commands can be monitored during simple position control.
For details, refer to "Simple Position Control Function" on page 5-158.
Parameter
No.
Function name d029
Position Command
Monitor
Data
− 268 ( − 268435455) to 2684 (268435455)
Displays MSB 4 digits for forward command. Displays ( − ) and MSB 3 digits for reverse command.
(Example) Command value 15600 →
Displays as 1560
Command value − 15600 →
Displays as − 156
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Current Position Monitor [d030]
The current position can be monitored during simple position control.
For details, refer to "Simple Position Control Function" on page 5-158.
Parameter
No.
Function name d030
Current Position
Monitor
Data
− 268 ( − 268435455) to 2684 (268435455)
Displays MSB 4 digits for forward position. Displays ( − ) and MSB 3 digits for reverse position.
(Example) Current position 1560000 →
Displays as 1560
Current position − 1560000 →
Displays as − 156
Default setting
−
5-9
Unit
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
User Selection Monitor (2 Types) [d050]
Desired two monitor items can be set and monitored by switching the item using the Increment/
Decrement keys.
Set the parameter numbers to be monitored in b160 and b161.
Example) To monitor d001, set "001" in b160/b161.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data d050 b160 b161
User Selection Monitor
(2 Types) d050 Monitor Target 1 d050 Monitor Target 2
The two items set in b160 and b161 are monitored.
001 to 030
Corresponding to d001 to d030.
*1.Fault Monitor parameters (d081 to d086) are excluded.
*1
Default setting
−
001
002
Unit
− dk0k5k0 5k0.0k0
Data of monitor target 1 set in b160
1k2.3
Data of monitor target 2 set in b161
When d001/d007 Frequency Setting Mode Selection (b163) is set to "01: Enabled," the output frequencies in d001 and d007 can be changed using the Increment/Decrement keys during operation. It cannot be changed if d001 and d007 are monitored using d050.
5
Inverter Mode Monitor [d060]
Displays the current Inverter mode.
The Inverter mode is changed using b171. For details, refer to "Inverter Mode Selection" on page 5-178.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name d060
Inverter Mode
Monitor
Data
I-C
IM (induction motor) heavy load mode
I-V
IM (induction motor) light load mode
H-I
IM (induction motor) high-frequency mode
− −
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-10
5-1 Monitor Mode
Fault Counter [d080]
Displays the number of times the Inverter has tripped.
This number is saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off.
Parameter
No.
Function name d080 Fault Counter
Data
0. to 9999.
1,000 to 6,553 (Displayed in increments of 10.)
Default setting
−
Unit
Time
5
Fault Monitors 1 to 6 [d081 to 086]
Displays the records of the last 6 errors. Error records are saved in the EEPROM when the power is turned off.
The record of the latest error is displayed under Fault Monitor 1 (d081).
(Display)
(1) Cause of trip (One of E01 to E83 is displayed.)
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor List" on page 6-35.
(2) Output frequency [Hz] at the time of tripping
(3) Output current [A] at the time of tripping
If the Inverter is currently stopped (E**.1), the monitor value may become zero.
(4) P-N DC voltage [V] in the main circuit at the time of tripping
If tripping occurs due to ground fault at power-on, the monitor value may become zero.
(5) Total Inverter RUN time [h] before the trip
(6) Total Inverter power ON time [h] before the trip dk0k8k1
(1) Trip factor (2) Frequency (3) Current (4) DC voltage (5) Total
RUN time ek0k7.2
6k0.0k0
4.0k0
4k0k0.2
1k5.
(6) Total
ON time
1k8.
_k_k_k_ is shown if no trip has occurred.
Warning Monitor [d090]
If the set data is inconsistent with other data, a warning is displayed.
While a warning is present, the Program LED (PRG) indicator remains lit until the data is corrected.
For details on the Warning display, refer to "Warning Display" on page 7-7.
5-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-1 Monitor Mode
DC Voltage Monitor [d102]
The Inverter P-N DC voltage (DC voltage between the Inverter terminals P/+2 and N/-) is displayed.
During operation, the monitor value changes depending on the actual DC voltage of the
Inverter.
Parameter
No.
d102
Function name
DC Voltage
Monitor
0.0 to 999.9/1000.
Data
Default setting
−
Unit
V
Regenerative Braking Load Rate Monitor [d103]
Displays a regenerative braking load rate. When the displayed value exceeds the value set in
Usage Rate of Regenerative Braking (b090), the Inverter trips because of "E06 (Braking resistor overload protection)".
Parameter
No.
d103
Function name
Regenerative Braking
Load Rate Monitor
Related functions
0.0 to 100.0
Data b090
Default setting
−
Unit
%
5
Electronic Thermal Load Rate Monitor [d104]
Displays an electronic thermal load rate. When the displayed value exceeds 100%, the Inverter trips because of "E05 (Overload protection)".
When the power is shut off, the displayed value changes to 0. Also when totaling does not occur for 10 minutes, the displayed value changes to 0.
Parameter
No.
d104
Function name
Electronic Thermal Load
Rate Monitor
0.0 to 100.0
Data
Default setting
−
Unit
%
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-12
5-2 Basic Functions
5-2 Basic Functions
The following explains the basic parameters such as RUN Command Selection and
Acceleration/Deceleration Time.
5
Heavy Load/Light Load Selection
The rated specification of the Inverter is selected from the two types: heavy load rating and light load rating.
The rated current is different between the heavy load rating and light load rating, and the electronic thermal characteristics, overload warning level and other items also vary accordingly. Select either type according to the load actually used.
When the setting of Heavy Load/Light Load Selection is changed, the parameters shown in the table below are reset to their default values and at the same time the heavy load/light load rating changes. There is no need to reconnect the power or perform initialization.
The high-frequency mode is supported only when the heavy load rating is selected. For the high-frequency mode, refer to "Inverter Mode Selection" on page 5-178.
Parameter
No.
Function name b049
Data
Heavy Load/Light
Load Selection
00: Heavy load mode (CT)
01: Light load mode (VT)
Default setting
00
Unit
−
5-13
The features of the heavy load mode and light load mode are described below.
Feature
Heavy load (CT)
A load that requires high torque under certain conditions such as at the start and during acceleration/ deceleration.
Application Lifts, cranes, conveyors, etc.
Rated current (example) 1.0 A (3-phase 200 V 0.1 kW)
Overload current rating 150% 60 s
Light load (VT)
A load that does not require much torque.
Fans, pumps, air-conditioners, etc.
1.2 A (3-phase 200 V 0.1 kW)
120% 60 s
The setting ranges and default values of the following parameters are different between the heavy load rating and light load rating. Take note that when the heavy load/light load setting is changed using b049, the default values of all these parameters other than H003/H203 will also change. (Even when the parameters shown in the table below are set to values within a range supported by both the heavy load mode and light load mode, these values will be reset to the default value once b049 is changed.)
Parameter
No.
A044/A244
Function name
Control Method
1/2
Heavy load (CT) Light load (VT)
Setting range Default value Setting range Default value
00: Constant torque
01: Reduced torque
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
00: Constant torque
00: Constant torque
01: Reduced torque
02: Free V/f setting
00: Constant torque
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Parameter
No.
A054
A057
A059 b022/b222 b025 b028 b083
H003/
H203
Function name
Heavy load (CT) Light load (VT)
Setting range Default value Setting range Default value
0 to 100[%] 50[%] 0 to 70[%] 50[%] DC Injection
Braking Power
Startup DC
Injection Braking
Power
DC Injection
Braking Carrier
Frequency
Overload Limit 1/
2 Level
Overload Limit 1
Level 2
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level
0.20 to 2.00
× Rated current
[A]
Carrier
Frequency
0 to 100[%]
2.0 to 15.0 [kHz]
0.20 to 2.00
× Rated current
[A]
2.0 to 15.0 [kHz]
0[%]
5.0 [kHz]
1.50
×
Rated current
[A]
Inverter rated current [A]
10.0 [kHz]
0 to 70[%]
2.0 to 10.0 [kHz] 2.0 [kHz]
0.10 to 1.50
× Rated current
[A]
0.10 to 1.50
× Rated current
[A]
0[%]
1.20 ×
Rated current
[A]
Inverter rated current [A]
2.0 to 10.0 [kHz] 2.0 [kHz]
Motor Capacity
1/2
0.1 to 18.5 [kW]
Capacity indicated by the type
0.1 to 18.5 [kW]
Capacity indicated by the type
Take note that the following parameters are not displayed in the light load mode:
Parameter
No.
d009 d010 d012 b040 b041 b042 b043 b044
Function name
Torque Reference Monitor
Torque Bias Monitor
Output Torque Monitor
Torque Limit Selection
Torque Limit 1
(Four-quadrant Mode Forward
Power Running)
Torque Limit 2
(Four-quadrant Mode Reversed
Regeneration)
Torque Limit 3
(Four-quadrant Mode Reversed
Power Running)
Torque Limit 4
(Four-quadrant Mode Forward
Regeneration) b045 b046
C054
C055
Overtorque Level
(Forward Power Running)
Parameter
No.
Function name
H005/H205 Speed Response 1/2
H020/H220 Motor 1/2 Parameter R1
H021/H221 Motor 1/2 Parameter R2
H022/H222 Motor 1/2 Parameter L
H023/H223
H024/H224
H030/H230
H031/H231
Motor 1/2 Parameter R1
(Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter R2
(Auto-tuning Data)
Torque LADSTOP Selection
Reverse Rotation Prevention
Selection
H032/H232
H033/H233
Overtorque/Undertorque Selection H034/H234
Motor 1/2 Parameter L
(Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter Io
(Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter J
(Auto-tuning Data)
P033
Motor 1/2 Parameter Io
Motor 1/2 Parameter J
Torque Reference Input Selection
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-14
5
5-2 Basic Functions
Parameter
No.
C056
C057
C058
C059
H001
Function name
Overtorque Level
(Reverse Regeneration)
Overtorque Level
(Reverse Power Running)
Overtorque Level
(Forward Regeneration)
Overtorque/Undertorque Signal
Output Mode Selection
Auto-tuning Selection
H002/H202
Motor Parameter 1/2
Parameter
No.
P034
Function name
Torque Reference Setting
P036
P037
P038
P039
P040
Torque Bias Mode
Torque Bias Value
Torque Bias Polarity Selection
Speed Limit Value in Torque
Control (forward)
Speed Limit Value in Torque
Control (reverse)
Take note that the following multi-function input terminals cannot be selected in the light load mode:
40: TL
41: TRQ1
Multi-function input terminals
Torque limit enabled/disabled
Torque limit switching 1
42: TRQ1
52: ATR
Multi-function output/relay terminals
07: OTQ
10: TRQ
Torque limit switching 2 −
Torque reference input permission −
Overtorque/undertorque
During torque limit
−
−
Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting
Select the method of the frequency reference.
Since multi-step speed operation (in which a combination pattern of input terminals is used to specify the speed) is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection (A001), A001 need not be set. Only when all multi-step speed inputs are OFF and therefore 0th is specified, the frequency conforms to the setting of A001.
5-15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A001
A201
F001
C001 to C007
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
Frequency
Reference
Selection 2
Output Frequency
Setting
*1
Multi-function Input
Selection
00 (Enabled when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.)
Data is set using the volume on the external
Digital Operator 3G3AX-OP01.
01
Data is set using the control circuit terminal
(analog input signal).
02
Data is set using the Digital Operator or
Remote Operator (set frequency: F001).
03
Data is set via Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU).
04
Data is set from optional board.
06
Data is set using a pulse train.
Refer to "Pulse Train Frequency Input" on page 5-82.
07
Do not set.
10
The operation result of the set frequency operation function is defined as a frequency reference.
Refer to "Frequency Operation Function" on page 5-70.
0.0, starting frequency to Maximum Frequency
1/2
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
02
6.00
−
−
%
−
*1.Only when Frequency Reference is selected to Digital Operator (A001/A201 = 02), the output frequency can be set using F001.
If only one frequency reference method is available, data is set using A001/A201 according to the above table.
If a frequency is set in F001, the same value is automatically set in Multi-step Speed 1
Reference 0 (A020) (F001 = A020). If Motor 2 Control is enabled (SET input = ON), the same value set in Multi-step Speed 2 Reference 0 is set (F001 = A220).
To switch between two frequency references by combining analog current/voltage switching based on frequency reference specification via analog input (A001/A201 = 01), and the Digital
Operator with volume 3G3AX-OP01, allocate the FV/FI terminal (16: FV/FI) to a multi-function input. The detailed setting method is explained below. (A005: FV/FI Selection)
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-16
5-2 Basic Functions
Specified by the Digital Operator
5
5-17
Parameter
No.
A001
Function name
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
Data
02: Specified by the Digital Operator
(Set by F001.)
Default setting
02
Unit
−
Switching between Analog Voltage and Analog Current via the FV/FI Terminal
V A
Parameter
No.
A001
A005
C001 to C007
Function name Data
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
01: Control circuit terminal block
FV/FI Selection 00: Switch between voltage/current
Multi-function
Input Selection
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
ON: Current
OFF: Voltage
Default setting
02
00
−
Unit
−
−
−
Switching between Analog Voltage and Volume via the FV/FI Terminal
V 0.0k0
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A001
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
01: Control circuit terminal block
A005
C001 to C007
FV/FI Selection
Multi-function
Input Selection
02: Switch between FV (voltage)/
Volume
*1
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
ON: Volume
*1
OFF: Voltage
*1.Volume: Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX-OP01.
Default setting
02
00
−
Unit
−
−
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Switching between Analog Current and VR via the FV/FI Terminal
A 0.0k0
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A001
A005
C001 to C007
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
01: Control circuit terminal block
FV/FI Selection 03: Switch between voltage/VR
*1
Multi-function
Input Selection
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
ON: Volume
*1
OFF: Current
*1.Volume: Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX-OP01.
Default setting
02
00
−
Unit
−
−
−
Either Analog Voltage or Analog Current is Used
To minimize the effect of noise, allocate the FV/FI terminal even when either analog voltage or current is used, and select either current or voltage by turning ON/OFF the terminal. If the FV/
FI terminal cannot be allocated, be sure to short the unused analog input terminal as shown below.
V A
5
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A001
C001 to C007
Wiring
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
01: Control circuit terminal block
Multi-function
Input Selection
−
(FV\FI not allocated)
Voltage: FV terminal is used, FI-SC shorted
Current: FI terminal is used, FV-SC shorted
Default setting
02
−
Unit
−
−
Specified by a Sum of Analog Voltage and Analog Current
V A
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A001
C001 to C007
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
Multi-function
Input Selection
01: Control circuit terminal block
−
(Need not be allocated)
Default setting
02
−
Unit
−
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-18
5
5-2 Basic Functions
Specified by Multi-step Speed
When a multi-step speed is allocated to a multi-function input and the input is turned ON, multistep speed operation is started regardless of the setting of A001. The frequency conforms to the applicable value set in A021 to A035. Only when all multi-step speed inputs are turned
OFF, or specifically in the case of "0th," the frequency conforms to the setting of A001.
V
Communication, etc.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
A001
Frequency
Reference
Selection 1
*1
*** 02
C001 to C007
A020 to A220
A021 to A035
Multi-function
Input Selection
Multi-step Speed
1/2
Reference 0
Multi-step Speed
Reference 1 to 15
02 to 05
Binary 15 Speed (CF1 to CF4)
Data is selected by A019.
32 to 38
Bit 7 Speed (SF1 to SF7)
Data is selected by A019.
Random
Random
−
6.00
0.00
*1.Only when the speed is 0th the frequency reference conforms to the setting of A001.
Unit
−
−
Hz
Hz
5-19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Forced Digital Operator Function/Forced Terminal Block Function is Used
Besides using Frequency Reference Selection (A001), the RUN command and frequency reference can be changed forcibly using an input terminal.
An overview is given below. For details, refer to "Forced Operator Function (OPE)" on page 5-
85 and "Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM)" on page 5-85.
Switching between the Digital Operator and Other (Analog Input/Communication, etc.)
When the forced Digital Operator function (31: OPE) is allocated to a multi-function input and the input is turned ON, the command and reference from a Digital Operator become effective regardless of the setting of A001. Take note that not only the frequency reference, but also the
RUN command conforms to the Digital Operator.
V
Communication, etc.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
31: OPE (Forced operator)
ON: Digital Operator
OFF: According to A001
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Switching between Analog Input and Other (Digital Operator/Communication, etc.)
When the Forced terminal block (51: F-TM) is allocated to a multi-function input and the input is turned
ON, the command and reference from the control circuit terminal block (analog input) become effective regardless the setting of A001. Take note that not only the frequency reference, but also the RUN command conforms to the control circuit terminal block.
In the terminal block mode, the analog current/voltage selection conforms to A005 and the FV/FI terminal status. When the Volume VR mode is selected (A005 = 02, 03 and the FV/FI terminal turned
ON), however, the input command/reference effective when the FV/FI terminal is OFF are used.
V
5
Communication, etc.
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
ON: Control circuit terminal block
OFF: According to A001
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Reference
If the forced operator terminal and forced terminal block terminal are both turned ON, the forced operator function is given priority.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-20
5
5-2 Basic Functions
A relation diagram for frequency reference selection is as follows:
Multi-step Speed
Reference A021-A035
Multi-step speed input
CF1-4,SF1-7
ON
Set frequency
OFF
Analog voltage input[FV]
Analog current input[FI]
External Digital
Operator
[volume]
[FV]+[FI]
+
[FV/FI] terminal [FV/FI] selection
OFF
A005
00
ON
02
03
[FV/FI] terminal allocation
None
Yes
OFF
ON
OFF
Digital Operator
A020/A220=F001
*1
ON
Forced Operator
ON
OFF
Modbus communication
Optional board
Pulse train input
[RP]
(Others)
Frequency Reference
Selection A001/A201
01
02
00
03
04
06
07
10
Forced terminal block
ON
OFF
Operation
Frequency
Selection 1
A141
Operation
Frequency
Selection 2
A142
Operation
Function
Operator
Selection
A143
(+)
(-)
(×)
Frequency operation function
*1. If the frequency reference source is a Digital Operator, the frequency can be set using F001. If the frequency reference source is not a Digital Operator, F001 shows a monitored value of the specified frequency. If Frequency Change is enabled (b163 = 01) during monitoring, the frequency can be changed by pressing the Up/Down keys on the d001 or d007 monitor display.
5-21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
RUN Command Selection
Select the method for using the RUN/STOP command.
To issue a RUN command from the Control Circuit Terminal Block (A002/A202 = 01), allocate the FW and RV terminals or STA, STP and F/R terminals (3-wire input) to multi-function input terminals.
To switch the NO/NC contact logic of each terminal, set the corresponding terminal using C011 to C017.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A002
A202
C001 to C007
RUN Command
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 2
Multi-function
Input Selection
01: Run/stop from the control circuit terminal block
02: Run/stop from the Digital Operator or Remote Operator
03: Run/stop via Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU)
04: Run/stop from optional board
00: FW (Forward)
01: RV (Reverse)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
02
−
−
−
Note : If the Forced operator (31: OPE) or Forced terminal block (51: F-TM) is allocated to a multi-function input, turning ON the terminal disables the settings of A001 and A002 and the frequency reference/
RUN command source specified by each terminal becomes effective.
The table below lists the forward/reverse/stop methods corresponding to different settings of
RUN Command selection.
RUN Command Selection
Terminal
Block
(A002=01)
FW/RV Terminal
3-wire
Forward
FW terminal ON
(level)
STA terminal ON
(edge)
F/R terminal OFF
(level)
RUN key
F004 = 00
Reverse
RV terminal ON
(level)
STA terminal ON
(edge)
F/R terminal ON
(level)
RUN key
F004 = 01
Stop
FW/RV terminals both OFF (level)
STP terminal ON
(edge)
(NC contact)
Digital
Operator
(A002=02)
Digital Operator
LCD Digital
Operator
Modbus communications
(A002 = 03)
Optional board (A002 = 04)
FWD RUN key
Forward command
REV RUN key
Reverse command
STOP key
STOP key
Stop command
Operation stops when the FW terminal and RV terminal are both turned ON.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-22
5-2 Basic Functions
An overview of run/stop operations using the FW/RV terminals is shown below.
Output frequency
Forward direction
Reverse direction
RUN lamp
Forward command
FW input
Reverse command
RV input
ON
ON
OFF
Output frequency setting
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Time
5
RUN Direction Selection
Select the rotation direction to be applied when a RUN command is input from the Digital
Operator or external Digital Operator.
Becomes invalid when any RUN command issued from the control circuit terminal block or
Remote Operator.
Parameter
No.
Function name
F004
RUN Direction
Selection
Data
00: Forward operation
01: Reverse operation
Default setting
00
Unit
−
Rotation Direction Limit Selection
Limits motor rotation directions.
Enabled in either "control circuit terminal block" or "Digital Operator" control mode.
When a limited RUN command is input from the control circuit terminal block, the Digital
Operator displays
OkOkOkO
.
Parameter
No.
Function name b035
Data
Rotation Direction
Limit Selection
00: No direction limit
01: Only Forward is enabled
(No Reverse)
02: Only Reverse is enabled
(No Forward)
Default setting
Unit
00 −
5-23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Stop Selection
It is possible to select deceleration stop or free-run stop according to the set deceleration time, when a stop command is issued.
If operation is resumed during free-run operation, the Inverter will restart according to the method set in Free-run Stop Selection (b088). For details, refer to "Deceleration Stop at Poweroff (Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function)" on page 5-106.
Parameter
No.
Function name b091 Stop Selection
Data
00: Deceleration stop
01: Free-run stop
Default setting
00
Unit
−
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Set an acceleration/deceleration time for the motor.
The set time indicates the acceleration/deceleration time from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency.
When the LAD (acceleration/deceleration) cancel (LAC) function is selected for a multifunction input selection and the signal is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration time changes to the minimum acceleration/deceleration time (0.01 s) and the output frequency instantaneously follows the set frequency.
You can also divide the acceleration/deceleration in two steps. For details, refer to "2-step
Acceleration/Deceleration Function (2CH)" on page 5-66.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
F002/F202
F003/F203
P031
Acceleration Time Setting
1/2
Deceleration Time
Setting 1/2
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Input Type
0.01 to 3600.
Set the acceleration time from 0 to the maximum frequency.
0.01 to 3600.
Set the deceleration time from the maximum frequency to 0.
00: Digital Operator
03: Do not set.
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
C001 to C007
Multi-function Input
Selection
Related functions
10.00
(30.00)
10.00
(30.00)
A004/A204, P031, C001 to C007
00
− s s
−
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-24
5
5-2 Basic Functions
Take note that, as shown in the figure, the actual acceleration/deceleration time becomes shorter than the set acceleration/deceleration time depending on the set values of maximum frequency, output frequency and starting frequency.
Output frequency
Maximum
Frequency
A004/A204
Output Frequency
Setting (F001) When the LAC input is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration time becomes 0.01 s.
Output frequency
Starting
Frequency b082
FW input
Real acceleration time
Real deceleration time
Time
LAC input
F002/F202 F003/F203
RUN command
FW input
No matter how shot the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual acceleration/ deceleration time cannot be shorter than the minimum acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical inertia J and the motor torque. If you set a time shorter than the minimum acceleration/deceleration time, an overcurrent (OC) or overvoltage (OV) trip may occur.
The calculations of the minimum acceleration/deceleration time are as follows. Use as a reference.
Acceleration time T
S t
S
=
( J
L
+ J
M
)
9.55
×
(
×
T
S
−
N
M
T
L
)
Deceleration time T
B
T
B
=
( J
L
+ J
M
)
9.55
×
(
×
N
M
T
B
+ T
L
)
J
L
J
M
: Motor-shaft converted load J (kg
• m 2 )
: Motor load J (kg
• m 2 )
N
M
: Motor rotation speed (r/min)
T
S
: Maximum acceleration torque based on inverter drive (N
• m)
T
B
: Maximum deceleration torque based on inverter drive (N
• m)
T
L
: Required running torque (N
• m)
5-25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Base Frequency
Adjust the base frequency to the motor specification.
If you apply a base frequency of over 60 Hz, a special motor is required. This may require the
Inverter to increase its capacity to accommodate a different applicable motor.
Set the motor incoming voltage selection according to the motor specifications.
This function is disabled if the control method is Free V/f Setting (A044/A244 = 02). (Refer to
"Free V/f Setting" on page 5-47.)
Take note that if a base frequency below 50 Hz is set, the motor may burn out.
If a motor voltage exceeding the motor specification is selected, the motor may burn out.
Parameter
No.
A003/A203
Function name
Base Frequency 1/2
A082/A282
Motor Incoming
Voltage Selection 1/2
Related functions
Data
30.0 to Maximum Frequency 1/2 [Hz]
200V class: 200/215/220/230/240
400V class: 380/400/415/440/460/
480
A081, A082
Default setting
60.0
(1000.0)
200
400
Output voltage
Motor incoming voltage selection A082/A282
Unit
Hz
V
5
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-26
5-2 Basic Functions
5
AVR Function
This function outputs voltage to the motor correctly even if the incoming voltage to the Inverter fluctuates.
The output voltage to the motor is based on the voltage selected by motor incoming voltage selection. Note, however, that a voltage exceeding the incoming voltage cannot be output.
AVR Filter Time Parameter/Voltage Gain During Deceleration
During deceleration, the motor functions as a generator and the generated energy is returned to the Inverter. As a result, the Inverter's DC voltage rises and if it exceeds the overvoltage level, an overvoltage (OV) trip occurs. Setting a higher output voltage increases the motor loss and energy consumptions, and consequently shortens the deceleration time. (However, the motor load increases.)
To shorten the deceleration time without causing an overvoltage trip, select OFF for AVR selection during deceleration for or tune the voltage characteristics using the AVR filter time parameter and voltage gain during deceleration.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A081/A281
A082/A282
A083
A084
AVR Selection 1/2
Motor Incoming Voltage
Selection 1/2
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
*1
200V class: 200/215/220/230/240
400V class: 380/400/415/440/460/
480
0.000 to 10.00
AVR Filter Time
Parameter
AVR Deceleration
Voltage Gain
50. to 200.
02
200
400
0.300
100.
−
V s
%
*1.The deceleration time can be shortened by increasing the motor loss during deceleration and thereby reducing the regenerated energy returned to the Inverter. If the location of AC incoming voltage is away from the location of motor incoming voltage, however, an overcurrent trip may occur during deceleration. In this case, make adjustment by, for example, selecting "Always ON" for AVR Selection.
Output voltage
Motor incoming voltage selection
AC incoming voltage
Output voltage
AVR Filter Time Parameter (A083) = 0
AVR Deceleration
Voltage Gain (A084)
Large
Small
Output voltage when the
AVR selection is ON
Motor incoming voltage selection
(A082/A282)
Time (s) Start deceleration
Time (s)
Example of setting the AVR Selection OFF during deceleration (A081 = 02)
5-27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-2 Basic Functions
Maximum Frequency
Set the maximum value of motor frequency to be used.
The set value corresponds to the maximum value of external analog input (such as 10 V in the range from is 0 to 10 V). For details, refer to "External Frequency Start/End" on page 5-40.
The Inverter output voltage from the base frequency to the maximum frequency is the voltage selected by Motor Incoming Voltage Selection (A082/A282).
This function is disabled if the control method is Free V/f Setting (A044/A244 = 02). (Refer to
"Free V/f Setting" on page 5-47.)
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A004/A204 Maximum Frequency 1/2
Base Frequency 1/2 to 400.0
(1000.)
Note: Data in ( ) indicates the value when the high-frequency mode is selected.
Default setting
60.0
(1000.0)
Unit
Hz
Output voltage
Motor voltage selection
(100%)
5
Base frequency Maximum frequency
Reference
All parameters whose function code is 2XX apply to Motor 2 (Motor 2 Control).
Switch between Motor 1 and Motor 2 using the input terminal allocated to 08 (SET).
Example) A020: Frequency of Motor 1 at Multi-step Speed 1 Reference 0
A220: Frequency of Motor 2 at Multi-step Speed 2 Reference 0
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-28
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
The following explains the Inverter's input/output signals.
5
Multi-function Input Selection
The following functions can be allocated to any of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7/EB to operate each function that has been set.
Terminals S1 to S7/EB correspond to C001 to C007.
You can select NO- or NC-contact input for each multi-function input.
The same function cannot be allocated to multiple multi-function input terminals. If the same function was allocated to multiple functions by mistake, the terminal to which the function was allocated last becomes effective. no is allocated to all terminals to which the function was allocated earlier, and their functions are disabled.
After allocating functions to terminals S1 to S7/EB, make sure that the function settings have been stored.
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
13
14
15
16
18
09
11
12
Data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
19
Description Reference item Page
FW: Forward
RV: Reverse
CF1: Multi-step speed 1
CF2: Multi-step speed 2
CF3: Multi-step speed 3
RUN Command Selection
Multi-step Speed Operation
Function (Binary)
CF4: Multi-step speed 4
JG: Jogging Jogging Operation
DB: External DC injection braking External DC Injection Braking
SET: Motor 2 Control
2CH: 2-step acceleration/ deceleration
Motor 2 Control Function
2-step Acceleration/deceleration
Function
FRS: Free-run stop
EXT: External trip
USP: USP function
CS: Commercial switch
SFT: Soft lock
FV/FI: Analog input switch
RS: Reset
TH: PTC thermistor thermal protection
Free-run Stop
External Trip
Power Recovery Restart
Prevention Function
Commercial Switching
Soft Lock
Analog Input
Reset
Thermistor Trip Function
5-22
5-64
5-59
5-135
5-54
5-66
5-103
5-120
5-105
5-79
5-84
5-37
5-100
5-120
5-29 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
28
34
35
36
37
38
29
31
32
33
39
46
47
50
51
40
41
42
44
52
59
60
61
62
65
53
56
57
58
Data
20
21
22
23
24
27
Description Reference item Page
STA: 3-wire start
STP: 3-wire stop
F/R: 3-wire forward/reverse
PID: PID disabled
PIDC: PID integral reset
UP: UP/DWN function accelerated
DWN: UP/DWN function decelerated
UDC: UP/DWN function data clear
OPE: Forced operator
SF1: Multi-step speed bit 1
SF2: Multi-step speed bit 2
SF3; Multi-step speed bit 3
SF4: Multi-step speed bit 4
SF5: Multi-step speed bit 5
SF6: Multi-step speed bit 6
SF7: Multi-step speed bit 7
OLR: Overload limit switching
3-wire Input Function
PID Function
Remote Operation Function
Forced Digital Operator Function 5-85
Multi-step Speed Operation
Function (Bit)
Overload Limit/Overload
Warning
5-56
5-73
5-71
5-65
5-114
TL: Torque limit enabled/disabled
TRQ1: Torque limit switching 1
TRQ2: Torque limit switching 2
BOK: Brake confirmation
LAC: LAD cancel
PCLR: Position deviation clear
ADD: Frequency addition
F-TM: Forced terminal block
ATR: Torque reference input permission
KHC: Integrated power clear
Torque Limit Function
Brake Control Function
Acceleration/Deceleration
Function
5-153
5-142
5-24
Simple Position Control Function 5-158
Frequency Addition Function 5-71
Forced Terminal Block Function 5-85
Torque Control
Integrated Power Monitor
5-156
5-7
Reserved.
AHD: Analog command held
−
Analog Command Hold Function
−
5-39
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-30
5
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
85
86 no
Data
66
67
68
69
70
73
77
78
81
82
83
84
Description Reference item Page
CP1: Position command selection
1
CP2: Position command selection
2
CP3: Position command selection
3
ORL: Zero return limit signal
ORG: Zero return startup signal
SPD: Speed/position switching
GS1: GS1 input (C003 only)
GS2: GS2 input (C004 only)
485: Start co-inverter communication
Reserved.
HLD: Retain output frequency
Simple Position Control Mode
Safety Function
Inverter-to-Inverter
Communication
−
Acceleration/Deceleration Hold
Function
ROK: Permission of RUN command
EB: Rotation direction detection
(C007 only)
DISP: Display fixed
No: Not assigned
RUN Permission Signal
Simple Position Control Function 5-158
Fixed Display
−
5-158
5-170
6-22
−
5-62
5-63
5-91
−
Multi-function Input Operation Selection
NO or NC contact can be selected individually for each of multi-function input terminals S1 to
S7/EB.
A terminal with reset (RS) setting functions as NO contact only.
Parameter
No.
C011 to C017
Function name Data
Multi-function Input
Terminal Operation
Selection
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
Default setting
00
Unit
−
C011 to C017 set values
00
(NO contact)
01
(NC contact)
Status Actual input signal status
Normal OFF (Open = No conduction)
Operating ON (Closed = Conduction)
Normal ON (Closed = Conduction)
Operating OFF (Open = No conduction)
Input signal status as recognized by the
Inverter
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
5-31 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Input Terminal Response Time
A sampling time can be set individually for each of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7/EB.
Helps remove chattering and other noises. If the terminal input becomes unstable because of chattering, etc. increase the data value.
The larger the data value is, the slower the response time. A setting range of 0 to 200 is available, which corresponds to approx. 2 to 400 ms.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C160 to C166
Input Terminal
Response Time
0. to 200. ( × 2 ms)
Approx. 2 to 400 ms
1.
ms
Note. The response time is ignored upon power ON or reset. For example, if the power is turned on while the FW terminal is still ON, operation resumes immediately regardless of the set value of response time.
Multi-function Output Terminal Selection
The following functions can be allocated to Multi-function Output Terminal P1/EDM to P2
Selections (C021 to C022) and Multi-function Relay Output (MA, MB) Function Selection
(C026). Multi-function output terminals P1/EDM, P2 are open-collector output, while multifunction relay output terminal MA, MB are relay output.
NO or NC contact can be selected individually for each output terminal using C031, C032 or
C036.
Reference item
Signal During RUN
Frequency Arrival Signal
Page
5-121
09
19
20
21
22
23
10
11
12
13
03
04
05
06
07
Data
00
01
02
Description
RUN: During RUN
FA1: Constant speed reached
FA2: Set frequency min. reached
OL: Overload warning
OD: PID excessive deviation
AL: Alarm output
FA3: Set frequency only
OTQ: Overtorque/Undertorque
UV: Signal during undervoltage
TRQ: During torque limit
RNT: RUN time over
ONT: Power on time over
THM: Thermal warning
BRK: Brake release
BER: Brake error
ZS: 0Hz
DSE: Excessive speed deviation
POK: Position ready
Overload Limit/Overload Warning
PID Function
Alarm Signal
Frequency Arrival Signal
5-115
5-73
5-119
5-122
Overtorque/undertorque 5-152
Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption/
Undervoltage, Overvoltage/Overcurrent
5-96
Torque Limit Function
RUN/Power ON Time Exceeded
5-153
5-124
Electronic Thermal Function
Brake Control Function
0-Hz Signal (ZS)
Simple Position Control Mode
5-122
5-113
5-142
5-125
5-160
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-32
5
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Data
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
40
41
42
43
33
34
35
39
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
Description
FA4: Set frequency min. reached 2
FA5: Set frequency only 2
OL2: Overload warning 2
FVdc: Analog FV disconnection detection
FIdc: Analog FI disconnection detection
FBV: PID FB status output
NDc: Communication disconnection detection
Frequency Arrival Signal
Overload Limit/Overload Warning
Window Comparator Function
PID Function
RS485
−
Reference item
LOG1: Logic operation output 1
LOG2: Logic operation output 2
Logic Operation Function
LOG3: Logic operation output 3
WAC: Capacitor life warning Capacitor Life Warning Signal
WAF: Cooling fan life warning signal WAF: Cooling Fan Life Warning Signal
FR: Starting contact signal
OHF: Fin overheat warning
LOC: Low current signal
Reserved.
IRDY: Operation ready
FWR: During forward operation
RVR: During reverse operation
MJA: Fatal fault signal
Starting Contact Signal
Cooling Fin Overheat Warning
Low Current Signal
Operation Ready Signal
Signal During Forward Operation
Signal During Reverse Operation
Fatal Fault Signal
54
55
58
WCFV: Window comparator FV
WCFI: Window comparator FI
Window Comparator Function
FREF: Frequency command source Frequency Reference Selection Status
Signal
59
60
62
63
REF: RUN command source
SETM: Motor 2 selection
EDM: Safety device monitor
OPO: Optional board
255 no: Not assigned
RUN Command Status Signal
Motor 2 Control Selected Signal
Safety Function
−
−
Page
5-122
5-115
5-132
5-73
5-128
5-125
−
5-130
5-130
5-131
5-131
5-132
5-133
5-133
5-134
5-170
−
−
5-126
5-127
5-128
5-129
5-129
5-33 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection
Whether to apply the NO or NC contact output specification can be set individually for each of multi-function output terminals P1/EDM, P2 and multi-function relay output terminal MA, MB.
Multi-function output terminals P1/EDM, P2 are open-collector output, while multi-function relay output terminal MA, MB are relay output.
Parameter
No.
Default setting
Unit
C031
C032
C036
Function name Data
Multi-function Output
Terminal P1/EDM
Contact Selection
Multi-function Output
Terminal P2 Contact
Selection
00: NO (NO contact) at P1, P2, MA,
NC (NC contact) at MB
01: NC (NC contact) at P1, P2, MA,
NO (NO contact) at MB
Multi-function Relay
Output (MA, MB)
Contact Selection
00: NO (NO contact) at P1, P2, MA,
NC (NC contact) at MB
01: NC (NC contact) at P1, P2, MA,
NO (NO contact) at MB
00
01
−
−
C031 to C032 set values
00
(NO contact)
01
(NC contact)
Power supply
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Inverter status
Normal
Operating (Error)
−
Normal
Operating (Error)
−
Output signal status
OFF (No conduction)
ON (Conduction)
Indeterminable
ON (Conduction)
OFF (No conduction)
Indeterminable
5
Specifications of Multi-function Output Terminals P1/EDM to P2
Below are the specifications of multi-function output terminals P1/EDM and P2.
PC P2 P1
Inverter interior
Electrical characteristics
Between each terminal and PC
Voltage drop 4 V max. at power-on
Max. allowable voltage: 27 VDC
Allowable max. current: 50 mA
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-34
5
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Specification of Multi-function Relay Output Terminals
Multi-function relay output terminals has a SPDT contact specification. Below is the operation.
MC MA MB
Inverter interior
Example of use as an alarm
C036
Set value
Power supply
00
01
(Default value)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Inverter status
Abnormal
Normal
−
Abnormal
Normal
−
Output terminal status
MA-MC MB-MC
Closed Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
MA-MC
MB-MC
Max. contact capacity
Min. contact capacity
Max. contact capacity
Min. contact capacity
Resistance load
250 VAC, 2 A
30 VDC, 3 A
Inductive load
250 VAC, 0.2 A
30 VDC, 0.6 A
100 VAC, 10 mA
5 VDC, 100 mA
250 VAC, 1 A
30 VDC, 1 A
250 VAC, 0.2 A
30 VDC, 0.2 A
100 VAC, 10 mA
5 VDC, 100 mA
5-35 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-3 Input/Output Terminals
Output Signal Delay/Hold Function
ON delay/OFF delay times can be set for each output terminal.
All output signals immediately turn ON/OFF when the specified conditions are satisfied.
Depending on the selected signal, chattering may occur. In such a case, use this function to hold or delay the signal.
Set the output terminals (a total of three terminals corresponding to multi-function outputs P1/
EDM and P2 and multi-function relay outputs MA, MB and MC) one by one. For the output terminals and the corresponding parameters, refer to the table below.
Output terminal
P1/EDM
P2
Relays (MA, MB, MC)
ON delay time
C130
C132
C140
OFF delay time
C131
C133
C141
Parameter No.
C130/C132
C131/C133
C140
C141
Function name
Output P1/EDM ON
Delay Time
Output P1/EDM OFF
Delay Time
Output RY ON Delay
Time
Output RY OFF Delay
Time
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
Data
Default setting
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
s s
Unit s s
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-36
5-4 Analog Signal
5-4 Analog Signal
The following explains the Inverter's analog input/output signals.
5
Analog Input (FV, FI)
The Inverter has 2 types of external analog input terminals.
FV-SC terminal: 0 to 10 V
Variable Resistor (volumes) inputs are also recognized as voltage inputs in the context of
Inverter signals.
FI-SC terminal: 0 to 20 mA
If the current is 4 to 20 mA, set A103 to 20%.
The following functions can be allocated to analog input signals. The required settings are as follows.
Parameter
No.
Setting item Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A001
A071
A076
A071
A079 b040
P033
C001 to
C007
Frequency
Reference
Selection
*1
PID Feedback
*2
PID Feedforward
Selection *3
Torque Limit
Selection *4
Torque Control
Frequency
Reference Selection
1
01: Control circuit terminal block
PID Selection
PID Feedback
Selection
PID Selection
PID Feedforward
Selection
Torque Limit
Selection
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
00: Current (FI)
01: Voltage (FV)
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
01: FV (voltage)
02: FI (current)
02: Analog voltage input
Torque Reference
Input Selection
Multi-function Input
Selection
00: Terminal FV
10 V = 200%
01: Terminal FI
20 mA = 200%
52: ATR
(Torque reference input permission)
02
00
00
00
00
00
00
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
*1.Switch among the volume, current and voltage using FV/FI Selection (A005). Volume (VR) on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX-OP01.
*2.If Frequency Reference is set to Control circuit terminal block (A001 = 01) and PID Selection (A071) is enabled, PID is given priority and the analog input specified by A076 is allocated for PID feedback.
Regardless of A005 or the FV/FI terminal status, the analog input not selected by A076 is allocated to
Frequency Reference.
*3.Even when the specified analog input is overlapping with the target value or feedback value, the setting of A079 is applied as is.
*4.Only the analog voltage 10 V = 200% of the torque limit value. The FV/FI terminal is not allocated.
5-37 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-4 Analog Signal
If an analog input is used for the frequency reference, current/voltage switch is performed as follows.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A005 FV/FI Selection
00
Use the FV/FI terminal to switch between
FV (voltage) and FI (current).
FV/FI terminal ON: Current
FV/FI terminal OFF: Voltage
02
Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.
Use the FV/FI terminal to switch between
FV (voltage) and volume.
FV/FI terminal ON: Volume
FV/FI terminal OFF: Voltage
03
Enabled only when 3G3AX-OP01 is used.
Use the FV/FI terminal to switch between
FI (current) and volume.
FV/FI terminal ON: Volume
FV/FI terminal OFF: Current
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
00 −
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
− −
Note: For details, refer to "Frequency Reference Selection and Output Frequency Setting" on page 5-15.
5
Analog Input Filter (FV, FI Sampling)
Helps remove noise in the frequency setting circuit.
If the frequency reference is specified using an external analog signal, a sampling time can be set for voltage input or current input.
Set a larger data value if stable operation cannot be secured because of noise.
The larger the data value is, the slower the response time. This parameter specifies a filter time constant for a set value of 1 to 30 ( × 2 ms).
When data "31" is selected, a filter time parameter of 500 ms and a hysteresis of ± 0.1 Hz are set.
Parameter
No.
A016
Function name
Analog Input Filter
(FV, FI Sampling)
Data
1. to 30.: Set value × 2 ms filter
31.: Fixed to 500 ms filter
With ± 0.1 Hz hysteresis
Default setting
8
Unit
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-38
5-4 Analog Signal
5
Analog Command Held Function (AHD)
While the AHD terminal is turned on, the Inverter keeps external analog input results on hold.
While the AHD terminal is turned ON, the UP/DWN function can be used based on the reference value of the analog signal kept on hold by this function. If UP/DWN Storage Selection
(C101) is set to "01", the Inverter can store an UP/DWN result.
If the power is turned on with the AHD terminal turned on, or if the Reset (18: RS) terminal is turned on and then off, the Inverter employs the data kept on hold immediately before.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
Data
65: AHD (Analog command held)
C101
Default setting
−
Unit
−
AHD input ON
Analog input value
Frequency reference
If the control function is switched via the SET terminal with the AHD terminal turned ON, the set frequency is retained. To switch the control function, turn OFF the AHD terminal once, and keep the analog signal on hold again.
If this function is frequently used, the internal EEROM element service life may be shortened.
5-39 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-4 Analog Signal
Analog Input Adjustment
The analog input gain can be changed. Use this function to fine-tune analog input signals.
Use "External Frequency Start/End" on page 5-40 to set for scale conversion from 0 to 10 V, to 0 to 5 V, for example.
Parameter
No.
C081
C082
Function name
FV Adjustment
FI Adjustment
Data
0. to 200.0
The gain of input voltage is fine-tuned.
0. to 200.0
The gain of input current is fine-tuned.
Default setting
100.
100.
Unit
%
%
Frequency settings
Maximum frequency
200 %
100 %
50 %
0
0 V, 4 mA 5 V, 12 mA 10 V, 20 mA
5
External Frequency Start/End
External Analog Input (Frequency Reference)
FV-SC terminal : 0 to 10 V
FI-SC terminal : 4 to 20 mA
VR : Volume on the external Digital Operator 3G3AX-OP01.
Parameter
No.
A011/A101/
A161
A012/A102/
A162
A013/A103/
A163
A014/A104/
A164
Function name
FV/FI/VR
Start Frequency
FV/FI/VR
End Frequency
FV/FI/VR Start
Ratio
FV/FI/VR End
Ratio
Data
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
Set a start frequency.
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
Set an end frequency.
0. to FV/FI/VR end ratio
Set a start ratio relative to an external frequency reference of 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA.
FV/FI/VR start ratio to 100.
Set an end ratio relative to an external frequency reference of 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA.
00: Start Frequency (A011/A101/A161)
(For the output frequencies from 0% to
A013/A103/A163, the values of A011/A101/
A161 are output.)
Default setting
0.00
0.00
0.
100.
Unit
Hz
Hz
%
%
A015/A105/
A165
FV/FI/VR Start
Selection
01 −
01: 0 Hz
(For the output frequencies from 0% to
A013/A103/A163, 0 Hz is output.)
Note 1: To input current between 4 and 20 mA, set A103 to 20%. (Default value: 20% = 20 mA × 20% = 4 mA)
Note 2: To input voltage between 0 and 5 V, set A014 to 50%.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-40
5
5-4 Analog Signal
Example 1) A015/A105 = 00 (External Start Frequency)
Maximum frequency
A012/A102/A162
A011/A101/A161
0 % or greater
The output frequencies of
A013/A103/A163 correspond to A011/A101/A161.
0 A013/
A103/
A163
(0 V)
(0 mA)
(VR minimum)
A014/
A104/
A164
100 % Analog input
(FV/FI)
(10 V)
(20 mA)
(VR maximum)
Example 2) A015/A105 = 01 (0 Hz)
Maximum frequency
A012/A102/A162
A011/A101/A161
0 % or greater
The output frequencies of
A013/A103/A163 are 0 Hz.
0 A013/
A103/
A163
(0 V)
(0 mA)
(VR minimum)
A014/
A104/
A164
100 % Analog input
(FV/FI)
(10 V)
(20 mA)
(VR maximum)
5-41 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-4 Analog Signal
MP Terminal (Pulse/PWM Output)
The MP terminal is a 10 VDC pulse output or PWM output.
The output frequency and output current can be monitored using the MP terminal on the control circuit terminal block.
MP Selection
Select a signal to output from the following table.
If pulse output 03, 08 or 15 is selected, use the digital frequency counter. For other output signals, use the analog meter.
Parameter
No.
Data Description
PWM/ pulse Full-scale value
C027
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Output frequency
Output current
Output torque
*2
Digital output frequency
*3
Output voltage
Input power
Electronic thermal load rate
LAD frequency
*1
*1
Digital current monitor
PWM
PWM
PWM
Pulse
PWM
PWM
PWM
PWM
Pulse
0 to maximum frequency [Hz]
0 to 200%
0 to 200%
0 to maximum frequency [Hz]
0 to 133%
(Example: 7.5 V at 200 V for a 200 V class)
0 to 200%
0 to 100%
0 to maximum frequency [Hz]
Refer to "MP Gain Setting" on page 5-
43.
10
12
15
Cooling fin temperature
Do not set.
Pulse train input monitor
PWM
−
Pulse
0 to 200 ° C (0 ° C output at 0 ° C or lower)
−
Refer to "MP Gain Setting" on page 5-
43.
− 16 Optional board −
*1."07: LAD frequency" is the frequency reference issued by the Inverter and corresponds to Output
Frequency Monitor (d001)."00: Output frequency" is the value that is calculated reflecting vector control compensation and stabilization control under sensorless vector control, etc.
*2.This setting is effective only when the control method is Sensorless Vector Control (A044/A244 = 03).
*3.If Frequency Conversion Coefficient (b086) is set, a gain-converted value is output for the digital output frequency. Refer to "Output Frequency Monitor [d001]" on page 5-1.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-42
5
5-4 Analog Signal
MP Gain Setting
The output gain can be set using C105 only when the PWM output target is selected by C027.
The output pulse can be set to C030 only when the digital current monitor is selected by C027.
(C030 value = 1,440 Hz)
The output pulse can be set to C047 only when the pulse train input monitor is selected by
C027. (Output = Input × C047)
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C105
C030
C047
MP Gain Setting
Digital Current
Monitor Reference
Value
50. to 200.
Set a gain for the MP monitor.
0.2 × Rated current to 2.0 × Rated current
(Set a current value at 1440 Hz output.)
Pulse Train Output
Coefficient
0.01 to 99.99
Output pulse frequency = Input pulse frequency × (C047)
100.
Rated current
1.00
%
A
−
Example 1) PWM output Example 2) Pulse output
T t
Cycle T: Constant (6.4 ms)
Duty t/T : Variable
T t
Cycle T: Variable
Duty t/T : Fixed to
1
2
5-43 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-4 Analog Signal
AM Terminal (Analog Output)
The AM terminal provides 0 to 10 VDC analog output.
The output frequency and output current can be monitored using the AM terminal on the control circuit terminal block.
AM Selection
Select a signal to output from the following.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Data Description Full-scale value
00
01
02
Output frequency
*1
Output current
Output torque
*3
Output voltage
0 to maximum frequency [Hz]
0 to 200%
0 to 200%
*2
04
0 to 133% (Example: 7.5 V at 200 V for a 200V class)
0 to 200%
C028
AM selection
05
06
07
10
Input power
Electronic thermal load rate 0 to 100%
LAD frequency
*1
0 to maximum frequency [Hz]
Cooling fin temperature
Output torque (signed)
*3
0 to 200 ° C (0 ° C output at 0 ° C or lower)
0 to 200%
*4
11
13
16
Do not set.
Optional board
−
−
*1."07: LAD frequency" is the frequency reference issued by the Inverter and corresponds to Output
Frequency Monitor (d001).
"00: Output frequency" is the value that is calculated reflecting vector control compensation and stabilization control under sensorless vector control, etc.
*2.During Simple Position Control (P003 = 01), the real frequency (detected frequency) is displayed.
*3.This setting is effective only when the control method is Sensorless Vector Control (A044/A244 = 03).
*4.Below are the specifications of the output torque (signed).
AM output (V)
10
When AM Gain Adjustment (C106) = 100 %
When AM Gain Adjustment (C106) = 200 %
5
5 AM Bias Setting (C109) = 50%
0
100 200
Torque (%)
Note: If "00: Output frequency" is monitored during deceleration due to overload limit, the displayed value may seem unstable in the low-speed range. In this case, changing the selection to "07: LAD frequency" stabilizes the displayed value.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-44
5
5-4 Analog Signal
AM Gain Setting
Set the Inverter output gain according to the meters connected to the AM and AMI terminals.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C106
C109
AM Gain
Adjustment
AM Bias Setting
50. to 200.
Set a gain for the AM monitor.
0 to 100
Set an offset for the AM monitor.
100.
0.
%
%
Note: When a reset signal is input, the offset becomes 0% once.
Example) AM provides 4 to 20 mA output, the offset value is 20% (= 4 / 20). (Default value)
5-45 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
The following explains the control-related settings such as the control method and torque boost.
Control Method (V/f Characteristics)
You can set V/f characteristics (output voltage/output frequency).
Switch between Control Methods 1/2 (V/f characteristics) using the SET terminal which is a multi-function input terminal to which Motor 2 Control (08: SET) is allocated.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
A044/A244
Control Method
1/2
00: Constant torque characteristics (VC)
01: Reduced torque characteristics (VP
1.7th power)
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV) For high-starting-torque, high-accuracy operation
*1
00
*1.This option cannot be selected in the Light Load Mode (b049 = 01) or high-frequency mode.
Unit
−
Constant Torque Characteristics (VC)
Output voltage is proportional to output frequency.
While the output voltage is proportional from 0 Hz to base frequency, the output voltage is constant from base to maximum frequency regardless of the frequency.
Output voltage
(100 %)
5
0
Base frequency Maximum frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-46
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
Reduced Torque Characteristics (VP 1.7th power)
Suitable for a fan or pump that does not require large torque in a low speed range.
It will provide high efficiency, reduce noise and vibration, owing to reduced output voltage in a low speed range.
V/f characteristics are shown below.
Output voltage
(100 %)
5
VP (f
1.7
)
VC
0
10 % of base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)
Base frequency Maximum frequency
(a) (b) (c)
Period (a): Provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 Hz to 10% of the base frequency.
Example) If the base frequency is 60 Hz, the Inverter provides constant torque characteristics within a range from 0 to 6 Hz.
Period (b): Provides reduced torque characteristics within a range from 10% of the base frequency to the base frequency.
The Inverter outputs voltage based on a curve of the 1.7th power of the frequency.
Period (c): Provides constant voltage characteristics within a range from the base frequency to the maximum frequency.
5-47
Free V/f Setting
Under the free V/f setting function, desired V/f characteristics can be set by setting seven points of voltage and frequency.(b100 to b113)
The set frequency should always be 1 ≤ 2 ≤ 3 ≤ 4 ≤ 5 ≤ 6 ≤ 7.
All default data is 0 Hz, so set free V/f frequency 7 first. (Operation is disabled by factory default.)
If the free V/f setting is enabled, the functions of Torque Boost Selection (A041/A241), Base
Frequency (A003/A203), and Maximum Frequency (A004/A204) are disabled. (Free V/f frequency 7 is handled as the maximum frequency.)
Parameter
No.
b112 b110 b108 b106 b104 b102 b100
Function name Data
Free V/f Frequency 7 (f7)
Free V/f Frequency 6 (f6)
Free V/f Frequency 5 (f5)
Free V/f Frequency 4 (f4)
Free V/f frequencies 6 to
400. (1000.)
Free V/f frequency 5 to free V/f frequency 7
Free V/f frequency 4 to free V/f frequency 6
Free V/f frequency 3 to free V/f frequency 5
Free V/f Frequency 3 (f3)
Free V/f frequency 2 to free V/f frequency 4
Free V/f Frequency 2 (f2)
Free V/f frequency 1 to free V/f frequency 3
Free V/f Frequency 1 (f1) 0. to Free V/f frequency 2
Default setting
Unit Description
0.
Hz
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
Set frequencies for each break point.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
Parameter
No.
b113 b111 b109 b107 b105 b103 b101
Function name
Free V/f Voltage 7 (V7)
Free V/f Voltage 6 (V6)
Free V/f Voltage 5 (V5)
Free V/f Voltage 4 (V4)
Free V/f Voltage 3 (V3)
Free V/f Voltage 2 (V2)
Free V/f Voltage 1 (V1)
Data
0.0 to 800.0
Default setting
0.0
Unit
V
Description
Set output voltages for each break point.
*1
*1.Even when a voltage greater than the Inverter input voltage is set in any one of Free V/f Voltages 1 to
7, the Inverter cannot output such voltage. Use thorough caution to verify that the output characteristic setting is proper. An improper setting causes overcurrent during acceleration or deceleration, or vibration of the motor and/or machine.
Output voltage (V)
V7
Selection of voltage or motor voltage that can be output
V6
5
(Example)
Output voltage (%)
V7
0
V6
V5
V4
V1
V2,V3 f6 f7 Output frequency (Hz)
0 f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7
Output frequency (Hz)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-48
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
5
Torque Boost
Compensates for the voltage drop caused by the resistance in the 1st resistance of the motor, or by wiring to suppress torque reduction at a low speed range.
To select the automatic torque boost for A041/A241, set Motor Capacity (H003/H203) and
Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) according to your motor.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A041/A241
A042/A242
A043/A243
Torque Boost
Selection 1/2
Manual
Torque Boost Voltage 1/2
Manual Torque Boost
Frequency 1/2
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
0.0 to 20.0
Ratio to motor voltage (A082/A282)
0.0 to 50.0
Ratio to base frequency (A003/A203)
H003/H203 Motor Capacity 1/2 0.1 to 18.5
H004/H204 Motor Pole Number 1/2 2/4/6/8/10
A046/A246
Automatic Torque Boost
Voltage Compensation
Gain 1/2
0. to 255.
Refer to "Automatic Torque Boost" on page 5-50.
A047/A247
Automatic Torque Boost
Slip Compensation Gain
1/2
0. to 255.
Refer to "Automatic Torque Boost" on page 5-50.
00
1.0
5.0
Default setting
4
100.
100.
−
%
% kW pole
−
−
Manual Torque Boost
Outputs the voltage set in A042/A242 or A043/A243.
In A042/A242, set a ratio based on the voltage set in the motor voltage selection as 100%. The ratio set here corresponds to the output frequency of 0 Hz.
If you raise the set value of the manual torque boost, be careful about motor overexcitation.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
The Manual Torque Boost Frequency A043/A243 is set in percentage terms based on the base frequency as 100%.
Switch between Controls 1/2 using the SET terminal which is a multi-function input terminal to which "08: SET" is allocated.
Output voltage (%)
100
A042/A242
5-49
A043/A243 Base frequency
(100 %)
Output frequency
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
Automatic Torque Boost
If Automatic torque boost is selected for Torque Boost Selection (041/A241 = 01), the output frequency and output voltage are adjusted automatically according to the load level.
The output voltage due to automatic torque boost is added to the manual torque boost voltage.
If the desired characteristics cannot be achieved, adjust the Manual Torque Boost Parameters
(A042/A242,A043/A243) by referring to the table below.
Set Motor Capacity (H003/H203) and Motor Pole Number (H004/H204) accurately according to the motor used.
To avoid a overcurrent trip during deceleration, set the AVR Selection to "Always ON" (A081=
00).
If the desired characteristics cannot be achieved using automatic torque boost, adjust each item by referring to the table below.
Phenomenon Adjusting method
Insufficient torque at low speed
(Motor does not rotate at low speed.)
Rotation speed lowers when load is applied.
Rotation speed increases when load is applied.
Overcurrent trip occurs when load is applied.
(1) Gradually increase the Manual Torque Boost
Voltage Setting.
(2) Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost Slip
Compensation Gain.
(3) Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost
Voltage Compensation Gain.
(4) Reduce the set value of the Carrier Frequency.
Gradually increase the Automatic Torque Boost Slip
Compensation Gain.
Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost Slip
Compensation Gain.
(1) Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost
Voltage Compensation Gain.
(2) Gradually reduce the Automatic Torque Boost Slip
Compensation Gain.
(3) Gradually reduce the Manual Torque Boost Voltage
Setting.
Adjustment item
A042/A242
A047/A247
A046/A246 b083
A047/A247
A047/A247
A046/A246
A047/A247
A042/A242
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-50
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
5
Carrier Frequency
The carrier frequency of the PWM waveform output from the Inverter can be changed.
Increasing the carrier frequency reduces the metallic noise from the motor. However, this may increase noise or leakage current from the Inverter.
Helps avoid mechanical or motor resonance.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data b083 Carrier Frequency
Heavy Load (b049 = 00)
2.0 to 15.0
Light Load (b049 = 01)
2.0 to 10.0
High-frequency (2.0 to 10.0)
Related functions
Default setting
10.0
2.0
(5.0)
Unit kHz b089
Note: The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity.
To raise the carrier frequency (fc), derate the output current. (Refer to "Appendix" at the end of this manual.)
Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal level.
For details, refer to "Electronic Thermal Function" on page 5-110.
(If the existing electronic thermal value is lower than the derating value, the above setting is not required.)
If the above maximum rated carrier frequency and the derating value at 15 kHz are exceeded, the
Inverter may be damaged and/or the service life may be shortened.
Raising the carrier frequency reduces the DC braking force. For details, refer to "DC Injection
Braking (DB)" on page 5-135.
Carrier frequency and Extent of impact
Carrier frequency
Motor noise
Noise/leak current
Torque
Low
Large
Small
Large
High
Small
Large
Small
Carrier frequency: Low Carrier frequency: High
5-51 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
Automatic Carrier Frequency Reduction Function
This function automatically reduces carrier frequency according to an increase in output current.
This function is enabled when Automatic Carrier Reduction (b089) is set to "01: Enabled."
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b089
Automatic Carrier
Reduction
00: Disabled
01: Enabled/depends on current
02: Enabled/depends on fin temperature b083
00 −
Related functions
When the output current exceeds 60%, 72%, 84% or 96% of the rated current, the carrier frequency is reduced to 12, 9, 6 or 3 kHz, respectively. When the output current falls below -
5% of each level, this function will be reset.
Starting level of carrier frequency reduction
(Recovery level)
Less than 60% of the rated current
60% (55%) of the rated current
72% (67%) of the rated current
84% (79%) of the rated current
96% (91%) of the rated current
When b089 set to 01
Carrier frequency
15.0 kHz
Reduced carrier frequency [kHz]
15.0
12.0
9.0
6.0
3.0
12.0 kHz
9.0 kHz
6.0 kHz
3.0 kHz
5
Output current (%) 0 50 100
60 % 72 % 84 % 96 %
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-52
5
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
When b089 set to 02
Carrier frequency
15.0kHz
12.0kHz
9.0kHz
6.0kHz
3.0kHz
0 40 50 60 70 80
Fin temperature (
°
C)
The carrier frequency reduction rate is 2 kHz per second.
The upper limit of Carrier Frequency (b083) variable with this function conforms to the set value of carrier frequency b083, and the lower limit is 3 kHz.
If b083 is 3 kHz or below, this function is disabled regardless of the setting of b089.
5-53 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
Motor 2 Control Function (SET)
The motors specified by two different parameters can be switched and controlled accordingly.
Switch between the two motors can be conducted by allocating "08: SET" to Multi-function
Input Selections (C001 to C007) and then turning the SET terminal ON/OFF. (OFF: Motor 1 control, ON: Motor 2 control)
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
08: SET (Motor 2 control)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
The functions switchable via the SET terminal are as follows:
Motor 1 control
F001
Motor 2 control
A042
A043
A044
A045
A046
A047
A061
A062
F002
F003
A001
A002
A003
A004
A020
A041
A081
A082
A092
A093
A094
A095
A096 b012 b013 b021
A242
A243
A244
A245
A246
A247
A261
A262
F202
F203
A201
A202
A203
A204
A220
A241
A281
A282
A292
A293
A294
A295
A296 b212 b213 b221
Setting item
Output Frequency Setting
Acceleration Time Setting
Deceleration Time Setting
Frequency Reference Selection
RUN Command Selection
Base Frequency
Maximum Frequency
Multi-step Speed Reference 0
Torque Boost Selection
Manual Torque Boost Voltage
Manual Torque Boost Frequency
Control Method
Output Voltage Gain
Automatic Torque Boost Voltage Compensation Gain
Automatic Torque Boost Slip Compensation Gain
Frequency Upper Limit
Frequency Lower Limit
AVR Selection
Motor Incoming Voltage Selection
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Selection
2-step Acceleration Frequency
2-step Deceleration Frequency
Electronic Thermal Level
Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection
Overload Limit Selection
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-54
5
5-5 Settings Relating to Control Method
H205
H206
H220
H221
H222
H223
H224
H230
Motor 2 control b222 b223
C241
H202
H203
H204
H231
H232
H233
H234
H005
H006
H020
H021
H022
H023
H024
H030
Motor 1 control b022 b023
C041
H002
H003
H004
H031
H032
H033
H034
Setting item
Overload Limit Level
Overload Limit Parameter
Overload Warning Level
Motor Parameter
Motor Capacity
Motor Pole Number
Speed Response
Stabilization Parameter
Motor Parameter R1
Motor Parameter R2
Motor Parameter L
Motor Parameter Io
Motor Parameter J
Motor Parameter R1 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor Parameter R2 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor Parameter L (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor Parameter Io (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor Parameter J (Auto-tuning Data)
There's no indication of control functions 1/2 on the display. You'll see which one is enabled by checking whether the terminal is turned on/off.
The control functions 1/2 cannot be switched during operation. Switching is possible only while operation is stopped, which means that the functions will switch after the operation stops.
U
V
W
Motor 1
SET terminal
OFF: Control 1 (motor 1)
OFF: Control 2 (motor 2)
Motor 2
Inverter
SET
SC
5-55 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
5-6 Operation Functions
The following explains the parameters relating to operation functions.
3-wire Input Function (STA, STP, F/R)
3-wire input refers to a RUN command method which is useful when the Inverter is to be run and stopped using auto-reset contacts such as pushbutton switches.
Set RUN Command Selection (A002) to "01: Control circuit terminal block".
When "20: STA," "21: STP" and "22: F/R" are allocated to Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007), the operation shown in below figure becomes possible. Allocating the STP terminal disables, the FW and RV terminals are disabled.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
Data
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
A002
− −
ON OFF
STA input (start)
5
OFF
STP input (stop)
ON
F/R input
(forward/reverse switching)
Output frequency
OFF ON
Forward
Reverse
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-56
5-6 Operation Functions
Wiring Example (When STA, STP and F/R are Allocated to Multi-function Input Terminals S1 to S3/GS1)
F/R setting
STP setting
STA setting
S7/EB S6 S5/TH S4/GS2 S3/GS1 S2 S1 SC PSC P24
Forward/ reverse
Stop
(NC contact)
Start
(NO contact)
In the case of 3-wire input, STOP (STP input) is used with NC contact. Take note that it is not necessary to set the output selection to NC for the Multi-function Input Terminal Operation
Selection (C011 to C017) to which the STP input is allocated.
5
Starting Frequency
Set the frequency for starting Inverter output when the RUN signal is turned on.
Use mainly to adjust the starting torque.
With Starting Frequency (b082) set high, the starting current should increase. Therefore, the current may exceed the overload limit and overcurrent protection may work to cause a trip.
Parameter
No.
b082
Function name
Starting
Frequency
Data
0.10 to 9.99 (100.00)
Default setting
0.50
Unit
Hz
RUN command
(FW input)
Output frequency b082
Output voltage
5-57 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Reduced Voltage Startup Selection
Slowly increases voltage during motor startup.
Increase the value of b036 if you want to prevent a current surge at the start or when an overcurrent trip occurs at the start. A smaller value increases the starting torque. As a result, an overcurrent trip occurs more easily.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data b036
Reduced Voltage
Startup Selection
Related functions
0: Reduced voltage startup disabled
01: (Short) to 255 (Long) b082
Default setting
2
Unit
−
RUN command
(FW input)
Starting frequency b082
Output frequency
RUN command
(FW input)
Starting frequency b082
Output frequency
5
Output voltage b036 = 00
Reduced voltage startup disabled
Output voltage
Small b036 Large
Reduced voltage startup enabled
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-58
5-6 Operation Functions
5
Jogging Operation (JG)
Set "06: JG" to a multi-function input terminal.
When a RUN command is issued with the JG terminal turned ON, operation starts at the jogging frequency set by A038.
During jogging operation, the Inverter trips easily because it starts at full voltage. Adjust the set value of Jogging Frequency (A038) to prevent the Inverter from tripping.
Turn ON the JG input first.
JG input
FW input
RV input
Output frequency
A038
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A038
Jogging
Frequency
Starting frequency to 9.99
6.00
Hz
A039
Jogging Stop
Selection
00: Disabled during operation, free-run on jogging stop
01: Disabled during operation, deceleration stop on jogging stop
02: Disabled during operation, DC injection braking on jogging stop
*1
03: Enabled during operation, free-run on jogging stop
04: Enabled during operation, deceleration on stop jogging stop
05: Enabled during operation, DC injection braking on jogging stop *1
06: JG (Jogging)
04 −
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
− −
*1.If Jogging Stop Selection (A039) is set to 02 or 05, DC injection braking data must be set. Refer to "DC
Injection Braking (DB)" on page 5-135.
Note: To perform the jogging operation, turn on the JG terminal before the FW or RV terminal.
(Even when the RUN command source is the Digital Operator, issue a RUN command after turning
ON the JG terminal.) Also note that the frequency reference can be changed by F001 even during jogging operation.
5-59 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Example 1) Jogging Operation is Not Performed
JG input
FW input
Set frequency
Jogging frequency
Output frequency
When A039 = 00, 01 or 02, jogging operation is not performed if the FW signal is turned ON first.
Example 2) Jogging Operation is Performed
JG input
FW input
Normal operation
During deceleration
Jogging operation
Jogging frequency
Output frequency
Free run
Accelerates according to the setting of b088.
For details, refer to "Free-run Stop Function (FRS)" on page 5-103.
When A039 = 03, 04 or 05, jogging operation is performed even when the FW signal is turned
ON first. However, if the JG signal is turned OFF first, the motor performs a free-run stop.
5
Frequency Limit
Both the upper and lower limits can be set for the output frequency. If a frequency reference beyond the upper/lower limits is input, the frequency is limited by the upper or lower limit.
Set the upper limiter first. Make sure the upper limit (A061/A261) is higher than the lower limit
(A062/A262).
Make sure the upper and lower limit settings do not exceed the Maximum Frequency (A004/A204).
Make sure the Output Frequency (F001) and Multi-step Speed References 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) are not lower than the lower limit and not higher than the upper limit.
Neither limit would work if is set to upper and lower limits.
Parameter
No.
A061/A261
A062/A262
Function name
Frequency Upper
Limit 1/2
Frequency Lower
Limit 1/2
Data
0.00, frequency lower limit 1/2 to maximum frequency
0.00, starting frequency to 1/2 frequency upper limit
Default setting
0.00
0.00
Unit
Hz
Hz
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-60
5-6 Operation Functions
Use of Analog Voltage Input (FV-SC) and Analog Current Input (FI-SC)
Output frequency (Hz)
Maximum frequency
A004/A204
A061
A062
0 V
4 mA
A013 = 0 (%)
A103 = 20 (%)
Frequency reference
10 V
20 mA
A014 = 100 (%)
A104 = 100 (%)
Once the lower limit is set, the Inverter outputs the frequency set for the Frequency Lower Limit
(A062), if 0 V (4 mA) is input to the frequency reference.
5
Frequency Jump Function
Use this function to avoid resonant points of loaded machines during operation.
If a jump frequency is set, an output frequency cannot be set within the jump frequency range in order to avoid steady-state operation within the jump frequency range.
The output frequency fluctuates continuously according to the acceleration/deceleration time during both acceleration and deceleration.
A jump frequency can be set at 3 points.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A063/A065/
A067
A064/A066/
A068
Jump Frequency 1/2/3
Jump Frequency Width
1/2/3
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
Set the center of the frequencies at which to execute a jump.
*1
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
Set one-half of the frequency width in which to execute a jump.
*1.If 0 Hz is set, this function is disabled.
Default setting
0.00
0.50
Unit
Hz
Hz
Output frequency
A067
A068
A068
A065
A066
A066
A063
A064
A064
Frequency reference
5-61 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Acceleration/Deceleration Stop Function
This function temporarily stops acceleration/deceleration to perform constant speed operation at the applicable frequency.
This function can be used to make the Inverter wait until the motor slip decreases during acceleration/deceleration, when the moment of inertia of the loaded machine is large. Also use this function if an overcurrent/overvoltage trip occurs during acceleration/deceleration.
This function is not affected by the setting of Acceleration Pattern Selection (A097). It is available in all acceleration patterns.
The following two methods can be used for a stop during acceleration/deceleration, and the two methods can be combined:
(1) Automatic stopping at a desired frequency/stopping time
(2) Stopping with a multi-function input terminal
Take note that the acceleration/declaration time set in F001/F202 or F003/F203 will not be enabled.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A069
A070
A154
A155
C001 to C007
Acceleration Stop
Frequency
Acceleration Stop
Time
Deceleration Stop
Frequency
Deceleration Stop
Time
Multi-function Input
Selection
0.00 to 400.0(1000.)
0.0 to 60.0
0.00 to 400.0(1000.)
0.0 to 60.0
83: HLD (Retain output frequency)
Default setting
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
−
Unit
Hz s
Hz s
−
5
(1) Automatic Stopping at a Desired Frequency/Stopping Time
Output frequency
A154
A069
A155
A070
Time
(2) Stopping with a Multi-function Input Terminal
Output frequency
Time
HLD input
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-62
5-6 Operation Functions
RUN Permission Signal
A RUN command is accepted only while the RUN permission signal is ON.
To use this function, allocate "84: ROK" to the multi-function input terminal.
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
84: ROK (Permission of RUN command)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Output frequency
ROK input
RUN command
FW, RV input
5
Multi-step Speed Operation Function (CF1 to CF4, SF1 to SF7)
Multiple RUN speeds can be set in parameters and the applicable speed can be switched using the terminals.
For multi-step speed operation, either 4-terminal binary operation (with maximum 16 steps) or
7-terminal bit operation (with maximum 8 steps) can be selected.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A019
A020
A021 to A035
A220
C001 to C007
C169
Multi-step Speed
Selection
Multi-step Speed 1
Reference 0
Multi-step Speed
References 1 to 15
Multi-step Speed 2
Reference 0
Multi-function Input
Selection
Multi-step Speed/
Position
Determination Time
00
4-terminal binary operation with up to
16 variable steps
01
7-terminal bit operation with up to 8 variable steps
0.00, starting frequency to maximum frequency
0.00, starting frequency to maximum frequency
0.00, starting frequency to maximum frequency
02 to 05
Binary operation, 16 steps (CF1 to
CF4)
32 to 38
Bit operation, 8 steps (SF1 to SF7)
0. to 200. ( × 10 ms)
Wait time until determination of terminal input
Default setting
00
6.00
0.00
6.00
−
0.
Unit
−
Hz
Hz
Hz
− ms
5-63 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Binary Operation
Selection of multi-step speed references 0 to 15 becomes possible when CF1 to CF4 (02 to
05) are allocated to any four of Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Use Multi-step Speed References 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) to set the frequencies for speed references 1 to 15.
Multi-step speed operation is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection (A001).
However, the frequency reference 0 conforms to the setting of Frequency Reference Selection
(A001).
Multi-step speed
Speed reference 0
Speed reference 1
Speed reference 2
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 4
Speed reference 5
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 7
Speed reference 8
Speed reference 9
Speed reference 10
Speed reference 11
Speed reference 12
Speed reference 13
Speed reference 14
Speed reference 15
CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF
OFF ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Speed reference 11
Speed reference 10
Speed reference 9
Speed reference 12
Speed reference 13
Speed reference 14
Speed reference 4
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 5
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 2
Speed reference 7
Speed reference 1
Speed reference 15
Speed reference 0
The frequency
CF1 input
Speed reference 8 at speed reference
0 conforms to the setting of A001.
CF2 input
CF3 input
CF4 input
FW input
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-64
5
5-6 Operation Functions
With multi-step speed binary operation, the wait time until the terminal input is determined can be set using Multi-step Speed/Position Determination Time (C169) (set value × 10 ms =
Determination time). This prevents the transition status before input establishment from being applied.
If no input is made during the time set in C169, the data is determined.
Note that the longer the determination time, the slower the input response.
Determination Time
(C169) Zero
9
Frequency reference
1
11
15
CF1 input
CF2 input
CF3 input
CF4 input
Determination
Time (C169)
13
5
4
Determination Time
(C169) available
Bit Operation
Selection of multi-step speed references 0 to 7 becomes possible when SF1 to SF7 (32 to 38) are allocated to Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Use Multi-step Speed References 1 to 7 (A021 to A027) to set the frequencies for SF1 to SF7.
Multi-step speed operation is given priority over Frequency Reference Selection (A001). However, the frequency reference 0 conforms to the setting of Frequency Reference Selection (A001).
Multi-step speed SF7 SF6 SF5 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1
Speed reference 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Speed reference 1
Speed reference 2
Speed reference 3
Speed reference 4
Speed reference 5
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 7
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
× ON
ON OFF
× ON OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF
×
×
× ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Speed reference 0
The frequency at speed reference 0 conforms to
Speed reference 4 Speed reference 5
Speed reference 6
Speed reference 2
Speed reference 1 Speed reference 7 the setting of A001.
Speed reference 1
SF1
SF2
SF3
SF4
SF5
SF6
SF7
FW
When several terminals are simultaneously turned on, priority is given to the terminal with the smallest number.
The × mark in the above table means that speed is selected regardless of ON/OFF status.
5-65 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
2-step Acceleration/Deceleration Function (2CH)
The acceleration/deceleration time can be changed during acceleration/deceleration.
Select an acceleration/deceleration time switching method from the following 3:
(1) Switching using a multi-function input terminal
(2) Automatic switching at a desired frequency
(3) Automatic switching together with forward/reverse switching only
To switch via a multi-function input terminal, allocate "09: 2CH" to any of C001 to C007.
Parameter
No.
A092/A292
A093/A293
Function name
1st/2nd
Acceleration
Time 2
1st/2nd
Deceleration
Time 2
0.01 to 3600.
(Example 1.2)
0.01 to 3600.
(Example 1.2)
Data
A094/A294
2-step
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Selection
A095/A295
A096/A296
2-step
Acceleration
Frequency
2-step
Deceleration
Frequency
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
00
Switched via 2CH terminal (example 1)
01
Switching via 2-step acceleration/deceleration frequency (example 2)
02
Enabled only when switching between forward/ reverse (example 3)
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
Enabled when 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration
Selection (A094/A294) is 01 (example 2)
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
Enabled when 2-step Acceleration/Deceleration
Selection (A094/A294) is 01 (example 2)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/deceleration)
F002/F202, F003/F203
Default setting
10.00
(15.00)
10.00
(15.00)
00
0.00
0.00
−
Unit s s
−
Hz
Hz
−
Example 1) Switching via Input Terminal (A094/A294 = 00)
FW input
2CH input
5
Output frequency
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
F002/
F202
A092/
A292
Deceleration time 2
Deceleration time 1
A093/
A293
F003/
F203
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-66
5
5-6 Operation Functions
Example 2) Switching via Frequency (A094/A294 = 01)
FW input
A095/A295
Output frequency
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
A096/A296
Deceleration time 1
F002/
F202
A092/
A292
A093/
A293
F003/
F203
Example 3) Forward/Reverse Switching (A094/A294 = 02)
FW input
RV input
Output frequency
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 1
A092/
A292
F003/
F203
F002/
F202
A093/
A293
5-67 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern
Acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set for each system. Select a desired pattern using
A097 or A098.
A different pattern can be set for acceleration and deceleration, respectively.
If the selected acceleration/deceleration pattern is not Linear (A097/A098 = 00), do not use this function with an Analog Input (A001 = 01) because it increases the acceleration/deceleration time.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A097/A098
Acceleration Pattern
Selection/
Deceleration Pattern
Selection
00: Linear
01: S shape
02: U shape curve
03: Reverse-U shape
04: EL-S shape
01(small curve) to 10 (large curve)
Enabled with other than EL-S shape (A097/
A098 = 04)
01 −
A131/ A132
A150/A151
A152/A153
Acceleration Curve
Parameter/
Deceleration Curve
Parameter
EL-S Shape
Acceleration
Curve Ratio 1/2
EL-S Shape
Deceleration
Curve Ratio 1/2
0 to 50
Specify the ratio of the curved section when the EL-S shape is used. (for acceleration)
0 to 50
Specify the ratio of the curved section when the EL-S shape is used. (for deceleration)
02
10.
10.
−
%
%
Note: When the EL-S shape is selected, use multi-step speed operation and do not change the frequency reference during acceleration/deceleration. Only line acceleration/deceleration can be selected in the high-frequency mode.
Pattern Selection
Select an acceleration/deceleration pattern with reference to the following table.
Set value
Curve
00
Line
01
S shape
02
U shape
03
Inverted U shape
04
EL-S shape
5
Time Time Time Time Time
Time
Accelerates/
Decelerates linearly before reaching the set output frequency value.
Time
Helps prevent the collapse of cargo on the elevating machine or conveyor.
Time Time
Helps with tension control and roll break prevention (for a winding machine, etc.).
Time
Provides shockless start/ stop as with the S shape, but the intermediate section is linear.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-68
5-6 Operation Functions
5
5-69
Pattern Curve Parameter (Curve Factor)
Determine a curve factor with reference to the figures below.
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)
Target frequency
(100 %)
96.9
82.4
10 02
Target frequency
(100 %)
99.6
93.8
87.5
68.4
64.6
10
02
35
17.6
3.1
02
10
25 50 75 Time
Acceleration time until reaching to the set value of output frequency (100 %)
Output frequency (Hz)
Target frequency
(100 %)
25 50 75 Time
Acceleration time until reaching to the set value of output frequency (100 %)
65
35.4
31.6
12.5
6.25
0.39
02
10
25 50 75 Time
Acceleration time until reaching to the set value of output frequency (100 %)
The S shape has an intermediate section where acceleration/deceleration time is shortened.
If "46: LAC (LAD cancel)" is selected for a multi-function input and the input is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration pattern is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows to the reference frequency.
EL-S shape Ratio
When the EL-S shape is used, various Curve Ratios (A150 to A153) can be set for acceleration/deceleration.
If all settings are "50 [%]", the Inverter operates in the same manner as with the S shape.
Output frequency ratio (%)
100
50
EL-S Shape
Acceleration
Curve Ratio 2
(A151)
EL-S Shape Deceleration
Curve Ratio 1
(A152)
EL-S Shape Acceleration
Curve Ratio 1 (A150)
EL-S Shape Deceleration
Ratio 2 (A153)
Time (s)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Frequency Operation Function
Two sets of frequency reference operation results can be used for frequency reference or PID feedback values.
To use this function for frequency reference, set Frequency Reference Selection (A001) to "10:
Operation function output."
To use this function for PID feedback, set PID Feedback Selection (A076) to "10: Operation function output."
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A141/A142
Operation Frequency
Selection 1/
Operation Frequency
Selection 2
00: Digital Operator (A020/A220)
01: Digital Operator (volume)
(Enabled only when the 3G3AX-
OP01 is connected.)
02: FV (voltage) input
03: FI (current) input
04: Modbus communication (Modbus-
RTU)
02/03 −
05: Optional board
07: Pulse train frequency
A143
A001
Operation Function
Operator Selection
00: Addition (A141) + (A142)
01: Subtraction (A141) − (A142)
02: Multiplication (A141) × (A142)
10: Operation function output Frequency Reference
Selection
PID Feedback Selection 10: Operation function output
00
02
−
−
A076 00 −
Note 1: The remote operation function cannot be used when this function is enabled. Also, frequency cannot be changed through key operations of Output Frequency Monitor (d001), Output
Frequency Monitor (After Conversion) (d007), or Output Frequency Setting (F001).
Note 2: The same setting is available in A141/A142.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-70
5-6 Operation Functions
5
Frequency Addition Function
The value set in Frequency Addition Amount Setting (A145) can be added to or subtracted from the selected frequency reference value.
To use this function, allocate "50: ADD" to any of the multi-function inputs.
A145 is added or subtracted with the ADD terminal is turned on.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
A145
A146
C001 to C007
Frequency
Addition Amount
Setting
Frequency
Addition
Sign Selection
Multi-function
Input Selection
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
00: (Frequency reference ) + (A145)
01: (Frequency reference ) − (A145)
50: ADD (Frequency addition)
0.00
00
−
Hz
−
−
Note 1: If the sign of the frequency reference is changed (( − ) → (+), or (+) → ( − )) as a result of operation, the rotation direction will be reversed.
Note 2: When the PID function is used, this function is also enabled for a PID target value.
(Note that A145 is displayed in % (in increments of 0.01%).)
Remote Operation Function (UP, DWN)
This function changes the Inverter output frequency using UP and DWN terminals of the multifunction input terminal.
Allocate "27: UP" and "28: DWN" to Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
While the UP/DWN terminal is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration time conforms to
F002, F003/F202, and F203. Switch between Controls 1 and 2 using the SET terminal which is a multi-function input terminal to which "08: SET" is allocated.
Also note that if "01: Store frequency data" is selected for C101, the set frequency value after
UP/DWN adjustment can be stored when the power is shut off.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C101
C104
C001 to C007
UP/DWN Storage
Selection
UP/DWN Clear
Terminal Mode
Multi-function Input
Selection
00: Do not store frequency data
01: Store frequency data
*1
00: 0 Hz
01: EEPROM data at power-on
(value stored in the EEPROM)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
00
00
−
−
−
−
*1.Do not turn ON/OFF the UP/DWN terminal after shutting off the power. Otherwise, the Inverter may not store data normally.
5-71 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
RUN command
(FW, RV)
UP input
DWN input
Output frequency
Acceleration/deceleration will not be executed if the UP and DWN terminals are turned ON at the same time.
This parameter is enabled only when Frequency Reference Selection A001 is set to "01: Control circuit terminal block" or "02: Digital Operator" or during multi-step speed operation. Note that "01:
Control circuit terminal block" can be used only when the analog command held (AHD) is enabled.
For details, refer to "Analog Command Held Function (AHD)" on page 5-39.
This function is disabled when an external analog input is used for frequency reference, or it cannot be used to set a Jogging Operation frequency.
Reference
The stored frequency set value can also be cleared. The frequency reference that has been adjusted by UP/DWN can be cleared by allocating "29: UDC" to a multi-function input terminal and then turning ON/OFF the UDC terminal. After clearing the data, the set value conforms to the setting of C104.
5
Output Voltage Gain
The voltage output by the Inverter can be changed based on the voltage selected by Motor
Incoming Voltage Selection (A082/A282) which is handled as 100%.
Motor hunting can be avoided by lowering the gain.
If the control method is Sensorless Vector Control (A044/A244 = 03), the setting change is effective only while operation is stopped. After the setting has been changed, be sure to turn
Reset (RS terminal) to ON and then OFF. The motor parameter is recalculated after the reset.
Do not change the setting significantly during operation. (As a guide, keep the change to within
10%). A sudden change in output voltage may trigger an overcurrent trip.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name
A045/A245
Output Voltage
Gain 1/2
Related functions
Data
Set the rate of reduction of output voltage.
20. to 100.
A082
100.
%
Motor incoming voltage selection
A045/A245
A082(100 %)
A282(100 %)
A082 × A045(%)
A282 × A245(%)
Base frequency Maximum frequency
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-72
5-6 Operation Functions
5
PID Function
This function enables process control of such elements as flow rate, air volume, and pressure.
To use this function, set A071 to "01: Enabled" or "02: Reverse output enabled."
You can disable the PID operation in progress using an external signal.
To use this function, allocate "23: PID disabled" to any of the multi-function inputs. While the
PID terminal is turned ON, the Inverter disables the PID function and outputs normally.
You can limit the PID output under various conditions.
Refer to "Maximum Frequency" on page 5-28, "Frequency Limit" on page 5-60 and PID
Variable Range Limit (A078).
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
A071
A072
A073
A074
A075
A076
A077
A078
A079
A156
Function name Data
PID Selection
PID P Gain
PID I Gain
PID D Gain
PID Scale
PID Feedback
Selection
PID Deviation
Reverse Output
PID Variable Range
Limit
PID Feedforward
Selection
PID Sleep Function
Operation Level
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
0.00 to 25.00
Proportional gain
0.0 to 3600.
Integral gain
0.00 to 100.
Differential gain
0.01 to 99.99
For unit conversion of PID Feedback
Value Monitor (d004)
00: FI (current)
4 to 20 mA
01: FV (voltage)
0 to 10V
02: Modbus communication (Modbus-
RTU)
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
*1
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (reversing of deviation polarity)
0.0 to 100.0
Variable range with reference to the target value
00: Disabled
01: FV (voltage)
*2
0 to 10V
02: FI (current)
*2
4 to 20 mA
0.0 to 400.0(1000.)
Operation stops once the PID output drops to below the operation level.
00
1.00
1.0
0.00
1.00
00
00
0.0
00
0.00
−
− s s
−
−
−
%
−
Hz
5-73 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A157
C044
C052
C053
C001 to C007
PID Sleep Operation
Delay Time
PID Deviation
Excessive Level
Feedback Comparison
Signal Off Level
Feedback Comparison
Signal On Level
Multi-function Input
Selection
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
Related functions
0.0 to 25.5
Set the delay time until sleep operation is started.
0.0 to 100.0
OD signal output judgment level
0.0 to 100.0
FBV signal output judgment level
0.0 to 100.0
FBV signal output judgment level
23: PID (PID disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
04: OD (PID excessive deviation)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
A001, A005, d004
*1. Refer to "Frequency Operation Function" on page 5-70.
*2. Refer to "Analog Input (FV, FI)" on page 5-37.
Default setting
0.0
3.0
100.0
0.0
−
−
Unit s
−
−
%
%
%
5
Reference
When the PID function is used, do not set the Analog Input Filter to 500 ms (A016 = 31).
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-74
5-6 Operation Functions
5
Basic Structure of PID Control
Feedforward Disabled
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
Target value
0 to 10 V
+
−
4 to 20 mA
Deviation
ε
Kp 1 +
Ti
1
· s
+ Td
Feedback 0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
· s
+
+
Manipulated value fs
Normal control of the Inverter
M =
Transducer
Sensor
Kp: Proportional gain Ti: Integral time Td: Differential time s: Operator
ε
: Deviation
PID Operation
(1) P operation
Operation where the manipulated value is proportional to the deviation (target value − current value).
Target value
Changes in steps Changes in lamps
Large Large
A072 A072
Manipulated value
Small Small
(2) I operation
Operation where the manipulated value is proportional to the time-integrated value of deviations. As the current value becomes closer to the target value, the deviation decreases and thus the effect of P operation is reduced, and consequently the time needed to achieve the target value increases. I operation compensates for this condition.
Target value
Manipulated value
Small
A073
Large
Small
A073
Small
(3) D operation
Operation where the maniplated value is proportional to the ratio of change in deviation.
Although use of PI operations alone require a response time, D operation has the effect of compensating for the response.
Target value
Manipulated value
Large
A074
Small
Large
A074
Small
5-75 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
PID scale
When PID Scale (A075) is set, the following parameters undergo scale conversion.
(Value after conversion) = (Value before conversion) × (A075) d004
A023
A031
F001
A024
A032
A011
A025
A033
A012
A026
A034
A020
A027
A035
A220
A028
A101
A021
A029
A102
A022
A030
A145
Feedback Selection
Select a terminal used for the feedback signal in PID feedback selection A076.
The target value depends on the terminal selected in frequency reference A001 other than that in A076. Also note that when A001 is set to "01: Control circuit terminal block," the setting of
FV/FI Selection (A005) is disabled.
To specify "02: Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU)" for PID Feedback Selection (A076), transfer the data as follows.
Write the data in holding register address 0006h based on 100% representing 10,000.
Register
Number
Function name
Parameter
No.
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Data
Resolutio n
0006h
PID Feedback
Selection
− R/W 0 to 10000 0.01 [%]
Note: You can read and write data. However, you can read data only when Modbus-RTU is selected for the PID feedback.
Data cannot be read under other settings.
If "03: Pulse train input" is set for PID Feedback Selection (A076), the Inverter obtains a percent conversion result (100% at maximum frequency) of the input pulse train frequency (Hz) as a feedback value.
For details on pulse train input frequency, refer to "Pulse Train Frequency Input" on page 5-82.
5
Feedforward Selection
Select a terminal used for feedforward signals in PID Feedforward Selection A079.
The A079 setting is enabled even if the terminal selected in A079 is duplicated with the terminal selected for target value or feedback value input.
If A079 is set to "disabled", feedforward control is disabled.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-76
5
5-6 Operation Functions
PID Deviation Reverse Output
Depending on the sensor characteristics, etc. the polarity of deviation between the target value feedback values may not match the Inverter's command. In this case, the deviation polarity can be reversed by using the PID Deviation Reverse Output (A077 = 01).
Example) Controlling a refrigerator compressor
The temperature sensor specification is 0 to 100 ° C: 0 to 10 (V) and the target value is 5 ° C.
If the current temperature is 10 ° C, "(Feedback value) > (Target value)" is satisfied and therefore the Inverter frequency drops under normal PID control.
→ Set A077 to "01" so that the Inverter increases the frequency.
A077
PID target value
PID operation
− 1
PID feedback
PID Variable Range Limit
This function limits PID output within a variable range relative to the target value.
To use this function, set PID Variable Range Limit (A078). The output frequency is limited within a range of "target value ± (A078)", with the maximum frequency defined as 100%.
With A078 set to 0.0, this function is disabled.
PID output (%) PID output range
PID target value
PID Variable Range Limit (A078)
PID Variable Range Limit (A078)
Time (s)
PID Reverse Output
If the PID operation result is a negative value under normal PID control, the frequency reference given to the Inverter is limited by 0 Hz. When PID Selection (A071) is set to "02:
Reverse output enabled," a reverse output can be output to the Inverter even when the PID operation result is a negative value.
If A071 = 02: Reverse output enabled, PID Variable Range Limit (A078) explained above is disabled.
5-77 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
PID Gain Adjustment
If a stable response cannot be obtained in PID function operation, adjust each gain as follows according to the situation.
The feedback value changes slowly when the target value is changed. → Raise P Gain A072.
The PID feedback value changes fast but isn't stable.
→ Lower P Gain A072.
The target and the PID feedback values wouldn't match smoothly. → Lower I Gain A073.
The PID feedback value fluctuates unstably.
Response is slow even with P gain raised.
→ Raise I Gain A073.
→ Raise D Gain A074.
With P gain raised, the PID feedback value fluctuates and isn't stable. → Lower D Gain A074.
PID Excessive Deviation (OD)
You can set PID excessive deviation level C044 during PID control. A signal can be output to a multi-function output terminal when the PID deviation ε reaches the level set in C044 or above.
Allocate "04: OD" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Relay
Output Function Selection (C026).
C044 can be set from 0 to 100. The setting corresponds to the range of 0 to the maximum target value.
Feedback Comparison Signal
A signal can be output to a multi-function output terminal when the PID feedback is out of the specified range.
Allocate "31: FBV" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Relay
Output Function Selection (C026).
5
PID feedback
C052 (OFF level)
C053 (ON level)
Time
FW input
ON
OFF
FBV output
ON
OFF
PID Feedback Value Monitor (d004)
You can monitor the PID feedback value.
The monitor value is displayed as the product of PID Scale (A075).
"d004 display" = "Feedback value [%]" × "PID Scale (A075)"
PID Integral Reset (PIDC)
Clears the integral value of PID operation.
Allocate "24: PIDC" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Clears the integral value every time the PIDC terminal is turned on.
Do not turn on the PIDC terminal during PID operation to avoid a possible overcurrent trip. Turn
ON the PIDC terminal after turning OFF PID operation.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-78
5-6 Operation Functions
PID Sleep Function
When the PID output drops to below the setting of PID Sleep Function Operation Level (A156), output will stop after the period set in PID Sleep Operation Delay Time (A157). The stop method (deceleration stop/free run) conforms to Stop Selection (b091). The PID sleep function does not actuate if recovery occurs within the PID sleep operation delay time.
Even when the PID function is disabled, output will still stop after the period of A157 when the frequency reference value drops to below the setting of A156. The stop method conforms to the setting of b091.
5
Automatic Energy-saving Operation Function
This function automatically adjusts the Inverter output power during constant speed operation in order to minimize it. This function is suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics (e.g. fan, pump).
When operation is performed using this function, set RUN Mode Selection (A085) to "01: Energysaving operation."
Response and accuracy can be adjusted using Energy-saving Response/Accuracy Adjustment (A086).
Control is performed at a relatively slow rate, so if a sudden load fluctuation like an impact load, etc.
occurs, the motor may stall, resulting in an overcurrent trip.
When the frequency reference uses the terminal block (analog input), the automatic energy-saving function may not function sufficiently. In this case, set Analog Input Filter (A016) to "31: 500 ms."
Parameter
No.
Function name
A085
RUN Mode
Selection
Data
00: Normal operation
01: Energy-saving operation
Default setting
00
Unit
−
Parameter
No.
A086
Function name
Energy-saving Response/
Accuracy Adjustment
Data
0 to 100
(Response: Slow to fast)
(Accuracy: High to low)
Default setting
50.0
Unit
−
Commercial Switch (CS)
Use this function to drive a system with large moment of inertia during acceleration and deceleration by using the Inverter, and during constant speed by using a commercial power supply.
Allocate "14: CS" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Parameter
No.
Function name
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
Data
14: CS (Commercial switch) b003, b007
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Switching from Inverter Operation to Commercial Power Supply Operation
Switch MC1 to MC3, FW terminal and CS terminal according to the sequence shown on the next page. When the CS terminal is turned ON, the Inverter stops the output and the motor performs free-run operation.
5-79 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Switching from Commercial Power Supply Operation to Inverter Operation
Switch MC1 to MC3 according to the sequence shown below. Turn the CS terminal to ON and then OFF, when both RUN command and CS input are ON. After an elapse of the period set by Restart Standby Time (b003), the Inverter will accelerate by matching the frequency to the rotation speed of the motor running freely (frequency matching restart). However, the Inverter may restart at 0 Hz in the following cases:
The motor rotation speed is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base rotation speed
The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
The motor rotation speed dropped to below the level set by Frequency Matching Lower Limit
Frequency Setting (b007).
Examples of Connections and Timing of Commercial Switching Operation
MC2
NFB
ELBC
FWY
RVY
CSY
MC1
R
S
T
R0
T0
FS
FV
SC
FW
RV
CS
SC
MA
MB
MC
U
V
W
MC3
THRY
M
Example of Commercial Switching Timing
MC2/MC3 interlock time
(0.5 to 1 s)
Inverter Power OFF MC1 Inverter Power ON
MC2 Commercial motor disconnected Commercial motor connected
MC2/MC3 interlock time
(0.5 to 1 s)
Inverter Power ON
Commercial motor disconnected
MC3 INV motor connected INV motor disconnected INV motor connected
FW input
CS input b003
Motor rotation speed
Frequency matching restart
Free run Free run
Output frequency
Frequency matching restart
Inverter drive Commercial power supply drive Inverter drive
Inverter operation Switching to commercial power supply operation
Commercial power supply operation Switching to inverter operation
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-80
5
5-6 Operation Functions
Ensure that MC3 and MC2 are mechanically interlocked. Otherwise the Inverter may be damaged.
Reference
If the earth leakage breaker ELB has tripped because of ground fault, etc. the commercial power supply circuit will not work, either. If backup is necessary, supply power from a commercial power supply circuit ELBC.
For FWY, RVY, and CSY, use low-voltage relays. Refer to the above sequence for timing.
If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching, extend the setting of Restart Standby Time b003.
For the Commercial Switching operation, refer to "Examples of connections and timing of
Commercial Switching operation."
The system can also be set to automatically restart upon power-on. This does not require the CS terminal. For details, refer to "Reset (RS)" on page 5-100.
5
Stabilization Parameter
This function is used for adjustment to reduce motor hunting.
In case of motor hunting, check whether motor capacity H003/H203 and motor pole number selection H004/H204 match your motor. If they do not, match them. If the motor's primary resistance is smaller than that of the standard motor, increase the H006/H206 set value gradually. To run a motor with a capacity larger than the Inverter's rated capacity, reduce the set value.
Other than this function, the following methods are suggested to reduce hunting:
Lower the Carrier Frequency (b083). → Refer to "Carrier Frequency" on page 5-51.
Lower the Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245). → Refer to "Output Voltage Gain" on page 5-72.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
H006/H206 Stabilization Parameter 1/2
A045/A245 b083
Output Voltage Gain 1/2
Carrier Frequency
0. to 255.
Increase/decrease the value if the motor hunts.
20. to 100.
If hunting occurs, reduce the set value.
2.0 to 15.0/2.0 to 10.0 or 2.0 to 10.0
(heavy load/light load or high frequency)
If hunting occurs, reduce the set value.
Default setting
100.
100.
10.0/2.0
(5.0)
Unit
−
% kHz
5-81 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-6 Operation Functions
Pulse Train Frequency Input
This function uses the pulse train (1 phase) input to the RP terminal, as the frequency reference or PID feedback value in each control mode.
Set the input frequency at the maximum frequency in Pulse Train Frequency Scale (P055).
The analog input start/end function cannot be used. To limit the input frequency, use Pulse
Train Bias Amount (P057) and Pulse Train Limit (P058).
Parameter
No.
P003
P055
P056
P057
P058
A001
A076
A141
A142
Function name Data
Pulse Train Input Terminal
RP Selection
Pulse Train Frequency
Scale
00: Frequency setting or PID feedback value
1.0 to 32.0
Specify the input pulse frequency at the motor's Maximum Frequency
(A004).
Pulse Train Frequency
Filter Time Parameter
0.01 to 2.00
Set the filter time constant for pulse train input.
Pulse Train Bias Amount − 100. to +100.
Pulse Train Limit 0. to 100.
Frequency Reference
Selection
06: Pulse train frequency
PID Feedback Selection 03: Pulse train frequency
Operation Frequency
Selection 1
Operation Frequency
Selection 2
07: Pulse train frequency
Default setting
00
25.0
0.10
0.
100.
02
00
02
03
Unit
− kHz s
−
−
−
%
%
−
5
Frequency measurement
Hz %
Frequency Scale (P055)
(1.0 to 32 kHz)
Limit
Bias limit
1
1 + sT
% Hz
Bias
Primary Delay Filter (P056)
Maximum Frequency
(A004)
Frequency
Reference
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-82
5-6 Operation Functions
5
V/f Control with Speed Feedback
This function performs V/f control along with slip compensation by loading as feedbacks (FB) the pulse trains from the encoder that have been input to the RP and EB terminals.
When this function is used, set Control Method (A044/A244) to "00: Constant torque characteristics," "01: Reduced torque characteristics" or "02: Free V/f setting."
Refer to "Encoder Connection" on page 5-158 for details on encoder wiring and feedback pulse selection.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
P003
P004
P011
P012
P026
P027
P077
H050
H051
Pulse Train Input Terminal
RP Selection
01: Feedback pulse
Feedback Pulse Train
Input Type Selection
00: 1-phase pulse train
01: Dual-phase pulse train with 90 ° phase difference 1
02: Dual-phase pulse train with 90 ° phase difference 2
03: 1-phase pulse train + direction
Number of Encoder Pulses 32. to 1024.
00: Simple position control disabled Simple Position Control
Selection
Overspeed Error Detection
Level
Speed Deviation Error
Detection Level
0.0 to 150.0 *1
0.00 to 120.00
0.0 to 10.0
Encoder Disconnection
Detection Time
V/f Control with Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation Proportional
Gain
V/f Control with Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation Integral
Gain
0.00 to 10.00
0. to 1000.
*1. Set the percentage of the Maximum Frequency (A004).
Default setting
00
00
512.
00
115.0
10.00
1.0
0.20
2
Unit
−
−
Pulse
−
%
Hz s
Time s
5-83 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
The following explains the functions relating to Digital Operators and operations.
STOP Key Selection
When the RUN command selection is not set to "Digital Operator" (A002/A202 = 02), the function of the Digital Operator's STOP key can be set.
When the RUN command is set to "Digital Operator", the STOP command and error reset operation are enabled regardless of this setting.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name b087
STOP Key
Selection
Data
00
Both the STOP command and error reset operation are enabled
01
Both the STOP command and error reset operation are disabled
02
The STOP command is disabled and only the error reset operation is enabled
00 −
5
Soft Lock Function (SFT)
Changing of various data can be prohibited. This helps prevent data rewriting due to erroneous operation.
Select the soft lock setting and performing method from the following table.
To combine this function with a multi-function input terminal, allocate "15: SFT" to any Multifunction Input Selections (C001 to C007).
When b031 is set to 10, the "Data can be changed during RUN" is enabled and only the functions specified in Chapter 4, "Parameter List" can be changed. Take note that this function is not for locking the parameter, but is the direction to reset.
This function can also be password-protected. Refer to "Password Function" on page 5-91.
Parameter
No.
b031
C001 to
C007
Function name
Soft Lock
Selection
Data
00
01
02
03
10
SFT terminal
Description
ON Only b031 can be rewritten
OFF Soft lock function is disabled (normal operation)
ON
−
Only b031 and Frequency Settings (F001, A020,
A220, A021 to A035, A038) can be rewritten
OFF Soft lock function is disabled (normal operation)
− Only b031 can be rewritten
−
Only b031 and Frequency Settings (F001, A020,
A220, A021 to A035, A038) can be rewritten
"Data can be changed during RUN" mode is enabled (Only the functions specified in
Chapter 4, "Parameter Lists" can be changed.)
Default setting
01
Unit
−
Multi-function
Input Selection
15: SFT (Soft lock) − −
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-84
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Forced Operator Function (OPE)
This function forcibly enables operation via the Digital Operator by turning ON/OFF the applicable multi-function input terminal if the selected frequency reference/RUN command sources are not the Digital Operator.
When "31: OPE" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON, the frequency reference and RUN command from the Digital Operator are applied forcibly.
When the terminal is OFF, the settings of A001 and A002 are applied.
If this function is switched during operation, the RUN command is cancelled to stop the Inverter output. Before resuming operation, stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again.
If the forced Digital Operator function and Forced terminal block (51: F-TM) are turned ON simultaneously, the forced Digital Operator function is given priority.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
31: OPE (Forced operator)
− −
Related functions A001, A002
5
Forced Terminal Block Function (F-TM)
This function forcibly enables operation via the control circuit terminal block by turning ON/OFF the applicable multi-function input terminal if the selected frequency reference/RUN command sources are not the control circuit terminal block.
If "51: Forced terminal block" is selected by any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007), the Inverter is operated with the signal from the frequency reference source and RUN command source selected in A001 and A002, when the input signal is OFF. When the signal is ON, the Inverter is forced to operate with the frequency reference or RUN command from the control circuit terminal block.
If you switch on/off this function during operation, the RUN command is reset to stop the Inverter output.
Before resuming operation, stop the RUN command from each command source to avoid possible danger and then input it again.
If the Forced operator (31: OPE) and forced terminal block function are turned ON simultaneously, the forced Digital Operator function is given priority.
When the F-TM terminal is turned ON with the FV/FI terminal turned ON and VR (volume on the external Digital Operator) selected, the frequency reference that was selected when the
FV/FI terminal was OFF is selected.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
Data
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
A001, A002
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5-85 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Selection of Operation upon Digital Operator Disconnection
If the Inverter detects disconnection of the Digital Operator (= communication with the Digital
Operator has been disrupted for 5 s or more), the Inverter operation conforms to the setting of
Selection of Operation on Digital Operator Disconnection (b165).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b165
Selection of
Operation on
Digital Operator
Disconnection
00: Trip (E40. )
01: Trip after deceleration stop (E40. )
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
02 −
Initial Screen Selection (Screen at Power-ON)
The Digital Operator screen to be displayed at power-on can be selected from among the following: (By factory default, "001 (d001)" is selected.)
Main Built-in Digital Operator
Parameter
No.
Function name Data Description (Digital Operator)
Default setting
Unit b038
Initial Screen
Selection
000
Screen on which the Enter key was pressed last (All items other than d*** and F001 are parameters.)
*1
001 d001 (Output Frequency Monitor)
002 d002 (Output Current Monitor)
003 d003 (Rotation Direction Monitor)
: : (Each item corresponds to d***.)
060 d060 (Inverter Mode Monitor)
201 F001 (Output Frequency Setting)
202 Do not use this setting.
001 −
*1.If "000" is selected and then the power is turned off without changing the setting, this item (b038) will be displayed the next time the power is turned on.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-86
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function
This function is enabled when Initial Screen Automatic Switching Function is set to "01: Enabled."
If the Digital Operator is not operated for 10 minutes, the display automatically switches to the initial screen set by b038.
Parameter
No.
Function name b164
Data
Initial Screen
Automatic
Switching Function
00: Disabled (Not switching automatically)
01: Enabled (Switching automatically)
Default setting
00
Unit
−
5
Main Panel Display Selection
Once the Remote Operator is connected, the keys on the main unit become disabled. Set the parameter number to be displayed on the main display at this time.
Parameter
No.
Function name b150
Data
Main Panel
Display Selection
001 to 060
Corresponding to d001 to d060 in the monitor mode.
Default setting
001
Unit
5-87 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Display Selection
The items displayed on the Digital Operator can be partially hidden.
This function can also be password-protected. Refer to "Password Function" on page 5-91.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name
Data b037
Display
Selection
U001 to U032 User Selection
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting + b037
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
05: Monitor (d***) display only no: No allocation d001 to P183
Select the parameter you want to display
(All parameters can be displayed.)
04 no
−
−
Individual Display of Functions (b037 = 01)
If a specific function is not selected, its relevant parameter is not displayed.
For details on the display requirements, refer to the following table.
No.
Display requirements
1 Displayed when 2 is set C001 to C007 = 08
2
3
4
5
6
7
Displayed when Control method 1 is sensorless vector control
Displayed when Control method 2 is sensorless vector control
Displayed when Control method 1/2 is free V/f setting
A044 = 03
C001 to C007 = 08 and
A244 = 03
Displayed in the free electronic thermal mode
A044 = 02 or
C001 to C007 = 08 and
A244 = 02 b013 = 02 or
C001 to C007 = 08 and b213 = 02
Displayed when Control method 1 is free V/f setting
Displayed when Control method 2 is free V/f setting
A044 = 00, 01
C001 to C007 = 08 and
A244 = 00, 01
Parameters displayed when the applicable conditions are met
F202, F203, A201 to A204, A220, A241 to
A247, A261, A262, A281, A282, A292 to
A296, b212, b213, b221 to b223, C241,
H202 to H206, H220 to H224, H230 to
H234 d009, d010, d012, b040 to b046, C054 to
C059, H001, H005, H020 to H024, H030 to
H034, P033, P034, P036 to P040 d009, d010, d012, b040 to b046, C054 to
C059, H001, H205, H220 to H224, H230 to
H234, P033, P034, P036 to P040 b100 to b113 b015 to b020
A041 to A043, A046, A047
A241 to A243, A246, A247
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-88
5
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
No.
Display requirements
Parameters displayed when the applicable conditions are met
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Displayed when DC injection braking is used
Displayed when PID is used
Displayed when Coinverter communication is used
Displayed during curved acceleration/ deceleration
Displayed when controlled deceleration on power loss is used
Displayed when the brake control function is used
Displayed when the overvoltage suppression function during deceleration is used
A051 = 01, 02 or
C001 to C007 = 07
A071 = 01, 02
C096 = 01, 02
A097, A098 = 01 to 04 b050 = 01, 02, 03 b120 = 01 b130 = 01, 02
A052 to A059 d004, A072 to A079, A156, A157, C044,
C052, C053
C098 to C100, P140 to P155
A131, A132, A150 to A153 b051 to b054 b121 to b127 b131 to b134
15
Displayed during simple position control is used
P003 = 01
Note: The comma "," in the Display requirements means OR.
d008, P004, P011, P012, P015, P026,
P027, P060 to P073, P075, P077, H050,
H051
User Setting (b037=02)
Displays only the parameters optionally set in U001 to U032.
In addition to U001 to U032, d001, F001, b037, b190 and b191 are displayed.
Data Comparison Display (b037=03)
Displays only the parameters changed from the factory default.
All monitors (d***) and F001, b190 and b191 are always displayed.
5-89 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
12
13
14
15
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
No.
1
2
3
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
30
31
32
26
27
28
29
Parameter No.
d001 to d104
F001
F002
F003
F004
A001
A002
A003
A004
A005
A020
A021
A022
A023
A044
A045
A085 b001 b002 b008 b011 b037 b083 b084 b130 b131 b180 b190 b191
C021
C022
C036
Basic Display (b037=04)
The basic parameters are displayed (factory defaults).
The following parameters are displayed when this function is enabled:
Function name
Monitor Display
Output Frequency Setting
Acceleration Time Setting 1
Deceleration Time Setting 1
RUN Direction Selection
Frequency Reference Selection 1
RUN Command Selection 1
Base Frequency 1
Maximum Frequency 1
FV/FI Selection
Multi-step Speed 1 Reference 0
Multi-step Speed Reference 1
Multi-step Speed Reference 2
Multi-step Speed Reference 3
Control Method 1
Output Voltage Gain 1
RUN Mode Selection
Retry Selection
Allowable Momentary Power Interruption Time
Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Selection
Overvoltage/Overcurrent Restart Standby Time
Display Selection
Carrier Frequency
Initialization Selection
Overvoltage Suppression Function Selection During
Deceleration
Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration
Perform-Initialization/Mode Selection
Password A Setting
Password A Authentication
Multi-function Output Terminal P1/EDM Selection
Multi-function Output Terminal P2 Selection
Multi-function Relay Output (MA, MB) Contact Selection
Monitor Display Only (b037 = 05)
Displays the Monitor Display (b037) for d***.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-90
5
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Display Fixed (DISP)
When "86: DISP" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON, the Digital Operator switches to the display selected by Initial Screen Selection (b038) and other parameters can no longer be displayed.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
Related functions
Data
86: DISP (Display fixed) b038
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5
Password Function
A password can be set for Display Selection (b037) and Soft Lock Selection (b031) to prevent displaying and changing of parameters.
If you forget the set password, no other method is available to cancel the password lock. Exercise due caution when setting a password, because our factory or service station cannot check the password.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Data Description
Default setting
Unit b190 b191 b192
Password A
Setting
Password A
Authentication
Password B
Setting b193
Password B
Authentication
Related functions
0000
0001 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
0000
0001 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
Password function disabled
Set password A for Display Selection
(b037).
This parameter is used to authenticate password A.
Password function disabled
Set password B for Soft Lock Selection
(b031).
This parameter is used to authenticate password B. b031, b037
0000
0000
0000
0000
−
−
−
−
Note 1: 0000 cannot be set as a password.
Note 2: Sixteen characters including 0 to 9, A, b, C, d, E and F (hexadecimals) can be used to set a password.
5-91 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Overview of Password Function
Example) Password A
Password not set (default condition)
b190 = 0000 (input accepted)
b191 = 0000 (input not accepted)
b037 can be changed.
Input "1234" in b190
(password setting).
Input "0000" in b190
(password clear).
Password locked
b190 = 0000 (input not accepted)
b191 = 0000 (input accepted)
b037 cannot be changed.
A password-locked condition.
The value of b037 cannot be changed.
Input "1234" in b191
(password authentication).
Authentication OK
b190 = 1234 (input accepted)
b191 = 1234 (input not accepted)
The power has been reconnected, no operation has been performed for approx. 10 minutes, or the password has been changed.
b037 can be changed.
The condition changes to the above once the password is successfully authenticated. Although the password setting information has not been cleared, the value of b037 can be changed. The password-locked condition is restored automatically if the power is reconnected or no operation is performed for approx. 10 minutes.
5
Password Setting
Password Setting
(1) Set Display Selection (b037)/Soft Lock Selection (b031) according to the target to be protected.
(2) Enter a desired password in Password Setting (b190/b192).(Note that 0000 cannot be used.) bk1k9k0 0k0k0k0
+1
1k2k3k4 1k2k3k4 bk1k9k0.
The blinking digit moves to the left.
−
1 The blinking digit moves to the right.
The dot "." indicates that a password is currently set.
(3) The password-locked condition is obtained. b037/b031 can no longer be changed.
Password Authentication (When a Person Who Knows the Password
Changes the Data of b037/b031)
(4) Enter the password in Password Setting (b191/b193).
bk1k9k1 okokoko 1k2k3k4
Displayed for 1 s.
9kokokd bk1k9k1
1k2k3kf
Displayed for 1 s.
ekrkr
(5) If the password is correct, "Good" is displayed and b037 become editable. If the password is incorrect, "Err" is displayed and the system returns to the original condition (passwordlocked condition in (3)). If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or the power is reconnected, the system automatically returns to the password-locked condition in (3).
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-92
5
5-7 Digital Operator/Operation Functions
Password Change
(6) Perform password authentication. (The password cannot be changed in the passwordlocked condition in (3) ("0000" is displayed).)
(7) Enter a desired password in Password Setting (b190/b192).
bk1k9k0 bk1k9k0.
1k2k3k4
1k2k3k4 akbkckd
0k0k0k0 akbkckd
0k0k0k0 bk1k9k0
(8) When the password is changed, the system automatically switches to the password-locked condition.
Password Clear
(9) Perform password authentication. (The password cannot be cleared in the passwordlocked condition in (3) ("0000" is displayed).)
(10) Enter 0000 in Password Setting (b190/b192).
(11) The system returns to the condition where no password is set (initial condition) and all password information is cleared. bk1k9k0
5-93 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
5-8 Restart Functions
The following explains the operations performed upon restart.
Frequency Matching Restart and Frequency Pull-in Restart
The 3G3MX2 provides two restart methods, frequency matching restart and frequency pull-in restart, which can be selected using the functions described below.
Functions relating to frequency matching restart and frequency pull-in restart
Description
Default setting
Unit b001 b008
C103
Retry Selection
→ Refer to 5-96 page.
Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Restart Selection
→ Refer to 5-97 page.
Reset Restart Selection
→ Refer to 5-101 page.
Selection of restart method upon cutoff of output after detection of momentary power interruption/undervoltage
Selection of restart method upon cutoff of output after detection of overvoltage/ overcurrent
Selection of restart method upon reset
00
00
00
−
−
− b088
Free-run Stop Selection
→ Refer to 5-103 page.
Selection of restart method after cancellation (turning ON and OFF) of freefun stop input
00 −
Both the frequency matching restart and frequency pull-in restart functions are provided to allow for restart without stopping the motor running freely. The Digital Operator displays okokoko
until restart, after output is shut off.
Function
Advantages
Disadvantages
Frequency matching restart
This method restarts the Inverter by detecting frequency based on the motor's residual voltage.
The Inverter can be restarted smoothly.
The Inverter cannot be restarted if the residual voltage is at a certain level or below (in which case the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz).
Frequency pull-in restart
The Inverter starts output at the frequency set in Starting Frequency (b030), and searches for a point where the frequency and voltage are balanced, while holding the current at the setting of Restart Current Level (b028), to restart itself.
If the Inverter trips with this method, reduce the b028 set value.
The Inverter can be restarted regardless of whether or not there is residual voltage.
Shock may occur upon restart.
(The current may surge. If an overcurrent trip occurs, also use Overcurrent Suppression
Function b027.)
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-94
5
5-8 Restart Functions
The major parameters relating to frequency matching restart and frequency pull-in restart are listed below.
For details, refer to the section on each function.
Classification
Parameter
No.
Common
Frequency matching restart
Frequency pull-in restart b003 b007 b028 b029 b030
Function name Data
Restart Standby
Time
Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit Frequency
Setting
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level
0.3 to 100.0
Time until restart
0.00 to 400.0 (1000.)
If the frequency drops to b007 or below during the motor free run, the Inverter restarts at 0
Hz.
0.20 × Rated current to 2.00 ×
Rated current
1.0
0.00
Inverter rated current
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Parameter
0.10 to 30.00
Frequency reduction time
Starting
Frequency at
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Selection
00: Frequency at interruption
01: Maximum frequency
02: Set frequency
Default setting
0.50
00
Unit s
Hz
A s
−
FW input
(forward)
Power supply
Decelerates according to b029. b028
Output current
Inverter output frequency
Motor rotation speed
Frequency selected in b030 b003
5-95 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Restart Upon Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage, Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Whether to trip or restart the Inverter upon momentary power interruption/undervoltage or overvoltage/overcurrent can be selected.
Restart upon Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage, Overvoltage/Overcurrent
When a restart function is selected under Retry Selection (b001), the Inverter restarts repeatedly for the number of times set in b005 in the case of momentary power interruption/ undervoltage, or in b010 in the case of overvoltage/overcurrent, and then trips at the next restart. The Inverter does not trip when unlimited restart is set. Unlimited restart can be set only for Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage Restart (b005).
b004 can be used to select whether the Inverter trips or not when a momentary power interruption or undervoltage occurs while stopped.
When selecting a restart function, set the following restart conditions according to the system.
A desired function can be selected from 0 Hz restart, frequency matching restart, frequency matching deceleration trip, and frequency pull-in restart.
Even when the Inverter is restarting, an E09 (undervoltage) trip occurs if an undervoltage condition continues for 40 seconds.
Parameter
No.
b001 b002 b003 b004 b005
Function name Data Description
Retry Selection
*1*2
Allowable
Momentary Power
Interruption Time
Restart Standby
Time
00
01
02
03
04
0.3 to 25.0
0.3 to 100.0
Trip
0 Hz restart
Frequency matching restart
(example 1)
*3
Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop *3 *4
Frequency pull-in restart
(example 1)
*3
Restarts if the momentary power interruption is within the set time.
(example 1)
Trips if the momentary power interruption is beyond the set time. (example 2)
Time until restart
Momentary Power
Interruption/
Undervoltage Trip
During Stop
Selection
*1
Restart During
Momentary Power
Interruption Count
Selection
00
01
02
00
01
Disabled (Not tripping during stop)
Enabled (Tripping also during stop)
Disabled while the operation is stopped or during a deceleration stop due to turning OFF of the
RUN command.
16 times
Unlimited
Default setting
Unit
00
1.0
1.0
00
00
− s s
−
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-96
5
5-8 Restart Functions
Parameter
No.
Function name Data Description
Default setting
Unit b007 b008 b010 b011 b028 b029 b030
C021 to
C022, C026
Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit Frequency
Setting
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart Selection
0.00 to
400.0
(1000.)
00
01
02
03
04
If the frequency drops to b007 or below while the motor is running freely, the Inverter restarts at 0
Hz. (examples 3, 4)
Trip
0 Hz restart
Frequency matching restart
Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
Frequency pull-in restart
Number of retries for restart upon overvoltage/overcurrent
*5
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart Count
Selection
Overvoltage/
Overcurrent
Restart Standby
Time
1 to 3
0.3 to 100.
Wait time until restart
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Parameter
Starting
Frequency at
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
0.20 × Rated current to
2.00 × Rated current
Current limit level at frequency pull-in restart
0.1 to 3000.
00
01
02
Frequency reduction time at frequency pull-in restart
Frequency at interruption
Maximum frequency
Set frequency
09 UV: Signal during undervoltage
0.00
00
3
1.0
Inverter rated current
0.50
00
−
Hz
−
Time s
A s
−
−
*1.Even when Retry Selection (b001) is set to any restart function (01 to 03) and Momentary Power
Interruption/Undervoltage Trip during Stop Selection (b004) is disabled (00 or 02), a trip still occurs if the momentary power interruption time exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption/ undervoltage time. (Example 2)
*2.Even if a restart function is selected, the Inverter trips when undervoltage remains for 40 seconds or longer.
*3.0 Hz restart may occur in the following cases:
• The output frequency is one-half the base frequency or below
• The induced voltage of the motor attenuates quickly
*4.If an overvoltage/overcurrent trip occurs during declaration, Undervoltage Error E09 is displayed and the motor goes into free-run status. In this case, increase the deceleration time.
*5.Even when a restart operation upon trip is selected, the Inverter continues to trip if the cause of the trip is not yet removed after Restart Standby Time (b003) elapses. In this case, increase the restart standby time.
5-97 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
A timing chart of Frequency Matching Restart (b001 = 02) is shown below.
t0: Momentary power interruption time
t1: Allowable Momentary Power Interruption Time (b002)
t2: Restart Standby Time (b003)
Example 1) When t0 < t1
Power supply
Inverter output
Free run
Motor rotation speed t0 t1
Example 2) When t0 > t1
Power supply
Inverter output t2
Free run
Motor rotation speed t1 t0
Example 3) Motor frequency (rotation speed) > b007
Power supply
Inverter output
Free run b007
Motor frequency
(rotation speed)
0
Frequency matching restart t0 t2
Example 4) Motor frequency (rotation speed) < b007
Power supply
Inverter output
Free run b007
Motor frequency
(rotation speed)
0 t0 t2 0 Hz restart
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-98
5
5-8 Restart Functions
Alarm Signal Output upon Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage during Stop
Use b004 to select whether to enable an alarm signal output in case of momentary power interruption or undervoltage.
An alarm signal output continues while the Inverter control power supply remains.
Alarm Signal Output upon Momentary Power Interruption/Undervoltage during Stop
Example 1) b004 = 00 (Disabled)
Power supply
RUN command
Output frequency
AL output
(alarm signal)
RS input
(reset)
Example 2) b004 = 01 (Enabled)
Power supply
RUN command
Output frequency
5-99
AL output
(alarm signal)
RS input
(reset)
Example 3) b004 = 02 (Disabled also during deceleration stop)
Power supply
RUN command
Output frequency
AL output
(alarm signal)
RS input
(reset)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Reset (RS)
This function resets an Inverter trip.
To reset an Inverter trip, press the STOP/RESET key on the Digital Operator, or turn ON the reset (RS) terminal.
When using the reset terminal, allocate "18: RS" to a multi-function input terminal.
The restart method to be applied after the reset operation can be selected by Reset Restart
Selection (C103). Take note, however, that the Inverter will restart at 0 Hz if Reset Selection
(C102) is set to "03: Trip reset only," regardless of the setting of C103. If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching, extend the Restart Standby Time (b003).
A trip reset time can be selected by Reset Selection (C102). In addition, the reset signal can be applied only to trip reset due to an error.
For the Reset (RS) terminal, only the NO contact setting is effective.
Do not use the reset terminal to stop the Inverter output. The reset operation will clear various data such as electronic thermal function and usage rate counter for regenerative braking, thereby causing damage to the Inverter.
Parameter
No.
Function name b003 b007
Restart Standby
Time
Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit Frequency
Setting b028
Data
0.3 to
100.0
0.00 to
400.0
(1000.)
Description
Time from reset to restart
If the frequency drops to the set frequency or below during the motor free run, the Inverter restarts at 0 Hz.
Frequency Pullin Restart Level
0.20 ×
Rated current to
2.00 ×
Rated current
Current limit level at frequency pull-in restart b029 b030
Frequency Pullin Restart
Parameter
Starting
Frequency at
Frequency Pullin Restart
Selection
0.1 to
3000.
00
01
02
Frequency reduction time at frequency pull-in restart
Frequency at interruption
Maximum frequency
Set frequency
C102 Reset Selection
00
01
02
Trip reset at power-on (example 1)
Normal: Output shut off
Abnormal: Trip reset
Trip reset at power-off (example 2)
Normal: Output shut off
Abnormal: Trip reset
Trip reset at power-on (example 1)
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Trip reset
Default setting
Unit
1.0
0.00
Inverter rated current
0.5
00
00 s
Hz
A s
−
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-100
5
5-8 Restart Functions
Parameter
No.
Function name
C102
C103
Reset Selection
Reset Restart
Selection
C001 to
C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
00
01
02
18
Data
03
Description
Trip reset only (example 1)
Not initializing internal data such as current values upon trip reset (Refer to
"Initialization Setting" on page 5-174.)
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Trip reset
0 Hz restart
Frequency matching restart (example 3)
Frequency pull-in restart (example 4)
RS: Reset
Default setting
Unit
00
00
−
−
−
−
Example 1) Trip reset at power ON (C102 = 00, 02, 03)
RS input
AL output
(alarm signal)
Example 2) Trip reset at power OFF (C102= 01)
RS input
AL output
(alarm signal)
Example 3) Reset enabled when normal (C102 = 00, 01)
Restarts according to C103.
Output frequency
RUN command
RS input
Example 4) Reset disabled when normal (C102 = 02, 03)
Reset is disabled during operation.
Output frequency
RUN command
RS input
5-101 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Example 5) When "01: Frequency matching restart" is selected by Reset Restart Selection
(C103), frequency matching restart can be applied also when the power is reconnected.
If C103 is set to 00 (0 Hz restart), Restart Standby Time (b003) is ignored.
Note, however, that 0 Hz restart may be applied even when frequency matching restart is selected, in the following cases:
The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base frequency
The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting (b007) is set and a frequency below the set frequency is detected.
ON OFF ON
Power supply
FW input
(forward)
Motor rotation speed
ON
Free run
Frequency matching
Reference
The counters used for the Inverter's internal protection will be cleared during reset.
To shut off the Inverter's output via a multi-function input, use the free-run terminal (FRS).
Example 6) Frequency pull-in restart
FW input
(forward)
RS input
Decelerates according to b029.
b028
Output current
Inverter output frequency
Frequency selected in b030
Alarm occurred
Motor rotation speed b003
After an elapse of the time set in Restart Standby Time (b003), output is started from the value set in Starting Frequency at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030). Thereafter, The Inverter decelerates according to Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter (b029) while keeping the output current at the value set in Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028).
When the frequency matches the voltage, the Inverter accelerates again to reach to the original frequency level. If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method, reduce the b028 setting.
5
Reference
If a reset signal is input during the restart wait time, the value of frequency at interruption stored in the Inverter's internal is cleared, resulting in a 0 Hz restart.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-102
5-8 Restart Functions
5
Free-run Stop Function (FRS)
Activating the free-run stop (FRS) function shuts off the Inverter output, letting the motor go into free-run status.
This function is effective when you stop the motor using the mechanical brake such as an electromagnetic. Note that an overcurrent trip may occur if the mechanical brake forces the motor to stop during Inverter output.
Allocate "11: FRS" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007). The motor performs a free-run stop while the FRS terminal is turned ON.
When the FRS terminal is turned ON and then OFF, the Inverter will restart after an elapse of the time set in Restart Standby Time (b003). However, the Inverter will not restart if RUN
Command Selection is set to "Digital Operator" (A002 = 02). To restart the Inverter, input the
RUN command.
As the Inverter output method at restart, 0 Hz restart, frequency matching restart or frequency pull-in restart can be selected by Free-run Stop Selection (b088). (Examples 1, 2, 3)
When Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting (b007) is set, the Inverter will restart at 0 Hz if a frequency below the frequency set here is detected at the time of frequency matching restart.
The setting of this function will be applied to the FRS terminal, and also when the Inverter is reset from free-run status.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name Data Description b088 b003 b007 b028 b029 b030
C001 to C007
Free-run Stop
Selection
00
01
02
0 Hz restart (example 1)
Frequency matching restart
(example 2)
Frequency pull-in restart
(example 3)
Restart Standby
Time
Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit Frequency
Setting
Frequency Pull-in
Restart
Parameter
Starting
Frequency at
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Selection
Multi-function
Input Selection
0.3 to 100.0
0.00 to 400.0
(1000.)
Setting of frequency matching level
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level
0.20 × Rated current to
2.00 × Rated current
Current limit level at frequency pull-in restart
0.1 to 3000.
00
01
02
11
Time until restart
Frequency at interruption
Maximum frequency
Set frequency
FRS: Free-run stop
00
1.0
0.00
INV rated current
0.50
00
−
− s
Hz
A s
−
−
5-103 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Example 1) 0 Hz restart (b088 = 00)
FW input
(forward)
FRS input
Free run
Motor rotation speed 0
0 Hz restart
The Inverter restarts running at 0 Hz regardless of the motor rotation speed. At 0 Hz restart, the restart standby time is ignored.
If the Inverter restarts running at 0 Hz with the motor rotation speed high, an overcurrent trip may occur.
Example 2) Frequency matching restart (b088 = 01)
FW input
(forward)
FRS input
Free run
Motor rotation speed b003
0
Frequency matching restart
When the FRS terminal is turned OFF and the restart standby time elapses, the motor frequency is detected and a frequency pull-in restart is performed without stopping the motor. If an overcurrent trip occurs at frequency matching restart, extend the setting of restart standby time.
Note, however, that 0 Hz restart may be applied even when frequency matching restart is selected, in the following cases:
The output frequency is equal to or lower than 1/2 of the base frequency
The motor induction voltage quickly attenuates
Frequency Matching Lower Limit Frequency Setting (b007) is set and a frequency below the set frequency is detected.
(Example 3) Frequency pull-in restart (b088 = 02)
FW input
(forward)
FRS input
Decelerates according to b029. b028
Output current
5
Inverter output frequency
Frequency selected in b030
Motor rotation speed b003
After an elapse of the time set in Restart Standby Time (b003), output is started from the value set in Starting Frequency at Frequency Pull-in Restart (b030). Thereafter, The Inverter decelerates according to Frequency Pull-in Restart Parameter (b029) while keeping the output current at the value set in Frequency Pull-in Restart Level (b028).
When the frequency matches the voltage, the Inverter accelerates again to reach to the original frequency level.
If an overcurrent trip occurs under this method, reduce the b028 setting.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-104
5-8 Restart Functions
5
Power Recovery Restart Prevention Function (USP)
This function trips the Inverter if the power is supplied when a RUN command is input to the
Inverter. In this case, E13 is displayed.
To reset a trip, perform the reset operation, or turn off the RUN command.(Example 1)
If a trip is reset with the RUN command is kept on, the Inverter will restart operation immediately after the trip is reset. (Example 2)
If the RUN command is turned ON after the power is turned on, the Inverter operates normally.
(Example 3)
Allocate "13: USP" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
13: USP (USP function)
− −
The operations under the power recovery restart prevention function are explained below.
Example 1) Turn ON the power when a RUN command is input
(Reset when the RUN command is turned OFF)
Example 2) Turn ON the power when a RUN command is input
(Reset by Reset (RS))
Power supply
Power supply
FW input
(forward)
FW input
(forward)
ON OFF
ON
USP input ON
USP input ON
RS input
(reset)
RS input
(reset)
AL output
(alarm signal)
Output frequency
AL output
(alarm signal)
Output frequency
Example 3) Turn ON the power and then turn ON the RUN command (normal operation)
Power supply
FW input
(forward)
USP input
OFF
ON
ON
RS input
(reset)
AL output
(alarm signal)
Output frequency
OFF
5-105 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Deceleration Stop at Power-off (Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss Function)
After the power is shut off during operation, this function decelerates the Inverter to a stop while keeping the voltage below the overvoltage level.
You can select from 3 modes in momentary power interruption non-stop selection b050.
This function will not be reset until the operation stops completely. To run the Inverter after power recovery while this function is active, input a STOP command (after turning OFF the
RUN command) and then input a RUN command again.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b050 b051 b052 b053 b054
Controlled
Deceleration on
Power Loss
00: Controlled deceleration on power loss function disabled
01: Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled (deceleration stop)
02: Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled (DC voltage kept constant, without recovery) *1
03: Controlled deceleration on power loss enabled (DC voltage kept constant, with recovery) *1
DC Bus Voltage
Trigger Level of
Ctrl. Decel
*2
Deceleration Hold
Level of Ctrl.
Decel
*2, *3
0.0 to to 1000.
Operation starts when the DC voltage drops to below b051.
0.0 to 1000.
The Inverter starts to decelerate when the overvoltage due to regeneration exceeds b052 after the start of operation.
Deceleration Time of Ctrl. Decel
*4
0.01 to 3600.00
Set the deceleration time under the controlled deceleration on power loss function.
Freq. Drop to start
Ctrl. Decel
*2
0.00 to 10.00 (100.00)
Set the frequency at which the Inverter starts to decelerate, as the difference from the output frequency.
00
220.0/440.0
360.0/720.0
1.0
0.00
−
V
V s
Hz
*1.When b050 = 02 or 03, PI control is performed to keep the internal DC voltage constant. Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain (b133) is increased, if the setting is too large a trip will occur easily. With a smaller proportional gain setting on the other hand, an undervoltage trip will occur due to a drop in voltage immediately after this function starts operating. Response also becomes quicker when the setting of Integral Time (b134) is decreased, but if the setting is too small a trip will occur easily, as well.
*2.Make sure that the set values of b051 and b052 are larger than the undervoltage level (210 V for 200
V class, 410V for 400V class). If undervoltage occurs, this function is disabled. Make sure that b051 is smaller than b052. If the difference between the settings of (b051) and (b052) is large, and setting too large a value for proportional Gain (b133) may cause sudden acceleration immediately after this function starts operating and overcurrent may flow.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-106
5
5-8 Restart Functions
*3.When the Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl. Decel (b052) < the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl.
Decel (b051), the Inverter performs this function by increasing the Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl.
Decel (b052) to the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl. Decel (b051). (Take note that the set values are not changed.) If b052 is smaller than the equivalent incoming voltage (equivalent DC voltage after rectification [incoming voltage × √ 2 ]), this function does not operate and the Inverter cannot decelerate when the power supply is cut off during the operation. (The Inverter will accept neither a STOP command nor frequency reference change until the operation is completed.)Make sure that the b052 setting is higher than the normal incoming voltage or equivalent.
*4.If the Freq. Drop to Start Ctrl. Decel (b054) is too large, an overcurrent trip occurs because of rapid deceleration. If b054 is too small, or if the Deceleration Time of Ctrl. Decel (b053) is too long, an undervoltage trip occurs because of insufficient regeneration power.
Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss (b050 = 01)
After the power is shut off during operation, the Inverter decelerates to a stop while keeping the voltage below the setting of Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl. Decel (b052).
If the power is shut off during operation and the voltage falls below the DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl. Decel (b051), the frequency deceleration width decreases to the Freq. Drop to Start Ctrl.
Decel (b054), and then the Inverter decelerates for the Deceleration time of Ctrl. Decel (b053).
If an overvoltage condition occurs (the level of Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl. Decel (b052) is exceeded) due to regeneration while the Inverter is decelerating, this function does not operate and the Inverter will not decelerate until the overvoltage condition is reset.
Main circuit PN-PN voltage
VPN (V) b052 b051
Undervoltage level
Time (sec)
Output frequency
(Hz) b054 b053
Time (sec)
5-107 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-8 Restart Functions
Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss DC Voltage Constant Control (b050 = 02: Without Recovery, b050 = 03: With Recovery)
If a momentary power interruption or main circuit DC voltage drop occurs during operation, the
Inverter decelerates while keeping the main circuit DC voltage at the value set in Deceleration
Hold Level of Ctrl. Decel (b052).
This function will be started when the following conditions are all satisfied:
b050 = 02 or 03
The Inverter is operating. (This function is disabled during trip/undervoltage/stop.)
The control power supply is momentarily interrupted, or the main circuit DC voltage falls below the setting of DC Bus Voltage Trigger Level of Ctrl. Decel b051.
If the time of momentary power interruption is short, the Inverter can continue to run without shutting off the output. However, if undervoltage occurs because of momentary power interruption, the Inverter immediately shuts off the output, and stops operating this function.
The subsequent power recovery depends on the Retry Selection b001.
With b050 = 03, the Inverter can be restored to normal operation, if a momentary power interruption occurs and incoming voltage recovers before the output is shut off. Note that the
Inverter may decelerate to a stop, depending on the b051 setting. Below are the details.
b050
02 (without recovery)
03 (with recovery) b051 b052 >Main Circuit DC Voltage at
Incoming voltage recovery b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery b052 > Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery b052 < Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery
Operation
Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant
Deceleration stop (normal operation)
(example 2)
Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant control) (example 1)
Operation (normal operation) (example 2)
If operation of this function results in deceleration stop, the Inverter is forced to stop, even if the FW (forward) command is
ON. To restart the Inverter, make sure that the incoming voltage has recovered, and input the FW (forward) command again.
Example 1)
Main circuit PN-PN voltage
Vpn (V) b052
5
Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery b051
DC voltage kept constant
Time
Output frequency
(Hz) b050 = 02, 03 (deceleration stop)
Time
Incoming voltage recovery
The main circuit DC voltage level, while this function is activated, may fall below the b052 set value depending on the proportional gain and integral time settings.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-108
5
5-8 Restart Functions
Example 2)
Main circuit PN-PN voltage
Vpn (V)
Output frequency
(Hz)
Main circuit DC voltage at incoming voltage recovery
DC voltage kept constant b050 = 03 (operation)
Time b052 b051 b050 = 02 (deceleration stop)
Time
Incoming voltage recovery
5-109 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections,
Warnings and Various Output Signals
The following explains the protective functions such as warning signals.
Electronic Thermal Function
This function calculates the rise in motor temperature in the Inverter based on the output current, output frequency, motor characteristics and other data, to protect the motor against overheating.
Provides the most appropriate protection characteristics, taking into account the decline of the motor cooling capability at a low speed.
Outputs an alarm before the electronic thermal trips.
The time limit characteristics of the electronic thermal vary depending on the setting of Heavy
Load/Light Load Selection (b049).
Electronic Thermal Level
Parameter
No.
b012/b212
Function name
Electronic Thermal Level 1/2
Data range
0.20 × Rated current to
1.00 × Rated current
Default setting
Inverter rated current
Unit
A
5
Example 1) Heavy load setting
Alarm time (s)
Example 2) Light load setting
Alarm time (s)
60
3.0
0 109 % 150 % 200 %
Motor current (A)
(ratio relative to b012/b212)
60
0.5
0
116 % 120 % 150 %
Motor current (A)
(ratio relative to b012/b212)
Electronic Thermal Characteristics
Although only one type of electronic thermal characteristic curve is available each for heavy load and light load, the frequency characteristics can be switched by Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection (b013/b213).
A standard motor requires reduced load (current) because the lower the motor rotation speed is, the lower the cooling capacity of its self-cooling fan gets. When the frequency drops, the reduction multiple also decreases and the thermal level (current) drops, as well.
The reduced torque characteristics depend on the heat radiation of a standard motor.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name b013/b213
Electronic
Thermal
Characteristics
Selection 1/2
Data
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
01 −
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-110
5
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Reduced Torque Characteristics
Multiplied by the time limit characteristics set in b012/212 for each frequency.
Reduction multiple
×
1.0
× 0.8
× 0.6
0
0
5
6
16
20
50
60
Base frequency
Inverter output frequency (Hz)
Example) 3G3MX2-**, base frequency 60 Hz, light load setting (rating 9.6 A = b012)
60 Hz (reduction multiple: × 1.0)
Alarm time (s)
20 Hz (reduction multiple: × 0.8)
Alarm time (s)
60
0.5
0
Motor
11.1 11.5
14.4 [A]
(116%)(120%) (150%) current (A)
60
3.0
0
8.9
9.2
11.5 [A]
(92.8%)(96%) (120%)
Motor current (A)
Constant Torque Characteristics
Do not skip this setting when using a constant torque motor.
Reduction multiple
× 1.0
× 0.8
0 3 60
Inverter output frequency (Hz)
Example) 3G3MX2-**, base frequency 60 Hz, heavy load setting (rating 8.0 A = b012)
60 Hz (reduction multiple:
×
1.0)
Alarm time (s)
Less than 3 Hz (reduction multiple: × 0.8)
Alarm time (s)
60
3.0
0 8.72 12 16 [A]
(109%)(150%) (200%)
Motor current (A)
60
3.0
0 7.0
9.6
12.8 [A]
(87.2%)(120%) (160%)
Motor current (A)
5-111 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Free Setting
Desired electronic thermal characteristics (reduction multiple characteristics) can be set according to the load for the purpose of protecting the motor.
The setting range is shown below.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name b015 b017 b019 b016/b018/ b020
Data
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 1
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 2
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 3
Free-electronic
Thermal Current
1/2/3
0 to Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 2
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 1 to
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 3
Free-electronic Thermal Frequency 2 to
400. (1000.)
0.0 to Rated current
Set current values for each break point.
0.
0.00
Hz
A
Reference
If the rated current value is set to (b016), (b018) and (b020), the reduction multiple becomes
× 1.0.
5
Reduction multiple
× 1.0
×
0.8
Output current value (A) b020 b018 b016
0 3 400
0 b015 b017 b019 A004/A204
Maximum frequency (Hz)
Inverter output frequency (Hz)
Example) 3-phase 200 V, 1.5 kW (CT rating 8 A)
b012 = 8 (A), b015 = 30 (Hz), b016 = 8 (A)
Since the reduction multiple is 8/8 = 1.0, the trip characteristic at 30 Hz is 60 s at 12 A.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-112
5
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Thermal Warning
This function outputs an alarm signal before electronic thermal overload protection is activated.
The warning level can be set in C061.
Allocate "13: THM" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Multifunction Relay Output Function Selection (C026).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C061
C021 to C022
C026
Electronic
Thermal Warning
Level
0.
The Inverter does not operate.
1. to 100.
*1
Set a thermal warning signal output level.
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
13: THM (Thermal warning)
Default setting
90.
−
Unit
%
−
*1.Set a percentage relative to the electronic thermal multiplication value. When the value reaches 100%,
Overload Trip (E05) occurs.
5-113 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Overload Limit/Overload Warning
Overload Limit
The Inverter monitors the motor current during acceleration or constant speed operation and lowers output frequency automatically when the motor current reaches to the overload limit level.
This function prevents an overcurrent trip caused by excessive moment of inertia during acceleration, or caused by sporadic load fluctuations during constant speed operation.
You can set 2 types of overload limit functions in b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026.
To switch between b021/b022/b023 and b024/b025/b026, allocate "39: OLR" to a multifunction input terminal and then turn it ON/OFF.
The overload limit level sets a current value for this function to work.
The overload limit parameter sets a time of deceleration from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz.
When this function operates while the Inverter is accelerating, the acceleration time becomes longer than the set time.
When the selected control method is sensorless vector control and "03: Enabled during acceleration/constant speed (accelerated during regeneration)" is selected for b021/b024, the frequency will increase if current exceeding the overload limit level flows during regeneration operation.
If the setting of Overload Limit Parameter b023/b026 is too small, an overvoltage trip may occur because of regenerative energy from the motor even during acceleration. This is due to automatic deceleration under this function.
Make the following adjustments if this function operates during acceleration and the frequency doesn't reach the target level.
Increase the acceleration time (refer to "Acceleration/Deceleration Time" on page 5-24).
Increase the overload limit level (b022/b025).
Parameter
No.
b021/b024 b221 b022/b025 b222
Function name
Overload Limit 1
Selection/
Overload Limit 1
Selection 2
Overload Limit 2
Selection
Overload Limit 1 Level/
Overload Limit 1 Level 2
Overload Limit 2 Level b023/b026 b223
C001 to C007
Overload Limit 1 Parameter/
Overload Limit 1 Parameter 2
Overload 2 Limit Parameter
Multi-function Input
Selection
Data
Default setting
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/constant speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled during acceleration/ constant speed (accelerated during regeneration)
Current value at which the overload limit actuates
Heavy load (b049 = 00):
0.20 × Rated current to 2.0 × Rated current
Light load (b049 = 01):
0.20 × Rated current to 1.5 × Rated current
0.1 to 3000.
Deceleration time at which the overload limit actuates
39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
01
Heavy load: Rated current ×
1.50
Light load:
Rated current ×
1.20
1.0
−
Unit
−
A s
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-114
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
5-115
Overload warning level b022/b025 b222
Output current
Maximum frequency
A004/A204
Deceleration set by the overload limit parameter
Target frequency
F001
Inverter output frequency b023/b026/b223
Overload Warning
If the applied load is large, the Inverter can output an overload warning signal before an overload trip occurs.
This helps prevent mechanical damage due to an overload in the carrier machine, or an operation line stop due to overload protection of the Inverter.
Allocate "03: OL (Overload warning)" or "26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)" to any Multi-function
Output Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection
(C026). (Two types of overload warning signals can be output.)
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C040
C041/C241
C111
C021 to C022
C026
Overload Warning
Signal Output
Mode Selection
Overload Warning
Level 1/2
Overload 1
Warning Level 2
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
00: Enabled in acceleration/deceleration and constant speed operation
01: Enabled in constant speed operation
0.0
The Inverter does not operate.
0.0 to 2.0 × Rated current
Outputs an OL signal when the overload warning level is reached.
0.0
The Inverter does not operate.
0.0 to 2.0 × Rated current
Outputs an OL2 signal when the overload warning level is reached.
03: OL (Overload warning)
26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
Default setting
01
Rated current
× 1.15
Rated current
× 1.15
−
Unit
−
A
A
−
Overload limit level b022/b025
Overload warning level
C041/C111
Output current
OL/OL2 output
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Overcurrent Suppression Function
This function suppresses the overcurrent caused by a steep current rise increase in an impact load, etc.
Acceleration is stopped temporarily when the output current reaches approx. 180% of the rated current.
Parameter
No.
Function name b027
Overcurrent
Suppression
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Data
Default setting
00
Unit
−
If the Inverter is used with an elevating machine, etc. disable this function. The system may "slip and fall" due to loss of torque.
If the acceleration time is too short, an overcurrent trip may occur because the current increases quickly.
Output current
180% of the rated current
5
Time
Output frequency
Time
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-116
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration
This function helps avoid an overvoltage trip due to regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration.
Whether to enable or disable this function can be selected by Overvoltage Suppression
Function Selection During Deceleration (b130). If "01: Enabled (DC voltage kept constant)" is selected, the Inverter decelerates automatically in order to keep the voltage rise in the main circuit DC unit at the start of deceleration, to the value of Overvoltage Suppression Level
During Deceleration (b131).
If "02: Enabled (Acceleration enabled)" is selected, the Inverter will accelerate according to the setting of Overvoltage Suppression Parameter (b132) when the voltage of the main circuit
DC unit rises at the start of deceleration and exceeds the value of Overvoltage Suppression
Level During Deceleration (b131). After that, when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the b131 level, the Inverter starts deceleration again.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b130 b131 b132 b133 b134
Overvoltage
Suppression
Function Selection
During
Deceleration
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC voltage kept constant)
(example 1)
*1
02: Enabled (Acceleration enabled)
(example 2)
330. to 395. (200 V class)
660. to 790. (400 V class)
Overvoltage
Suppression Level
During
Deceleration
*2
Overvoltage
Suppression
Parameter
Overvoltage
Suppression
Proportional Gain
Setting
Overvoltage
Suppression
Integral Time
Setting
0.10 to 30.00
Set the acceleration rate applied when this function is enabled.
0.00 to 5.00
Proportional gain for DC voltage constant control (b130 = 01 only)
0.0 to 150.0
Proportional gain for DC voltage constant control (b130 = 01 only)
00
380.
760.
1.00
0.20
1.0
−
V
V s
−
S
*1.When b130 = 01, PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant.
Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain (b133) is increased, control tends to be divergent and this may easily lead to a trip. Response also becomes quicker when the setting of Integral Time (b134) is decreased, but if the setting is too small the same situation may occur.
*2.If the value set in b131 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent, the motor may not be stopped.
5-117 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Example 1) DC voltage kept constant (b130 = 01)
Main circuit DC voltage (V)
Overvoltage
Suppression Level
(b131)
Output frequency (Hz) Time (s)
Start deceleration
Constant control at DC voltage
Example 2) Acceleration enabled (b130 = 02)
Main circuit DC voltage (V)
Overvoltage
Suppression Level
(b131)
Time (s)
Output frequency (Hz) Time (s)
Start deceleration
Accelerates according to b132.
Time (s)
With this function enabled, the actual deceleration time may be longer than the set value.
Particularly with b130 = 02, if b131 is set too low, the Inverter may not decelerate.
Even if this function is enabled, an overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate and load condition.
When using this function, the Inverter may reduce frequency depending on the moment of inertia of motor load, and takes a long time to stop.
If the value set in b131 is lower than the incoming voltage or equivalent, the motor may not be stopped.
When (b130 = 01), PI control works to keep the internal DC voltage constant.
Though quicker response is expected when the setting of Proportional Gain (b133) is increased, if the setting is too large a trip will occur easily. Response also becomes quicker when the setting of Integral Time (b134) is decreased, but if the setting is too small, a trip will occur easily, as well.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-118
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
Alarm Signal (AL)
Upon detecting an overcurrent, overvoltage or other error, the Inverter stops the output and outputs an alarm signal (AL). This is called a "trip."
When the Inverter is reset, the trip status is reset and the alarm signal also turns OFF. A trip can be reset by pressing the STOP/RESET key or turning the reset terminal ON and then OFF.
(Some trips may not be reset using the reset terminal depending on their cause. In this case, the power must be reconnected. )
Allocate "05: AL (Alarm output)" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to
C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection (C026). (This function is allocated to the relay in default setting.)
The relay is based on SPDT contact. For details, refer to "Multi-function Output Terminal
Contact Selection" on page 5-34.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
05: AL (Alarm output)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Alarm occurred
RUN command FW, RV
Free run
Motor rotation speed
RS (reset) input
AL output
(alarm signal)
Operation
Stop Operation
Error occurred
Stop Error occurred
Reset
Alarm
5-119 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
External Trip (EXT)
Use this function to trip the Inverter via an error signal generated from a peripheral system. In this case, allocate "12: EXT" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
When the EXT terminal is turned ON, E12 is displayed and the Inverter trips to shut off the output.
When the Inverter has tripped, indicating E12, the trip will not be reset even if the error signal from external equipment is reset (EXT terminal is turned OFF).
To reset the trip, perform the reset operation or turn the power off and on again.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C001 to C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
12: EXT (External trip)
− −
Do not turn on the EXT terminal after shutting off the power. The fault monitor data may not be stored correctly.
RUN command FW, RV
EXT terminal input
Motor rotation speed
Free run 5
RS (reset) input
AL output
(alarm signal)
Thermistor Trip Function
This function enables thermal protection of the external equipment (e.g. motor) if its internal thermistor is connected to the Inverter.
Connect a PTC thermistor. The Inverter will be tripped (E35) when the resistance of the PTC thermistor exceeds approximately 3 k Ω .
To trip the Inverter at less than 3 k Ω , increase the value of C085. To trip the Inverter at greater than 3 k Ω , decrease the value of C085.
Wire the external thermistor between control terminals S5/TH and SC and allocate TH to Multifunction Input Terminal S5 (C005 = 19: TH).
Set the following functions according to the specifications of your thermistor.
When this function is used, keep the cable length between the motor and Inverter within 20 m.
Since the current flowing through the thermistor is weak, consider separating the wires, etc. to prevent noise due to motor current.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
C085
C005
Thermistor
Adjustment
Multi-function
Input Selection
0.0 to 200.0.
The gain of input voltage is fine-tuned.
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection)
100.0
02(CF1)
Note: If "Thermistor" is allocated to C005 but no thermistor is connected, a trip occurs.
Unit
%
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-120
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
Signal During RUN (RUN)
A signal is output by a multi-function output terminal or multi-function relay output terminal while the Inverter is operating.
This signal turns ON only with Inverter output, and it is not output even when a RUN command is issued by setting the frequency to 0 Hz. (The RUN lamp is lit when a RUN command is input.)
Allocate "00: RUN (During RUN)" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to
C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection (C026).
Also outputs a signal during DC injection braking.
Below is the time chart. The RUN signal will remain ON until the motor stops, even when the
RUN command is turned OFF.
Parameter
No.
Function name
C021 to
C022
C026
Data
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
00: RUN (During RUN)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Output frequency
FW input
(forward)
RUN output
5-121 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Frequency Arrival Signal (FA1 to FA5)
When the output frequency reaches the set level, a frequency arrival signal is output.
Allocate "01: FA1 (constant speed reached)," "02: FA2 (set frequency min. reached)," "06: FA3
(set frequency only)," "24: FA4 (set frequency min. reached 2)," or "25: FA5 (set frequency only
2)" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Multi-function Relay
Output Function Selection (C026).
Below is the hysteresis of the frequency arrival signal:
ON
OFF
: (Set frequency) − (1% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
: (Set frequency) − (2% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
If "06: FA3" or "25: FA5" is set, however, operation during acceleration is:
ON
OFF
: (Set frequency) − (1% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
: (Set frequency) − (2% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
During deceleration
ON
OFF
: (Set frequency) + (1% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
: (Set frequency) − (2% of the maximum frequency) [Hz]
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C042/C045
C043/C046
C021 to C022
C026
Arrival Frequency
During
Acceleration/
Arrival Frequency
During
Acceleration 2
Arrival Frequency
During
Deceleration/
Arrival Frequency
During
Deceleration 2
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
0.0
Does not output arrival signal during acceleration.
0.01 to 400.0 (1000.)
Outputs arrival signal during acceleration.
0.0
Does not output arrival signal during deceleration.
0.01 to 400.0 (1000.)
Outputs arrival signal during deceleration.
01: FA1 (Constant speed reached)
02: FA2 (Set frequency min. reached)
06: FA3 Set frequency only)
24: FA4 (Set frequency min. reached 2)
25: FA5 (Set frequency only 2)
Default setting
0.00
0.00
−
Unit
Hz
Hz
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-122
5
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Constant speed reached (01: FA1)
This signal is output when the frequency reaches the level set by Frequency Setting (F001,
A020, A220) or any of Multi-step Speed References 1 to 15 (A021 to A035).
f on f off
Set frequency
Output frequency
FA1 output fon: 1% of the maximum frequency foff: 2% of the maximum frequency
Example) Maximum frequency fmax = 120 (Hz)
Set frequency fset = 60 (Hz)
fon = 120 × 0.01 = 1.2 (Hz)
foff = 120 × 0.02 = 2.4 (Hz)
During acceleration: ON at 60 − 1.2 = 58.8 (Hz)
During deceleration: OFF at 60 × 2.4 = 57.6 (Hz)
Set frequency min. reached (02: FA2, 24: FA4)
This signal is output when the frequency exceeds the level set by Arrival Frequency During
Acceleration (C042/C045) or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration (C043/C046).
C042/C045 f on
Set frequency
C043/C046 f off
FA2/FA4 output fon: 1% of the maximum frequency foff: 2% of the maximum frequency
Set frequency only (06: FA3, 25: FA5)
This signal is output only when the frequency corresponds to the level set by Arrival Frequency
During Acceleration (C042/C045) or Arrival Frequency During Deceleration (C043/C046).
C042/C045 f off f on
Output frequency f on f off
C043/C046
FA3/FA5 output fon: 1% of the maximum frequency foff: 2% of the maximum frequency
5-123 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
RUN Time/Power ON Time Over (RNT/ONT)
The RUN time/power ON time over (RNT/ONT) signal is output when the total sum of the
Inverter power ON time and RUN time exceeds the time set in Power ON Time Level (b034).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data b034
RUN Time/Power
ON Time Level
0.
Function disabled
1. to 9999.
Set in increments of 10 hours (10 to 99,990 hours).
1000 to 6553
Set in increments of 100 hours (100,000 to
655,350 hours).
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
Related functions
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power ON time over) d016, d017
Default setting
0.
−
Unit
−
−
5
RUN Time Over (RNT)
Allocate "11: RNT (RUN time over)" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections (C021 to
C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection (C026).
Set Power ON Time Level (b034).
Power ON Time Over (ONT)
Allocate "12: ONT (Power ON time over)" to any Multi-function Output Terminal Selections
(C021 to C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection (C026).
Set Power ON Time Level (b034).
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-124
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
0 Hz (ZS)
This function outputs a detection signal when the Inverter output frequency drops to below the level set by 0 Hz Detection Level (C063).
This function is enabled when "21: ZS (0 Hz)" is allocated to any Multi-function Output Terminal
Selections (C021 to C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection (C026).
Although this function normally operates according to the Inverter output frequency, during simple position control it operates according to the motor frequency.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C063
C021 to C022
C026
0 Hz Detection Level
0.00 to 100.0
Set a frequency to be detected as 0 Hz.
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function Selection
21: ZS (0 Hz)
Default setting
0.00
−
Unit
Hz
−
Output frequency
C063
ZS output
RUN command
ON
ON
ON
Output Signal Logic Operation (LOG1 to LOG3)
This function performs output signal logic operations inside the Inverter. "No" (not assigned),
62, 63, and logic operation results (LOG1 to LOG3) cannot be selected.
Three types of operators, AND, OR and XOR, can be selected.
Output signal 1
Output signal 2
5-125
LOGx (AND)
LOGx (OR)
LOGx (XOR)
The setting parameters vary depending on the logic output signal selected.
Refer to the following table to set the necessary parameters.
Selected signal
33: Logic operation output 1 (LOG1)
34: Logic operation output 2 (LOG2)
35: Logic operation output 3 (LOG3)
Operand 1 selection
C142
C145
C148
Operand 2 selection
C143
C146
C149
Operator selection
C144
C147
C150
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Example) To output a logic output 1 (LOG1) signal through AND operation of RUN signal (00:
RUN) and Set frequency min. reached (02: FA2) to multi-function output terminal P2
Multi-function Output Terminal P2 Selection (C022): 33 (LOG1)
Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 1 (C142) : 00 (RUN)
Logic Output Signal 1 Selection 2 (C143) : 02 (FA2)
Logic Output Signal 1 Operator Selection (C144) : 00 (AND)
RUN
FA2
LOG1
Parameter
No.
C142
C145
C148
C143
C146
C149
Function name
Logic Output Signal
Selection 1
Selection 2
*1
Logic Output Signal
*2
00 to 63
(Except 33 to 35, 62, 63, and
"no".)
Data
C144
C147
C150
Logic Output Signal
Operator Selection
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function Selection
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
33: LOG1: Logic operation output 1
34: LOG2: Logic operation output 2
35: LOG3: Logic operation output 3
*1.Select operand 1.
*2.Select operand 2.
Default setting
00
00
00
−
Unit
−
−
−
−
5
Capacitor Life Warning (WAC)
This function estimates service life of the capacitor on the PCB, based on the Inverter's internal temperature and ON time.
Life assessment monitor d022 shows the status of this signal.
Parameter
No.
C021 to C022
C026
Function name
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
Data
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-126
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
Cooling Fan Operation
You can set whether to operate the Inverter's cooling fan constantly or only during Inverter operation.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b092 b093
Cooling Fan
Operation
Cooling Fan Total
Operation Time
Clear
00: Always
01: Only during operation
(However, the cooling fan operates for 5 minutes after power-on, and for 5 minutes after the Inverter stops.)
02: Depends on the fin temperature
00: Total operation time count
01: Clear total operation time
(After this function is executed, 01 is reset to 00.)
01
00
−
−
Note 1: If a momentary power interruption occurs or the power is cut off while the cooling fan is operating, the cooling fan stops temporarily and will resume operation automatically once the power recovers.
Note 2: Do not clear the total operation time except when the cooling fan is replaced, because doing so will disable the correct Life Assessment Monitor of the cooling fan (d022).
Cooling Fan Life Signal (WAF)
Set the ambient temperature in the environment where the Inverter is used, in b075. Estimate the life of the cooling from the total operation time and set ambient temperature and have a signal output when the replacement timing arrives.
It is recommended that the cooling fan be checked for clogging, etc. or replaced when this signal is output.
Life Assessment Monitor (d022) shows the status of this signal.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data b075
Ambient
Temperature
− 10. to 50.
Set the ambient temperature in the use environment.
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
Related functions
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning signal) b092, d022
Default setting
40.
−
Unit
° C
−
5-127 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Communication Disconnection Detection Signal (NDc)
Enabled only when Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU) is selected for RS485 communication.
If a reception timeout error occurs, this signal is output until reception of the next data.
Set a time before reception timeout in Communication Error Timeout Time(C077).
For details, refer to Chapter 6, "Communication Function".
External controller
Inverter
Monitor timer
Communication Error Timeout
(C077)
Communication error (NDc) output
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C077
C021 to C022
C026
Communications
Error Timeout
Time
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
0.00 to 99.99
Set a time before reception timeout.
32: NDc (Communication disconnection detection)
Default setting
0.00
−
Unit s
−
5
Starting Contact Signal (FR)
While the Inverter is receiving the RUN command, a starting contact signal is output.
This signal is output regardless of the setting of RUN Command Selection (A002).
If inputs FW and RV are simultaneously turned on, the Inverter stops.
Default setting
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
41: FR (Starting contact signal) −
Unit
−
Forward command (FW)
Reverse command (RV)
Starting contact (FR) output
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-128
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Fin Overheat Warning (OHF)
This function monitors the Inverter's internal cooling fin temperature and outputs a signal when the temperature exceeds the Cooling Fin Overheat Warning Level (C064).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C064
C021 to C022
C026
Cooling Fin
Overheat Warning
Level
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
0. to 110.
Set a temperature to output the overheat warning signal.
42: OHF (Fin overheat warning)
Default setting
100.
−
Unit
° C
−
5
Low Current Signal (LOC)
This signal is output when output current falls below the Low Current Detection Level (C039).
Whether this signal is always output during operation or only in constant speed operation can be selected by Low Current Signal Output Mode Selection (C038).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
C038
Low Current Signal
Output Mode
Selection
00: Enabled during acceleration/ deceleration and constant speed.
01: Enabled only during constant speed*
0.0 to 2.0 × Rated current
Set a low current signal output level.
01 −
C039
C021 to C022
C026
Low Current Detection
Level
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
43: LOC (Low current signal)
Rated current
−
A
−
* When 01 (control circuit terminal block) is selected for Frequency Reference Selection 1 (A001), constant speed may not be recognized due to sampling. In this case, set C038 to 00 (enabled during acceleration/deceleration and constant speed) or increase the value set in Analog Input Filter (A016).
Output current (A)
Low Current Signal
Detection Level
(C039)
ON Low current (LOC) output ON
5-129 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Operation Ready (IRDY)
This signal is output when the Inverter becomes ready for operation (ready to receive the RUN command).
Even if a RUN command is input while this signal is not output, the Inverter will not operate.
If this signal is not output, check if the input power supply voltage (R, S, T) is within the rated range.
Parameter
No.
C021 to C022
C026
Function name Data
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
50: IRDY (Operation ready)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
Signal During Forward Operation (FWR)
This signal is output while the Inverter is running forward.
While the Inverter is running in reverse, or when stopped, this signal is turned off.
Parameter
No.
C021 to C022
C026
Function name Data
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
51: FWR (During forward operation)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-130
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
5
Signal During Reverse Operation (RVR)
This signal is output while the Inverter is running in reverse.
While the Inverter is running forward, or when stopped, this signal is turned off.
Default setting
Parameter
No.
C021 to C022
C026
Function name Data
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
52: RVR (During reverse operation) −
Forward
Unit
−
Output frequency
(Hz)
Reverse
During forward operation
(FWR) output
During reverse operation
(RVR) output
Fatal Fault Signal (MJA)
In addition to an Alarm output (05: AL), this signal is output separately if any of the following trips occurs.
This signal applies to a trip caused by the hardware.
4
5
6
No.
1
2
3
Error code
E08:
E10:
E11:
E14:
E22:
E25:
Description
EEPROM error
Current detector error
CPU error
Grounding protection
CPU communication error
Main circuit error
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5-131 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Window Comparator ( WCFV/WCFI) (Disconnection Detection FVdc/FIdc)
The Inverter activates the window comparator output when the FV/FI analog input value is within the upper and lower limit levels of the window comparator. Analog inputs such as disconnection detection can be monitored on a desired level.
Hysteresis widths can be set for the window comparator upper and lower limit levels.
Levels and hysteresis widths can be set separately for individual FV/FI inputs.
The analog value to be adopted upon WCFV/WCFI output can be fixed to a desired value. Set values in FV/FI Disconnection Operation Levels (b070/b071). If "no" is set, the analog input value will be directly reflected.
FVdc/FIdc outputs are the same as WCFV/WCFI, respectively.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data range
Default setting
Unit b060 b063 b061 b064 b062 b065 b070 b071
C021 to C022
C026
Window Comparator
FV Upper Limit Level
Window Comparator
FI Upper Limit Level
Window Comparator
FV Lower Limit Level
Window Comparator
FI Lower Limit Level
Window Comparator
FV Hysteresis Width
Window Comparator
FI Hysteresis Width
Analog Operation
Level at FV
Disconnection
Analog Operation
Level at FI
Disconnection
Lower limit level + Hysteresis width
2 (0 min.) to 100.
Set an upper limit level.
0 to Upper limit level - Hysteresis width × 2 (100 max.)
Set an upper limit level.
0 to (Upper limit level - Lower limit level) / 2 (10 max.)
Set a hysteresis width for the upper and lower limit levels.
0. to 100./no (ignored)
Set the analog value to be adopted upon WCFV/WCFI (FVdc/FIdc) output.
×
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function
Selection
27: FVdc (Analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIdc (Analog FI disconnection detection)
54: WCFV (Window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (Window comparator FI)
100.
0.
0.
no
−
%
%
%
−
−
Note: The window comparator upper/lower level settings have nothing to do with the external frequency start/end settings.
Set the voltage limits as percentages [%] corresponding to 0 to 10 V, and current limits as percentages [%] corresponding to 0 to 20 mA.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-132
5
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
FV/FI input
Max (100%)
Hysteresis Width
(b062, b065)
Analog value adopted
Window Comparator
Upper Limit Level
(b060/b063)
Analog Operating Level on Disconnection
( b070/b071)
Window Comparator
Lower Limit Level
(b061/b064) Min(FV/FI: 0%)
WCFV/WCFI output
FVDc/FIDc output
Analog Input value
Reference
If this function is used to detect a disconnection, set the disconnection detection level to the window comparator upper limit level.
(Normally a bandwidth exceeding the upper limit value is used and once the upper limit value is breached, a disconnection is detected.)
Frequency Command Source (FREF)
This signal is output when Frequency Reference is set to Digital Operator (A001 = 02).
The signal is turned OFF when Frequency Reference is not set to Digital Operator.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
58: FREF (Frequency command source)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
RUN Command Source (REF)
This signal is output when RUN Command is set to Digital Operator (A002 = 02).
The signal is turned OFF when RUN Command is not set to Digital Operator.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
59: REF (RUN command source)
Default setting
−
5-133
Unit
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-9 Functions Relating to Protections, Warnings and Various Output Signals
Motor 2 Selection (SETM)
This signal is output when the multi-functional input SET terminal is turned ON and Motor 2 control (Motor 2) is selected.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
C021 to C022
C026
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-134
5-10 Brake Settings
5-10 Brake Settings
The following explains the functions relating to brake control.
5
DC Injection Braking (DB)
DC injection braking can be applied to the motor depending on the load.
DC injection braking is performed in one of two methods: external DC injection braking using a multi-function input terminal, and internal DC injection braking performed automatically when starting/stopping. Even if DC injection braking is used, however, the motor may not stop depending on the moment of inertia of the motor load.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
A051
A052
A053
A054
A057
A055
A056
A058
A059
C001 to C007
Internal DC
Injection Braking
Selection
Internal DC
Injection Braking
Frequency
DC Injection
Braking Delay
Time
DC Injection
Braking Power
Startup DC Injection
Braking Power
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Enabled
(Operates only at the set frequency.)
0.00 to 60.00
When internal DC injection braking is enabled, DC injection braking starts if the frequency drops to below the set level while the Inverter is stopped.
0.0 to 5.0
Delay time after the DC injection braking time is reached or DB terminal turns ON until DC injection braking is started.
Heavy load (b049 = 00) 0. to 100.
Light load (b049 = 01) 0. to 70.
0: Weak (zero current) to 100: Strong
(rated current)
DC Injection
Braking Time
DC Injection
Braking Edge/
Level Selection
0.0 to 60.0
This function becomes effective for edge operation of external DC injection braking or when internal DC injection braking is set.
00: Edge operation (Examples 1-a to 6-a)
01: Level operation (Examples 1-b to 6-b)
Startup Internal
DC Injection
Braking Time
DC Injection
Braking Carrier
Frequency
Multi-function
Input Selection
0.0 to 60.0
This function becomes effective when internal DC injection braking is performed.
When the RUN command is turned ON,
DC injection braking is started.
Heavy load (b049 = 00) 2.0 to 15.0
Light load (b049 = 01) 2.0. to 10.0
07: DB (External DC injection braking)
Default setting
00
0.50
0.0
50.
0.
0.5
01
0.0
5.0/2.0
−
Unit
−
Hz s
%
% s
− s kHz
−
5-135 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-10 Brake Settings
DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency
This function can be set using DC Injection Braking Carrier Frequency (A059). Note that setting a 5 kHz or higher frequency automatically reduces the braking power.
Refer to the DC injection braking power limiter shown below.
Maximum braking force (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
(75)
(46)
(34)
(22)
(10)
0 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
DC injection braking carrier frequency
(kHz)
DC injection braking power limiter
External DC Injection Braking
Allocate "07: DB (External DC injection braking)" to any Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
DC injection braking is applied when the DB terminal is turned ON/OFF, regardless of Internal
DC Injection Braking Selection (A051).
Set a braking power level in DC Injection Braking Power (A054).
If DC Injection Braking Delay Time (A053) is set, the Inverter output is shut off during the set time period and the motor goes into free-run status. After the set time elapses, DC injection braking starts.
Set the DC Injection Braking Time (A055) via the Digital Operator or the DB terminal while taking into account motor heat generation.
Perform each setting according to your system after selecting the setting of DC Injection
Braking Edge/Level Selection (A056).
(a) Edge Operation (A056 = 00)
Example 1-a)
FW input
(b) Level Operation (A056 = 01)
Example 1-b)
FW input
5
DB input
Output frequency
DB input
Output frequency
A055
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-136
5
5-10 Brake Settings
(a) Edge Operation (A056 = 00)
Example 2-a)
FW input
(b) Level Operation (A056 = 01)
Example 2-b)
FW input
DB input
Output frequency
DB input
Output frequency
A055
Example 3-a)
FW input
Example 3-b)
FW input
DB input DB input
Output frequency
Free run
Free run
Output frequency
A053 A055
Note. The output frequency becomes zero during free run and DB operation.
A053
5-137 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-10 Brake Settings
Internal DC Injection Braking (A051 = 01)
DC injection braking can be applied without terminal operation at start/stop of the Inverter.
To use internal DC injection braking, set Internal DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) to "01:
Enabled."
Set the Startup DC Injection Braking Power using A057, and set the startup DC Injection
Braking Time using A058 regardless of the edge or level operation. (Examples 1-a, 1-b)
Set DC Injection Braking Power (A054) to define the braking power other than at startup.
Use Internal DC Injection Braking Frequency (A052) to set the frequency at which to start DC injection braking.
Once DC Injection Braking Delay Time (A053) is set, the Inverter stops output when the frequency reaches the A052 value after the RUN command (FW) has been turned off. During the set time in A053, the motor remains in free-run status. After an elapse of the period set in
A053, DC injection braking starts.
Edge and Level operations for internal DC injection braking work differently when the RUN command switches from STOP to RUN.
Edge operation: Giving priority to DC Injection Braking Time (A055), performs DC injection braking for the set time in A055.
DC injection braking operates for the set time in A055 when the output frequency reaches the set value in A052 after the RUN command (FW) is turned OFF.
Even when the RUN command is turned ON, DC injection braking continues to be applied during the period set in A055. (Examples 2-a, 3-a)
Level operation: Giving priority to the RUN command, shifts to normal operation, ignoring the
DC Injection Braking Time (A055).
When the RUN command is turned ON during DC injection braking, the period set in A055 is ignored and the Inverter returns to normal operation.
(Examples 2-a, 3-b)
(a) Edge Operation (A056 = 00)
Example 1-a) When starting
FW input
(b) Level Operation (A056 = 01)
Example 1-b) When starting
FW input
5
Output frequency
A057
Example 2-a) When stopping
FW input
A058
Output frequency
Free run
A052
A053 A055
Output frequency
A057
A058
Example 2-b) When stopping
FW input
Output frequency Free run
A052
A053 A055
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-138
5
5-10 Brake Settings
(a) Edge Operation (A056 = 00)
Example 3-a) When stopping
FW input
(b) Level Operation (A056 = 01)
Example 3-b) When stopping
FW input
Output frequency Output frequency
A055
A052 A052
Note. The output frequency becomes zero during free run and DB operation.
A055
5-139 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-10 Brake Settings
Internal DC Injection Braking (Operation Only Based on Set Frequency) (A051 = 02)
DC injection braking can be applied when the output frequency becomes lower than the setting of Internal DC Injection Braking Frequency (A052).
Neither external nor internal DC injection braking is available while this function is selected.
Operates only when the RUN command is turned on.
DC injection braking starts when both frequency reference and current frequency become lower than A052. (Example 1-a)
When the reference frequency becomes 2 Hz higher than the A052 set value, DC injection braking is released and the output returns to normal. (Example 1-a)
If the reference frequency is zero when the operation starts with analog input, operation is started with DC injection breaking because both the reference and current frequencies are zero.(Example 1-b)
If the RUN command is turned on with the determined frequency reference (a value larger than the A052 setting is input), operation is started with normal output.
Example 1-a)
FW input
ON
A052
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Example 1-b)
ON
FW input
A052
Frequency reference
Output frequency
5
The operation to return to normal varies depending on the setting of DC Injection Braking
Edge/Level Selection (A056).
(a) Edge Operation (A056 = 00) (b) Level Operation (A056 = 01)
FW input
ON
FW input
ON
A052
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Output frequency
A053
A052
Frequency reference
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-140
5-10 Brake Settings
5
Regenerative Braking Function
During deceleration, the motor functions as a generator and the generated energy is returned to the Inverter. As a result, the Inverter's DC voltage rises and if the overvoltage level is exceeded, an overvoltage (OV) trip occurs.
This function is intended to prevent this problem by allowing the regenerative energy to be consumed using an external Resistor. It is effective if you want to quickly decelerate the motor or when the load inertia is large.
All 3G3MX2 models have a built-in regenerative braking circuit, so install only a Braking
Resistor externally to the Inverter. To use the Regenerative Braking Unit, set Regenerative
Braking Selection (b095) to "00: Disabled."b090 and b096 will be ignored.
To use the regenerative braking function, set the following conditions.
Parameter
No.
b090
Function name
Data
0.0
Regenerative braking does not operate.
0.1 to 100.0
Usage Rate of
Regenerative
Braking
The usage rate of regenerative braking can be set in increments of 0.1%.
A trip occurs if the set usage rate is exceeded. t1 t2 t3
ON ON ON
Default setting
Unit
0.0
%
Regenerative braking operation
100 sec.
Usage rate (%) =
(t1+t2+t3)
100 sec.
100 b095 b096
Regenerative
Braking
Selection
00: Disabled
01
While operating: Enabled (Regenerative braking operates.)
While stopped : Disabled (Regenerative braking does not operate.)
Regenerative
Braking ON
Level
02: Enabled while operating and stopped
(Regenerative braking operates.)
330 to 380
*1
(200 V class)
660 to 760
*1
(400 V class)
00
360
720
−
V
*1.The regenerative braking ON level conforms to the output voltage setting for the Inverter's internal converter (DC unit). The regenerative braking circuit turns ON when the set voltage is exceeded. When the Resistor consumes the energy and the voltage drops to below the ON level, the regenerative braking circuit turns OFF.
5-141 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-10 Brake Settings
Brake Control Function
This function allows the Inverter to control the external brake of an elevating system.
When Brake Control Function Selection (b120) is set to "01: Enabled," the Inverter operates as follows.
(1) At RUN command input, the Inverter starts output, and accelerates to the release frequency.
(2) After the reaching to the release frequency, the Inverter outputs the brake release signal
(BRK) after the Brake Release Wait Time (b121) elapses. However, if the Inverter's output current is less than the current value set in Brake Release Current (b126), the Inverter does not output the brake release signal. In this case, the Inverter trips, and outputs the brake error signal (BER).
(3) When Brake Confirmation (44: BOK) is set for a multi-function input terminal and a brake release signal is output, the Inverter waits for a brake confirmation signal, without accelerating, for the period set in Brake Wait Time for Confirmation (b124). If the brake confirmation signal does not turn on within the period set in b124, the Inverter outputs the brake error signal (BER), resulting in trip. If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi-function input, brake confirmation wait time b124 is disabled, and the Inverter performs processing (4) after the brake release signal is output.
(4) After the brake confirmation signal is input (or after the brake release signal is output if BOK is not selected), the Inverter restarts acceleration up to the set frequency after the period set in Acceleration wait time (b122) elapses.
(5) After the RUN command is turned OFF, the Inverter decelerates to the Break ON
Frequency (b127), and turns off the brake release signal (BRK).
(6) When Brake Confirmation (44: BOK) is set for a multi-function input terminal and the brake release signal is turned OFF, the Inverter waits for the brake confirmation signal to turn OFF, without decelerating, for the period set in Wait Time for Confirmation (b124). If the brake confirmation signal is not turned off within the period set in b124, the Inverter outputs the brake error signal (BER), resulting in trip. If the brake confirmation signal is not allocated to a multi-function input, Brake Wait Time for Confirmation (b124) is disabled, and the Inverter performs processing (7) after the brake release signal is turned OFF.
(7) After the brake confirmation signal is turned OFF (or after the brake release signal is turned
OFF if BOK is not selected), the Inverter restarts deceleration down to 0 Hz after the period set in Stop Wait Time (b123) elapses.
5 b125 Brake Release Frequency
Output frequency
RUN command
(FW input)
Brake release signal
(BOK input)
(1)
Brake confirmation signal
(BRK output)
(2) b121 Brake Release Wait Time
(4) b122 Brake Acceleration Wait Time
(5)
(3) b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation
Brake Wait Time for Confirmation
(7) b123 Brake Stop Wait Time
(6) b124 Brake Wait Time for Confirmation
Note: This operation chart applies to a case where the Brake confirmation (44: BOK) is selected for any of Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
If BOK is not selected, the Acceleration Wait Time (b122) starts at the brake release signal ON timing. The Stop Wait Time (b123) starts at the brake release signal OFF timing.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-142
5-10 Brake Settings
5
5-143
To use the Brake Control function, allocate the following functions to multi-function I/O terminals, as required.
(1) To input a brake release signal from an external brake to the Inverter, allocate the Brake confirmation (44: BOK) to any of Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
(2) Allocate the Brake release (19: BRK) for releasing the brake, to any Multi-function Output
Terminal Selections (C021 to C022) or Multi-function Relay Output Function Selection. Also, to use a brake error output signal, allocate the Brake error (20: BER). When the Brake Control function is used, it is recommended to use Sensorless Vector Control (A044 = 03) in which high torque is generated at start. For details, refer to "Sensorless Vector Control" on page 5-144.
When the Brake Control function is used, it is recommended to use Sensorless Vector Control (A044 = 03) in which high torque is generated at start. For details, refer to "Sensorless Vector Control" on page 5-144.
Parameters Required for Brake Control Function
Parameter
No.
Function name Data b120 b121 b122 b123 b124 b125 b126 b127
C001 to C007
C021 to C022
C026
Brake Control
Function Selection
Brake Release Wait
Time
Acceleration Wait
Time
Stop Wait Time
Brake Wait Time for
Confirmation
Brake Release
Frequency
Brake Release
Current
Break ON Frequency
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
0.00 to 5.00
Set a time required for the output current to reach the rate of the release current after reaching the release frequency.
0.00 to 5.00
Set a mechanical delay time from when the release signal is output until the brake is released.
0.00 to 5.00
Set a mechanical delay time from when the release signal is turned off until the brake is closed.
0.00 to 5.00
Set a wait time longer than the time from when the release signal is output until the brake sends the release completion signal to the Inverter.
0.00 to 400.0
Set a frequency to output the brake release signal. *1
0.0 to 2.0 × Inverter rated current
Set an output current that allows the brake to be released.
*2
0.00 to 400.0
Set a frequency to close the brake during stop.
*1
44: BOK (Brake confirmation) Multi-function Input
Selection
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function Selection
19: BRK (Brake release)
20: BER (Brake error)
Default setting
00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Inverter rated current
0.00
−
−
Unit
− s s s s
Hz
A
Hz
−
−
*1.Set a value greater than what is set in Starting Frequency (b082).
*2.If the set current is too low, sufficient torque may not be provided when the brake is released.
In any of the following cases, the Inverter trips and outputs the brake error signal (BER). (Brake error: E36)
The output current is lower than the release current after the Brake Release Wait Time (b121) elapses.
When the brake confirmation signal (BOK) is used. The brake confirmation signal did not turn ON within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation (b124) during acceleration. Or the brake confirmation signal did not turn OFF within the Brake Wait Time for Confirmation (b124) during deceleration. In case that Brake
Confirmation Signal (BOK) is turned OFF when Brake Release Signal (BRK) is output.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
The following explains the sensorless vector control, which is based on estimation of the motor rpm and output torque from the motor parameter settings.
Sensorless vector control cannot be selected for High-frequency Induction Motor (b171 = 02) and Light Load Mode (b049 = 01).
Sensorless Vector Control
In this method, the motor rpm and output torque are controlled by estimating these parameters based on the Inverter's output voltage and current, as well as the motor parameter settings.
High starting torque can be generated to enable high-accuracy operation, even in a lowfrequency range (0.5 Hz).
When this function is used, set Control Method (A044/A244) to "03: Sensorless vector control."
When this function is used, make sure to refer to "Motor Parameter Selection" on page 5-145 and that the settings are optimum for the motor used.
Parameter
No.
A044/A244
Function name
Control Method
1/2
Data
03: Sensorless vector control (SLV)
Default setting
00
Unit
−
Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if you select a motor size two or more ranks lower than the maximum applicable motor.
The speed may increase at low frequencies (several hertz).
When the Inverter incoming voltage is higher than the rated voltage of the drive motor, current may increase and normal operation may not be performed if "01: Always OFF" or "02: OFF during deceleration" is selected for AVR Selection (A081/A281). In this case, change AVR Selection to
"00: Always ON."
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-144
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
5
Motor Parameter Selection
When sensorless vector control is performed, set the motor parameters according to the motor used.
If multiple motors are used with one Inverter using constant torque characteristics (VC), reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power) or free V/F setting, calculate the total motor capacity and select the closest data in Motor capacity.
When automatic torque boost is used, improper setting of this parameter may result in torque reduction or motor hunting.
The motor parameters can be set by one of the following three methods:
(1) Use the motor parameters of a standard motor
⇒ When the "Standard Motor Parameters" are selected (H002/H202 = 00), the motor parameter values set in H020/220 to H024/224 are applied. The parameters of a standard motor are set in H020/220 to H024/224 by default.
(2) Measure automatically via offline auto-tuning
⇒ When the auto-tuning parameters are selected in Motor Parameter (H002/H202 = 02) after offline auto-tuning, the motor parameters automatically measured by offline autotuning (H030/230 to H034/234) are applied. Refer to "Offline Auto-Tuning Function" on page 5-146.
(3) Set desired parameters
⇒ In either (1) or (2) above, the motor parameters can be changed to desired values.
Change the values of H020/220 to H024/224 or H030/230 to H034/234 according to the value of H002/202. (The parameters of a standard motor are set in H030/230 to H034/
234 by default.)
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
H002/H202 Motor Parameter 1/2
00: Standard motor parameter
(Application of H020/220 to H024/224 as motor parameters)
02: Auto-tuning parameter
(Application of H030/230 to H034/234 as motor parameters)
0.1 to 18.5
H003/H203
H004/H204
Motor Capacity
Selection 1/2
Motor Pole Number
Selection 1/2
2/4/6/8/10
H005/H205 Speed Response 1/2
1. to 1000.
Reduce the value if the motor hunts.
Standard motor parameters
*1
H020/H220
H021/H221
Motor 1/2 Parameter
R1
Motor 1/2 Parameter
R2
H022/H222 Motor 1/2 Parameter L
H023/H223 Motor 1/2 Parameter Io
H024/H224 Motor 1/2 Parameter J
0.001 to 65.53
(Primary resistance)
0.001 to 65.53
(Secondary resistance)
0.01 to 655.3
(Leakage inductance)
0.01 to 655.3
(No-load current)
0.001 to 9999.
(Moment of inertia)
Auto-tuning parameters
*2
H030/H230
Motor 1/2 Parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
0.001 to 65.53
(Primary resistance)
Default setting
00
Default setting
4
100.
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Unit
− kW pole
−
Ω
Ω mH
A kgm
2
Ω
5-145 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Parameter
No.
Function name
H031/H231
Motor 1/2 Parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
H032/H232
H033/H233
Motor 1/2 Parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
H034/H234
Motor 1/2 Parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
Motor cable length
*3 b033
Motor Cable Length
Code Selection
Data
0.001 to 65.53
(Secondary resistance)
0.01 to 655.3
(Leakage inductance)
0.01 to 655.3
(No-load current)
0.001 to 9999.
(Moment of inertia)
5. to 20.
Default setting
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
10.
Unit
Ω mH
A kgm
−
2
*1.These parameters are used to set motor parameters when auto-tuning is not used. The parameters of a standard motor are set by default.
*2.These parameters are measured automatically when offline auto-tuning is performed. They can also be changed to desired value manually after tuning.
*3.Set an appropriate value according to the motor cable length used.
Note 1: For moment of inertia J, set a conversion value for the motor. After setting the J value, adjust the response speed in Speed Response (H005/H205). The larger the Speed Response (H005/H205), the higher the response speed , resulting in a steep torque rise; the smaller the J value, the lower the response speed, resulting in gradual torque rise.
Note 2: In sensorless vector control, an output in the direction opposite to the RUN command direction may be issued in the control in the low-speed range, etc.
If the motor's reverse rotation may cause a problem, such as damage to the machine driven by the motor, set Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection (b046) to "01: Enabled". (Refer to "Reverse
Rotation Prevention Function" on page 5-157.)
Note 3: Motor Cable Length Code Selection (b033) is a parameter for compensating the current detection accuracy based on the difference in the motor cable length. This parameter need not be set for 11 kW and 15 kW models.
5
Offline Auto-Tuning Function
In offline auto-tuning, whether the "motor rotates or not" can be selected.
The features of each setting are described below.
Term
Offline Auto-Tuning
Motor does not rotate
Motor rotates
Related functions
Description
The motor parameters required in sensorless vector control are automatically measured in a dedicated operation pattern different from that of normal operation, to increase the accuracy of vector control.
The motor parameters are measured without rotating the motor. Use this setting if motor rotation must be prevented. Since the motor does not rotate, motor parameter Io (no-load current) and motor parameter
J (moment of inertia) cannot be measured. The previously set values are held for motor parameter Io and motor parameter J.
The motor parameters are measured by actually rotating the motor.
Use this setting if motor rotation does not cause problems.
* b046
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-146
5
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
When vector control is performed using a motor whose motor parameters are unknown, perform offline auto-tuning to measure the motor parameters.
The motor parameters correspond to data on one phase of Y-connection at 50 Hz.
Adjust the settings of Base Frequency (A003/A203) and Motor Incoming Voltage Selection (A082/
A282) to the specifications of the motor to be measured. If the applicable motor voltage is not available among the options for Motor Incoming Voltage Selection, set the output voltage gain so that "Motor Incoming Voltage (A082/A282) × Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245) = Rated Motor
Voltage" is established.
The motor parameters can be determined for motors with the maximum applicable capacity or subsequent lower capacity. For motors with other capacities, the Inverter may not correctly determine the motor parameters. (In some cases, auto-tuning may not be completed. In this case, pressing the STOP/RESET key displays an abort message.)
Set Internal DC Injection Braking Selection (A051) and Simple Position Control Selection (P012) to "00: Disabled." If they are set to "01: Enabled," measurement is not performed correctly.
Turn OFF the Torque reference input permission (52: ATR). If it is ON, measurement is not performed correctly.
When performing auto-tuning while the motor is rotating, take note of the following items:
1) There will be no problem even if the motor accelerates up to near 80% of the base frequency.
2) The motor is not driven by external equipment.
3) The brake is released.
4) The torque is not sufficient during auto-tuning. In the case of a lift, etc. the system may "slip and fall." Accordingly, remove the motor from the loaded machine and perform auto-tuning for the motor alone.
(Here, moment of inertia J applies to the motor alone. Accordingly, add the motor-shaft converted value of the moment of inertia of the loaded machine.)
5) In the case of a machine whose motor shaft rotations are limited (lift, ball screw, etc.), the motor may rotate exceeding the allowable rotation and the machine may be damaged as a result.
Accordingly, select "01: Enabled (Motor does not rotate)" in H001.
6) No-load current Io can also be checked by the current monitor function as the current during noload, 50-Hz operation at V/f setting.
Also, the setting obtained by auto-tuning (with the motor rotating) can be rewritten (H023/H223) to the monitored value. It can be rewritten to the monitored value after executing auto-tuning
(with the motor rotating).
Even when H001 = 01 (Motor does not rotate), the motor may still rotate slightly.
To perform auto-tuning for a motor with the subsequent lower capacity, enable Overload Limit
Selection (b021/b221b024) and set Overload Limit Level (b022/b222) to 1.5 times larger than the rated current of the motor.
If the value of Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time (b134) is small, an Overvoltage Trip (E07) may occur at an auto-tuning.
In this case, increase b134 and then perform auto-tuning again.
5-147 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
H001
H002/H202
Auto-tuning Selection
Motor Parameter 1/2
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (Motor does not rotate)
02: Enabled (Motor rotates)
00: Standard motor parameter
02: Auto-tuning parameter
00
00
−
−
H003/H203
H004/H204
H030/H230
H031/H231
H032/H232
H033/H233
H034/H234
A003/A203
Motor Capacity 1/2
Motor Pole Number 1/2
Motor 1/2 Parameter R1
(auto-tuning data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter R2
(auto-tuning data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter L
(auto-tuning data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter Io
(auto-tuning data)
Motor 1/2 Parameter J
(auto-tuning data)
Base Frequency 1/2
0.1 to 18.5
2/4/6/8/10
0.001 to 65.53
*
(Primary resistance)
0.000 to 65.53
*
(Secondary resistance)
0.00 to 655.3
*
(Leakage inductance)
0.00 to 655.3
*
(No-load current)
0.001 to 9999.
*
(Moment of inertia)
30.0 to Maximum Frequency 1/2
Default setting
4
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
Depends on the capacity
60.0
(1000.0) kW pole
Ω
Ω mH
A kgm
2
Hz
A051
A082/A282
Internal DC Injection Braking
Selection
Motor Incoming Voltage
Selection 1/2
Related functions
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
200/215/220/230/240
This function can be selected for
200V class models.
380/400/415/440/460/480
This function can be selected for
400V class models. b046
00
200
400
−
V
V
* These parameters are measured automatically when offline auto-tuning is performed. They can also be changed to desired value manually after tuning.
If H002/H202 remains 00 after the completion of auto-tuning, the motor parameters obtained by auto-tuning are not reflected in the operation data.
If the auto-tuning result indicates that the tuning was aborted, perform auto-tuning again.
If a trip occurs during auto-tuning, the auto-tuning processing is forced to stop.
(No abort message appears. Trip display is given higher priority.)
After removing the cause of the trip, set H001 to 01 and then perform the auto-tuning again.
If the offline auto-tuning is performed with "free V/f setting" selected as the control method, the
Inverter displays the abort message and stops processing.
During auto-tuning, the deceleration stop tends to slow under certain conditions such as when the incoming voltage is high. In this case, press the STOP key and adjust the parameters so that the value of Over voltage Suppression Integral Time Setting (b134) will decrease and the value of
Overvoltage Suppression Level During Deceleration (b131) will increase.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-148
5
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
If an overcurrent trip occurs during acceleration while auto-tuning is in progress, adjust the parameters so that the acceleration time will increase and the overload limit level will decrease. If an overcurrent trip occurs during deceleration, adjust the parameters so that the value of
Overvoltage Suppression Integral Time Setting (b134) will increase and the value of Overvoltage
Suppression Level During Deceleration (b131) will decrease.
5-149 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Operating Procedure (Motor rotates: H001 = 02)
Step 1: Set the motor capacity and number of poles according to the motor ratings. hk0k0k3 hk0k0k4
Motor capacity
Number of motor poles
Step 2: Set the base frequency and motor voltage selection according to the motor ratings. ak0k0k3 Base frequency ak0k8k2 Motor voltage
After the auto-tuning, the result is displayed.
_k_k_ko Successful
_k_k_kz Aborted
Starts the automatic operation.
Step 3: Set Auto-tuning
Selection (H001) to 02. hk0k0k1 0k2
Step 4: Issue a RUN command according to the setting of RUN Command
Selection (A002).
Step 5: After the operation is completed, use the
STOP/RESET key to cancel the result display.
Step 6: Reflect the automatically measured motor parameters in the operation data. hk0k0k2 0k2
Issuing a RUN command starts automatic operation in the following sequence:
(1) 1st AC excitation (The motor does not rotate.)
↓
(2) 2nd AC excitation (The motor does not rotate.)
↓
(3) 1st DC excitation (The motor does not rotate.)
↓
(4) V/f control operation (The motor rotates until 80% of the base frequency.)
*
↓
(5) Sensorless vector control operation (The motor rotates until x% of the base frequency.)
*
↓
(6) 2nd DC excitation (The motor does not rotate.)
↓
(7) The auto-tuning result is displayed.
5
* If the "motor does not rotate" (H001 = 01) is selected, steps (4) and (5) are not performed.
The rotation frequency in step (5) is defined as follows, if "T" represents the acceleration time or deceleration time in step (4), whichever is larger:
0 s < T < 50 s: x = 40%
50 s ≤ T < 100 s: x = 20%
100 s ≤ T: x = 10%
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-150
5
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
If sensorless vector control cannot provide the desired characteristics, adjust the motor parameters depending on the phenomena, as shown in the table below.
Operation status
Power running
Regeneration startup.
Phenomenon
Speed change ratio is a negative value.
Speed change ratio is a positive value.
Insufficient torque at low frequency (several Hz)
Shock occurs during
Adjusting method
Increase motor parameter R2 gradually up to the set parameter × 1.2.
Decrease motor parameter R2 gradually up to the set parameter × 0.8.
Increase motor parameter R1 gradually up to the set parameter × 1.2.
Increase motor parameter Io gradually up to the set parameter × 1.2.
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
Reduce the speed response.
Set Reverse Rotation Prevention
Selection (b046) to "01: Enabled."
Adjustment item
H021/H221/
H031/H231
H021/H221/
H031/H231
H020/H220/
H030/H230
H023/H223/
H033/H233
H024/H224/
H034/H234
H005/H205
During startup
The motor momentarily rotates in the direction opposite the reference rotation direction. b046
During deceleration
Low-frequency operation
Motor hunting
Rotation is not constant.
Reduce motor parameter J from the set parameter.
Reduce the speed response.
Increase motor parameter J from the set parameter.
Raise the speed response.
H024/H224/
H034/H234
H005/H205
H024/H224/
H034/H234
H005/H205
Note: To use a motor with a capacity lower than that of the Inverter, set Torque Limit (b041 to b044) by making sure the value α , calculated with the following formula, does not exceed 200%. Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
α = Torque limit value × (Inverter capacity) / (Motor capacity)
Example) From the above formula, the torque limit value to achieve α = 200% with a 0.75 kW Inverter and
0.4 kW motor is calculated as follows:
Torque Limit (b041 to b044) = α × (Motor capacity) / (Inverter capacity)
= 200% × (0.4 kW) / (0.75 kW) = 106%.
Torque Monitor Function
This function monitors the estimate output torque of the motor.
This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method
(A044/A244 = 03). Take note that if constant torque characteristics (VC), reduced torque characteristics (VP 1.7th power) or free V/f setting is selected for Control Method (A044/A244), this function is disabled and the output signals for display or through the control terminal block become indeterminable.
To perform monitoring via the Digital Operator, select Display Parameter d012.
To perform monitoring using signals from the control terminal block, refer to "MP Terminal
(Pulse/PWM Output)" on page 5-42 or "AM Terminal (Analog Output)" on page 5-44.
The torque monitor value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the
Inverter's rated current is 100%.
Accordingly, the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined.
5-151 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Parameter
No.
C027
C028
Function name
MP Selection
AM Selection
Data
A044/A244 Control Method 1/2 03: Sensorless vector control d012
Output Torque
Monitor
− 200. to 200.
Output torque
02: Output torque
11: Output torque (signed)
*1
*1: This setting can be allocated only to C028.
Default setting
00
−
07
07
Unit
−
−
−
−
Overtorque/Undertorque Selection (OTQ)
This function outputs a signal upon detection of the estimate motor output torque exceeding a given level. This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method (A044/A244 = 03). Take note that under all other settings, the output becomes indeterminable.
This function is enabled when the Overtorque/Undertorque (07: OTQ) is selected in Multifunction Output Terminal Selection.
Default setting
Unit
Parameter
No.
Function name
C054
C055
C056
C057
C058
C059
C021 to
C022
C026
Data
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Selection
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
(Forward Power
Running)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
(Reverse
Regeneration)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
(Reverse Power
Running)
Overtorque/
Undertorque Level
(Forward
Regeneration)
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Signal Output
Mode Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
Selection
Multi-function
Relay Output
Function Selection
00: Overtorque
01: Undertorque
0. to 200.
OTQ signal output level for forward power running
0. to 200.
OTQ signal output level for reverse regeneration
0. to 200.
OTQ signal output level for reverse power running
0. to 200.
OTQ signal output level for forward regeneration
00: Enabled in acceleration/deceleration and constant speed operation
01: Only during constant speed
07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque)
00
100.
100.
100.
100.
01
−
−
%
%
%
%
−
−
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-152
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
5
Torque Limit Function
This function limits the motor output torque. This function is enabled only when Sensorless
Vector Control is selected for control method (A044/A244 = 03).
You can select any of the following 3 torque limit functions from Torque Limit Selection (b040).
Four-quadrant separate setting mode
In this mode, torque limits are set separately for the four quadrants of forward power running, forward regeneration, reverse power running and reverse regeneration, using Torque Limits 1 to 4 (b041 to b044).
Terminal switching mode
In this mode, the values set in Torque Limits 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) are switched based on the combination of torque limit switching terminals 1 and 2 (TRQ1,TRQ2) which are set using multi-function input terminals.
Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes.
Analog input mode
In this mode, the torque limits are set based on the voltage applied to the FV terminal (analog voltage) on the control terminal block.
0 to 10 V correspond to torque limit values of 0% to 200%. Selected torque limit values are enabled for all operation modes.
Option mode
This mode is valid when an optional board is used. Refer to the manual for the optional board.
If the Torque limit enabled function (40: TL) is set to a multi-function input terminal, the torque limit function set in b040 is enabled only when TL is turned ON. When TL is off, the torque limit setting is disabled, and the maximum value is defined as the torque limit value. If the Torque limit enabled function (40: TL) is not set to a multi-function input terminal, the torque limit function set in Torque Limit Selection (b040) is always enabled.
The torque limit value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the
Inverter's rated current is 100%. Accordingly, the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined.
When the Torque limit (10: TRQ) is selected in the multi-function output selection, the torque limit signal turns on when the above torque limit function is activated.
5-153 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b040 b041 b042
Torque Limit
Selection
Torque Limit 1
(Four-quadrant Mode
Forward Power Running)
Torque Limit 2
(Four-quadrant Mode
Reverse Regeneration)
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switching
02: Analog voltage input
03: Optional board
0 to 200/no (Disabled)
Forward power running under fourquadrant separate setting
0 to 200/no (Disabled)
Reverse regeneration under fourquadrant separate setting
00
200.
200.
−
%
% b043 b044
Torque Limit 3
(Four-quadrant Mode
Reverse Power Running)
Torque Limit 4
(Four-quadrant Mode
Forward Regeneration)
0 to 200/no (Disabled)
Reverse power running under fourquadrant separate setting
0 to 200/no (Disabled)
Forward regeneration under fourquadrant separate setting
40: TL (Torque limit enabled/disabled)
200.
200.
%
%
C001 to
C007
Multi-function
Input Selection
41: TRQ1 (Torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (Torque limit switching 2)
− −
C021 to
C022
C026
Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay
Output Function Selection
10: TRQ (During Torque limit) − −
When "00: Four-quadrant separate setting" is selected in Torque Limit Selection (b040),
Torque Limits 1 to 4 (b041 to b044) conform to the figure below.
Torque
5
Regeneration b042
Power running direction b041
Reverse
(RV)
Power running direction b043
Regeneration b044
Forward
(FW)
When "01: Terminal switching" is selected in Torque Limit Selection (b040), Torque Limits 1 to
4 (b041 to b044), which are switched by Torque Limit Switchings 1, 2 allocated to multi-function input terminals, are set as follows.
Example) Torque limit switching 1 (41: TRQ1) is allocated to multi-function input terminal S6, and Torque limit switching 2 (42: TRQ2) is allocated to multi-function input terminal
S7/EB.
42
S7
41
S6 SC
41:TRQ1 42:TRQ2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON b041 b042 b044 b043
To use the torque limit function in a low-speed range, also use Overload Limit Selection (b021/ b221/b024).
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-154
5
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Torque LADSTOP Function
This function temporarily stops the frequency deceleration function (LAD) when the torque limit function is actuated. This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method (A044/A244 = 03).
Parameter
No.
Function name b045
Torque LADSTOP
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Related functions
Data
Default setting
00
A044/A244, b040, b041to b044
Unit
−
Output frequency
Torque limit in progress (during torque limit)
Time
TRQ output
5-155 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
Torque Control
This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method (A044/A244 = 03).
To operate in the torque control, allocate "52: ATR" to any multi-function input terminal. While the ATR terminal is turned on, the torque reference input is enabled.
The torque reference source can be selected from two analog types, Digital Operator, etc.
using P033. When analog setting is used, the full-scale value is 200%. (When voltage is used,
10 V corresponds to 200%.)
The torque control speed depends on the balance between torque and load. To prevent the
Inverter from running out of control, set a speed limit value in P039 (forward) or P040 (reverse).
Increasing the speed/torque control switching time reduces the switching shock. The torque reference value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the Inverter's rated current is
100%. Accordingly, the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined.
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
P033
P034
P039
P040
P041
C001 to
C008
Torque Reference Input
Selection
00: Input from the FV terminal
(10V = 200%)
01: Input from the FI terminal
(20 mA = 200%)
03: Input via the Digital Operator
06: Input from optional board
0. to 200.
(Torque reference when P033 = 03)
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 120.0
Torque Reference
Setting
Speed Limit Value in
Torque Control (forward)
Speed Limit Value in
Torque Control (reverse)
Speed/Torque Control
Switching Time
Multi-function Input
Selection
0.00 to 99.99/100.0 to 120.0
0 to 1000
52: ATR (Torque reference input permission)
00
0.
0.00
0.00
0.
−
−
%
Hz
Hz ms
−
5
Torque Bias Function
This function is used to apply a bias to the torque reference generated by torque control. This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method (A044/A244 = 03).
The torque bias value under this function assumes that the torque corresponding to the Inverter's rated current is 100%. Accordingly, the absolute value of torque varies depending on the motor to be combined.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Default setting
Unit
P036
P037
P038
Torque Bias Mode
Torque Bias Value
Torque Bias Polarity
Selection
*1
Data
00: Disabled
01: Set via the Digital Operator
05: Input from optional board
− 200 to +200
(Enabled when P036 = 01)
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
00
0.
00
−
%
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-156
5
5-11 Sensorless Vector Control
*1.• As per sign (00) When the polarity of a torque bias signal is (+), the torque increases for forward rotation, and when it is ( − ), the torque increases for reverse rotation, regardless of the RUN direction.
• Depends on the RUN direction (01)
The torque bias signal sign and torque bias direction vary depending on the RUN command direction.
Forward command: Applies torque in the same direction as the torque bias.
Reverse command: Applies torque in the reversed direction of the torque bias.
Reverse Rotation Prevention Function
This function is enabled only when Sensorless Vector Control is selected for control method
(A044/A244 = 03).
Because of its control characteristics, the Inverter may output a rotation signal in the direction opposite to that of the RUN command under certain conditions such as in a low-speed range.
If the motor's reverse rotation may cause a problem, such as damage to the machine driven by the motor, set Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection (b046) to "Enabled".
Parameter
No.
b046
Function name Data
Reverse Rotation
Prevention
Selection
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (No reverse rotation)
Default setting
00
Unit
−
5-157 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
The following explains the simple position control mode.
Encoder Connection
The hardware specification for pulse train input is described below.
Dual-phase pulse train input with 90 ° C phase difference (P004 = 01, 02)
1-phase pulse train input + direction (P004 = 03)
1-phase pulse train input
(P004 = 00)
Maximum frequency to 1.8 kHz to 32 kHz to 32 kHz
RP terminal
(5 to 24VDC) (32 kHz max.)
Phase-A pulse train
(PNP open-collector or voltage-output encoder)
1-phase pulse train
(PNP open-collector or voltage-output encoder)
1-phase pulse train
(PNP open-collector or voltage-output encoder)
S7/EB terminal
(24 VDC) (1.8 kHz max.)
Phase-B pulse train
(PNP open-collector or voltage-output encoder)
Direction signal
(Sink/source transistor or selector switch)
−
Wire the incremental encoder as shown below when using this function.
Dual-phase Pulse Train
Input the dual-phase pulses to the RP and EB terminals. Since the EB terminal is also used as multi-function input terminal S7/EB, use all multi-function inputs, including the EB terminal, based on the source logic (voltage-output encoder or PNP open collector encoder). Also make sure the input voltage is within the rated range for the multi-function input terminal (18 to 24 V).
Allocate EB to multi-function input terminal S7/EB.
Vcc
Forward:
90 ° advanced
P24
3G3MX2
A RP
3.9 k Ω
510 Ω
5.1 V 6.2 k Ω
Encoder
B
S7/EB
4.7 k Ω
PSC
SC
GND
Voltage-output or PNP open-collector type encoder
Connect the Inverter output terminals (U, V, and W) and the motor input terminals (U, V, and
W) in the correct phase order. In this case, the motor turns forward when a forward command is applied to the Inverter. Forward is the direction in which the motor shaft turns counterclockwise when viewed from the load. Reverse is the direction in which the motor shaft turns clockwise. For the dual-phase pulse on terminals RP and EB, forward is detected when the pulse on the RP terminal is 90 ° advanced from the EB terminal, and reverse is detected when the pulse on the RP terminal is 90 ° delayed from the EB terminal. Input the encoder signals so that the RP terminal is 90 ° advanced from the EB terminal when the motor is turning forward.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-158
5
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
5
5-159
1-pulse + Direction Signal
Input the 1-phase pulse to the RP terminal and direction signal to the EB terminal. The EB terminal can support both the sink logic and source logic by changing the shorting bar position.
Allocate EB to multi-function input terminal S7/EB.
The EB terminal is OFF for forward and ON for reverse.
Vcc P24
3G3MX2
Out
RP
Direction S7/EB
PSC
SC
GND
Voltage-output or PNP open-collector type encoder
Vcc
Out
P24
RP
Direction
S7/EB
PSC
SC
GND
Sink transistor
Voltage-output or PNP open-collector type encoder
Vcc
Out
P24
RP
Direction
S7/EB
PSC
SC
GND
Source transistor
Voltage-output or PNP open-collector type encoder
3G3MX2
3G3MX2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Simple Position Control Mode
When Pulse Train Input Terminal RP Selection (P003) is set to "01: Feedback pulse," the pulse train signals are used as feedback information from the encoder. (Enabled for Control 1 only)
The position reference is specified by the combination of multi-function input terminals. Up to eight position references can be specified.
The speed for a position command conforms to the Output Frequency Setting (F001). For data with many digits, such as position commands, only the higher four digits are displayed. A run command (FW or RV) is required separately as well as the position command. (Set A002 to
01.) This is needed to enable DC injection braking when stopping. During Digital Operator operation (A002 = 2), DC injection braking does not function. DC injection braking functions when A002 is 03 and A002 is 04.) For information on DC injection braking (DB), refer to "Brake
Settings" on page 5-135 . (DC Injection Braking Power (A054) must be set. Set A051 to 00. Even with these settings, DC injection braking will function for simple position control when external
DC injection braking is selected. For position control, external DC injection braking takes priority, so do not set A051 to 01 or 02.)
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
P003
P004
P011
P012
P015
P026
Pulse Train Input Terminal
RP Selection
01: Feedback pulse
Feedback Pulse Train Input
Type Selection
Number of Encoder Pulses
Simple Position Control
Selection
Creep Speed Setting
Overspeed Error Detection
Level
00: 1-phase pulse train *2
01: Dual-phase pulse train with 90 ° phase difference 1 *1 , *2
02: Dual-phase pulse train with 90 ° phase difference 2
*1, *2
03: 1-phase pulse train + direction
*1, *2
32. to 1024.
Set the calculated number of pulses per motor rotation for each connected encoder phase. This setting is used for speed detection and position control by calculating pulse to stop.
00: Simple position control disabled
02: Simple position control enabled
Starting frequency to 10.00 (100.0)
0.0 to 150.0
The Inverter will be tripped if the motor speed detected by the encoder exceeds the maximum frequency times the Overspeed Error Detection
Level (P026) during operation when
P003 is set to 01 (encoder feedback) and P026 is not set to 0.
This does not depend on whether simple position control of V/f control with FB is ON or OFF.
00
00
512.
00
5.00
115.0
−
−
Pulse
−
Hz
%
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-160
5
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
P027
Speed Deviation Error
Detection Level
0.00 to 120.0
If this parameter is not set to 0 and
DSE (excessive speed deviation) is assigned to the intelligent output terminal, the DSE signal will turn ON if the absolute value of the output frequency minus the speed FB is equal to or greater than the setting of
P027. The Inverter will not be tripped.
This does not depend on whether simple position control or V/f control with FB is either ON or OFF.
0 to +268,435,455
10.00
Hz
P072
P073
Position Range Setting
(forward side)
Position Range Setting
(reverse side)
− 268,435,455 to 0
26843545
5
−
26843545
5
−
−
P075
P077 d029 d030
C102
C001 to
C007
C021 to
C022
C026
Positioning Mode Selection
00: Limit
01: Not limited
*3
0.0 to 10.0
Encoder Disconnection
Detection Time
Position Command Monitor − 268,435,455 to +268,435,455
Current Position Monitor
*5 − 268,435,455 to +268,435,455
Reset Selection
03: Trip reset only
Internal data (current values) are not initialized upon reset.
Multi-function Input
Selection
47: PCLR (Position deviation clear)
85: EB (Rotation direction detection)
*1
22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation) Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection
Multi-function Relay Output
Function Selection
23: POK (Position ready)
00
1.0
−
−
00
−
−
− s
−
−
−
−
−
*1.To use the EB terminal (P004 = 01 to 03), allocate "85: EB" to multi-function input terminal S7/EB.
The selection of an NO or NC contact will be disabled. The EB terminal is OFF for forward and ON for reverse.
*2. The run command, command rotation direction, and detected rotation direction are as follows:
Run command (FW/RV terminal): Tells the Inverter to start operation.
Command rotation direction: The direction in which the Inverter is intended to rotate the motor. For positioning control, this is determined by the sign of the position deviation.
Detected rotation direction: The current rotation direction as detected by the Inverter.
P004 specifies the number of encoder phases and the method used to detect the motor rotation direction.
The methods for determining the command rotation direction and detected rotation direction are given in the following table. For a dual-phase pulse, the maximum input pulse frequencies are 32 kHz for phase A and
1.8 kHz for phase B. At less than 1.8 kHz, which is valid for both phases A and B, the motor rotation phase and direction detection (number of pulses: x4) is performed using a 90 ° encoder phase difference. For 1.8
kHz or higher, where phase B is not valid, the phase-B signal is ignored and only phase A is used to detect the motor rotation phase (number of pulses: x1). Motor rotation direction, which cannot be detected from the encoder, is detected with a different method, as shown in the following table.
5-161 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Determining the Command Rotation Direction and Detected Rotation Direction
P004
00
Single-phase pulse
RV terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
FW terminal
OFF
ON
OFF
EB terminal
-
-
-
Phase difference
-
Positive/ negative
Positive/ negative
-
-
Command rotation direction
None
Forward/ reverse
Forward/ reverse
None
None
Detected rotation direction
None
Forward/reverse *
Forward/reverse *
01
90 ° phase difference, dualphase pulse 1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
-
-
Less than 1.8 kHz
Positive/ negative
Forward/ reverse
None
None
Detected from encoder
(90 ° phase difference)
02
90 ° phase difference, dualphase pulse 2
03
Single-phase pulse + direction
Either ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Either ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Either ON
1.8 kHz or higher
-
-
Less than 1.8 kHz
1.8 kHz or higher
1.8 kHz or higher
-
-
OFF
ON
Positive/ negative
-
-
Positive/ negative
Positive/ negative
Positive/ negative
-
Positive/ negative
Positive/ negative
Reverse/ reverse
None
None
Forward/ reverse
Forward/ reverse
Forward/ reverse
None
None
Forward/ reverse
Reverse/ reverse
None
Detected direction maintained when EB terminal is less than 1.8 kHz.
None
None
Detected from encoder
(90 ° phase difference)
Forward/reverse *
Forward/reverse *
None
None
Forward (according to
EB terminal)
Reverse (according to
EB terminal)
None ON ON -
* If the command rotation direction changes before the completion of positioning, the current detected rotation direction will be maintained until deceleration of the Inverter output frequency has been completed and then the command rotation direction will be used. However, even if the Inverter output frequency follows the command rotation direction the actual number of motor rotations may not keep up, and the present position will be counted in the opposite direction until it catches up, causing deviation.
If this occurs, operation can be improved by increasing the acceleration/deceleration time.
*3. When a rotary coordinate system such as a turntable is used, setting b075 = 01 allows for positioning in the rotation direction corresponding to the shorter moving distance. In this case, set the position per rotation in the rotary coordinate system, in Multi-step Position Command 0 (P060). (This must be a positive value.) The set value of P060 is used to determine the correct rotation direction. For position commands for which movement will actually be stopped, set a multi-step position other than P060 (for example, P061 = 6000). Take note that this function can be used only when Feedback Pulse Train
Input (P004) is "00" or "01."
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-162
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
5
5-163
P075 = 00
4000
2000
Position command: 6000
6000
Present position
0
8000 = P060
P075 = 01 (shortest control)
*4. This setting is not required if control method is set to Sensorless vector control (A044/A244 = 03).
*5. If P004 is 00, counting will not be performed if the motor runs idle when neither FW nor RV is input.
(This is because FW/RV specify the motor rotation direction.) The value of d030 is cleared when PCLR
(position clear signal), SPD (speed/position switch signal), ORG (zero return start signal) or RS (RS terminal input) turns ON or the power supply is turned ON. Calculations are based on a x1 number of pulses and are not dependent on whether a single-phase or dual-phase encoder input is used.
P003
00
(Frequency setting
(including PID))
01
Encoder feedback
01
Encoder feedback
P004
00
(1-phase pulse input)
-
-
P012
00
(Simple position control disabled)
00
(Simple position control disabled)
02
(Simple position control enabled)
A044
-
00 to 02
-
Enabled function
Pulse train frequency input
V/f control with FB
Simple position control
RUN command
Output frequency (Hz)
Speed reference
ON
If the position command is small, deceleration and positioning is performed before the speed reference is reached.
Creep Speed Setting P015
DC injection brake (DB)
Position
POK output signal ON
In simple position control, DC injection braking (DB) is applied after moving to the target position according to the following:
(1) Position command
(2) Speed reference (frequency reference)
(3) Acceleration time, deceleration time
DC injection braking must be set. (DC injection braking (DB) will remain effective until the RUN command is turned OFF.)
In absolute position control, the frequency reference and acceleration/deceleration reference conform to the currently selected parameters.
The exact target position may not be achieved depending on the DC injection braking force or creep speed setting. Adjust the strength of the DC injection brake to minimize rotational fluctuations when the DC injection brake is applied and in a range that will not cause the electronic thermal to trip. If the creep speed setting is small, displacement will tend to be smaller.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
The trigger for starting deceleration according to the speed reference is as follows:
Number of pulses required for (the number of rotations equivalent to the triangle for deceleration from the current frequency at the applicable deceleration time + 1.25 rotations) <
Position deviation
If movement decelerates to the creep speed before the following stopping condition is met, movement continues at the creep speed. Movement stops using DC injection braking when the position deviation becomes less than 50 pulses (calculated at x4).
If the position command is set to a low value, the Inverter may conduct deceleration and perform positioning before the speed command value is reached. If the position command is
"0," DC injection braking (DB) is applied immediately when the RUN command is turned ON.
The position at power-on is recognized as the zero (position = 0). (When the power is turned off, the current value is cleared.)
If the current position counter exceeds the specified position range, a Position Control Range
Trip (E83) occurs and the Inverter runs freely. If the PCLR terminal is allocated, turning ON the
PCLR terminal clears the current position counter. (The internal position deviation counter is cleared simultaneously.)
In Reset Selection (C102), select "03: Trip reset only."
If Reset Selection (C102) is not set to 03, turning ON the Inverter's reset terminal (STOP/RESET key) clears the current position counter. To operate the Inverter by using the current position count value after resetting a trip by turning ON the reset terminal (STOP/RESET key), be sure to set Reset Selection (C102) to 03.
Reference
In the simple position control mode, the direction of RUN command (FW, RV) does not indicate the rotation direction. The FW or RV signal starts or stops the Inverter. The Inverter runs forward when
"Target position - Current position" is a positive value, or runs in reverse when it is a negative value.
In the simple position control mode, the ATR terminal is disabled.(Torque control is disabled.)
5
Multi-step Position Switching Function (CP1/CP2/CP3)
Selection of multi-step positions 0 to 7 becomes possible when "66: CP1" to "68: CP3" are allocated to Multi-function Input Selections (C001 to C007).
Set position commands in Multi-step Position Commands 0 to 7 (P060 to P067). (The unit is based on poool setting. This is not dependent on whether a single-phase or dual-phase encoder input is used and no need consider for x4 operation.)
If no position command is allocated to the terminals, Multi-step Position Command 0 (P060) is defined as the position command.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-164
5
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
P060
P061
P062
P063
P064
P065
P066
P067
C001 to C007
C169
Multi-step Position
Command 0
Multi-step Position
Command 1
Multi-step Position
Command 2
Multi-step Position
Command 3
Multi-step Position
Command 4
Multi-step Position
Command 5
Multi-step Position
Command 6
Multi-step Position
Command 7
Position Range Setting (Reverse Side)
(P073)
to
Position Range Setting (Forward Side)
(P072)
*1*2
Multi-function
Input Selection
Multi-step Speed/Position
Determination Time
66: CP1 (Position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (Position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (Position command selection 3)
0. to 200. ( × 10 ms)
Wait time until determination of terminal input
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
−
0.
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
− s
*1. Only when P075 is set to 01 the position corresponding to one rotation in the rotary coordinate system should be set in Multi-step Position Command 0 (P060).
*2. +: Forward rotation from the zero
− : Reverse rotation from the zero
Position command
Multi-step position 0
Multi-step position 1
Multi-step position 2
Multi-step position 3
Multi-step position 4
Multi-step position 5
Multi-step position 6
Multi-step position 7
1
1
0
1
1
CP3
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
CP2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
CP1
0
1
0
To prevent an erroneous input due to a time lag between inputs in the multi-step position command input mode, the wait time until the terminal input is confirmed can be set using Multistep Speed/ Position Determination Time (C169). This prevents the transition status before input establishment from being applied.
After an input change is detected, data will be confirmed upon an elapse of the time set in
C169. Note that the longer the determination time, the slower the input response.
5-165 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Determination Time (C169) Zero
Position command
1
3
7
CP1
CP2
CP3
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Determination Time (C169) available
5
4
Determination Time (C169)
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-166
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
5
Speed/Position Switching Function (SPD)
To perform speed control operation in the simple position control mode, turn ON this terminal.
While the SPD terminal is turned ON, the current position counter remains at zero. When the
SPD terminal is turned OFF during operation, position control operation is started the moment the terminal is turned OFF (speed/position switching). At this time, if the position command is
"0" the Inverter immediately stops. (Hunting may occur depending on the DC injection braking force.)
Reference
While the SPD terminal is ON, the Inverter runs in the direction specified by the run command.
Accordingly, set P004 to 02 (90 ° dual-phase pulse 2) when using this function.
When using speed/position switching (SPD), set P075 (Positioning Mode Selection) to 00 (limit).
Output frequency
Position count start
Speed control Position control
Time
Target position
SPD input ON
Parameter
No.
C001 to C007
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
73: SPD (Speed/position switching)
Default setting
−
Unit
−
5-167 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Zero Return Function
This function performs two types of zero return operations according to Zero Return Mode
(P068).
Zero return starts when the Zero return start signal (70: ORG) turns ON. When zero return is complete, the current position is cleared (= 0).
Select the zero return direction in Zero Return Direction Selection (P069).
If zero return is not performed, the Inverter performs position control with the position at poweron defined as the origin.
force.)
Reference
When using the zero return function (mode 1 or 2), set P075 (Positioning Mode Selection) to 00 (limit).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
P068
P069
P070
P071
C001 to C007
Zero Return Mode
Zero Return
Direction Selection
00: Zero return mode 1
01: Zero return mode 2
00: Forward side
01: Reverse side
Zero Return Mode 1
Frequency
Zero Return Mode 2
Frequency
0.00 to 10.00 (100.0)
0.00 to 400.0
Multi-function Input
Selection
69: ORL (Zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (Zero return startup signal)
Default setting
00
01
5.00
5.00
−
Unit
−
−
Hz
Hz
−
5
Zero Return Mode 1 (P068 = 00)
ON ORG input
ORL input
Output frequency
(2)
(1)
ON
Zero Return Mode 1 Frequency (P070)
(3) DB
Zero Position
(1) Accelerate until the zero return mode 1 frequency (speed) according to the acceleration time.
(2) Operate at the zero return mode 1 frequency (speed).
(3) Apply DC injection braking (DB) the moment an ORL signal is input.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-168
5
5-12 Simple Position Control Function
Zero Return Mode 2 (P068 = 01)
ON ORG input
ORL input
Output frequency
(2)
(1)
ON
Zero Return Mode 2 Frequency (P071)
Zero
(3)
Position
(4)
Zero Return Mode 1 Frequency (P070)
ORG input
ORL input
Output frequency
(2)
ON
ON
Zero Return Mode 2 Frequency (P071)
(1) (3)
(4)
DB
(5)
Time
Zero Return Mode 1 Frequency (P070)
(1) Accelerate until the zero return mode 2 frequency (speed) according to the acceleration time.
(2) Operate at the zero return mode 2 frequency (speed).
(3) Start decelerating the moment the ORL signal turns ON.
(4) Operate in the reverse direction at the zero return mode 1 frequency (speed).
(5) Apply DC injection braking (DB) the moment the ORL signal turns OFF.
5-169 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-13 Safety Function
5-13 Safety Function
Overview of Safety Function
The safety function is designed so that the safety stop function of category 0 (uncontrolled stop) specified in IEC 60204-1 is used to meet the safety standard of Stop PLd under ISO
13849-1.
The safety input function allows inverter output when current is flowing to both the GS1 and
GS2 terminals. When the safety input function actuates, the Inverter's output transistor operation is stopped while ensuring the level of safety conforming to the above standard, and the electric power to the motor stops (the motor executes a free-run stop).
It takes less than 10 ms after the safety input is received until the output is stopped.
An Emergency Shutoff (E37) message is displayed and a trip occurs. In the case of a competitive
External Trip (E12) setting, the Emergency Shutoff (E37) setting is given priority unless at poweron.
Note. If the EDM function is not used, PLc under ISO13849-1 applies.
Safety Function Setting
Turn ON the safety function selector switch while the Inverter power is turned OFF. The GS1 input and GS2 input are allocated to multi-function input terminals S3/GS1 and S4/GS2 automatically.
If the EDM output (safety monitor output) is used, turn ON the EDM function selector switch.
The EDM output is allocated to multi-function output terminal P11/EDM automatically.
Safety function selector switch
OFF ON
EDM function selector switch
OFF
(normal)
ON
(EDM)
5
Take note that when the safety function selector switch or EDM function selector switch is turned
ON and then OFF, the input/output terminals previously allocated to the GS1/GS2 inputs and
EDM output are reset to "no," meaning no allocation and the I/O contact selection remains NC contact.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-170
5-13 Safety Function
5
How to Wire for/Use Safety Function
Observe the above safety standard and follow the wiring example. Be sure to use both the GS1 input and GS2 input to design a system where both GS1 input and GS2 input are turned OFF upon actuation of the safety function.
Upon detecting an OFF state of the GS1 input or GS2 input, the Inverter actuates the safety function and stops the output.
Reference
The safety monitor (62: EDM) turns ON when the output is cut off upon detection of an OFF state of both the GS1 input and GS2 input signals. If the output stopped due to the safety function but the EDM output did not turn ON, check the GS1 and GS2 input circuits and EDM detection circuit.
Parameter
No.
C003
C004
C013
Function name
Multi-function
Input Selection
Data
77: GS1 input (safety input 1)
78: GS2 input (safety input 2)
*1
*1
Default setting
18
12
Unit
−
C014
C021
C031 b145
Multi-function
Input Operation
Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P1/EDM Selection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
P1/EDM Contact
Selection
GS Input
Operation
Selection
01: NC (NC contact)
*1
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)
*2
00: NO (NO contact)
*2
00: Not tripped (Cut off by hardware)
01: Tripped
*3 , *4
00
00
00
00
−
−
−
−
*1.When the safety function selector switch is turned ON, this setting is applied forcibly and the selection can no longer be changed.
*2.When the EDM function selector switch is turned ON, this setting is applied forcibly and the selection can no longer be changed.
*3. An E37 trip occurs. In the case of a competitive External Trip (E12) setting, "E37" setting is given priority unless at power-on.
*4.If either the GS1 or GS2 input terminal turns ON while an E37 trip is still present, safety cannot be ensured by the safety function.
5-171 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-13 Safety Function
Wiring Example
Wiring Example
Wiring Example When EDM is Used (Conforming to PLd under ISO13849-1)
Safety switch
Reset switch
EDM
(feedback) input
+24 V
Safety input
T11
T31 T32
T12
T33
A1
+24 V
(The figure shows an emergency-stop pushbutton switch.)
PC
A2
T21
T22
S14
S24
Safety output
G9SX-GS226-T15-RC
EDM
GS1
GS2
PSC
SC
Safety Unit
* Certified under the applicable safety
standards IEC61508, ISO13849.
3G3MX2
KM1
M
When the emergency stop button is pressed, the current flowing through GS1 and GS2 is cut off and the Inverter output is cut off. As a result, the motor enters a free-run status. This operation corresponds to stop category 0 under IEC60204-1.
Note 1. Shown above are wirings that apply when the multi-function input terminals are used based on the source logic. If they are used based on the sink logic, the wiring must be changed. For details, refer to "Connection to Programmable Controller (PLC)" on page 2-22.
Note 2. The safety relay and emergency shutoff input signal line must use a shielded coaxial cable such as RG174/U (by LAPP) per MIL-C17 or KX3B per NF C 93-550 with an outer diameter of 2.8 mm and length of 20 m or less. Ground the shield.
Note 3. All inductor parts such as relays and contactors must have an overvoltage protection circuit.
5
Example of System Components
Shown below is an example of peripherals conforming to the applicable safety standards which are recommended as system components.
Series name
G9SA
G9SX
NE1A
Model
G9SA-301
NE1A-SCPU01-V1
Manufacturer
OMRON Corporation ISO13849-2 cat4, SIL3
G9SX-GS226-T15-RC OMRON Corporation
OMRON Corporation
Applicable standard
IEC61508 SIL1-3
IEC61508 SIL3
Date of certification
06.06.2007
04.11.2004
27.09.2006
The Inverter meets the PLd safety requirement only when combined with PLd-compliant equipment.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-172
5
5-13 Safety Function
Periodic Inspection
If the current stops flowing to either the GS1 or GS2 terminal while the safety function is operating, the Inverter cuts off output. Accordingly, absence of defect in GS1 and GS2 wirings must be inspected periodically. Be sure to conduct a periodic inspection once a year.
The wiring inspection method for GS1/GS2/EDM is shown below.
Terminal
GS1
GS2
EDM
Inverter output
Current OFF
Current OFF
ON
Output cut off
Current ON
Current OFF
OFF
Output cut off
Status
Current OFF
Current ON
OFF
Output cut off
Current ON
Current ON
OFF
Output available
Precautions
To make sure the safety function operates normally, evaluate the overall safety system against all risk factors.
The safety function does not mean the input is cut off or output is electrically insulated. Before installation or maintenance work, turn off the Inverter input power supply.
The wires used for the safety function must be 30 m or shorter.
If common GS1 and GS2 are used for two or more Inverters, be sure to install a diode according to "Note on Use of Multiple Inverters" on page 2-24. GS1 and GS2 may turn ON, thus causing the
Inverter to produce output even in the safety mode.
5-173 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
5-14 Other Functions
The following explains the functions other than those relating to operation settings, such as initialization setting functions.
Initialization Setting
The set values can be initialized to the factory defaults. The fault monitor data can also be cleared.
To prevent inadvertent initialization, initialization cannot be performed unless multiple parameters are set.
Total RUN Time (d016) and Power ON Time Monitor (d017) cannot be cleared.
If Display Selection (b037) or Soft Lock Selection (b031) is set, initialization cannot be performed because the following parameters used in initialization cannot be accessed. Cancel the fixed display or soft lock and then perform initialization.
If you forget the password, there is no other means for recovery. Exercise due caution when setting a password.
Parameter
No.
Function name b084 b094
Data
Initialization
Selection
Initialization
Target Selection
00: Initialization disabled
01: Fault monitor clear
02: Initializes data
03: Fault monitor clear + Data initialization
04: Do not set.
00: All data (Complete initialization)
01: Initialize all data other than input/output terminal/basic communication settings
*1
02: Initialize only user-set/registered functions (U001 to U032)
*2
03: Initialize all data other than user-set/ registered functions (U001 to U032) and
Display Selection (b037)
Default setting
00
00
Unit
−
− b085
Initialization Data
Selection
00: Do not change.
00 − b180
Perform
Initialization/Mode
Selection
*3
00: Initialization disabled
01: Perform initialization/mode selection
00 −
*1.Refer to the next page for the details of "input/output terminal/basic communication settings" when
Initialization Target Selection is set (b094 = 01).
*2.Only the data of user-registered parameters are initialized and the user-registered parameters themselves remain.
*3.Exercise caution because when "01" is selected for Perform Initialization/Mode Selection (b180) and the Enter key is pressed, initialization starts immediately and the process cannot be undone.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-174
5
5-14 Other Functions
Details of input/output terminals/basic communication settings when
Initialization Target Selection is set (b094 = 01)
Parameter No.
Input/output terminal data
C001 to C007
C011 to C017
Description
Multi-function input selection
Multi-function input terminal operation selection
C021 to C022
C026
C031 to C032
C036
Multi-function output terminal selection
Multi-function relay output function selection
Multi-function output terminal contact selection
Multi-function relay output contact selection
Basic communication setting data
C071 Communication speed selection
C072
C074
Communication station No. selection
Communication parity selection
C075
C076
C077
C078
Communication stop bit selection
Operation selection on communication error
Communications error timeout time
Communication wait time
5-175 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
Initialization Method (Complete Initialization of Fault Monitor/Data)
Step 1: Set b084 to 03 and press the Enter key. bk0k8k4 0k0
Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and press the Enter key. bk1k8k0 0k0
Step 3: When the initialization display disappears, the initialization is complete. xkkkkkjkp Initialization
0k3 0k0 dk0k0k1
Initialization completed
Step 1.5
To perform partial initialization, set b094. bk0k9k4
How to Clear Fault Monitor
Step 1: Set b084 to 01 and press the Enter key. bk0k8k4 0k0
0k1
Step 2: Set b180 to 01 and press the Enter key. bk1k8k0 0k0
0k1
Step 3: When the display showing the clearing process in progress disappears, the clearing is complete. xkkkkkhkc Clear dk0k0k1
Clear completed
Note 1: To prevent inadvertent initialization, b084 and b180 will return to 00, even if changed, once the initialization is complete and when the power is reconnected.
Set these parameters every time the initialization is performed.
Note 2: Even if initialization is performed, the parameters for Initialization-related Functions (b085, b094),
Heavy/Light Load Selection (b049), FV/FI Adjustment (C081, C082) and Thermistor Adjustment
(C085) are not initialized.
Note 3: Once initialized, the current settings can no longer be restored.
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-176
5-14 Other Functions
User Parameter Manual Setting Function
"U" parameters are user parameters, and up to 32 parameters can be registered, as desired.
When user parameters are set and then Display Selection (b037) is set to "02: User setting," only the functions registered under U001 to U032, d001, F001 and b037 will be displayed thereafter.
Parameter
No.
Function name
Default setting
Unit
U001 to
U032 b037
User Selection
Display Selection
Data no: Not registered d001 to P186
Register a desired function code.
02: User setting + b037 no
04
−
−
5
User Parameter Automatic Setting Function
When User Parameter Automatic Setting Function (b039) is set to "01: Enabled," the parameters subjected to a data change are automatically stored in sequence under U001 to
U032. This data can be used as modification records.
The screen information (parameters) is stored when the Enter key is pressed. The monitor screens (d***) are also stored in the same manner.
U001 is the latest parameter, while U032 is the oldest parameter.
The same parameter is not duplicated. If the number of parameters stored exceeds 32, the oldest parameters are erased (from U032).
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit b039
User Parameter Automatic Setting
Function
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00 −
Related functions U001 to U032
Note: Take note that all parameters that are currently registered in User Parameters (U001 to U032) when b039 is changed from 00 to 01 will be initialized (set to "no").
5-177 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
Inverter Mode Selection
Changing the setting of Inverter Mode Selection alone does not change the mode. After changing this setting, perform an initialization/Mode Selection Command (b180). When the
Inverter mode is changed, the fault monitor data is cleared and the parameters are initialized.
The current Inverter mode can be monitored using d060.
Although the maximum output frequency of the 3G3MX2 is 400 Hz, switching to the highfrequency mode permits output of up to 1,000 Hz. Since the high-frequency mode is supported only in the heavy load rating setting, set the high-frequency mode after selecting Heavy Load
Rating (b049 = 00). (The rating type cannot be changed to light load when the high-frequency mode is selected.)
To perform initialization or clear the fault monitor data while in the high-frequency mode, set appropriate values in b084 and b094 and then perform initialization via b180 according to the normal initialization procedure. It is not necessary to set a value in b171.
Sensorless vector control operation cannot be performed in the high-frequency mode.
Switching between Normal Mode (Heavy Load Rating or Light Load Rating) and High-frequency Mode
Heavy load rating
Heavy load mode b049 : 00 d060 : 1-c
Normal mode (to 400 Hz) b049 b049
=
=
01
00
Light load rating
Light load mode b049 : 01 d060 : 1-
5 b171 = 02
+ Initialization b171 = 01
+ Initialization b171 = 02
+ Initialization
High-frequency mode d060 : h-1
High-frequency mode (to 1,000 Hz)
Parameter
No.
b171 b180
Function name Data
Inverter Mode
Selection
Perform Initialization/
Mode Selection
00: Selection disabled
01: Induction motor
02: Induction motor (high-frequency mode)
00: Initialization disabled
01: Perform initialization/mode selection
Default setting
00
00
Unit
−
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-178
5
5-14 Other Functions
Major Differences between High-frequency Mode and Normal Mode
Function name
High-frequency mode
Normal mode
Heavy Load/Light Load
Selection (b049)
Maximum Frequency
(A004)
Starting Frequency
(b082)
Carrier Frequency
(b083)
Heavy load rating (CT) Heavy load rating (CT)
1000 [Hz]
0.10 to 100.0 [Hz]
2.0 to 10.0 [kHz]
400 [Hz]
0.10 to 9.99 [Hz]
2.0 to 15.0 [kHz]
Light load rating (VT)
400 [Hz]
0.10 to 9.99 [Hz]
2.0 to 10.0[kHz]
Control Method (A044)
Acceleration Pattern
Selection (A097)
Deceleration Pattern
Selection (A098)
Automatic Carrier
Reduction (b089)
00: Constant torque characteristics
01: Reduced torque characteristics
02: Free V/f setting
00: Line
00: Disabled
00: Constant torque characteristics
01: Reduced torque characteristics
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
00: Linear
01: S shape curve
02: U shape curve
03: Reverse-U shape curve
04: EL-S shape curve
00: Disabled
01: Enabled, depends on current
02: Enabled, depends on fin temperature
00: Constant torque characteristics
01: Reduced torque characteristics
02: Free V/f setting
00: Linear
01: S shape curve
02: U shape curve
03: Inverted U shape curve
04: EL-S shape curve
00: Disabled
01: Enabled, depends on current
02: Enabled, depends on fin temperature
Note: In the high-frequency mode, the values are fixed and thus parameters b049, A097, A098 and b089 are not displayed.
5-179 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
The following table gives the differences in the setting ranges and default settings for parameters in Normal Mode with a Heavy Load Rating (CT) and
High-frequency Mode.
Parameter
No.
F002
F202
F003
F203
A003
A203
A004
A204
A011
A012
A044
A244
A059
A063
A064
A065
A066
A067
A068
A069
A092
A292
Function name
Normal Mode with a Heavy Load
Rating (CT)
Setting range Default
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s] 10.00
Acceleration Time
Setting 1
Acceleration Time
Setting 2
Deceleration Time
Setting 1
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
Deceleration Time
Setting 2
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
Base Frequency 1 30.0 to Maximum Frequency
1 (A004) [Hz]
Base Frequency 2 30.0 to Maximum Frequency
2 (A204) [Hz]
10.00
10.00
10.00
60.0
60.0
Maximum
Frequency 1
Base Frequency 1 (A003) to
400.0 [Hz]
Maximum
Frequency 2
Base Frequency 2 (A203) to
400.0 [Hz]
FV Start Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
FV End Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
Control Method 1 00: VC
01: VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
Control Method 2 00: VC
01: VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control
DC Injection
Braking Carrier
Frequency
2.0 to 15.0 [kHz]
Jump Frequency 1 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
Jump Frequency
Width 1
0.00 to 10.00 [Hz]
Jump Frequency 2 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00
0.00
00
00
5.0
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
Jump Frequency
Width 2
0.00 to 10.00 [Hz]
Jump Frequency 3 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
Jump Frequency
Width 3
0.00 to 10.00 [Hz]
Acceleration Stop
Frequency
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
60.0
60.0
0.00
0.50
0.00
1st Acceleration
Time 2
2nd Acceleration
Time 2
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
10.00
10.00
Default
30.00
30.0 to Maximum Frequency
1 (A004) [Hz]
30.0 to Maximum Frequency
2 (A204) [Hz]
Base Frequency 1 (A003) to
1,000.0 [Hz]
Base Frequency 2 (A203) to
1000.0 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
00: VC
01: VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>
02: Free V/f setting
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
1000.0
0.00
0.00
00
00: VC
High-frequency Mode
Setting range
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
01: VP 1.7th power <VC, if low speed>
02: Free V/f setting
2.0 to 10.0 [kHz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 100.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 100.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 100.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
30.00
30.00
30.00
00
5.0
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
15.00
15.00
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-180
5
5-14 Other Functions
Parameter
No.
A093
A293
A095
A295
A096
A296
A101
A102
A145
A154
A156
A161
A162 b007 b019 b054 b082 b083 b112
C027
Function name
Normal Mode with a Heavy Load
Rating (CT)
Setting range
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
Default
10.00
1st Deceleration
Time 2
2nd Deceleration
Time 2
2-step Acceleration
Frequency 1
2-step Acceleration
Frequency 2
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
2-step
Deceleration
Frequency 1
2-step
Deceleration
Frequency 2
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
FI Start Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
FI End Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz] Frequency Addition
Amount Setting
Deceleration Stop
Frequency
PID Sleep Function
Operation Level
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
VR Start
Frequency
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
VR End Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz] Frequency
Matching Lower
Limit Frequency
Setting
Free-electronic
Thermal
Frequency 3
Free-electronic Thermal
Frequency 2 to 400 [Hz]
Freq. Drop to Start
Ctrl. Decel
0.00 to 10.00 [Hz]
Starting Frequency 0.10 to 9.99 [Hz]
Carrier Frequency 2.0 to 15.0 [kHz]
Free V/f Frequency
7
MP Selection
Free V/f Frequency 6 to 400
[Hz]
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
10: Cooling fin temperature
12: Do not use this setting.
15: Pulse train input monitor
16: Optional board
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.50
10.0
0.
07
High-frequency Mode
Setting range
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.01 to 3,600.00 [s]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
Free-electronic Thermal
Frequency 2 to 1,000 [Hz]
0.00 to 100.00 [Hz]
0.10 to 100.00 [Hz]
2.0 to 10.0 [kHz]
Free V/f Frequency 6 to
1,000 [Hz]
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
10: Cooling fin temperature
12: Do not use this setting.
15: Pulse train input monitor
16: Optional board
Default
15.00
15.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.50
5.0
0.
07
5-181 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
Parameter
No.
C028
Function name
AM Selection
Normal Mode with a Heavy Load
Rating (CT)
Setting range
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
10: Cooling fin temperature
11: Output torque (signed)
13: Do not use this setting.
16: Optional board
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
Default
07
0.00
High-frequency Mode
Setting range
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
10: Cooling fin temperature
13: Do not use this setting.
16: Optional board
C042
C043
C045
C046
P015
P070
Arrival Frequency
During
Acceleration
Arrival Frequency
During
Deceleration
Arrival Frequency
During
Acceleration 2
Arrival Frequency
During
Deceleration 2
Creep Speed
Setting
Zero Return Mode
1 Frequency
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 400.00 [Hz]
Starting Frequency to 10.00
[Hz]
Starting Frequency to 10.00
[Hz]
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
5.00
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
0.00 to 1,000.00 [Hz]
Starting Frequency to
100.00 [Hz]
Starting Frequency to
100.00 [Hz]
* Shaded cells are the same as those for Normal Mode (heavy load rating).
Default
07
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
5.00
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-182
5
5-14 Other Functions
The following parameters are not displayed in High-frequency Mode. b042 b043 b044
C058
C059
H001
H002
H202
H005
H205
H020 b045 b046 b049 b089
C054
C055
C056
C057
H220
H021
H221
H022
Parameter No. d009 d010 d012
A097
A098
A131
A132
A150
A151
A152
A153 b040 b041
Function name
Torque Reference Monitor
Torque Bias Monitor
Output Torque Monitor
Acceleration Pattern Selection
Deceleration Pattern Selection
Acceleration Curve Parameter (S, U, reverse U)
Deceleration Curve Parameter (S, U, reverse U)
EL-S Shape Acceleration Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Acceleration Curve Ratio 2
EL-S Shape Deceleration Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Deceleration Curve Ratio 2
Torque Limit Selection
Torque Limit 1 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward Power
Running)
Torque Limit 2 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse
Regeneration)
Torque Limit 3 (Four-quadrant Mode Reverse Power
Running)
Torque Limit 4 (Four-quadrant Mode Forward
Regeneration)
Torque LADSTOP Selection
Reverse Rotation Prevention Selection
Heavy Load/Light Load Selection
Automatic Carrier Reduction
Overtorque/Undertorque Selection
Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Forward Power Running)
Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Reverse Regeneration)
Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Reverse Power Running)
Overtorque/Undertorque Level (Forward Regeneration)
Overtorque/Undertorque Signal Output Mode Selection
Auto-tuning Selection
Motor Parameter 1
Motor Parameter 2
Speed Response 1
Speed Response 2
Motor 1 Parameter R1
Motor 2 Parameter R1
Motor 1 Parameter R2
Motor 2 Parameter R2
Motor 1 Parameter L
5-183 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
5-14 Other Functions
H233
H034
H234
P033
P034
P036
P037
P038
P039
P040
P041
Parameter No.
H222
H023
H223
H024
H224
H030
H230
H031
H231
H032
H232
H033
Function name
Motor 2 Parameter L
Motor 1 Parameter Io
Motor 2 Parameter Io
Motor 1 Parameter J
Motor 2 Parameter J
Motor 1 Parameter R1 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 2 Parameter R1 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1 Parameter R2 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 2 Parameter R2 (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1 Parameter L (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 2 Parameter L (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1 Parameter Io (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 2 Parameter Io (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 1 Parameter J (Auto-tuning Data)
Motor 2 Parameter J (Auto-tuning Data)
Torque Reference Input Selection
Torque Reference Setting
Torque Bias Mode
Torque Bias Value
Torque Bias Polarity Selection
Speed Limit Value in Torque Control (Forward)
Speed Limit Value in Torque Control (Reverse)
Speed/Torque Control Switching Time
Multi-function Input Selections (C001, C002, C003, C004, C005, C006, and
C007)
In High-speed Mode, functions cannot be selected for the multi-function input terminals listed in the following table.
40
41
42
52
Setting
TL
TRQ1
TRQ2
ATR
Function name
Torque limit enabled/disabled
Torque limit switching 1
Torque limit switching 2
Torque reference input permission
Multi-function Output and Multi-function Relay Output Function Selections
(C021, C022, and C026)
In High-speed Mode, functions cannot be selected for the multi-function output and relay output terminals listed in the following table.
7
10
Setting
OTQ
TRQ
Function name
Overtorque/undertorque
During torque limit
5
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 5-184
Communication Function
Describes the connection and setting methods for implementing Modbus communication with external network control equipment, as well as each function required in this communication. The method of Co-inverter communication is also described.
6-1 Communication Specifications ........................................... 6-1
6-2 RS-485 Port Specifications and Connection ...................... 6-2
6-3 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Parameters....... 6-3
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol............. 6-4
Message Structure.......................................................................... 6-4
Total Communication Time ............................................................. 6-6
Normal Response ........................................................................... 6-6
Abnormal Response ....................................................................... 6-7
No Response .................................................................................. 6-7
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No. .................................... 6-8
Coil Status Read [01h] .................................................................... 6-8
Reading the Holding Register Content [03h] .................................. 6-9
Writing Into the Coil [05h].............................................................. 6-10
Writing Into the Holding Register [06h] ......................................... 6-12
Loop-back Test [08h] .................................................................... 6-13
Writing Into Multiple Coils [0Fh] .................................................... 6-14
Writing Into Multiple Holding Register [10h].................................. 6-16
Multiple Holding Register Read or Write [17h].............................. 6-17
Exceptional Response .................................................................. 6-18
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command) ......6-19
Issuing Method for the Enter Command ....................................... 6-19
EEPROM Write Mode ................................................................... 6-20
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication............................................... 6-22
Co-inverter Communication Setting .............................................. 6-25
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data...... 6-27
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6
6-1 Communication Specifications
6-1 Communication Specifications
The 3G3MX2 Series Inverter comes standard with a RS-485 Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU) port to enable communication with external network control equipment. The communication specifications are specified below. The Modbus communications function of the Inverter cannot be used if an optional board that provides communications functions is mounted.
Function name
Protocol
Transfer Speed
Description
Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU) (Slave)
2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 k, 38.4 k, 57.6 k, 76.8 k,
115.2 kbps
Synchronous System Asynchronous system
Transfer Code Binary
Transmission Mode LSB first (Sent sequentially from the least significant bit.)
Complying Interface
Data Bit Length
Parity
RS-485
8 bits
No parity/Even/Odd
Note
Selected/set by a parameter.
Stop Bit Length
Startup Method
Wait Time
1 bit or 2 bits
One-side start using host command
Silent interval + 0 to 1,000 [ms]
Connection 1: N (N = Max. 247)
(Up to 32 units can be connected without repeater.)
Error Check Overrun/Framing/CRC-16/Horizontal parity
Communication length 500 m
Selected/set by a parameter.
Selected/set by a parameter.
−
Selected/set by a parameter.
Selected/set by a parameter.
6-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-2 RS-485 Port Specifications and Connection
6-2 RS-485 Port Specifications and
Connection
Each communication connector pin is shown below.
The USB port is designed exclusively for communication with a
PC. The RS-422 (RJ45 modular connector) port is designed exclusively for communication with the Digital Operator.
RS − S7
RS+ MP
S6
RP
S5 S4
FS FV
S3 S2 S1 SC
FI SC AM PC
PSC P24
P2 P1
Modbus-RTU
Terminal Resistor selector switch
RS-485 terminal
External equipment
(master)
RS+
200 Ω
3G3MX2 (No.1)
RS −
RS+ RS
−
3G3MX2 (No.2)
RS+ RS
−
3G3MX2 (No.3)
RS+ RS
−
3G3MX2 (No.n)
Note. If communication is unstable, install on both ends of the communication cable a Terminal Resistor matching the characteristic impedance of the cable.
The built-in Terminal Resistor inside the Inverter is 200 Ω .
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-2
6
6-3 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Parameters
6-3 List of Modbus Communication
(Modbus-RTU) Parameters
Set the following parameters according to the communication specifications.
As for C071, C074 and C075, modified data are not reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed. To perform a reset, turn the reset terminal (18: RS) OFF, ON and then
OFF again.
Parameter
No.
A001
Function name
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
A002
C071
C072
C074
C075
C076
C077
C078
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
Data
RUN Command Selection 1 03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
Communication Speed
Selection
03: 2,400 bps
04: 4,800 bps
05: 9,600 bps
06: 19.2 kbps
07: 38.4 kbps
08: 57.6 kbps
09: 76.8 kbps
10: 115.2 kbps
1. to 247.
Communication Station
No. Selection
Communication Parity
Selection
Communication Stop Bit
Selection
Operation Selection on
Communication Error
00: No parity
01: Even
02: Odd
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
Communications Error
Timeout Time
03: Free run
04: Deceleration stop
0.00: Timeout disabled
0.01 to 99.99
Communication Wait Time 0. to 1000.
Default setting
02
02
05
1.
00
1
02
0.00
0.
Unit
−
−
−
−
−
−
− s ms
6-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-
RTU) Protocol
Follow the procedures below in regards to communication between the external control device and the Inverter.
(1) (3)
External control device
Time
Inverter
(2)
Wait time
(Silent interval + C078)
Communication error timeout time (C077)
(1) Frame to be sent from the external control device to the Inverter (Query)
(2) Frame to be returned from the Inverter to the external control device (Response)
(3) Unless the Inverter completes reception of a query from the host within the time set in C077 after the Inverter completes a response (response transmission), the Inverter becomes ready to receive the first data again. In this case, the Inverter sends no response. Also, the
Inverter's operation conforms to the setting of Operation Selection on Communication
Error (C076). For details, refer to Chapter 4. "Parameter List".
The receiving timeout monitor will be started after the first transmission/reception is performed after power-on or reset. Timeout will not occur until reception or transmission is performed.
Response from the Inverter (Frame (2)) will be output as return after the Inverter receives the query (Frame (1)), not output independently.
The silent interval corresponds to 3.5 characters.
Below is each frame format (command).
6
Message Structure
A command message sent from the master to a slave is called "Query," while a response message sent from the slave is called "Response". The query and response transmission formats are specified below.
Query
Slave address
Parameter No.
Query data
Error check (CRC-16)
Response
Slave address for confirmation
Parameter No. for confirmation
Response data
Error check (CRC-16)
Slave address
Pre-set numbers ranging from 1 to 247 in each Inverter (slave). (Only the Inverter having the same slave address as the query will take the corresponding query.)
Broadcasting can be performed by setting the slave address to zero.
A broadcast message is received by all slaves, but the slaves do not return a response.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-4
6
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol
Data read or loop-back cannot be performed while broadcasting.
Although slave addresses 1 to 247 are used under the Modbus specification, the master can use any of slave addresses 250 to 254 to broadcast to each group. (The slaves do not return a response.)
Note that this function is effective only with write commands (05h, 06h, 0Fh and 10h).
Slave address
250 (FAh)
251 (FBh)
252 (FCh)
253 (FDh)
254 (FEh)
Recipient
Broadcast it to slave addresses 01 to 09.
Broadcast it to slave addresses 10 to 19.
Broadcast it to slave addresses 20 to 29.
Broadcast it to slave addresses 30 to 39.
Broadcast it to slave addresses 40 to 247.
Parameter No.
Use a Parameter No. to specify the function to be executed by the Inverter.
Supported Parameter Nos. are shown below.
Parameter No.
Parameter No.
01h
03h
05h
06h
08h
0Fh
10h
17h
Function
Read the status of a coil
Read the content of a holding register
Write into a coil
Write into a holding register
Loop-back test
Write into multiple coils
Write into multiple registers
Read from or write into multiple holding resisters
Maximum number of data bytes in 1 message
4
32
Maximum data number in
1 message
32 coils (in bit)
16 registers (in byte)
2
2
−
4
32
32/32
1 coil (in bit)
1 register (in byte)
−
32 coils (in bit)
16 registers (in byte)
16/16 registers (in byte)
Data
Send data relating to a Parameter No.
The data transmission format varies depending on the Parameter No.
The 3G3MX2 Series supports the data types specified below, among the types used in
Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU).
Data name
Coil
Holding register
Description
Binary data (1 bit) that can be read or written
16-bit data that can be read or written
6-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol
Error Check
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for the Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU) error check.
The CRC code is a 16-bit data generated against the block of random length data in the 8-bit unit. Generation of CRC codes uses the generation polynomial "CRC-16 (X
16
+ X
15
+ X
2
+ 1)".
<CRC-16 Calculation Example>
CRC-16 operator
CRC
CRC
=
FFFFh
Hi Lo
CRC register (2 bytes)
Target data
Target data completed
Yes
Swap the Hi and Lo bytes of CRC.
CRC
=
CRC XOR target data
Completed
8-bit shift
Remaining bit
CRC
=
CRC is shifted to the right by 1 bit.
Completed
0
Overflowed bit due to the shift
1
CRC
=
CRC is shifted to the right by 1 bit.
Shift the applicable data by 1 byte.
Total Communication Time
The time from receiving query to the response by the Inverter will be the total of <the silent interval (3.5-character length) and C078 (communication wait time) setting>.
If sending another query to the Inverter after receiving the response, be sure to provide the silent interval length (3.5 characters) at the minimum.
Normal Response
If the Parameter No. in the query indicates a loop-back (08h), writing to a coil(s) (05h/0Fh) or writing to a holding register(s) (06h/10h), the Inverter returns a response whose content is the same as the query.
If the Parameter No. in the query indicates reading from a coil (01h) or reading from a holding register (03h), a response is returned whose slave address and Parameter No. are the same as the query and to which data has been added.
Refer to the format for each query specified below.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-6
6
6-4 Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Protocol
6
Abnormal Response
Response
Slave address
Parameter No.
Exceptional code
Error check (CRC-16)
If an error (aside from a communication error) is found in the query content, the Inverter returns exceptional responses without performing any operation.
To determine the cause of an error, check the Parameter No. of the response. The Parameter No.
of the exceptional response will be the value of the query Parameter No. to which 80h is added.
Check the details of the error with the exceptional code.
Exceptional code
Code
01h
02h
03h
21h
22h
23h
Description
Specified an unsupported function.
Specified address does not exist.
Specified data has an unacceptable format.
Data is out of the Inverter's range for writing but for the holding register.
The Inverter does not allow this function.
Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation.
Has issued the enter command during operation (UV*).
Has written into the register during trip (UV*).
Has written into a soft-locked register.
Has attempted to change an I/O terminal that cannot be changed.
Has attempted to change the contact type of the RS (reset) allocation terminal.
Has attempted to write into a register when auto-tuning was enabled.
Has attempted to write into a locked register while a password was set.
Etc.
Has written into the read-only register (coil).
* UV: During undervoltage
No Response
The Inverter ignores the query and does not respond if:
Has received a broadcast command (query of address 0).
A communication error is detected in receiving a query.
The query slave address is different from the slave address set for the Inverter.
The time interval between 2 pieces of data that configure the message is less than a 3.5character length.
Query data length is inappropriate.
The reception interval in a frame exceeds the 1.5-character length.
The error check code in the query does not match (CRC error).
Has received a broadcast command for each group (query of address 250 to 254).
If the timer is set in the master to monitor response, but no response is returned within the set time, send the same query again.
6-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Coil Status Read [01h]
Reads out the coil status (ON/OFF).
Example) Read multi-function input terminals S1 to S7/EB of the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
Refer to the following table for the multi-function input statuses.
Function name
Coil No.
Multi-function Input
Terminals
Coil Status
Data
0007h 0008h 0009h 000Ah 000Bh 000Ch 000Dh
S1 S2 S3/GS1 S4/GS2 S5/TH S6 S7/EB
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil start address (MSB)
*2
4 Coil start address (LSB)
*2
5 Number of coils (MSB)
6 Number of coils (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (LSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
01
00
06
00
07
9D
C9
(Coil address) = (Coil number) − 1
Response:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
Example
(Hex)
01
01
Input terminal S7/EB
Input terminal S1
3 Number of data bytes
4 Coil data
*3
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
01
45
90
7B
→ 45h = 0100 0101
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
*2. Note that the coil start address is "0006", which is smaller by 1 than the coil number "0007". The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address.
*3. Transfers the byte length data. The most significant byte (data received first) indicates the younger coil address.
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-8
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
The data received as the response shows the statuses of coils 0007h to 000Dh. The received data "45h = 0100 0101b" is read as shown in the preceding page, where the status of coil
0007h represents the LSB.
If the reading coil exceeds the defined coil range in the final coil data, such coil data is regarded as "0" and returned.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if the coil status read command was unsuccessful.
Example) If the statuses of 16 coils are read from Coil No. 0001h, the data sequence will be as follows:
Data 1
Data 2 bit7
0008h
0010h bit6
0007h
000Fh bit5
0006h
000Eh bit4
0005h
000Dh bit3
0004h
000Ch bit2
0003h
000Bh bit1
0002h
000Ah bit0
0001h
0009h
6
Reading the Holding Register Content [03h]
Reads the specified number of consecutive holding register contents from the specified holding register addresses.
Example) Read the latest trip information (0012h to 0017h) from the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Register start address (MSB)
*3
4 Register start address (LSB)
*3
5 Number of holding registers (MSB)
6 Number of holding registers (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
03
00
11
00
06
95
CD
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
6 registers
6-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Response:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address *1
2 Parameter No.
3 Number of data bytes *2
4 Register data 1 (MSB)
5 Register data 1 (LSB)
6 Register data 2 (MSB)
7 Register data 2 (LSB)
8 Register data 3 (MSB)
9 Register data 3 (LSB)
10 Register data 4 (MSB)
11 Register data 4 (LSB)
12 Register data 5 (MSB)
13 Register data 5 (LSB)
14 Register data 6 (MSB)
15 Register data 6 (LSB)
D2
00
1E
01
1C
04
00
00
04
Example
(Hex)
01
03
0C
00
03
00
0003h →
0004h →
03d
4 (Inverter status: Accelerating)
0000 04D2h
(Frequency)
001Eh
011Ch
→
→
30d
→
→
→
284d
E03 (Cause: Overcurrent)
1234d → 12.34 [Hz]
3.0 [A] (Current)
→ 284 [V] (DC)
16 CRC-16 (MSB) 77
"d": Decimal
17 CRC-16 (LSB) 3D
"h": Hexadecimal
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
*2. Data is transferred by the number of data bytes. In this example, 12 (0Ch) bytes are used since 6 pieces of holding register data are returned.
*3. Note that the holding register start address is "0011h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number
"0012h". The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address.
6
Writing Into the Coil [05h]
Writes into 1 coil. The following table shows the coil status change.
Coil status
Data
Written data (MSB)
Written data (LSB)
OFF → ON
FFh
00h
ON → OFF
00h
00h
Example) Issue a RUN command to the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
The RUN command selection must be set to Communication (A002 = 03).
The coil number of the RUN command is "0001".
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-10
6
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address *1
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil address (MSB) *2
4 Coil address (LSB) *2
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
05
00
00
FF
00
8C
3A
(Coil address) = (Coil number) − 1
OFF → ON: FF00h
Response:
No.
1
Field name
Slave address
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil address (MSB) *2
4 Coil address (LSB) *2
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Exampl e (Hex)
01
05
00
00
FF
00
8C
3A
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the coil start address is "0000", which is smaller by 1 than the coil number "0001". The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if writing into the coil cannot be performed normally.
6-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Writing Into the Holding Register [06h]
Writes data into the specified holding register.
Example) Write "50.00 Hz" into Output Frequency Setting (F001 = A020) of the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
Since the holding register for output frequency setting has a data resolution of 0.01 Hz, the data to be written should be "5000 (1388h)" when setting 50.00 Hz.
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Register address (MSB)
*2,*3
4 Register address (LSB)
*2,*3
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
06
00
01
13
88
D5
5C
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
1388h → 5000d → 50.00 Hz
Response:
No.
1
Field name
Slave address
2 Parameter No.
3 Register address (MSB) *2
4 Register address (LSB) *2
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
06
00
01
13
88
D5
5C
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Although the Frequency Reference (F001) normally uses two registers (0001h and 0002h), 50.00 Hz
(5000) is covered by the range of the LSB register, therefore, the data is written to only one register in the above sample. When setting a frequency exceeding 655.35 Hz, write it into two registers simultaneously using a multiple holding register write command (10h).
*3. Note that the holding register start address in F001 (LOW) is "0001h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number "0002h". The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address.
Note that if any parameter other than F001 is rewritten while the data is displayed, the displayed data does not change in real time. Return to the parameter display and show the data gain, and the value reflecting the change will be displayed.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if the writing into the holding register cannot be performed normally.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-12
6
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
6
Loop-back Test [08h]
Used to check the communications between master and slave. A random value can be used for test data.
Example) Loopback test to the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Test sub code (MSB)
4 Test sub code (LSB)
5 Data (MSB)
6 Data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
08
00
00
Random
Random
CRC
CRC
Response:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address *1
2 Parameter No.
3 Test sub code (MSB)
4 Test sub code (LSB)
5 Data (MSB)
6 Data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
*1. Broadcasting cannot be performed.
Example
(Hex)
01
08
00
00
Random
Random
CRC
CRC
As for test sub code, only those relating to echo-back of query data (00h, 00h) are supported.
Other commands are not supported.
6-13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Writing Into Multiple Coils [0Fh]
Rewrites consecutive multiple coils.
Example) Change the statuses of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7/EB of the
Inverter with the slave address "1".
Change multi-function input terminals S1 to S7/EB to the statuses shown in the table below.
Coil No.
Function name
Multi-function input terminals
Terminal status
Data
0007h 0008h 0009h 000Ah 000Bh 000Ch 000Dh
S1
ON
S2
ON
S3/GS1 S4/GS2
ON OFF
S5/TH
ON
S6
OFF
S7/EB
OFF
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil start address (MSB)
*2
4 Coil start address (LSB)
*2
5 Number of coils (MSB)
6 Number of coils (LSB)
7 Number of bytes
8 Change data (MSB)
9 Change data (LSB)
10 CRC-16 (MSB)
CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
0F
00
06
00
07
02
17
00
06
98
(Coil address) = (Coil number)
17h = 0001 0111
− 1
Input terminal S1
Input terminal S7/EB
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-14
6
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Response:
No.
1
Field name
Slave address
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil start address (MSB)
*2
4 Coil start address (LSB)
*2
5 Number of coils (MSB)
6 Number of coils (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
*1
Example
(Hex)
01
0F
00
06
00
07
F4
08
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Since the change data comprises both MSB and LSB as a set, make the byte to be an even number by adding 1, even if the byte which actually needs to be changed is an odd number.
*3. Note that the coil start address is "0006", which is smaller by 1 than the coil number "0007". The coil number less 1 corresponds to the coil address.
A multi-function input is recognized as ON when the status of either the terminal block input or communication setting becomes ON.
As for Multi-function Input Monitor (d005), only the terminal block input is monitored.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if writing into multiple coils cannot be performed normally.
6-15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Writing Into Multiple Holding Register [10h]
Writes into consecutive multiple registers.
Example) Set Acceleration Time Setting 1 (F002) to "10 s" for the Inverter whose slave address is "1".
Since holding registers "1103h and 1104h" used for Acceleration Time Setting 1 (F002) have a data resolution of 0.01 s, the data to be written should be "1000 (0000 03E8h)" when setting 10 s.
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Register start address (MSB)
*2
4 Register start address (LSB)
*2
5 Number of registers (MSB)
6 Number of registers (LSB)
7 Number of bytes
*3
8 Written data 1 (MSB)
9 Written data 1 (LSB)
10 Written data 2 (MSB)
11 Written data 2 (LSB)
12 CRC-16 (MSB)
13 CRC-16 (LSB)
00
03
E8
B2
98
Example
(Hex)
01
10
11
02
00
02
04
00
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
0000 03E8h → 1000d → 10.00 s
Response:
No.
1
Field name
Slave address
2 Parameter No.
3 Register start address (MSB)
*2
4 Register start address (LSB)
*2
5 Number of registers (MSB)
6 Number of registers (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
*1
Example
(Hex)
01
10
11
02
00
02
E5
34
*1. There is no response for broadcasting.
*2. Note that the holding register start address is "1102h", which is smaller by 1 than the register number
"1103h". The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address.
*3. Specifies the number of actual bytes to change to, not the number of holding registers.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if the writing into the multiple registers cannot be performed normally.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-16
6
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
6
Multiple Holding Register Read or Write [17h]
Writes into or reads from consecutive multiple registers.
Example) Write 50,00 Hz into Output Frequency Setting (F001) of the Inverter with
Slave Address "1," and Read Output Frequency Monitor Value (d001).
Query:
No.
Field name
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
8
Slave address
Parameter No.
Read register start address (MSB)
*1
Read register start address (LSB)
*1
Number of read registers (MSB)
Number of read registers (LSB)
Write register start address (MSB) *1
Write register start address (LSB)
*1
9 Number of write registers (MSB)
10 Number of write registers (LSB)
11 Number of written data bytes n
12 Written data 1 (MSB)
13 Written data 1 (LSB)
14 Written data 2 (MSB)
15 Written data 2 (LSB)
16 CRC-16 (MSB)
17 CRC-16 (LSB)
00
13
88
00
02
04
00
F4
86
00
00
02
00
00
Example
(Hex)
01
17
10
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
0000 1388h → 5000d → 50.00 Hz
Response:
No.
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
Field name
Slave address
Parameter No.
Number of read data bytes n
Read data 1 (MSB)
Read data 1 (LSB)
Read data 2 (MSB)
Read data 2 (LSB)
CRC-16 (MSB)
CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
01
17
04
00
00
13
88
F4
71
0000 1388h → 5000d → 50.00 Hz
*1. Note that the holding register start address is smaller by 1 than the register number. The register number less 1 corresponds to the register address.
Refer to "Exceptional Response" on page 6-18 if writing into or reading from multiple registers cannot be performed normally.
6-17 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-5 Explanation of Each Parameter No.
Exceptional Response
The master requests the response for a query other than broadcast or broadcast to each group. Though the Inverter should return a response corresponding with the query, it returns an exceptional response if the query has an error.
The exceptional response has the field configuration shown in the following table.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Parameter No.
Exceptional code
Error check
The detailed field configuration is shown in the table below. The Parameter No. of the exceptional response will be the value of the query Parameter No. to which 80h is added. The exceptional code shows the cause of exceptional response.
Query
01h
03h
05h
06h
0Fh
10h
17h
Parameter No.
Exceptional response
81h
83h
85h
86h
8Fh
90h
97h
6
Exceptional code
01h
02h
03h
21h
22h
23h
Description
Specified an unsupported function.
Specified address does not exist.
Specified data has an unacceptable format.
Data is out of setting range for writing into the holding register.
The Inverter does not allow this function.
Has attempted to change the register that cannot be changed during operation.
Has issued the enter command during operation (UV*).
Has written into the register during trip (UV*).
Has written into a soft-locked register.
Has attempted to change an I/O terminal that cannot be changed.
Has attempted to change the contact type of the RS (reset) allocation terminal.
Has attempted to write into a register when auto-tuning was enabled.
Has attempted to write into a locked register while a password was set.
Has written into the read-only register (coil).
* UV: During undervoltage
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-18
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command)
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding
Register (Enter Command)
If a holding register write command (06h) or consecutive holding register write command (10h) is used, the new register value will become effective but it will not be stored in the Inverter's
EEPROM memory. Accordingly, once the Inverter power is cut off the status will return to the one effective before the holding register was changed.
To store the change to the holding register in the Inverter's EEPROM memory, issue an Enter command according to the method specified below. When the control parameters are changed, the motor parameters must be re-calculated. In this case, also perform recalculation with the Enter command.
6
Issuing Method for the Enter Command
Use a Holding Register Write command (06h) to write into the holding register for Enter command (0900h). At this time, the value to be written into the holding register (0900h) is as follows.
0000
0001
Set value
0002 to FFFF
Description
Motor parameter recalculation
Set value storage
Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage
Note. If any of the following parameters is changed, the motor parameters must be recalculated. In this case, the motor parameters can be recalculated by writing 0000h or 0002h into the Enter command holding register.
Parameter List Requiring Motor Parameter Recalculation
Parameter No.
A003/A203
A004/A204
A044/A244
A082/A282
Function name
Base Frequency
Maximum Frequency
Control Method
Motor Incoming Voltage
Selection
Free V/f Frequency 7
Parameter No.
H003/H203
H004/H204
H005/H205
Function name
Motor Capacity
Motor Pole Number
Speed Response
H020/H220 to H024/H224 Motor Parameters b112 H030/H230 to H034/H234 Motor Parameters
(Auto-tuning)
H002/H202 Motor Parameter
Note 1. The Inverter returns a response to the host when it receives an Enter command, and then executes
EEPROM memory write. You can check whether the data is being written by monitoring the data writing signal (coil number 0049h).
Note 2. Since the Inverter's EEPROM memory has a limit for the number of rewrites (approx. 100,000 times), the Inverter life may be shortened if Enter commands are frequently used.
6-19 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command)
Example) Issue an Enter command (storage of set value) to the Inverter whose slave address is "8".
Query:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
*1
2 Parameter No.
3 Register address (MSB)
*2
4 Register address (LSB)
*2
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
08
06
08
FF
00
01
7A
C3
(Register address) = (Register number) − 1
Response:
No.
Field name
1 Slave address
2 Parameter No.
3 Coil address (MSB)
*2
4 Coil address (LSB)
*2
5 Written data (MSB)
6 Written data (LSB)
7 CRC-16 (MSB)
8 CRC-16 (LSB)
Example
(Hex)
08
06
08
FF
00
01
7A
C3
6
EEPROM Write Mode
If the holding register write command (06h), etc. is used to write "1" into the holding register for
EEPROM write mode (0902h), the EEPROM, the EEPROM write mode will become active.
If data is changed using the holding register write command (06h) after switching to the EEPROM write mode, the new data is written into both the volatile memory for operation (RAM) and nonvolatile memory for storage (EEPROM). At the same time, the EEPROM write mode is cancelled.
If any command other than the holding register write command (06h) is received after switching to the EEPROM write mode, the EEPROM write mode is cancelled.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-20
6
6-6 To Save the Change to the Holding Register (Enter Command)
Difference Between Enter Command and EEPROM Write Mode
Enter command EEPROM write mode
Master
Parameter change
Parameter change
3G3MX2
Write into RAM
Master
EEPROM write mode enabled
902h=1
3G3MX2
Write into RAM
Parameter change
Parameter change
Write into RAM
Write into RAM and
EEPROM
(changed data only)
Enter command
900h=1
Write all data into EEPROM
Parameter change
Write into RAM
The EEPROM write mode remains effective only for one parameter change.
6-21 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
The 3G3MX2 provides the Co-inverter communication function to allow for communication among multiple 3G3MX2 Inverters without using a PC, PLC or other master equipment, in addition to performing normal Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU) (slave).
In Co-inverter communication, each Inverter plays the role of "Management Inverter", "Master
Inverter" or "Slave Inverter". For the Management Inverter, the Master Inverter as set by the user is specified. All other Inverters become slave Inverters. Although the Management Inverter is always fixed, the Master Inverter changes sequentially. Accordingly, the Management Inverter may be the Master Inverter or Slave Inverter. Other conditions are specified below:
One Management Inverter is required within the network.
Up to eight Inverters can be selected that function as the Master Inverter.
Up to 247 Inverters (or 32 Inverters without repeater, regulated by the RS-485 network) can be connected across the network.
Station No. 1 operates as the Management Inverter in Co-inverter communication. Accordingly, be sure to provide a Management Inverter of Station No. 1.
The Master Inverter can write data into holding registers in a given Slave Inverter. Up to five different station numbers and holding registers can be specified at a time. When one data transmission is completed between the master and slave, the Master Inverter changes sequentially and data transmission is repeated according to the details set for each Master
Inverter.
Management Inverter
(01)
Inverter (02) Inverter (03) Inverter (04)
Data transmission from the Inverter 01 master to the slave
Switch the Master Inverter from 01 to 02 *1, *2
Data transmission from the Inverter 02 master to the slave
Switch the Master Inverter from 02 to 03 *3, *4
Data transmission from the Inverter 03 master to the slave
Switch the Master Inverter from 03 to 04
Data transmission from the Inverter 04 master to the slave
6
: Master Inverter
*1. The Master Inverter is switched automatically by the Management Inverter.
*2. A command to switch the Master Inverter from 01 to 02 is sent after an elapse of the silent interval +
Communication Wait Time (C078), following the data transmission from the Inverter 01 master to the slave.
*3. Upon receiving the data sent from the Master Inverter, the Management Inverter sends the next master switching command after an elapse of the silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078).
If the data sent from the Master Inverter could not be received within the Communication Error Timeout
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-22
6
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
Time (C077), a communication timeout occurs. At this time, the action to be performed conforms to the Operation Selection on Communication Error (C076).
*4. Be sure to set the communication timeout for the Management Inverter so that this setting is enabled
(C077 = 0.01 to 99.99). When this setting is disabled (C077 = 0), Co-inverter communication will stop if the data sent from the Master Inverter cannot be received. In this case, reconnect the Management
Inverter or perform a reset (by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning if OFF).
Parameter
No.
C072
C076
*2
*4
C077
C078
C096
C098
C099
C100
*2
*2
*2
*2
P140
P141
P142
P143
Function name Data
Communication Station
No. Selection
Operation Selection on
Communication Error
Communications Error
Timeout Time
1. to 247.
*8
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
0.00: Timeout disabled
0.01 to 99.99
0. to 1000.
Communication Wait
Time
Communication
Selection
00: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
01: Co-inverter communication
02: Co-inverter communication
(Management Inverter)
1. to 8.
Setting is required only for the
Management Inverter.
*9
Co-inverter
Communication
Starting Station
Number
Co-inverter
Communication Ending
Station Number
Co-inverter
Communication Start
Selection
1. to 8.
Setting is required only for the
Management Inverter.
1. to 5.
*9
00: Starting by an input terminal
*5
01: Constant communication *6
Number of Sent Data of
All Stations in Coinverter
Communication
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 1
Recipient Register of
All Stations in Coinverter
Communication 1
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 1
1. to 247.
*7
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
Default setting
1.
02
0.00
0.
00
1.
1.
00
5.
1.
0000
0000
Unit
Setting destination *1
− ALL
*3
− s ms
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
ALL
ALL
ALL
−
B
A
A
A
A
A
M
M
M
M
6-23 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
Parameter
No.
Function name Data
Default setting
Unit
Setting destination
*1
P144
P145
P146
P147
P148
P149
P150
P151
P152
P153
P154
P155
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Register of
All Stations in Coinverter
Communication 2
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Register of
All Stations in Coinverter
Communication 3
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 4
Recipient Register of
All Stations in Coinverter
Communication 4
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 4
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 5
Recipient Register of
All Stations Co-inverter
Communication 5
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 5
Multi-function Input
Selection
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
1. to 247.
0000 to FFFF Hex
0000 to FFFF Hex
81: 485 (inverter communication start)
2.
0000
0000
3.
0000
0000
4.
0000
0000
5.
0000
0000
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
C001 to
C007
− − A
*1. The details of the setting destination are as follows.
ALL: Set for all connected Inverters.
A: Set only for the Management Inverter (Station No. 01).
B: Set for Inverters other than the Management Inverter (Station No. 01).
M: Set for the Inverter whose station number is specified in C098 or C099 (= Master Inverter).
*2. Even when C072 and C096 to C100 of the Management Inverter are changed, the changes will not be reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed (by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF). Changes made to the same parameters of other Inverters are immediately reflected.
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-24
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
*3. Set 01 (C072 = 01) as the station number of the Management Inverter.
*4. If the Communication Error Selection of the Management Inverter is set to other than "Ignore" (C076
= 02), Co-inverter communication will stop once the management Inverter experiences a communication timeout. In this case, reconnect or perform a reset (by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning if OFF).
*5. If input terminal start is selected for the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100 = 00), allocate 81 to one of multi-function inputs S1 to S7/EB (485: Start Co-inverter Communication).
*6. If constant communication is selected for the Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100 = 01), the Management Inverter starts sending data the moment the power is input. If starting of the Inverter to switch the master to is delayed and thus receiving of the master switching command fails, the
Master Inverter cannot send data and consequently the Management Inverter experiences a receive timeout.
If C100 = 01 is selected, confirm starting of all other Inverters and then start the Management Inverter.
*7. Although the station number of the recipient slave is set in master-slave communication, actually this communication is performed as broadcast communication (station number: 00). Accordingly, data is sent to all stations. The data received by a slave not specified as the recipient by the master will be discarded.
*8. If multiple Master Inverters are provided, set consecutive station numbers for the Inverters.
Communication cannot be performed if the numbers are discontinuous.
*9. Make sure that C098 is equal to or smaller than C099.
6
Co-inverter Communication Setting
Set (C072) a station number for each of the Inverters performing Co-inverter communication by avoiding duplicate numbers. Be sure to set station number 01. The Inverter of station number 01 becomes the "Management Inverter".
For the Management Inverter, set Communication Selection (C096) to "02: Co-inverter communication (management)". For all other Inverters, set Communication Selection (C096) "01:
Co-inverter communication".
Set the station number for Master Inverter in the Management Inverter (C098, C099).
Set the Inverter communication starting method in the Management Inverter (C100). If "00: 485 terminal" is selected for Co-inverter Communication Start Selection (C100), allocate "81: 485
(Start Co-inverter communication)" to one of multi-function Inputs 1 to 7.
Set in the Master Inverter the number of send data items, recipient station number, recipient register and sender register for which the Master Inverter writes into.
Inverter-Inverter Communication Operation
(1) The Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter according to the items set in the
Master Inverter.
(2) The Management Inverter sends a master switching command and the Master Inverter changes.
(3) The next Master Inverter sends data to each slave inverter in the same manner as in (1).
(4) (2) and (3) are repeated.
Note: Since the Inverter communication is performed in the form of broadcasting (station number: 00), all communication data are sent to all stations. Accordingly, while a slave not specified as the recipient of the Master also receives data, if the data is not addressed to that slave the data will be discarded in the slave.
6-25 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-7 Co-Inverter Communication
Example of Inverter-Inverter Communication Sequence
Shown below is a communication sequence involving a total of four Inverters from station numbers 01 to 04, where the Master Inverter is one of 01 to 03.
Management
Inverter (01)
Send
Receive
M
Inverter (02)
Send
Receive
S
Inverter (03)
Send
Receive
S
Inverter (04)
Send
Receive
S t1
Station register data
02 xxxx xxxx
02 xxxx xxxx
03 xxxx xxxx
03 xxxx xxxx
Up to five recipients can be specified.
t3
S
M
S
S t2 t3 t3
S
S
M
S
M Sent data from the master
S Received data in the slave
Master switching command t3
M
S
S
S
All slaves receive data from the master, but they will discard the data if the data is not addressed to themselves.
t1: Silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) t2: Silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) t3: Communication Timeout Time (C077)
For the Management Inverter, be sure to set a value other than 0 (1 s or more is recommended) in Communication Error Timeout Time (C077). When 0 is set, the Co-inverter communication function will stop if the data sent from the Master Inverter cannot be received. If the function has stopped, reconnect the Management Inverter or perform a reset (by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF).
The communication timeout timer starts counting when the recipient starts waiting for data. If data reception is not completed within the set time, a timeout occurs (t3 in the above figure) and the operation specified by Operation Selection on Communication Error (C076) takes place.
If the Management Inverter is the master, the master switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) following the sending of data by the
Master Inverter (t1 in the figure above).
If an Inverter other than the Management Inverter is the master, the master switching command is sent after an elapse of the silent interval + Communication Wait Time (C078) following the receiving of data from the Master Inverter (t2 in the figure above).
If "01: Always started" is selected for Co-inverter Communication Start Selection, the Management
Inverter starts sending the moment the power is turned on. Accordingly, any delay in the poweron timing of other Inverter prevents normal communication and the Management Inverter experiences a communication timeout. If "Always started" is selected, confirm starting of all other
Inverters and then start the Management Inverter at the end.
Do not set 08FFh (EEPROM write) or 0901h (EEPROM write mode selection) in the recipient register.
If any one of C096 to C100 is changed, the change will not be reflected until the power is reconnected or a reset is performed (by turning the RS terminal ON and then turning it OFF).
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-26
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-8 List of Modbus Communication
(Modbus-RTU) Data
R/W in the list shows whether the coil or holding register accepts reading and/or writing.
(R: Read-only, R/W: Can be read and/or written)
(i) Coil Number List
Coil No.
0000h Not used
Function name
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
RUN Command
Rotation Direction Command
External Trip (EXT)
Trip Reset (RS)
Reserved
Multi-function Input 1
R/W
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
−
R/W
Description
Inaccessible
1: RUN
0: Stop (Enabled when A002/A202 =
03)
1: Reverse
0: Forward (Enabled when A002/
A202 = 03)
1: Trips
1: Reset
−
0008h
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
000Fh
0010h
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
Multi-function Input 2
Multi-function Input 3
Multi-function Input 4
Multi-function Input 5
Multi-function Input 6
Multi-function Input 7
Reserved
Operation Status
RUN Direction
Inverter Ready
Reserved
RUN (during RUN)
FA1 (constant speed reached)
FA2 (set frequency min. reached)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
−
R
R
R
−
R
R
R
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
1: ON
0: OFF
*1
−
1: RUN
0: Stop (Interlocked with d003)
1: Reverse
0: Forward (Interlocked with d003)
1: Ready
0: Not ready
−
1: During trip
0: Normal
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
6-27 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Coil No.
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
001Ch
001Dh
Function name
OL (overload warning)
OD (PID excessive deviation)
AL (alarm output)
FA3 (set frequency only)
OTQ (overtorque/undertorque)
Reserved
UV (signal during undervoltage)
TRQ (during torque limit)
001Eh
001Fh
0020h
0021h
0022h
0023h
0024h
0025h
0026h
RNT (RUN time over)
ONT (Power ON time over)
THM (thermal warning)
Reserved
0027h
0028h
0029h
002Ah
002Bh
002Ch
002Dh
BRK (brake release)
BER (brake error)
ZS (0Hz)
DSE (excessive speed deviation)
POK (position ready)
FA4 (Set frequency min. reached
2)
FA5 (Set frequency only 2)
002Eh
002Fh
0030h
0031h
OL2 (overload warning 2)
FVdc (analog FV disconnection detection)
FIdc (analog FI disconnection detection)
Reserved
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
−
R
R
R
R
R
−
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
−
−
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
−
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
−
1: ON
0: OFF
Description
6-28
6
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-29
0046h
0047h
0048h
0049h
003Ch
003Dh
003Eh
003Fh
0040h
0041h
0042h
0043h
0044h
0045h
Coil No.
0032h
0033h
0034h
0035h
0036h
0037h
0038h
0039h
003Ah
003Bh
004Ah
004Bh
004Ch
004Dh
Function name
FBV (FB status output)
NDc (communication disconnection detection)
LOG1 (logic operation output 1)
LOG2 (logic operation output 2)
LOG3 (logic operation output 3)
Reserved
WAC (capacitor life warning)
WAF (cooling fan life warning)
FR (starting contact signal)
OHF (fin overheat warning)
LOC (low current signal)
Reserved
IRDY (operation ready)
FWR (during forward operation)
RVR (during reverse operation)
MJA (fatal fault signal)
Data being written
CRC error
Overrun error
Framing error
Parity error
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
−
R
R
R
R
R
−
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
−
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
Description
−
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: Being written
0: Normal
1: Error
0: No error
*2
1: Error
0: No error
*2
1: Error
0: No error
*2
1: Error
0: No error
*2
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Coil No.
004Eh
004Fh
0050h
0051h
Function name
Checksum error
Reserved
WCFV (window comparator FV)
WCFI (window comparator FI)
R/W
R
−
R
R
Description
1: Error
0: No error
*2
−
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
0052h
0053h
Reserved − −
0054h
0055h
0056h
FREF (Frequency Reference
Operator)
REF (RUN Command Operator)
SETM (Motor 2 Selected)
R
R
R
1: Digital Operator
0: Other than Digital Operator
1: Digital Operator
0: Other than Digital Operator
1: Motor 2 control selected
0: Motor 1 control selected
0057h
0058h
0059h to
005Ah
Reserved
Not used
−
−
−
Inaccessible
*1. The input terminal can be turned ON/OFF via Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU). The Inverter recognizes an ON status if the input terminal is ON due to communication or the input signal at the control circuit terminal block is ON.
*2. The communications error is retained until a fault reset is input. (Can be reset during operation.)
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-30
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6
6-31
(ii) Holding Register Number List (Frequency Reference and Fault Monitor)
Register
No.
Function name
0000h Reserved
0001h
0002h
Output Frequency
Setting
0003h Inverter Status A
0004h Inverter Status B
0005h Inverter Status C
Parameter
No.
−
F001 (HIGH)
F001
(LOW)
−
−
−
−
R/W
−
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
−
0 to maximum frequency
(Enabled when A001 = 03)
0: Initial status
2: Stop
3: RUN
4: Free-run stop
5: Jogging
6: DC injection braking
7: Restart
8: Trips
9: During UV
0: During stop
1: During RUN
2: During trip
0: −
1: Stop
2: Deceleration
3: Constant speed
4: Acceleration
5: Forward
6: Reverse
7: Forward to reverse
8: Reverse to forward
9: Forward run start
10: Reverse run start
0 to 10000 0006h PID Feedback
0007h
to
0010h
Reserved
0011h Fault Counter
0012h Fault Monitor 1: Cause
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
Fault Monitor 1:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 1:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 1:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 1:
Current
Fault Monitor 1:
Voltage
Fault Monitor 1: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 1: RUN
Time (LOW)
− d080 d081
−
R
R
−
0 to 65530
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
1 [time]
−
−
0 to 100000
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
Data resolution
−
0.01 [Hz]
−
−
−
0.01 [%]
−
0.01 [Hz]
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
0.01 [A]
0.1 [V]
1 [h]
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
001Ah
001Bh
Fault Monitor 1: ON
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 1: ON
Time (LOW)
001Ch Fault Monitor 2: Cause
Parameter
No.
d081
001Dh
001Eh
001Fh
0020h
0021h
0022h
0023h
0024h
0025h
Fault Monitor 2:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 2:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 2:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 2:
Current
Fault Monitor 2:
Voltage
Fault Monitor 2: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 2: RUN
Time (LOW)
Fault Monitor 2: ON
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 2: ON
Time (LOW)
0026h Fault Monitor 3: Cause
0027h
0028h
0029h
002Ah
002Bh
002Ch
002Dh
002Eh
002Fh
Fault Monitor 3:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 3:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 3:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 3:
Current
Fault Monitor 3:
Voltage
Fault Monitor 3: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 3: RUN
Time (LOW)
Fault Monitor 3: ON
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 3: ON
Time (LOW) d082 d083
R/W
R
R
R
Monitor and setting parameters
Power ON time at the time of tripping
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
0 to 100000
Data resolution
−
−
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
0.01[A]
0.1 [V]
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
1 [h]
Power ON time at the time of tripping
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
1 [h]
−
−
0 to 100000
Power ON time at the time of tripping
1 [h]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
0.01 [A]
0.1 [V]
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
1 [h]
1 [h]
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-32
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
0030h Fault Monitor 4: Cause
Parameter
No.
0031h
0032h
0033h
0034h
0035h
0036h
0037h
0038h
0039h
Fault Monitor 4:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 4:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 4:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 4:
Current
Fault Monitor 4:
Voltage
Fault Monitor 4: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 4: RUN
Time (LOW)
Fault Monitor 4: ON
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 4: ON
Time (LOW) d084 d084
003Ah Fault Monitor 5: Cause
003Bh
003Ch
003Dh
003Eh
003Fh
0040h
0041h
0042h
0043h
Fault Monitor 5:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 5:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 5:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 5:
Current
Fault Monitor 5:
Voltage
Fault Monitor 5: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 5: RUN
Time (LOW)
Fault Monitor 5: ON
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 5: ON
Time (LOW) d085
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Data resolution
−
−
R
0 to 100000 0.01 [Hz]
R
R
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
Power ON time at the time of tripping
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
0 to 100000
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
Power ON time at the time of tripping
0.01 [A]
0.1 [V]
1 [h]
1 [h]
−
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [A]
0.1 [V]
1 [h]
1 [h]
6-33 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
0044h Fault Monitor 6: Cause
Parameter
No.
0045h
0046h
0047h
0048h
0049h
Fault Monitor 6:
Inverter Status
Fault Monitor 6:
Frequency (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 6:
Frequency (LOW)
Fault Monitor 6:
Current
Fault Monitor 6:
Voltage
004Ah
004Bh
Fault Monitor 6: RUN
Time (HIGH)
Fault Monitor 6: RUN
Time (LOW)
004Ch
004Fh to
08FFh
Fault Monitor 6: ON
Time (HIGH)
004Dh
Fault Monitor 6: ON
Time (LOW)
004Eh Warning Monitor
Not used d086 d090
−
0900h EEPROM Write
0901h Not used
0902h
0903h
to
1000h
EEPROM Write Mode
Selection
Not used
−
−
−
−
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Refer to "Inverter Fault Factor
List" on page 6-35.
Data resolution
−
−
R
R
−
W
−
W
−
0 to 100000
Output current value at the time of tripping
DC input voltage at the time of tripping
Total RUN time at the time of tripping
Power ON time at the time of tripping
Warning code
Inaccessible
0: Motor parameter recalculation
1: Set value storage in
EEPROM
Other: Motor parameter recalculation and set value storage in
EEPROM
Inaccessible
0: Write disabled
1: Write enabled
Inaccessible
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [A]
0.1 [V]
1 [h]
1 [h]
−
−
−
−
−
−
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-34
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Inverter Fault Factor List
Trip factor high-order (factor)
Name Code
0 No trip factor
Overcurrent protection during constant speed
1
Overcurrent protection during deceleration
Overcurrent protection during acceleration
2
3
Overcurrent protection during stop
Overload protection
Braking resistor overload protection
Overvoltage protection
4
5
6
7
EEPROM error
Undervoltage protection
Current detector error
CPU error
External trip
USP error
Grounding protection
Incoming overvoltage protection
Abnormal temperature
Main circuit error
Driver error
Thermistor error
Brake error
Emergency shutoff
Overload protection in a low speed range
Poor Digital Operator connection
Modbus communication (Modbus-
RTU) error
Internal data error
Encoder disconnection
Excess speed
Position control range trip
12
13
14
15
10
11
8
9
21
25
30
35
36
37
38
40
41
43 to 45
50 to 69
80
81
83
Trip factor low-order (Inverter status)
Name Code
During reset
During stop
0
1
During deceleration
2
At a constant speed
During acceleration
Operates at frequency = 0
During startup
DB active (DC injection braking active)
During overload limit
3
4
5
6
7
8
6-35 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
(iii) Holding Register Number List (Monitor)
Register
No.
1001h
1002h
Function name
Output Frequency
Monitor
1003h Output Current Monitor
1004h
1005h
1006h
1007h
1008h
Rotation Direction
Monitor
PID Feedback Value
Monitor
Multi-function Input
Monitor
Multi-function Output
Monitor
1009h Output Frequency
100Ah
100Bh
100Ch
Monitor (after conversion)
Real Frequency Monitor
100Dh
Torque Reference
Monitor d009
100Eh Torque Bias Monitor
100Fh Reserved
1010h Output Torque Monitor d010
− d012
1011h Output Voltage Monitor d013
1012h Input Power Monitor
1013h
1014h
Integrated Power Monitor d014 d015
(HIGH) d015
(LOW) d007
(HIGH) d007
(LOW) d008
(HIGH) d008
(LOW)
1015h
1016h
Total RUN Time Monitor d016
(HIGH) d016
(LOW)
1017h d017
(HIGH)
1018h
Power ON Time Monitor d017
(LOW)
1019h Fin Temperature Monitor d018
Parameter
No.
d001(HIG
H) d001
(LOW) d002
R/W
R
Monitor and setting parameters
0 to 40000(100000) d003
R 0 to 65530
R
0: Stop
1: Forward
2: Reverse d004
(HIGH) d004
(LOW)
R 0 to 1000000 d005 d006
R
R
2
2
0
6
: Terminal S1 to
: Terminal S7/EB
2
0
: Terminal P1/EDM to 2
1
: Terminal P2
2
6
: Relay output terminal
R
R
R
R
0 to 4000000(10000000)
−
−
R − 200 to +200
− −
R − 200 to +200
R 0 to 6000
R
R
R
R
R
0 to 9999
0 to 9999000
0 to 999000
0 to 999000
−
100000 to +100000
200 to +200
200 to 1500
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [Hz] 5-1
0.01 [A] 5-1
− 5-2
0.1
Bit
Bit
0.01
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
0.01 [Hz] 5-5
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
1 [%]
0.1 [V]
0.1 [kW]
5-5
5-6
−
5-6
5-6
5-7
−
1 [h]
1 [h]
5-7
5-8
5-8
0.1 [ ° C] 5-8
6-36
6
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
101Ah
to
101Ch
Function name
Reserved
Parameter
No.
−
101Dh Life Assessment Monitor d022
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
− −
R
2
0
: Capacitor on main circuit board
2
1
: Cooling fan
Data resolution
Page
− −
Bit 5-9
101Eh to
1025h
1029h to
1035h
Reserved
1026h DC Voltage Monitor
1027h
1028h
Regenerative Braking
Load Rate Monitor
Electronic Thermal Load
Rate Monitor
Reserved
− d102 d103 d104
−
1036h
1037h
1038h
1039h
Position Command
Monitor
Current Position Monitor d029
(HIGH) d029
(LOW) d030
(HIGH) d030
(LOW)
103Ah to
1056h
Reserved −
1057h Inverter Mode Monitor d060
− −
R 0 to 10000
R 0 to 1000
R
−
R
R
R
R
−
0 to 1000
−
− 268435455 to 268435455
− 268435455 to 268435455
−
R
0: I-C (IM load heavy)
1: I-V (IM load light)
2: H-I (IM power supply harmonics)
−
0.1 [V]
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
−
1
1
−
−
−
5-12
5-12
5-12
−
5-9
5-9
−
5-10
1058h to
1102h
Not used − − Inaccessible − −
6-37 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
(iv) Holding Register Number List (Group F)
Register
No.
1103h
1104h
1105h
1106h
Function name
Acceleration Time
Setting 1
Deceleration Time
Setting 1
1107h RUN Direction Selection
Parameter
No.
F002
(HIGH)
F002
(LOW)
F003
(HIGH)
F003
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 1 to 360000
R/W 1 to 360000
F004 R/W
0: Forward
1: Reverse
1108h
to
1200h
Not used − − Inaccessible
(v) Holding Register Number List (Groups A, b, C, H and P)
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
−
−
5-24
5-23
−
Register
No.
1201h
1202h
Frequency Reference
Selection 1
RUN Command
Selection 1
*1
1203h Base Frequency 1
1204h Maximum Frequency 1
1205h FV/FI Selection
1206h
to
120Ah
Function name
Reserved
Parameter
No.
A001
A002
A003
A004
A005
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Volume
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Do not set.
10: Operation function output
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
Data resolution
−
−
Page
5-15
5-22
R/W 300 to Maximum Frequency 1 0.1 [Hz] 5-26
R/W
Base Frequency 1 to
4000 (10000)
0.1 [Hz] 5-28
R/W
00: Switch between FV/FI
02: Switch between FV/ volume
03: Switch between FI/ volume
− 5-38
− − − − −
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-38
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6
6-39
Register
No.
120Bh
120Ch
120Dh
120Eh
Function name
FV Start Frequency
FV End Frequency
120Fh FV Start Ratio
1210h FV End Ratio
1211h FV Start Selection
Parameter
No.
A011
(HIGH)
A011
(LOW)
A012
(HIGH)
A012
(LOW)
A013
A014
A015
A016
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 0 to 40000(100000)
R/W 0 to 40000(100000)
R/W 0 to 100
R/W 0 to 100
R/W
R/W
00: Start frequency
01: 0 Hz
1 to 30/31 (with 500 ms filter
± 0.1 Hz hysteresis)
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
1
5-40
5-38 1212h
Analog Input Filter
(FV, FI Sampling)
1213h
1214h
Reserved − − − − −
1215h
Multi-step Speed
Selection
A019 R/W
00: Binary, 4 terminals, 16 steps
01: Bit, 7 terminals, 8 steps
−
1216h
1217h
Multi-step Speed 1
Reference 0
A020
(HIGH)
A020
(LOW)
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to
Maximum Frequency 1
0.01 [Hz]
5-63
*1. After changing the RUN Command Selection 1, provide an interval of at least 40 ms before the RUN command is actually executed.
Register
No.
Function name
1218h
1219h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 1
121Ah
121Bh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 2
121Ch
121Dh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 3
121Eh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 4
121Fh
1220h
1221h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 5
Parameter
No.
A021
(HIGH)
A021
(LOW)
A022
(HIGH)
A022
(LOW)
A023
(HIGH)
A023
(LOW)
A024
(HIGH)
A024
(LOW)
A025
(HIGH)
A025
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
5-63
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1222h
1223h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 6
1224h
1225h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 7
1226h
1227h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 8
1228h
1229h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 9
122Ah
122Bh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 10
122Ch
122Dh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 11
122Eh
Multi-step Speed
Reference 12
122Fh
1230h
1231h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 13
1232h
1233h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 14
1234h
1235h
Multi-step Speed
Reference 15
1236h
1237h
Reserved
1238h Jogging Frequency
A033
(HIGH)
A033
(LOW)
A034
(HIGH)
A034
(LOW)
A035
(HIGH)
A035
(LOW)
A030
(HIGH)
A030
(LOW)
A031
(HIGH)
A031
(LOW)
A032
(HIGH)
A032
(LOW)
A028
(HIGH)
A028
(LOW)
A029
(HIGH)
A029
(LOW)
Parameter
No.
A026
(HIGH)
A026
(LOW)
A027
(HIGH)
A027
(LOW)
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to nth maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
R/W 0
Starting frequency to nth
R/W maximum frequency
−
A038
− −
R/W
Starting frequency to 999
(10000)
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
−
0.01 [Hz]
5-63
−
5-59
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-40
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1239h Jogging Stop Selection
123Ah Reserved
123Bh Torque Boost Selection 1
Parameter
No.
A039
−
A041
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W
00: Free run on jogging stop/Disabled in operation
01: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/Disabled in operation
02: Injection braking on jogging stop/Disabled in operation
03: Free run on jogging stop/Enabled in operation
04: Deceleration stop on jogging stop/Enabled in operation
05: DC injection braking on jogging stop/Enabled in operation
− −
R/W
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
Data resolution
−
−
−
Page
5-59
−
123Ch
123Dh
Manual Torque Boost
Voltage 1
Manual Torque Boost
Frequency 1
A042
A043
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 500
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
5-49
123Eh Control Method 1 A044
A045
R/W
00: Constant torque characteristics
01: Reduced torque characteristics
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control (heavy load only)
R/W 20 to 100
−
1 [%]
5-46
5-144
5-72 123Fh Output Voltage Gain 1
1240h
1241h
Automatic Torque Boost
Voltage Compensation
Gain 1
Automatic Torque Boost
Slip Compensation Gain 1
1242h
to
1244h
Reserved
A046
A047
−
R/W 0 to 255
R/W 0 to 255
− −
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
5-49
−
6-41 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
1245h
Function name
Internal DC Injection
Braking Selection
1246h
1247h
1248h
1249h
Internal DC Injection
Braking Frequency
DC Injection Braking
Delay Time
DC Injection Braking
Power
DC Injection Braking
Time
124Ah
124Bh
124Ch
DC Injection Braking
Edge/Level Selection
Startup DC Injection
Braking Power
Startup Internal DC
Injection Braking Time
124Dh
DC Injection Braking
Carrier Frequency
124Eh Reserved
124Fh
Frequency Upper Limit 1
1250h
1251h
1252h
1253h
1254h
1255h Jump Frequency Width 1
1256h
1259h
125Ch
125Dh
Frequency Lower Limit 1
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Frequency 2
1257h
1258h Jump Frequency Width 2
Jump Frequency 3
125Ah
125Bh Jump Frequency Width 3
Acceleration Stop
Frequency
125Eh Acceleration Stop Time
Parameter
No.
A051
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Enabled (Operates only on set frequencies.)
Data resolution
−
Page
A052 R/W 0 to 6000 0.01 [Hz]
A053
A054
A055
A056
A057
A058
A059
A065
(HIGH)
A065
(LOW)
A066
A067
(HIGH)
A067
(LOW)
A068
A069
(HIGH)
A069
(LOW)
A070
−
A061
(HIGH)
A061
(LOW)
A062
(HIGH)
A062
(LOW)
A063
(HIGH)
A063
(LOW)
A064
R/W 0 to 50
R/W 0 to 100
R/W 0 to 600
R/W
R/W 0 to 100
R/W 0 to 600
R/W 20 to 150 (100)
− −
R/W 0
Frequency Lower Limit 1 to
R/W
Maximum Frequency 1
R/W 0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)
R/W
R/W
R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)
R/W
R/W
R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)
R/W
R/W
00: Edge operation
01: Level operation
Starting Frequency to
Frequency Upper Limit 1
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (10000)
R/W 0 to 600
0.1 [s]
1 [%]
0.1 [s]
−
1 [%]
0.1 [s]
0.1 [kHz]
− −
0.01 [Hz] 5-60
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [s]
5-135
5-135
5-60
5-61
5-62
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-42
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
125Fh PID Selection
1260h PID P Gain
1261h PID I Gain
1262h PID D Gain
1263h PID Scale
1264h PID Feedback Selection
1265h
PID Deviation Reverse
Output
1266h PID Variable Range Limit
1267h
1268h Reserved
1269h AVR Selection 1
126Ah
PID Feedforward
Selection
Motor Incoming Voltage
Selection 1
Parameter
No.
A071
A072
A073
A074
A075
A076
A077
A078
A079
−
A081
A082
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Reverse output enabled
R/W 2 to 2500
R/W 0 to 36000
R/W 0 to 10000
R/W 1 to 9999
R/W
00: FI (current)
01: FV (voltage)
02: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
03: Pulse train frequency
10: Operation function output
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W
00: Disabled
01: FV (voltage)
02: FI (current)
− −
R/W
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
R/W
200V class: 00 (200)
01 (215)
02 (220)
03 (230)
04 (240)
400V class: 05 (380)
06 (400)
07 (415)
Data resolution
−
0.01
0.1 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01
−
−
0.1 [%]
−
−
−
Page
5-73
5-73
−
5-27
5-26
5-148
126Bh
126Ch
AVR Filter Time
Parameter
AVR Deceleration
Voltage Gain
A083
A084
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 50 to 200
0.01 [s]
1 [%]
5-27
126Dh RUN Mode Selection A085 R/W
00: Normal operation
01: Energy-saving operation
−
5-79
126Eh
Energy-saving
Response/Accuracy
Adjustment
126Fh to
1273h
Reserved
A086
−
R/W 0 to 1000
− −
0.1 [%]
− −
6-43 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
1274h
1275h
1276h
1277h
Function name
1st Acceleration Time 2
1st Deceleration Time 2
1278h
2-step Acceleration/
Deceleration Selection 1
1279h
127Ah
127Bh
127Ch
127Dh
127Eh
2-step Acceleration
Frequency 1
2-step Deceleration
Frequency 1
Acceleration Pattern
Selection
Deceleration Pattern
Selection
Parameter
No.
A092
(HIGH)
A092
(LOW)
A093
(HIGH)
A093
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
A094
Monitor and setting parameters
1 to 360000
1 to 360000
R/W
00: Switched via 2CH terminal
01: Switched by setting
02: Enabled only when switching forward/ reverse
A095
(HIGH)
A095
(LOW)
A096
(HIGH)
A096
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
A097
A098
R/W
R/W
00: Linear
01: S shape
02: U shape
03: Inverted U shape
04: EL-S shape
00: Line
01: S shape
02: U shape curve
03: Inverted U shape curve
04: EL-S shape
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
−
−
5-66
5-68
127Fh
1280h
Reserved
1281h
FI Start Frequency
1282h
1283h
FI End Frequency
1284h
1285h FI Start Ratio
1286h FI End Ratio
1287h FI Start Selection
−
A101
(HIGH)
A101
(LOW)
A102
(HIGH)
A102
(LOW)
A103
A104
A105
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
−
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W 0 to 100
R/W 0 to 100
00: Start frequency
01: 0Hz
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
−
5-40
1288h
to
12A4h
Reserved
12A5h
12A6h
Acceleration Curve
Parameter
Deceleration Curve
Parameter
−
A131
A132
−
R/W
R/W
−
01 (small curve) to 10 (large curve)
01 (small curve) to 10 (large curve)
−
−
−
−
5-68
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-44
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-45
Register
No.
12A7h
to
12AEh
12AFh
12B0h
12B1h
12B3h
12B4h
12B5h
Function name
Reserved
Operation Frequency
Selection 1
Operation Frequency
Selection 2
Operation Function
Operator Selection
12B2h Reserved
Frequency Addition
Amount Setting
Frequency Addition Sign
Selection
Parameter
No.
−
A141
A142
A143
−
A145
(HIGH)
A145
(LOW)
A146
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
12B6h
to
12B8h
Reserved
12B9h
12BAh
12BBh
12BCh
EL-S Shape Acceleration
Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Acceleration
Curve Ratio 2
EL-S Shape Deceleration
Curve Ratio 1
EL-S Shape Deceleration
Curve Ratio 2
12BDh
12BEh
Deceleration Stop
Frequency
12BFh Deceleration Stop Time
12C0h
12C1h
PID Sleep Function
Operation Level
12C2h
PID Sleep Operation
Delay Time
−
A150
A151
A152
− −
R/W 0 to 50
R/W 0 to 50
R/W 0 to 50
A153
A154
(HIGH)
A154
(LOW)
A155
A156
(HIGH)
A156
(LOW)
A157
R/W 0 to 50
R/W 0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W 0 to 600
R/W 0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W 0 to 255
Data resolution
− − − −
R/W
R/W
00: Digital Operator
01: Volume
02: FV (voltage) input
03: FI (current) input
04: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
05: Optional board
07: Pulse train frequency
00: Digital Operator
01: Volume
02: FV (voltage) input
03: FI (current) input
04: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
05: Optional board
07: Pulse train frequency
R/W
00: Addition (A141 + A142)
01: Subtraction (A141 −
A142)
02: Multiplication (A141 ×
A142)
− −
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W
−
−
−
−
0.01 [Hz]
R/W
00: Frequency reference +
A145
01: Frequency reference −
A145
−
5-70
−
5-71
−
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [s]
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [s]
Page
−
5-68
5-62
5-73
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
12C3h
to
12C5h
Function name
Reserved
12C6h
12C7h
VR Start Frequency
12C8h
VR End Frequency
12C9h
12CAh VR Start Ratio
12CBh VR End Ratio
12CCh VR Start Selection
12CDh
to
1300h
Not used
Parameter
No.
−
A161
(HIGH)
A161
(LOW)
A162
(HIGH)
A162
(LOW)
A163
A164
A165
R/W
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
−
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W 0 to VR End Ratio
R/W VR Start Ratio to 100
00: Start frequency A161
01: 0 Hz
Data resolution
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
Page
−
5-40
1301h Retry Selection
− b001
− Inaccessible
R/W
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz restart
02: Frequency matching restart
03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
R/W 3 to 250
−
−
−
5-96
1302h
Allowable Momentary
Power Interruption Time b002 0.1 [s]
1303h Restart Standby Time b003 R/W 3 to 1000 0.1 [s]
5-96
5-100
5-103
1304h
Momentary Power
Interruption/ undervoltage Trip During
Stop Selection
1305h
Restart During
Momentary Power
Interruption Count
Selection
1306h Reserved
1307h Frequency Matching
1308h
Lower Limit Frequency
Setting b004 b005
− b007
(HIGH) b007
(LOW)
1309h
Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Restart Selection
130Ah Reserved b008
−
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
02: Disabled during stop/ deceleration stop
R/W
00: 16 times
01: Unlimited
−
−
5-96
− −
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W
R/W
00: Trip
01: 0 Hz restart
02: Frequency matching restart
03: Trip after frequency matching deceleration stop
04: Frequency pull-in restart
− −
− −
0.01 [Hz]
5-97
5-100
5-103
−
−
5-97
−
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-46
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
130Bh
Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Restart Count Selection
130Ch
Overvoltage/Overcurrent
Restart Standby Time
130Dh Electronic Thermal Level 1
Parameter
No.
b010 b011 b012
130Eh
Electronic Thermal
Characteristics Selection 1
130Fh Reserved
1310h
1311h
Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 1
Free-electronic Thermal
Current 1 b013
− b015 b016
R/W
Monitor and setting
R/W 1 to 3 parameters
R/W 3 to 1000
R/W 200 to 1000
R/W
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
− −
R/W
0 to Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 2
R/W 0 to Rated current
1312h
Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 2 b017 R/W
Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 1 to Free-electric
Thermal Frequency 3
1313h
1314h
1315h
Free-electronic Thermal
Current 2
Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 3
Free-electronic Thermal
Current 3 b018 b019 b020
R/W 0 to Rated current
R/W
Free-electric Thermal
Frequency 2 to 400(1000)
R/W 0 to Rated current
1316h
Overload Limit 1
Selection b021 b022
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled during acceleration/constant speed (accelerated during regeneration)
R/W 200 to 2000
Data resolution
Page
1 [time]
0.1 [s]
0.1 [%]
−
−
1 [Hz]
0.01 [%]
1 [Hz]
0.01 [%]
1 [Hz]
0.01 [%]
−
0.01 [%]
5-97
5-110
−
5-112
1317h Overload Limit 1 Level
1318h
Overload Limit 1
Parameter b023 R/W 1 to 30000 0.1 [s]
5-114
1319h
Overload Limit 1
Selection 2 b024 b025
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
03: Enabled during acceleration/constant speed (accelerated during regeneration)
R/W 200 to 2000
−
0.01 [%] 131Ah Overload Limit 1 Level 2
131Bh
131Ch
Overload Limit 1
Parameter 2
Overcurrent Suppression
Selection b026 b027
R/W 1 to 30000
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
0.1 [s]
− 5-116
6-47 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
131Dh
131Eh
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Level
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Parameter
131Fh
Starting Frequency at
Frequency Pull-in
Restart Selection
1320h Soft Lock Selection
1321h Reserved
1322h
1323h
1324h
1325h
Motor Cable Length
Code Selection
RUN Time/Power ON
Time Level
Rotation Direction Limit
Selection
1326h
Reduced Voltage Startup
Selection
1327h Display Selection
1328h Initial Screen Selection
Parameter
No.
b028
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 200 to 2000 b029 b030 b031
− b033 b034
(HIGH) b034
(LOW)
R/W 1 to 30000
R/W
00: Frequency at interruption
01: Max. frequency
02: Set frequency
R/W
00: Data other than b031 cannot be changed when terminal SFT is
ON
01: Data other than b031 and set frequency cannot be changed when terminal SFT is
ON
02: Data other than b031 cannot be changed.
03: Data other than b031 and the set frequency cannot be changed
10: Data can be changed during RUN.
− −
R/W 5 to 20 b035 b036 b037 b038
R/W
0 to 65535
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: No direction limit
01: Only Forward is enabled
(Reverse is limited)
02: Only Reverse is enabled
(Forward is limited)
0 (Reduced voltage startup time: small) to 255
(Reduced voltage startup time: large)
00: Complete display
01: Individual display of functions
02: User setting, + b037
03: Data comparison display
04: Basic display
05: Monitor display only
00: Screen on which the
Enter key was last pressed
001 to 060:
(d001 to d060)
201: F001
202: Do not use this setting.
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [%]
0.1 [s]
−
−
−
−
10 [h]
−
−
−
−
5-97
5-100
5-103
5-84
−
5-145
5-124
5-23
5-58
5-88
5-86
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-48
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1329h
User Parameter
Automatic Setting
Function
132Ah Torque Limit Selection
Parameter
No.
b039
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled b040 R/W
00: Four-quadrant separate setting
01: Terminal switching
02: Analog voltage input
03: Optional board
Data resolution
Page
−
−
5-177
132Bh
132Ch
132Dh
132Eh
132Fh
1330h
Torque Limit 1 (fourquadrant mode forward power running)
Torque Limit 2 (fourquadrant mode reverse regeneration)
Torque Limit 3 (fourquadrant mode reverse power running)
Torque Limit 4 (fourquadrant mode forward regeneration)
Torque LADSTOP
Selection
Reverse Rotation
Prevention Selection
1331h
1332h
1333h
1334h
Reserved
Heavy Load/Light Load
Selection
Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss
1335h
1336h
DC Bus Voltage Trigger
Level of Ctrl. Decel
Deceleration Hold Level of Ctrl. Decel
1337h
1338h
Deceleration Time of
Ctrl. Decel
1339h
133Fh
Freq. Drop to start Ctrl.
Decel
133Ah to
133Eh
Reserved
Window Comparator FV
Upper Limit Level
1340h
Window Comparator FV
Lower Limit Level b041 b042 b043 b044 b045 b046
− b049 b050 b051
− b060 b061
R/W 0 to 200/255 (no)
R/W 0 to 200/255 (no)
R/W 0 to 200/255 (no)
R/W 0 to 200/255 (no)
R/W
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
− −
R/W
R/W
00: Heavy load mode
01: Light load mode
00: Disabled
01: Deceleration stop
02: Constant voltage
(without recovery)
03: Constant voltage (with recovery)
R/W 0 to 10000 b052 b053
(HIGH) b053
(LOW) b054
R/W 0 to 10000
R/W
R/W
1 to 360000
R/W 0 to 1000
−
R/W
R/W
−
0. to 100. (lower limit: b061
+ b062 × 2)
0. to 100.
(upper limit: b060 − b062 ×
2)
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
−
−
−
−
0.1 [V]
0.1 [V]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [Hz]
−
1 [%]
1 [%]
5-153
5-155
5-157
−
5-13
5-106
−
5-132
6-49 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1341h
1342h
1343h
1344h
Window Comparator FV
Hysteresis Width
Window Comparator FI
Upper Limit Level
Window Comparator FI
Lower Limit Level
Window Comparator FI
Hysteresis Width
1345h to
1348h
Reserved
1349h
134Fh to
1350h
Analog Operation Level at FV Disconnection
134Ah
Analog Operation Level at FI Disconnection
134Bh to
134Dh
Reserved
134Eh Ambient Temperature
Reserved
Parameter
No.
b062 b063 b064 b065
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
0. to 10. (upper limit: (b061
− b062)/2)
0. to 100. (lower limit: b064
+ b065 × 2)
0. to 100. (upper limit: b063
− b065 × 2)
0. to 10. (upper limit: (b063
− b064)/2)
Data resolution
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
Page
5-132
− b070 b071
− b075
−
−
−
R/W
−
−
R/W 0 to 100/255 (no)
R/W 0 to 100/255 (no)
−
−
−
10 to 50
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [
−
−
°
−
C]
−
5-132
−
5-127
−
1351h Integrated Power Clear b078 R/W
00: Disabled
01: Clear (Return to 00 after clear)
−
5-7
1352h
Integrated Power Display
Scale
1353h
1354h
Reserved
1355h Starting Frequency
1356h Carrier Frequency b079
− b082 b083
R/W 1 to 1000
− −
1
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.1 [kHz]
−
5-57
5-51
1357h Initialization Selection b084
R/W 10 to 999 (10000)
R/W 20 to 150 (100)
R/W
00: Initialization disabled
01: Fault monitor clear
02: Initializes data
03: Fault monitor clear +
Data initialization
04: Do not set.
−
5-174
1358h
1359h
Initialization Data
Selection
Frequency Conversion
Coefficient b085 b086
R/W 00: Do not change.
R/W 1 to 9999
−
0.01
5-4
135Ah STOP Key Selection
135Bh Free-run Stop Selection
135Ch
Automatic Carrier
Reduction b087 b088 b089
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
02: Only resetting enabled
00: 0 Hz restart
01: Frequency matching restart
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00: Disabled
01: Enabled, depends on current
02: Enabled, depends on the fin temperature
−
−
−
5-84
5-103
5-52
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-50
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-51
Register
No.
Function name
135Dh
Usage Rate of
Regenerative Braking
135Eh Stop Selection
135Fh Cooling Fan Operation
1360h
1361h
1362h
Cooling Fan Total
Operation Time Clear
Initialization Target
Selection
Regenerative Braking
Selection
Parameter
No.
b090
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 0 to 1000 b091 b092 b093 b094 b095 b096
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: Deceleration stop
01: Free-run stop
00: Always
01: Only during operation
(including 5 minutes after power on/stop)
02: Depends on the fin temperature
00: Operation time count
01: Clear (Return to 00 after clear)
00: All data
01: All data other than terminals/ communication
02: U*** registration function only
03: Other than U*** registration function
00: Disabled
01: Enable (Disable during stop)
02: Enable (Enable during stop)
R/W 330 to 380/660 to 760
Data resolution
Page
0.1 [%] 5-141
−
−
−
−
−
1 [V]
5-24
5-127
5-174
5-141
1363h
Regenerative Braking
ON Level
1364h to
1366h
Reserved
1367h Free V/f Frequency 1
1368h Free V/f Voltage 1
1369h Free V/f Frequency 2
136Ah Free V/f Voltage 2
136Bh Free V/f Frequency 3
136Ch Free V/f Voltage 3
136Dh Free V/f Frequency 4
136Eh Free V/f Voltage 4
136Fh Free V/f Frequency 5
1370h Free V/f Voltage 5
1371h Free V/f Frequency 6
1372h Free V/f Voltage 6
1373h Free V/f Frequency 7
1374h Free V/f Voltage 7
1375h to
137Ah
Reserved
− b100 b101 b102 b103 b104 b105 b106 b107 b108 b109 b110 b111 b112 b113
−
− −
R/W 0 to Free V/f frequency 2
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 1 to
Free V/f frequency 3
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 2 to
Free V/f frequency 4
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 3 to
Free V/f frequency 5
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 4 to
Free V/f frequency 6
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 5 to
Free V/f frequency 7
R/W 0 to 8000
R/W
Free V/f Frequency 6 to 400
(1000) (Hz)
R/W 0 to 8000
−
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
1 [Hz]
0.1 [V]
− − −
−
5-47
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
137Bh
Brake Control Function
Selection
137Ch
Brake Release Wait
Time
137Dh Acceleration Wait Time
137Eh Stop Wait Time
137Fh
1380h
Brake Wait Time for
Confirmation
Brake Release
Frequency
1381h Brake Release Current
1382h Break ON Frequency
1383h
1384h
Reserved
1385h
Overvoltage
Suppression Function
Selection During
Deceleration
1386h
1387h
1388h
1389h
Overvoltage
Suppression Level
During Deceleration
Overvoltage
Suppression Parameter
Overvoltage
Suppression
Proportional Gain Setting
Overvoltage
Suppression Integral
Time Setting
138Ah to
1393h
Reserved
1394h
GS Input Operation
Selection
1395h to
1398h
Reserved
1399h Reserved
139Ah to
13A2h
Reserved
13A3h Reserved
13A4h Reserved
13A5h Reserved
13A6h
13A7h d001/d007 Frequency
Setting Mode Selection
Initial Screen Automatic
Switching Function
Parameter
No.
b120
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Disabled
01: Enabled b121 b122 b123 b124 b125 b126 b127
− b130 b131 b132 b133 b134
− b145
−
−
−
−
−
− b163 b164
R/W 0 to 500
R/W 0 to 500
R/W 0 to 500
R/W 0 to 500
R/W 0 to 40000
R/W 0 to 20000
R/W 0 to 40000
−
R/W
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (DC voltage kept constant)
02: Enabled (Acceleration enabled)
200 V class: 330 to 390
400 V class: 660 to 780
R/W 10 to 3000
R/W 0 to 500
R/W 0 to 1500
−
R/W
−
−
−
−
−
00: Do not trip
01: Tripped
−
−
−
− −
− −
− −
R/W
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
Data resolution
Page
−
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [%]
0.01 [Hz]
−
−
1 [V]
0.01 [s]
0.01
0.1 [s]
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-143
5-143
−
5-117
−
5-171
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-1
5-4
5-87
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-52
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
13A8h
Function name
Selection of Operating
Level on Digital Operator
Disconnection
Parameter
No.
b165
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
Data resolution
−
Page
5-86
13A9h to
13ADh
Reserved − − − − −
13AEh Inverter Mode Selection b171 R/W
00: Selection disabled
01: Induction motor
02: High-frequency induction motor
− 5-178
13AFh to
13B6h
Reserved − − − − −
13B7h
Perform Initialization/
Mode Selection b180 R/W
00: Initialization disabled
01: Perform initialization/ mode selection
− 5-174
13B8h to
1400h
Not used − − Inaccessible − −
There are no corresponding registers in Modbus communications for parameters b150, b160, and b161.
6-53 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1401h
Multi-function Input 1
Selection
1402h
Multi-function Input 2
Selection
1403h
Multi-function Input 3
Selection
1404h
Multi-function Input 4
Selection
1405h
Multi-function Input 5
Selection
1406h
Multi-function Input 6
Selection
1407h
Multi-function Input 7
Selection
Parameter
No.
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
C001
C002
C003
C004
C005
C006
C007
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: FW (Forward)
01: RV (Reverse)
02: CF1 (Multi-step speed 1)
03: CF2 (Multi-step speed 2)
04: CF3 (Multi-step speed 3)
05: CF4 (Multi-step speed 4)
06: JG (Jogging)
07: DB (External DC injection braking)
08: SET (Motor 2 control)
09: 2CH (2-step acceleration/ deceleration)
11: FRS (Free-run stop)
12: EXT (External trip)
13: USP (USP function)
14: CS (Commercial switch)
15: SFT (Soft lock)
16: FV/FI (Analog input switch)
18: RS (Reset)
19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection)
20: STA (3-wire start)
21: STP (3-wire stop)
22: F/R (3-wire forward/reverse)
23: PID (PID disabled)
24: PIDC (PID integral reset)
27: UP (UP/DWN function accelerated)
28: DWN (UP/DWN function decelerated)
29: UDC (UP/DWN function data clear)
31: OPE (Forced operator)
32: SF1 (Multi-step speed bit 1)
33: SF2 (Multi-step speed bit 2)
34: SF3 (Multi-step speed bit 3)
35: SF4 (Multi-step speed bit 4)
36: SF5 (Multi-step speed bit 5)
37: SF6 (Multi-step speed bit 6)
38: SF7 (Multi-step speed bit 7)
39: OLR (Overload limit switching)
40: TL (Torque limit enabled/disabled)
41: TRQ1 (Torque limit switching 1)
42: TRQ2 (Torque limit switching 2)
44: BOK (Brake confirmation)
46: LAC (LAD cancel)
47: PCLR (Position deviation clear)
50: ADD (Frequency addition)
51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)
52: ATR (Torque reference input permission)
53: KHC (Integrated power clear)
56: Reserved.
57: Reserved.
58: Reserved.
59: Reserved.
60: Reserved.
61: Reserved.
62: Reserved.
65: AHD (Analog command held)
66: CP1 (Position command selection 1)
67: CP2 (Position command selection 2)
68: CP3 (Position command selection 3)
69: ORL (Zero return limit signal)
70: ORG (Zero return startup signal)
73: SPD (Speed/position switching)
77: GS1 (GS1 input (C003 only))
78: GS2 (GS2 input (C004 only))
81: 485 (Start co-inverter communication)
82: Reserved.
83: HLD (Retain output frequency)
84: ROK (Permission of RUN command)
85: EB (Rotation direction detection (C007 only))
86: DISP (Display fixed) no: NO (Not assigned)
Data resolution
Page
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-29
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-54
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
1408h to
140Ah
Function name
Reserved
140Bh
140Ch
140Dh
140Eh
140Fh
1410h
1411h
Multi-function Input
Terminal 1 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 2 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 3 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 4 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 5 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 6 Operation
Selection
Multi-function Input
Terminal 7 Operation
Selection
1412h to
1414h
Reserved
Parameter
No.
R/W
− − −
Monitor and setting parameters
Data resolution
Page
− −
C011
C012
C013
C014
C015
C016
C017
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
−
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-31
−
6-55 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
1415h
Multi-function Output
Terminal P1/EDM
Selection
1416h
Multi-function Output
Terminal P2 Selection
1417h to
1419h
Function name
Reserved
Parameter
No.
C021
C022
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: RUN (During RUN)
01: FA1 (Constant speed reached)
02: FA2 (Set frequency min. reached)
03: OL (Overload warning)
04: OD (PID excessive deviation)
05: AL (Alarm output)
06: FA3 (Set frequency only)
07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque)
09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (During torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power on time over)
13: THM (Thermal warning)
19: BRK (Brake release)
20: BER (Brake error)
21: ZS (0Hz)
22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (Position ready)
24: FA4 (Set frequency min. reached
2)
25: FA5 (Set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
27: FVdc (Analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIdc (Analog FI disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (Communication disconnection detection)
33: LOG1 (Logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (Logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (Logic operation output 3)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (Starting contact signal)
42: OHF (Fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (Low current signal)
44: Reserved.
45: Reserved.
46: Reserved.
50: IRDY (Operation ready)
51: FWR (During forward operation)
52: RVR (During reverse operation)
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (Window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (Window comparator FI)
58: FREF (Frequency command source)
59: REF (RUN command source)
60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)
63: OPO (Optional board) no: NO (Not assigned)
Data resolution
−
−
Page
5-32
− − − − −
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-56
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-57
Register
No.
Function name
141Ah
Multi-function Relay
Output (MA, MB)
Function Selection
141Bh MP Selection
Parameter
No.
C026
C027
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: RUN (During RUN)
01: FA1 (Constant speed reached)
02: FA2 (Set frequency min. reached)
03: OL (Overload warning)
04: OD (PID excessive deviation)
05: AL (Alarm output)
06: FA3 (Set frequency only)
07: OTQ (Overtorque/Undertorque)
09: UV (Signal during undervoltage)
10: TRQ (During torque limit)
11: RNT (RUN time over)
12: ONT (Power on time over)
13: THM (Thermal warning)
19: BRK (Brake release)
20: BER (Brake error)
21: ZS (0Hz)
22: DSE (Excessive speed deviation)
23: POK (Position ready)
24: FA4 (Set frequency min. reached
2)
25: FA5 (Set frequency only 2)
26: OL2 (Overload warning 2)
27: FVdc (Analog FV disconnection detection)
28: FIdc (Analog FI disconnection detection)
31: FBV (PID FB status output)
32: NDc (Communication disconnection detection)
33: LOG1 (Logic operation output 1)
34: LOG2 (Logic operation output 2)
35: LOG3 (Logic operation output 3)
39: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
40: WAF (Cooling fan life warning signal)
41: FR (Starting contact signal)
42: OHF (Fin overheat warning)
43: LOC (Low current signal)
44: Reserved.
45: Reserved.
46: Reserved.
50: IRDY (Operation ready)
51: FWR (During forward operation)
52: RVR (During reverse operation)
53: MJA (Fatal fault signal)
54: WCFV (Window comparator FV)
55: WCFI (Window comparator FI)
58: FREF (Frequency command source)
59: REF (RUN command source)
60: SETM (Motor 2 selection)
62: EDM (Safety device monitor)
63: OPO (Optional board) no: NO (Not assigned)
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque (heavy load only)
03: Digital output frequency
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
08: Digital current monitor
10: Cooling fin temperature
12: Do not set.
15: Pulse train input monitor
16: Optional board
Data resolution
−
−
Page
5-32
5-42
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
1426h
Function name
141Ch AM Selection
141Dh Reserved
141Eh
Digital Current Monitor
Reference Value
141Fh
1420h
Multi-function Output
Terminal P1/EDM
Contact Selection
Multi-function Output
Terminal P2 Contact
Selection
1421h to
1423h
Reserved
1424h
Multi-function Relay
Output (MA, MB) Contact
Selection
1425h Reserved
Low Current Signal
Output Mode Selection
Parameter
No.
C028
−
R/W
R/W
00: Output frequency
01: Output current
02: Output torque (heavy load only)
04: Output voltage
05: Input power
06: Electronic thermal load rate
07: LAD frequency
10: Cooling fin temperature
11: Output torque (signed)
(heavy load only)
13: Do not set.
16: Optional board
− −
Monitor and setting parameters
Data resolution
−
−
Page
5-44
−
C030
C031
C032
−
C036
−
C038
R/W 2000 to 20000
R/W
R/W
−
R/W
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
−
00: NO (NO contact)
01: NC (NC contact)
− −
R/W
00: During acceleration/ deceleration/constant speed
01: Only during constant speed
0.01 [%]
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-43
5-34
−
5-34
−
5-129
1427h
Low Current Detection
Level
C039 R/W 0 to 20000 0.01 [%]
1428h
Overload Warning Signal
Output Mode Selection
C040 R/W
00: During acceleration/ deceleration/constant speed
01: Only during constant speed
−
5-115
1429h
Overload Warning Level
1
C041 R/W 0 to 20000 0.01 [%]
142Ah
142Bh
142Ch
142Dh
Arrival Frequency During
Acceleration
Arrival Frequency During
Deceleration
C042
(HIGH)
C042
(LOW)
C043
(HIGH
C043
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
5-122
142Eh
PID Deviation Excessive
Level
C044 R/W 0 to 1000 0.1 [%] 5-73
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-58
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
142Fh
1430h
1431h
1432h
Function name
Arrival Frequency During
Acceleration 2
Arrival Frequency During
Deceleration 2
Parameter
No.
C045
(HIGH)
C045
(LOW)
C046
(HIGH)
C046
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1433h
Pulse Train Output
Coefficient
1434h to
1437h
Reserved
1438h
1439h
143Ah
143Bh
143Ch
143Dh
143Eh
Feedback Comparison
Signal Off Level
Feedback Comparison
Signal On Level
Overtorque/Undertorque
Selection
Overtorque/Undertorque
Level (Forward Power
Running)
Overtorque/Undertorque
Level (Reverse
Regeneration)
Overtorque/Undertorque
Level (Reverse power running)
Overtorque/Undertorque
Level (Forward
Regeneration)
C047
−
C052
C053
C054
C055
C056
C057
C058
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
R/W 0001 to 9999
−
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W
−
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Overtorque
01: Undertorque
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
143Fh
Overtorque/Undertorque
Signal Output Mode
Selection
C059
−
R/W
00: During acceleration/ deceleration/constant speed
01: Only during constant speed
− − 1440h Reserved
1441h
Electronic Thermal
Warning Level
1442h Reserved
1443h 0 Hz Detection Level
1444h
Cooling Fin Overheat
Warning Level
1445h
to
144Ah
Reserved
C061
−
C063
C064
−
R/W 0 to 100
− −
R/W 0 to 10000
R/W 0 to 110
− −
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
−
−
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
−
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
−
1 [%]
−
−
5-122
5-43
−
5-73
5-152
5-152
−
5-113
−
0.01 [Hz] 5-125
1 [ ° C] 5-129
−
6-59 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
144Bh
144Ch
144Dh Reserved
144Eh
144Fh
Communication Stop Bit
Selection
1450h
Function name
Communication Speed
Selection
Communication Station
No. Selection
Communication Parity
Selection
Operation Selection on
Communication Error
1451h
Communication Error
Timeout Time
1452h
Communication Wait
Time
1453h to
1454h
Reserved
1455h FV Adjustment
1456h FI Adjustment
1457h to
1458h
Reserved
1459h Thermistor Adjustment
145Ah to
145Eh
Reserved
145Fh Debug Mode Selection
Parameter
No.
C071
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
03 (2,400 bps)
04 (4,800 bps)
05 (9,600 bps)
06 (19.2 kbps)
07 (38.4 kbps)
08 (57.6 kbps)
09 (76.8 kbps)
10 (115.2 kbps)
C072 R/W 1 to 247
−
C074
C075
C076
C077
C078
− −
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Even
02: Odd
R/W
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
R/W
R/W
00: Trip
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free-run stop
04: Deceleration stop
0: Timeout disabled
1 to 9999
R/W 0 to 1000
−
C081
C082
−
C085
−
C091
−
R/W 0 to 2000
R/W 0 to 2000
−
−
−
R/W 0 to 2000
−
R
−
For factory adjustment (Do not change.)
1460h to
1463h
Reserved − − −
1464h
Communication
Selection
1465h Reserved
C096
−
R/W
00: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
01: Co-inverter communication
02: Co-inverter communication
(management)
− −
Data resolution
Page
−
−
−
−
−
−
0.01 [s]
1 [ms]
−
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
−
0.1 [%]
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-40
−
5-120
−
−
−
6-22
−
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-60
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1466h
1467h
1468h
Co-inverter
Communication Starting
Station Number
Co-inverter
Communication Ending
Station Number
Co-inverter
Communication Starting
Selection
Parameter
No.
R/W
C098
C099
C100
R/W 1 to 8
R/W 1 to 8
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: 485 terminal
01: Always started
1469h
UP/DWN Storage
Selection
146Ah Reset Selection
146Bh Reset Restart Selection
146Ch
UP/DWN Clear Terminal
Mode
146Dh MP Gain Setting
146Eh AM Gain Adjustment
146Fh to
1470h
Reserved
1471h AM Bias Setting
1472h Reserved
1473h
Overload 1 Warning
Level 2
1474h to
1485h
Reserved
1486h
1487h
Output P1/EDM ON
Delay Time
Output P1/EDM OFF
Delay Time
1488h
1489h
Output P2 ON Delay
Time
Output P2 OFF Delay
Time
148Ah to
148F
Reserved
1490h
1491h
Output RY ON Delay
Time
Output RY OFF Delay
Time
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
−
C109
−
C111
−
C130
C131
C132
C133
−
C140
C141
R/W
R/W
00: Do not store frequency data
01: Store frequency data
00: Trip reset at power-on
01: Trip reset at power-off
02: Enabled only during trip
(Reset when the power is ON.)
03: Trip reset only
R/W
R/W
00: 0 Hz restart
01: Frequency matching restart
02: Frequency pull-in restart
00: 0 Hz
01: EEPROM data at power-on
R/W 50 to 200
R/W 50 to 200
−
R/W 0 to 100
− −
R/W 0 to 20000
−
−
−
−
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
−
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
Data resolution
Page
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
1 [%]
−
5-45
−
0.01 [%] 5-115
−
0.1 [s]
0.1 [s]
0.1 [s]
0.1 [s]
−
0.1 [s]
0.1 [s]
6-22
5-71
5-100
5-71
5-43
5-45
−
−
5-36
5-36
−
5-36
6-61 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1492h
Logic Output Signal 1
Selection 1
1493h
Logic Output Signal 1
Selection 2
1494h
Logic Output Signal 1
Operator Selection
1495h
Logic Output Signal 2
Selection 1
1496h
Logic Output Signal 2
Selection 2
1497h
Logic Output Signal 2
Operator Selection
1498h
Logic Output Signal 3
Selection 1
1499h
Logic Output Signal 3
Selection 2
149Ah
Logic Output Signal 3
Operator Selection
149Bh to
14A3h
Reserved
14A4h
14A5h
14A6h
14A7h
14A8h
14A9h
14AAh
Input Terminal 1
Response Time
Input Terminal 2
Response Time
Input Terminal 3
Response Time
Input Terminal 4
Response Time
Input Terminal 5
Response Time
Input Terminal 6
Response Time
Input Terminal 7
Response Time
14ABh to
14ACh
Reserved
Parameter
No.
C142
C143
C144
C145
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
Data resolution
−
−
−
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
Same with C021 and C022
(Except that "no," 62, 63, and LOG1 to LOG3 cannot be selected.)
00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
−
−
−
−
−
−
Page
5-125
− − − − −
C160
C161
C162
C163
C164
C165
C166
−
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 200
− −
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
−
5-32
−
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-62
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-63
Register
No.
Function name
14ADh
Multi-step Speed/
Position Determination
Time
14AEh to
1500h
Not used
Parameter
No.
R/W
C169
−
Monitor and setting
R/W 0 to 200 parameters
1501h Auto-tuning Selection
1502h Motor Parameter 1
1503h Motor Capacity 1
1504h Motor Pole Number 1
H001
H002
H003
H004
−
H005
H006
− Inaccessible
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled (motor does not rotate)
02: Enabled (motor rotates)
00: Standard motor parameter
02: Auto-tuning parameter
00: 0.1
01: 0.2
02: 0.4
03: 0.55
04: 0.75
05: 1.1
06: 1.5
07: 2.2
08: 3.0
09: 3.7
10: 4.0
11: 5.5
12: 7.5
13: 11.0
14: 15.0
15: 18.5
00: 2P
01: 4P
02: 6P
03: 8P
04: 10P
− −
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 255
1505h Reserved
1506h Speed Response
1507h Stabilization Parameter 1
1508h to
1515h
Reserved
1516h Motor 1 Parameter R1
1517h Reserved
1518h Motor 1 Parameter R2
1519h Reserved
151Ah Motor 1 Parameter L
151Bh Reserved
151Ch Motor 1 Parameter Io
151Dh
Motor 1 Parameter J
151Eh
151Fh
to
1524h
Reserved
−
H020
−
H021
−
H022
−
H023
H024
(HIGH)
H024
(LOW)
−
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
R/W
1 to 9999000
R/W
− −
Data resolution
Page
1
−
−
−
−
−
−
1 [%]
1
−
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.01 [mH] 5-145
−
0.01 [A]
0.001
[kgm
−
2
]
5-63
−
5-146
5-145
5-145
−
5-145
5-81
−
−
5-145
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1525h
Motor 1 Parameter R1
(Auto-tuning Data)
1526h Reserved
1527h
Motor 1 Parameter R2
(Auto-tuning Data)
1528h Reserved
1529h
Motor 1 Parameter L
(Auto-tuning Data)
152Ah Reserved
152Bh
Motor 1 Parameter Io
(Auto-tuning Data)
152Ch
152Dh
Motor 1 Parameter J
(Auto-tuning Data)
152Eh
to
153Ch
Reserved
153Dh
153Eh
V/f Control With Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation
Proportional Gain
V/f Control With Speed
Feedback Slip
Compensation Integral
Gain
153Fh
to
1600h
Not used
1601h
Operation Selection on
Option Error
1602h Reserved
1603h
1604h
Pulse Train Input
Terminal RP Selection
Feedback Pulse Train
Input Type Selection
Parameter
No.
R/W
H030
−
H031
−
H032
Monitor and setting parameters
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
−
H033
H034
(HIGH)
H034
(LOW)
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
R/W
R/W
1 to 9999000
−
H050
H051
−
P001
−
P003
P004
− −
R/W 0 to 1000
R/W 0 to 1000
− Inaccessible
R/W
R/W
00: Trip
01: Continue operation
− −
R/W
00: Frequency setting
(including PID)
01: Feedback pulse (enabled only when motor 1 control is selected)
02: Do not set.
00: 1-phase pulse input
01: Dual-phase pulse 1
02: Dual-phase pulse 2
03: 1-phase pulse train + direction
1605h
to
160Ah
Reserved
160Bh
Number of Encoder
Pulses
−
P011
− −
160Ch
Simple Position Control
Selection
P012
R/W 32 to 1024
R/W
00: Simple position control disabled
02: Simple position control enabled
Data resolution
Page
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.01 [mH] 5-145
−
0.01 [A]
−
0.001
[kgm
−
00
−
2
]
0.01 [%]
1 [s]
−
−
−
−
1
−
5-145
−
5-83
5-160
−
−
−
5-82
5-160
5-160
−
5-160
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-64
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
160Dh to
160Eh
Function name
Reserved
160Fh Creep Speed Setting
1610h to
1619h
Reserved
161Ah
161Bh
Overspeed Error
Detection Level
Speed Deviation Error
Detection Level
161Ch to
161Eh
Reserved
161Fh
Acceleration/
Deceleration Time Input
Type
1620h Reserved
Parameter
No.
R/W
−
P015
−
P026
P027
−
P031
−
−
R/W
−
Monitor and setting
Starting frequency to 1000
(10000) parameters
R/W 0 to 1500
R/W 0 to 12000
−
−
−
−
1621h
1622h
Torque Reference Input
Selection
Torque Reference
Setting
1623h Reserved
1624h Torque Bias Mode
1625h Torque Bias Value
1626h
Torque Bias Polarity
Selection
P033
P034
−
P036
P037
P038
R/W
00: Digital Operator
03: Do not set.
− −
R/W
00: Terminal FV
01: Terminal FI
03: Digital Operator
06: Do not set.
R/W 0 to 200
− −
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Digital Operator
05: Do not set.
R/W − 200 to +200
R/W
00: As per sign
01: Depends on the RUN direction
1627h
1628h
1629h
162Ah
Speed Limit Value in
Torque Control (forward)
Speed Limit Value in
Torque Control (reverse)
162Bh
Speed/Torque Control
Switching Time
162Ch to
1633h
1634h to
1638h
Reserved
Reserved
P039
(HIGH)
P039
(LOW)
P040
(HIGH)
P040
(LOW)
P041
−
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 to 12000
0 to 12000
R/W 0 to 1000
−
−
−
−
Data resolution
Page
−
0.01 [Hz]
−
0.1 [%]
0.01 [Hz]
−
−
−
−
1 [%]
−
−
1 [%]
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
1 [ms]
−
−
−
5-160
−
5-160
−
5-24
−
5-156
−
5-156
5-156
−
−
6-65 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
1639h
Pulse Train Frequency
Scale
163Ah
Pulse Train Frequency
Filter Time Parameter
163Bh Pulse Train Bias Amount
163Ch Pulse Train Limit
163Dh Reserved
163Eh
163Fh
1640h
1641h
1642h
1643h
1644h
1645h
1646h
1647h
1648h
1649h
164Ah
164Bh
164Ch
164Dh
164Fh
1650h
1651h
Multi-step Position
Command 0
Multi-step Position
Command 1
Multi-step Position
Command 2
Multi-step Position
Command 3
Multi-step Position
Command 4
Multi-step Position
Command 5
Multi-step Position
Command 6
Multi-step Position
Command 7
164Eh Zero Return Mode
Zero Return Direction
Selection
Zero Return Mode 1
Frequency
Zero Return Mode 2
Frequency
Parameter
No.
P055
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
10 to 320 *Input frequency at maximum frequency
P056
P057
P058
−
P060
(HIGH)
P060
(LOW)
P061
(HIGH)
P061
(LOW)
P062
(HIGH)
P062
(LOW)
P063
(HIGH)
P063
(LOW)
P064
(HIGH)
P064
(LOW)
P065
(HIGH)
P065
(LOW)
P066
(HIGH)
P066
(LOW)
P067
(HIGH)
P067
(LOW)
P068
P069
P070
P071
R/W 1 to 200
R/W − 100 to +100
R/W 0 to 100
− −
R/W
R/W
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
Position range setting
(reverse side) to position range setting (forward side)
(Displays MSB 4 digits including " − ")
00: Zero return mode 1
01: Zero return mode 2
R/W
00: Forward
01: Reverse
R/W 0 to 1000 (10000)
R/W 0 to 4000
Data resolution
Page
0.1 [kHz]
0.01 [s]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
−
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
5-82
−
5-164
5-164
5-168
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-66
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-67
Register
No.
1652h
1653h
1654h
1655h
Function name
Position Range Setting
(forward side)
Position Range Setting
(reverse side)
1656h Reserved
1657h
Positioning Mode
Selection
1658h Reserved
1659h
Encoder Disconnection
Detection Time
165Ah to
168Dh
Reserved
168Eh
168Fh
Number of Send Data of
All Stations in Co-inverter
Communication
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 1
1690h
1691h
1692h
1693h
1694h
1695h
1696h
1697h
1698h
Recipient Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 1
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 1
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 2
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 2
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 3
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 3
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 4
Parameter
No.
P072
(HIGH)
P072
(LOW)
P073
(HIGH)
P073
(LOW)
−
P075
−
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
0 to 268435455
− 268435455 to 0
− −
R/W
00: Limit
01: Unlimited
− −
P077
−
P140
P141
P142
P143
P144
P145
P146
P147
P148
P149
P150
R/W 0 to 100
− −
R/W 1 to 5
R/W 1 to 247
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 1 to 247
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 1 to 247
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 1 to 247
Data resolution
Page
1
1
−
−
−
5-160
− −
0.1 [s] 5-160
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
5-160
−
6-22
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
Parameter
No.
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
Data resolution
Page
1699h
169Ah
169Bh
169Ch
169Dh
Recipient Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 4
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 4
Recipient Station
Number of All Stations in
Co-inverter
Communication 5
Recipient Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 5
Sender Register of All
Stations in Co-inverter
Communication 5
P151
P152
P153
P154
P155
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 1 to 247
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
R/W 0000h to FFFFh
−
−
−
−
−
6-22
169Eh
to
16BCh
16BDh to
1E00h
Reserved
Not used
−
−
−
−
−
Inaccessible
−
−
−
−
1E01h Coil Data 1
1E02h Coil Data 2
1E03h Coil Data 3
1E04h Coil Data 4
1E05h Coil Data 5
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
−
−
−
−
−
R
R
R
R
R
2
2
0
: Coil number 0010h to
15 : Coil number 001Fh
2
2
0
: Coil number 0020h to
15
: Coil number 002Fh
2
2
0
: Coil number 0030h to
15
: Coil number 003Fh
2
2
0
: Coil number 0040h to
15 : Coil number 004Fh
2
2
0
8
: Coil number 0050h to
: Coil number 0058h
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
1E06h to
1E18h
1E19h to
1F00h
Reserved
Not used
−
−
−
−
−
Inaccessible
−
−
−
−
1F01h Coil Data 0 *1 − R/W
2
2
1
: Coil number 0001h to
15
: Coil number 000Fh
− −
1F02h to
1F1Dh
1F1Eh to
2102h
Reserved
Not used
−
−
−
−
− *2
Inaccessible
−
−
−
−
*1. Each of the above holding registers (coil data 0 to 5) consists of 16 coil data. Since coils are not supported in Co-inverter communication (only holding registers are supported), use the above holding registers when accessing coils.
*2. Do not write into holding registers 1F02h to 1F1Dh.
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-68
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
(vi) Holding Register Number List (2nd Setting, Group F)
Register
No.
Function name
2103h
2104h
Acceleration Time 2
Setting
2105h
2106h
Deceleration Time 2
Setting
2107h to
2200h
Not used
Parameter
No.
F202
(HIGH)
F202
(LOW)
F203
(HIGH)
F203
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
1 to 360000
1 to 360000
− − Inaccessible
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
−
5-24
−
6
6-69
(vii) Holding Register Number List (2nd Setting, Groups A, b, C, H and P)
Register
No.
2201h
2202h
Function name
Frequency Reference
Selection 2
RUN Command
Selection 2
*1
2203h Base Frequency 2
2204h Maximum Frequency 2
Parameter
No.
A201
A202
A203
A204
R/W
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Volume
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
06: Pulse train frequency
07: Do not set.
10: Operation function output
01: Control circuit terminal block
02: Digital Operator
03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
04: Optional board
Data resolution
−
−
Page
5-15
5-22
R/W 300 to Maximum Frequency 2 0.1 [Hz] 5-26
R/W
Base Frequency 2 to
4000 (10000)
0.1 [Hz] 5-28
2205h to
2215h
Reserved − − − − −
2216h
2217h
Multi-step Speed 2
Reference 0
A220
(HIGH)
A220
(LOW)
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to
Maximum frequency 2
0.01 [Hz] 5-63
2218h to
223Ah
Reserved − − − − −
*1. After changing the 2nd RUN Command Selection, provide an interval of at least 40 ms before the RUN command is actually executed.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
223Bh Torque Boost Selection 2
Parameter
No.
A241
R/W
R/W
Monitor and setting parameters
00: Manual torque boost
01: Automatic torque boost
223Ch
223Dh
Manual Torque Boost
Voltage 2
Manual Torque Boost
Frequency 2
A242
A243
R/W 0 to 200
R/W 0 to 500
223Eh Control Method 2 A244
A245
R/W
00: Constant torque characteristics
01: Reduced torque characteristics
02: Free V/f setting
03: Sensorless vector control (heavy load only)
R/W 20 to 100 223Fh Output Voltage Gain 2
2240h
2241h
Automatic Torque Boost
Voltage Compensation
Gain 2
Automatic Torque Boost
Slip Compensation Gain 2
2242h to
224Eh
Reserved
A246
A247
−
R/W 0 to 255
R/W 0 to 255
− −
Data resolution
Page
−
0.1 [%]
0.1 [%]
−
1 [%]
1 [%]
1 [%]
−
5-49
5-46
5-144
5-72
5-49
−
224Fh
2250h
2251h
2252h
Frequency Upper Limit 2
Frequency Lower Limit 2
A261
(HIGH)
A261
(LOW)
A262
(HIGH)
A262
(LOW)
R/W 0
R/W
Frequency Lower Limit 2 to
Maximum Frequency 2
R/W 0
R/W
Starting frequency to
Frequency Upper Limit 2
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
5-60
2253h to
2268h
Reserved − − − − −
2269h AVR Selection 2
226Ah
Motor Incoming Voltage
Selection 2
A281
A282
R/W
R/W
00: Always ON
01: Always OFF
02: OFF during deceleration
200V class: 00 (200)
01(215)
02(220)
03(230)
04(240)
400V class: 05 (380)
06(400)
07(415)
−
−
5-27
5-26
5-148
226Bh to
226Eh
Reserved − − − − −
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-70
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
6-71
Register
No.
226Fh
2270h
2271h
2272h
2273h
2274h
2275h
2276h
2277h
Function name
2nd Acceleration Time 2
2nd Deceleration Time 2
2-step Acceleration/
Deceleration Selection 2
2-step Acceleration
Frequency 2
2-step Deceleration
Frequency 2
Parameter
No.
A292
(HIGH)
A292
(LOW)
A293
(HIGH)
A293
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
A294
Monitor and setting parameters
1 to 360000
1 to 360000
R/W
00: Switched via 2CH terminal
01: Switched by setting
02: Enabled only when switching forward/ reverse
A295
(HIGH)
A295
(LOW)
A296
(HIGH)
A296
(LOW)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0 to 40000 (100000)
0 to 40000 (100000)
2278h to
230Bh
Not used
230Ch Electronic Thermal Level 2
− b212
− Inaccessible
230Dh
Electronic Thermal
Characteristics Selection 2 b213
R/W 2000 to 10000
R/W
00: Reduced torque characteristics
01: Constant torque characteristics
02: Free setting
230Eh to
2315h
Reserved − − −
2316h
Overload Limit 2
Selection
2317h Overload Limit 2 Level
2318h
Overload Limit 2
Parameter
2319h to
2428h
Not used
2429h Overload Warning Level 2 b221 b222 b223
−
C241
R/W
00: Disabled
01: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
02: Enabled in constant speed operation
03: Enabled in acceleration/ constant speed operation
(Accelerates during regeneration)
R/W 100 to 2000
R/W 1 to 30000
− Inaccessible
R/W 0 to 2000
Data resolution
Page
0.01 [s]
0.01 [s]
−
0.01 [Hz]
0.01 [Hz]
−
0.01 [%]
−
−
−
0.1 [%]
0.1 [s]
−
0.1 [%]
5-66
−
5-110
−
5-114
−
5-115
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
242Ah to
2501h
Function name
Not used
Parameter
No.
−
R/W
−
Monitor and setting parameters
Inaccessible
2502h Motor Parameter 2
2503h Motor Capacity 2
2504h Motor Pole Number 2
2505h
2506h
Speed Response 2
2507h Stabilization Parameter 2
2508h to
2515h
Reserved
2516h Motor 2 Parameter R1
2517h Reserved
2518h Motor 2 Parameter R2
2519h Reserved
251Ah Motor 2 Parameter L
251Bh Reserved
251Ch Motor 2 Parameter Io
251Dh
251Eh
Motor 2 Parameter J
251Fh to
2524h
Reserved
2525h
Motor 2 Parameter R1
(Auto-tuning Data)
H202
H203
H204
H205
(HIGH)
H205
(LOW)
H206
R/W
R/W
R/W
00: Standard motor parameter
02: Auto-tuning data
00: 0.1
01: 0.2
02: 0.4
03: 0.55
04: 0.75
05: 1.1
06: 1.5
07: 2.2
08: 3.0
09: 3.7
10: 4.0
11: 5.5
12: 7.5
13: 11.0
14: 15.0
15: 18.5
00: 2P
01: 4P
02: 6P
03: 8P
04: 10P
R/W
R/W
1 to 1000
R/W 0 to 255
−
H220
−
H221
−
H222
−
H223
H224
(HIGH)
H224
(LOW)
−
H230
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
R/W
R/W
−
1 to 9999000
−
R/W 1 to 65530
Data resolution
Page
− −
−
−
−
1 [%]
1
−
5-81
−
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.01 [mH] 5-145
− −
0.01 [A] 5-145
0.001
[kgm
−
0.001 [
2 ]
Ω ]
5-145
5-145
−
5-145
6
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 6-72
6
6-8 List of Modbus Communication (Modbus-RTU) Data
Register
No.
Function name
2526h Reserved
2527h
252Bh
Motor 2 Parameter R2
(Auto-tuning Data)
2528h Reserved
2529h
Motor 2 Parameter L
(Auto-tuning Data)
252Ah Reserved
Motor 2 Parameter Io
(Auto-tuning Data)
252Ch
252Dh
Motor 2 Parameter J
(Auto-tuning Data)
252Eh to
3102h
Not used
Parameter
No.
−
R/W
− −
Monitor and setting parameters
H231 R/W 1 to 65530
−
H232
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
−
H233
H234
(HIGH)
H234
(LOW)
− −
R/W 1 to 65530
R/W
R/W
1 to 9999000
− − Inaccessible
Data resolution
−
Page
−
0.001 [ Ω ] 5-145
− −
0.01 [mH] 5-145
− −
0.01 [A] 5-145
0.001
[kgm
−
2
]
5-145
−
6-73 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Maintenance Operations
Describes the error diagnosis based on error display, remedial actions to be taken, and items to check upon occurrence of a problem.
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions................................... 7-1
Error Display ................................................................................... 7-1
Error Code List................................................................................ 7-2
Warning Display.............................................................................. 7-7
Other Displays ................................................................................ 7-9
7-2 Troubleshooting.................................................................. 7-10
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
7
Error Display
Upon detecting an error, the Inverter cuts off (trips) the output, the ALARM LED indicator is lit, and an error code is displayed. By pressing the Increment key while the error code is displayed, the output frequency, current, DC voltage and other detailed information at the time of occurrence of the alarm can be checked.
Before resetting the alarm, check each signal such as the RUN command.
Also before resetting the alarm, identify the cause of the trip based on the displayed error code and remove the cause.
This Chapter explains how to handle problems that may occur after operation of the Inverter is started.
Method for Resetting Trip
A trip can be reset by one of the following two methods:
Press the STOP/RESET Key.
Allocate Reset (18: RS) to a multi-function input terminal, and turn this terminal ON and then turn it OFF.
Depending on its factor, the trip may not be reset using the reset terminal. In this case, reconnect the power supply.
dk0k8k1 Fault monitor 1 ek0k7.2
7-1 ek0k7.2
6k0.0k0
4.0k0
Hz
A
Error code
Hz
A
Output frequency at the time of the alarm (Hz)
Hz
A
Output current (A) at the time of the alarm
4k0k0.2
Hz
A
P-N DC voltage (V) at the time of the alarm
1k5.
Hz
A
Total RUN time until the time of the alarm (h)
1k8.
Hz
A
Total ON time until the time of the alarm (h)
Alarm factor Inverter status at the time of the alarm
(Refer to
"Error Code List" on page 7-2.)
.0
.1
: Power turned on or initialization in
progress with the reset terminal ON
: During stop
.2
: During deceleration
.3
: At a constant speed
.4
: During acceleration
.5
: RUN command issued
at frequency 0
.6
: During startup
.7
: DC limited
.8
: During overload limit
.9
: Forcing in progress or
servo ON
Note: This is the Inverter condition when a trip has occurred. It may be different from the apparent operation of the motor.
(During PID control or when the frequency is input using an analog signal, the
Inverter may be repeating brief decelerations/accelerations due to analog signal fluctuation, etc., even when the motor appears to be operating at a constant speed.)
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
Error Code List
Name
Overcurrent protection
Overload protection
Braking resistor overload protection
*1
Overvoltage protection
Description
Error code
If the motor is restrained or rapidly accelerated or decelerated, a large current will flow through the Inverter, which will result in breakage.
Accordingly, the protection circuit operates at approximately 200% of the
Inverter rated output current and a trip occurs.
Constant speed
During deceleration
E01.
E02. occurs.
the b090 set value.
Acceleration E03.
Others
The Inverter output current is monitored and if a motor overload is detected by the built-in electronic thermal, a trip
A trip will occur if the usage rate of regenerative braking circuit exceeds
Extremely high DC voltage between P/
+2 and N/ − may result in failure.
Accordingly, a trip will occur if the DC voltage between P/+2 and N/ − reaches approx. 400 VDC (200V class) or 800
VDC (400V class) or above due to increase in the regenerative energy from the motor or in the incoming voltage.
E04.
E05.
E06.
E07.
Check point and remedy
Reference page
Is there any rapid load fluctuation?
→ Eliminate load fluctuations.
Is there any output short-circuit?
→ Check the output wiring.
Is there any ground fault?
→ Check the output wiring and motor.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
→ Increase the deceleration time.
Is there any rapid acceleration?
→ Increase the acceleration time.
Has the motor been locked?
→ Check the motor and wiring.
Is the torque boost too high?
→ Lower the torque boost.
Is the DC injection braking too high?
→ Decrease the braking force.
Is the load too large?
→ Decrease the load rate.
Is the thermal level correct?
→ Adjust the thermal level to an appropriate level.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
→ Increase the deceleration time.
Is the operation cycle too short?
→ Increase the operation cycle.
Is there any rapid deceleration?
→ Increase the deceleration time.
Is there any ground fault?
→ Check the output wiring and motor.
Has the motor been rotated from the load side?
→ Reduce regenerative energy.
Has incoming voltage increased?
→ Lower the incoming voltage, sustain the power supply fluctuation, apply the AC reactor to input.
5-24
5-66
5-135
5-110
5-24
5-141
−
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-2
7
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
*1. The reset command will not be accepted until approximately 10 seconds pass since the trip occurs
(protection function works).
Name Description
Error code
EEPROM error
*1
A trip will occur if the built-in EEPROM generates an error due to external noise, abnormal rise in temperature, etc. (It may become a CPU error depending on the case).
E08.
Undervoltage The output is shut off if the incoming
Current detector error
CPU error
*1
External trip
USP error
Grounding protection *1 voltage drops to the specified value or below, because the control circuit no longer functions properly if the incoming voltage to the Inverter drops.
A trip will also occur when the DC voltage between P/+2 and N/ − drops to approx. 173 VDC (200V class) or 345
VDC (400V class) or below.
A trip will occur if the current detector generates an error.
A trip will occur if the built-in CPU experiences a malfunction or error.
A trip will occur if the multi-function input terminal set for External trip (12:
EXT) turns ON.
E09.
E10.
E11.
E12.
A trip will occur if the power is turned on while a RUN signal is still input to the
Inverter. (Available only when the USP function is selected).
E13.
A trip will occur if a ground fault between the Inverter output unit and the motor is detected when turning on the power. (This function does not work when there is residual voltage in the motor).
E14.
Check point and remedy
Reference page
Is there any large noise source around?
→ Countermeasures against noise
Has the cooling efficiency been reduced?
→ Check that there is no clogging in the cooling fan and clean it.
→ Replace the cooling fan.
Has the power supply voltage decreased?
→ Check the power supply.
Is the power supply capacity insufficient?
→ Check the power supply.
Has the thyristor been broken?
→ Check the thyristor.
The Inverter has a failure.
→ Repair
Is there any large noise source around?
→ Countermeasures against noise
The Inverter has a failure.
→ Repair
Faulty external equipment
→ Check the external equipment
Is the power turned on while a RUN signal is still input?
→ Check the RUN signal.
−
5-72
−
−
5-120
5-105
Is there any ground fault?
→ Check the output wiring and motor.
Is there any error in the
Inverter itself?
→ Disconnect the output wires to check.
Is there any error in the main circuit?
→ Check the main circuit.
(Refer to Chapter 8,
"Inspection and
Maintenance").
−
7-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
*1. If an error occurs, the reset operation using the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power once.
If an error is issued when the power is turned on again, the memory may be faulty or parameters may not be stored correctly. Perform parameter initialization and set the parameters again.
Name
Incoming overvoltage protection
Description
A trip will occur if the incoming voltage remains in an overvoltage state for 100 s while the Inverter is stopped. The overvoltage detection value is approx.
390 VDC for 200V class models, or 780
VDC for 400V class models, based on the DC voltage between P/+2 and N/ − .
Error code
E15.
Check point and remedy
Is the incoming voltage too high?
→ Decrease the incoming voltage.
→ Suppress the power supply fluctuation.
→ Apply the AC reactor to input.
Reference page
−
Abnormal temperature
CPU communication error
Main circuit error
A trip will occur if the temperature of the main circuit exceeds the specified value due to a high ambient temperature, etc.
A trip will occur if the built-in CPU experiences a communication malfunction or error.
A trip will occur if the main circuit board generates an error.
E21.
E22.
E25.
Is the installation direction vertical?
→ Check the installation.
Is the ambient temperature high?
→ Lower the temperature.
Is there any large noise source around?
→ Countermeasures against noise
Faulty inverter
→ Repair
Is there any large noise source around?
→ Countermeasures against noise
Faulty inverter
→ Repair
−
−
−
Driver error
Thermistor error
*1
This error is detected by the driver IC mounted in the Inverter.
A trip will occur upon occurrence of momentary overcurrent, abnormal main element temperature or drop in main element drive power, in order to protect the main element. (Operation cannot be restarted following this trip).
A trip will occur upon detection of abnormal temperature based on the resistance of the external thermistor, if the thermistor input function is enabled.
E30.
E35.
Is there any output shortcircuit?
→ Check the output wiring.
Is there any ground fault?
→ Check the output wiring and motor.
Has the main element been damaged?
→ Check the IGBT.
Is there any clogging in the fan?
→ Clean the fins.
Is the motor temperature too high?
→ Check the temperature.
Is the thermistor damaged?
→ Check the thermistor.
Is there any noise interfusion in the thermistor signal?
→ Separate the wiring.
−
5-120
*1. If an error occurs, the reset operation using the RS terminal or STOP/RESET key is not accepted. Turn off the power once.
If an error is issued when the power is turned on again, the memory may be faulty or parameters may not be stored correctly. Perform parameter initialization and set the parameters again.
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-4
7
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
Name
Brake error
Description
A trip will occur if brake ON/OFF cannot be confirmed within the Brake
Confirmation Wait Time (b124) after the
Inverter has issued a brake release output, provided that the Brake Control function is enabled (b120 = 01).
Error code
E36.
Check point and remedy
Is the brake ON/OFF function working?
→ Check the brake.
Is the set time for b124 too short?
→ Increase b124 .
Has the brake confirmation signal been input?
→ Check the wiring.
− Emergency shutoff
*1
E37.
Overload protection in a low speed range
If an overload occurs in the extremely low speed range of 0.2 Hz or below, it will be detected by the built-in electronic thermal of the Inverter and a trip will occur. (However, the error history may indicate a high frequency).
E38. Is the load too large?
→ Decrease the load rate.
Poor Digital
Operator connection
The Inverter is tripped when there is an error or broken line for communications with an externally connected Operator
(optional).
E40. Is there a communications error?
→ Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
This error will not be detected if b165 is set to
02 (ignore).
Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU) error
A trip will occur upon timeout if the communication error selection is set to tripping (C076 = 00).
Internal data error
−
E41.
E43. to
E59.
−
Is the communication speed correct?
→ Check the setting.
Is the wiring distance appropriate?
→ Check the communication wiring.
Has disconnection occurred?
→ Check the wiring.
Option error This error is reported by an optional board.
E60.
E68.
to Refer to the manual for the optional board for details.
Option timeout A timeout occurred in communications between the Inverter and optional board, and the Inverter was tripped.
E69. The optional board is disconnected.
→ Check to see if the case of the optional board is mating properly with the
Inverter. Tighten the mounting screws.
The option board is malfunctioning.
→ If the optional board is mated properly, it may have failed.
Reference page
5-142
−
−
5-85
5-86
6-3
−
−
−
7-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
Name
Encoder disconnection
Description
The Inverter is tripped if the motor rotations detected by the motor are less than the Starting Frequency (b082) for longer than the Encoder Disconnection
Detection Time (P077, P077 ≠ 0) when the output frequency is equal to or higher than the Creep Speed Setting
(P015).
Excess speed The Inverter is tripped when the motor rotations equal or exceed the maximum frequency times the Overspeed Error
Detection Level (P026 ≠ 0).
Error code
E80.
E81.
Check point and remedy
The encoder wiring is disconnected or there is a faulty connection.
→ Check the encoder wiring.
The actual motor rotations is less than the Starting
Frequency (b082) for longer than the Encoder
Disconnection Detection
Time (P077).
→ Adjust the parameters.
Increase the setting in P077 and P015.
This error also occurs if the number of motor rotations is less than the starting frequency during simple position control.
→ Adjust the parameters.
Increase the setting in P077 and P015.
This is determined via speed detection with the encoder.
The encoder wiring is disconnected or there is a faulty connection.
→ Check the encoder wiring.
The number of encoder pulses is not correct.
→ Check the Number of
Encoder Pulses (P011).
The actual motor rotations exceeded the error detection level.
→ Adjust the Overspeed
Error Detection Level (P026)
Reference page
5-83
5-160
5-161
5-83
5-160
Position control range trip
A trip will occur if the current position exceeds the Position Range Setting
(P072, P073) during simple position control.
E83. Check the current position.
→ Check parameters P072 and P073.
→ Check the zero point.
5-161
*1. It cannot be reset with STOP/RESET keys. Perform a reset by reconnecting the power or operating the
RS (reset) terminal.
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-6
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
7
Warning Display
If the set parameter contradicts other set value, a warning will be displayed and the program
LED indicator will flash.
The table below lists the warnings to be displayed and the conditions in which these warnings are displayed. If a warning is displayed, change the applicable parameter by referring to the content of the table. (Issuing a RUN command will not rewrite the parameter to the correct value automatically).
The last displayed warning is stored in d090.
Warning display v001 v002 v005 v015 v025 v031 v032 v035 v037 v085 v086 v091 v092 v095 v201 v202 v205 v215 v225 v231 v232 v235
Warning display condition
Frequency Upper Limit 1 (A061) > Maximum Frequency 1 (A004)
Frequency Lower Limit 1 (A062) > Maximum Frequency 1 (A004)
>
Maximum Frequency 1 (A004) Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Frequency Lower Limit 1 (A062)
Starting Frequency (b082)
>
>
>
Frequency Upper Limit 1 (A061)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Frequency Upper Limit 1 (A061)
Starting Frequency (b082) > Frequency Lower Limit 1 (A062)
Starting Frequency (b082)
Starting Frequency (b082)
>
>
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Jogging Frequency (A038)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Multi-step Speed References 1 to 15
(A021 to A035)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)
=
=
>
Jump frequency
*1
(A063/A065/A067 ± A064/A066/A068)
Frequency Upper Limit 1 (A061)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) > Frequency Lower Limit 1 (A062)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)
Frequency Upper Limit 2 (A261)
>
>
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 1 Reference 0 (A020)
Maximum Frequency 2 (A204)
Frequency Lower Limit 2 (A262) > Maximum Frequency 2 (A204)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 2 Reference 0 (A220)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 2 Reference 0 (A220)
Frequency Lower Limit 2 (A262)
Starting Frequency (b082)
>
>
>
>
Maximum Frequency 2 (A204)
Frequency Upper Limit 2 (A261)
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 2 Reference 0 (A220)
Frequency Upper Limit 2 (A261)
Starting Frequency (b082) > Frequency Lower Limit 2 (A262)
Starting Frequency (b082)
>
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 2 Reference 0 (A220)
7-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
Warning display v285 v291 v292 v295
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)
Warning display condition
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed Reference 0 (A220)
=
>
Jump Frequency
*1
(A063/A065/A067 ± A064/A066/A068)
Frequency Upper Limit 2 (A261)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112) > Frequency Lower Limit 2 (A262)
Free V/f Frequency 7 (b112)
>
Output Frequency Setting (F001), Multistep Speed 2 Reference 0 (A220)
*1. A warning will occur if the frequency set in any one of F001, A020, A220 and A021 to A035 is within the frequency range set by the jump frequency.
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-8
7-1 Error Display and Remedial Actions
7
Other Displays
Reset
Name Description
This warning appears if the input terminal set to Reset (RS) is ON or a trip has been reset using the STOP/RESET key.
Display on Digital Operator
Turns.
xkxkxkx
Undervoltage standby Appears in undervoltage standby condition or with the power shut off.
-k-k-k-
Restart during momentary power interruption, restart during trip
RUN command is limited
Restart function is in operation.
okokoko
Setting initialization
Fault monitor being initialized
Appears if the limited RUN command is received from the control terminal while the
RUN direction is limited with b035.
Appears while the set values are being initialized.
[ 00]: Setting for Japan
Appears while the fault monitor is being initialized.
OkOkOkO
0k0 hkc
No data Appears when no applicable data is available
(a trip has not yet occurred in the fault monitor mode).
Communications error Appears if an error occurs between the
Remote Operator and the Inverter.
Flashes.
_k_k_k_
=k=k=k=
Auto-tuning OK Appears upon successful completion of auto-tuning.
_k_k_ko
Auto-tuning NG Appears upon failure of auto-tuning.
_k_k_kz
7-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-2 Troubleshooting
7-2 Troubleshooting
If the Inverter malfunctions or does not function as expected although no error display is shown, take a remedial action by referring to the information below.
If the Inverter trips after showing an error display, refer to "Error Display and Remedial Actions" on page 7-1.
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
The power does not turn on. (The main POWER LED indicator is not lit).
The motor does not turn after a RUN command is issued.
The shorting bar between terminals +1 and P/+2 or
DC reactor is disconnected.
Connect the shorting bar or DC reactor.
The input wire is disconnected. Check the wiring.
The setting of RUN
Command Selection
(A002) is not correct.
Set the correct RUN Command Selection
(A002).
The setting of Frequency
Reference Selection
(A001) is not correct.
The frequency is set to 0
Hz.
Set Frequency Reference Selection
(A001) correctly according to the frequency reference input method, and specify the frequency.
If Frequency Reference Selection (A001) is set to
"01: Control circuit terminal block, "input to the FV or FI terminal an analog voltage or current signal corresponding to the frequency. Refer to
"Frequency Reference Selection and Output
Frequency Setting" on page 5-15 for details on analog voltage/current switching.
No multi-function input terminal (RUN command) is allocated.
One of multi-step speed settings "02: CF1" to "05:
CF4" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
Both the forward input and reverse input terminals are turned ON.
If Frequency Reference Selection (A001) is set to "02: Digital Operator", set the frequency in Output Frequency Setting
(F001).
Enter the frequency according to the set value in Frequency Reference Selection
(A001). (The entered frequency is displayed under F001).
In the case of multi-step speed operation, set the frequency in Multi-step Speed
Reference 0 to 15 (A020 to A035, A220).
If a multi-function input terminal is used to issue a RUN command, allocate "00: FW" or
"01: RV" to the applicable terminal.
If a RUN command is issued using the 3-wire input method, allocate "20: STA", "21: STP,
"or "22: F/R".
Turn OFF the multi-step speed setting. (If the multi-step speed setting is turned ON, multi-step speed operation becomes effective. Accordingly, operation is not performed if the applicable frequency set in
Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15 (A021 to A035) is 0 (default value)).
To use the forward or reverse input terminal to issue a RUN command, turn only one of the two terminals ON.
Reference
Page
2-6 to
2-14
5-22
5-15
5-63
5-29
5-63
5-23
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-10
7
7-2 Troubleshooting
7-11
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
The motor does not turn after a RUN command is issued.
Rotation Direction Limit Selection
(b035) is set and forward or reverse rotation is prohibited.
The input terminal wiring for RUN command or shorting-bar connection position is incorrect.
The analog input for frequency reference or
Variable Resistor wiring is incorrect.
Set the correct Rotation Direction Limit
Selection (b035).
Implement wiring correctly. (The ON/OFF status of the input terminal can be checked with Multi-function Input Monitor (d005)).
Implement wiring correctly.
• For the analog voltage or Variable
Resistor input, measure the FV-SC terminal voltage using a tester, etc. to check if the correct voltage is output.
• For the analog current input, disconnect the wiring and measure the source-FI terminal current using a tester, etc. to check if the correct current is supplied.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
"51: F-TM (Forced terminal block)" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned
ON, even though a Digital
Operator mode is selected.
"31: OPE (Forced operator)" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned
ON, even though the control circuit terminal block mode is selected.
The Inverter has tripped.
(The ALARM LED indicator is lit and "Exxx" is shown).
The safety function selector switch is turned
ON and the multi-function input terminal S3/GS1 or
S4/GS2 is turned OFF.
"18: RS (Reset)", "14: CS
(Commercial switch)", or
"11: FRS (free-run stop)" is allocated to a multifunction input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
"84: ROK (Permission of
RUN command)" is allocated to a multifunction input terminal and the terminal is turned OFF.
The wiring from the
Inverter to the motor or wiring inside the motor is disconnected.
The load is excessive.
The motor is locked.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Press the STOP/RESET key to reset the trip, identify and remove the cause of the trip based on the error code, and then restart the operation.
If the safety function is used, turn both the safety inputs GS1 and GS2 ON. If the safety function is not used, turn OFF the selector switch.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Turn ON the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Check the wiring.
Reduce the load.
Unlock the motor.
Reference
Page
5-23
2-19 to
2-22
2-6
5-37
5-85
5-85
3-12
5-119
7-1 to
7-6
5-170
5-79
5-100
5-103
5-63
2-6 to
2-14
−
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-2 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
The motor rotation speed does not rise.
The frequency cannot be set in
Output Frequency
Setting (F001) using the Digital
Operator.
Specified parameters are not displayed.
The Digital
Operator keys do not work.
Contact failure of the analog input for frequency reference or Variable
Resistor.
The overload limit or overcurrent suppression function has actuated.
The setting of Maximum
Frequency (A004) or
Frequency Upper Limit
(A061/A261) is low.
Change the setting.
Acceleration time is long.
Shorten the acceleration time (F002/F202/
A092/A292).
"06: JG (jogging)" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
One of multi-step speed settings "02: CF1" to "05:
CF4" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
The load is excessive.
The motor is locked.
Turn OFF the multi-step speed setting. (If the multi-step speed setting terminal is turned ON, multi-step speed operation becomes effective. Accordingly, operation is performed according to the frequency set in Multi-step Speed Reference 1 to 15
(A021 to A035)).
Reduce the load.
Unlock the motor.
Set Frequency Reference Selection
(A001) to "02: Digital Operator".
Frequency Reference
Selection (A001) is not set to "Digital Operator".
"51: F-TM (forced terminal block)" is allocated to a multi-function input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Set Display Selection (b037) to "00:
Complete display".
Display Selection (b037) is set to "01: Individual display of functions," "04:
Basic display," etc.
"86: DISP (Display fixed)" is allocated to a multifunction input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
"86: DISP (Display fixed)" is allocated to a multifunction input terminal and the terminal is turned ON.
Check the wiring.
• For the analog voltage or Variable
Resistor input, measure the FV-SC terminal voltage using a tester, etc. to check if the correct voltage is output.
• For the analog current input, disconnect the wiring and measure the source-FI terminal current using a tester, etc. to check if the correct current is supplied.
Disable the function or raise the operation level.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Turn OFF the terminal to which the applicable function is allocated.
Reference
Page
2-6
5-37
5-114
5-28
5-60
5-24
5-59
5-64
−
−
5-15
5-85
5-88
5-91
5-91
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-12
7
7-2 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
Parameters cannot be changed.
Motor turns in reverse.
The motor turns in reverse when operation is started with the RUN key.
An Overcurrent
Trip (E03) occurs during operation.
The STOP/RESET key does not work.
The Inverter is running.
Soft lock is effective.
The phase order of motor wiring is incorrect. (The specification of motor phase order is such that U/
T1, V/T2, W/T3 does not indicate forward rotation).
The forward/reverse logic is incorrect when the 3-wire input function is used.
RUN Direction Selection
(F004) is incorrect.
Stop the Inverter and wait for the motor to decelerate to a stop, and then set again. When the mode is set to "Data can be changed during RUN" (b031 = 10), some parameters can be changed even during operation.
Disable Soft Lock Selection (b031).
Reverse two of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 or adjust the motor phases to the correct order.
Check the "22: F/R (3-wire forward/ reverse)" logic of the applicable multifunction input terminal.
Change the setting of RUN Direction
Selection (F004).
The acceleration time is too short.
Extend the Acceleration Time (F002/F202/
A092/A292).
Change the operation pattern to one in which acceleration is temporarily stopped using the acceleration hold function.
The load is excessive.
Reduce the load.
Perform tuning using the torque boost function.
Set Control Method (A044/A244) to "02:
Free V/f setting" and perform tuning.
Enable Overload Limit Selection (b021/ b024).
Overload Limit Selection
(b021/b024) is set to "00:
Disabled".
[An overcurrent trip occurs during operation, even when the overload limit is enabled]
Overload Limit Level
(b022/b025) is high.
Lower the Overload Limit Level (b022/ b025).
Overload Limit Parameter
(b023/b026) is short.
The STOP/RESET key is disabled by setting.
Overvoltage Suppression
Function During Deceleration
(b130) is enabled.
Controlled Deceleration on Power Loss (b050) is enabled.
Extend the Overload Limit Parameter
(b023/b026).
Set STOP Key Selection (b087) correctly.
Set Overvoltage Suppression Function
During Deceleration (b130) to "00:
Disabled" or adjust the operation level of each function.
Set Controlled Deceleration on Power
Loss (b050) to "00: Disabled" or adjust the operating level of each function.
Reference
Page
−
5-84
2-6
5-29
5-56
5-23
5-24
5-66
5-62
−
5-49
5-46
5-114
5-114
5-114
5-84
5-117
5-106
7-13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-2 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
The motor/machine is loud.
An Overload Trip
(E05) occurs.
An Overvoltage
Trip (E07) occurs during deceleration.
A Thermistor Error
Trip (E35) occurs.
Carrier frequency is low.
Increase the Carrier Frequency (b083).
However, this may increase noise or leakage current from the Inverter. Also note that the output current must be derated depending on the model. For details, refer to Appendix-1 Derating Table.
The motor rotation frequency and machine's natural frequency are resonating.
Change the set frequency. If resonance occurs during acceleration/deceleration, avoid the resonance frequency using
Frequency Jump Function (A063 to A068).
The motor is over-excited. Adjust Base Frequency (A003/A203) and
Motor Incoming Voltage Selection (A082/
A282) to the motor ratings. If the situation does not improve, slightly lower the setting of Output Voltage Gain (A045/A245). Or, set Control Method (A044/A244) to "02:
Free V/f setting" and perform tuning.
The electronic thermal level is not appropriate.
Set Electronic Thermal Level (b012/b013) correctly.
The deceleration time is short. Extend the Deceleration Time Setting (F003/
F203/A093/A293).
Overvoltage Suppression
Function During
Deceleration (b130) is set to "00: Disabled".
Enable Overvoltage Suppression Function
During Deceleration (b130). (Note that when this function is enabled, the actual deceleration time may become longer than the set value). For details, refer to
"Overvoltage Suppression Function During
Deceleration" on page 5-117).
[An Overvoltage Trip (E07) occurs during deceleration even though
Overvoltage Suppression Function During Deceleration (b130) is enabled]
The value of Overvoltage
Suppression Proportional
Gain Setting During
Deceleration (b133) or
Overvoltage Suppression
Integral Time Setting (b134) is not appropriate.
Change each set value. For details, refer to
"Overvoltage Suppression Function During
Deceleration" on page 5-117.
The value of Overvoltage
Suppression Level During
Deceleration (b131) is high.
Lower the value of Overvoltage
Suppression Level During Deceleration
(b131). (Note, however, that deceleration may be disabled if this value is set too low.
As a guide, the set value should be at least
"Incoming voltage × √ 2 × 110%").
Cancel the TH allocation.
"19: TH (PTC thermistor thermal protection)" is allocated to the multifunction input terminal S5/
TH and 24 VDC is input.
Reference
Page
5-51
A-1
5-61
5-26
5-46
5-72
5-110
5-24
5-66
5-117
5-117
5-117
5-120
7
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-14
7
7-2 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
Reference
Page
The output frequency becomes unstable.
Sufficient torque does not generate.
The Inverter trips or executes a free-run or deceleration stop when the
Digital Operator or
LCD Operator cable is disconnected.
Various parameters are not appropriate.
The load fluctuates significantly.
The power supply voltage fluctuates.
Various parameters are not appropriate.
[Acceleration/constant speed operation]
Shift the output frequency slightly away from the power supply frequency.
Change the value of Stabilization
Parameter (H006/H206).
Increase the motor/Inverter capacity.
Suppress the fluctuation.
Various parameters are not appropriate.
[Deceleration]
The operation to be taken upon Digital Operator disconnection is not selected properly.
5-15
5-81
−
−
Increase the value of Manual Torque Boost
Voltage (A042/A242) or Manual Torque
Boost Frequency (A043/A243).
Set Torque Boost Selection (A041/A241) to "01: Automatic torque boost".
5-49
5-49
Decrease the Carrier Frequency (b083).
Set Control Method (A044/A244) to "03:
Sensorless vector control (SLV)".
Extend the Deceleration Time (F003/F203/
A093/A293).
5-51
5-144
5-24
5-66
Turn OFF the AVR Selection (A081/A281).
5-27
Use a Braking Resistor or Regenerative
Braking Unit.
−
Set Selection of Operation on Digital
Operator Disconnection (b165) to "02:
Ignore".
5-86
7-15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
7-2 Troubleshooting
Condition Possible cause Remedial actions
Operation/setting cannot be performed via
Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU).
The earth leakage breaker trips when the Inverter is operated.
Changes to communication parameters are not reflected.
The setting of RUN
Command Selection
(A002/A202) is not correct.
The setting of Frequency
Reference Selection
(A001/A201) is not correct.
The communication speed is not set correctly.
The station number is not set correctly or duplicated.
The communication parity is not set correctly.
The communication stop bit is not set correctly.
The wiring is incorrect.
The Inverter leak current is large.
If the setting of Communication Speed
Selection (C071), Communication Parity
Selection (C074) or Communication Stop
Bit Selection (C075) was changed, reconnect the power or perform a reset (by turning the RS terminal ON and then OFF).
Set RUN Command Selection (A002/
A202) to "03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)".
Set Frequency Reference Selection (A001/
A201) to "03: Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)".
Set the correct communication speed in
Communication Speed Selection (C071).
Set the correct station number in
Communication Station No. Selection
(C072).
Set the correct communication parity in
Communication Parity Selection (C074).
Set the correct stop bit in Communication
Stop Bit Selection (C075).
Correctly wire the RS+ and RS − terminals on the control circuit terminal block.
Decrease the Carrier Frequency (b083).
Increase the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker. Or, replace the earth leakage breaker with one of higher sensitivity current.
Set DC Injection Braking Power (A054).
DC injection braking does not work.
An Undervoltage
Trip (E09) occurs.
The DC injection braking power is not set.
The DC injection braking time is not set.
The voltage drops due to insufficient power supply capacity.
Irradiated noise from the
Inverter.
Noise enters in the
TV or radio located near the Inverter.
An optional board error (E60 to E68) occurred.
The optional board detected and error and notified the Inverter.
Inverter failure: The optional board connector is not operating properly.
An optional board error (E69) occurred.
Set DC Injection Braking Time (A055).
Increase the power supply capacity.
Extend as much as possible the wiring distance from the TV or radio to the
Inverter.
Refer to the manual for the optional board.
Communications became impossible after detecting the option. The optional board is partly disconnected.
If the problem cannot be fixed in the optional board, the Inverter may have failed. The mating of the option connector may be bad. Check of dirty contacts and other possible causes. If the problem cannot be solved, replace the Inverter.
Check for bad option connector mating, dirty terminal contacts, etc. Check to see if the terminal block cover on the Inverter and the cover on the optional board are mated properly and the screws are properly tightened.
Reference
Page
6-3
5-22
5-15
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-2
5-51
2-17
5-135
5-135
−
−
−
−
−
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 7-16
7
Inspection and Maintenance
Describes the daily inspection and periodic inspection.
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance................................................ 8-1
Daily Inspection............................................................................... 8-2
Cleaning.......................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Inspection.......................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection ........................................ 8-3
Megger Test.................................................................................... 8-6
Withstand Voltage Test................................................................... 8-6
Checking the Inverter and Converter .............................................. 8-6
Measurement Methods of I/O Voltage, Current, and Electric Power8-8
8
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
WARNING
Do not change wiring, slide switches, or optional devices while power is being supplied.
Always turn off the power supply to the Inverter before changing wiring, changing the slide switches, or replacing options.
Do not remove the terminal block cover during the power supply and 10 minutes after the power shutoff.
Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock.
Do not touch the Inverter fins, braking resistors and the motor, which become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shutoff. Doing so may result in a burn.
Caution
Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product.
Doing so may result in an injury.
8
Precautions for Safe Use
Maintenance and Inspection
Be sure to confirm safety before conducting maintenance, inspection or parts replacement.
The life of the capacitor depends on ambient temperatures. Refer to the diagram of product life specified in the manual. When the capacitor stops operating at the end of the product's life, the
Inverter must be replaced.
Precautions for Correct Use
Operation Stop Command
Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP key on the Digital Operator is valid only when function settings are performed.
When checking a signal during the power supply and the voltage is erroneously applied to the control input terminals, the motor may start abruptly. Be sure to confirm safety before checking a signal.
Maintenance and Parts Replacement
The Inverter consists of many parts, and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use of the designed functions of the Inverter. Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Product Disposal
Comply with the local ordinance and regulations when disposing of the product.
8-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Daily Inspection
Check the following during operation.
The motor operates according to the settings.
There is no error in the installation environment.
There are no errors in the cooling system.
Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds.
There are no abnormal overheat or discoloration.
Check that there are no abnormal odors.
Check the input voltage of the Inverter during operation using a tester or other equipment.
There is no frequent power supply voltage fluctuation.
The voltage level between the wires is balanced.
Cleaning
Always keep the Inverter clean for operation.
Lightly remove any dirt with a soft cloth moistened with a neutral detergent.
Do not use such solutions as acetone, benzene, toluene, or alcohol for cleaning. Doing so may cause the Inverter surface to dissolve or its coating to come off.
In particular, do not use detergent or alcohol on the display of the Digital Operator.
Periodic Inspection
Check the parts that cannot be checked without stopping operation, as well as those that require periodic inspection.
Contact OMRON Corporation for periodic inspections.
Any abnormality in the cooling system? → Clean the air filter, etc.
Tightening check and secure tightening → Screws, bolts and other tightened parts may become loose due to the effects of vibration, temperature change, etc. Thorough check the applicable locations and tighten them securely.
Check that there is no corrosion or damage to the conductors and/or insulators.
Measurement of insulation resistance
Check and replace the cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, and relay.
8
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 8-2
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
8
Daily Inspection and Periodic Inspection
Inspection part
Inspection item
Inspection point
Inspection period
Periodic Inspection method
Criteria
Measurement device
General Ambient environment
Check ambient temperature, as well as humidity and dust levels.
√
Main circuit
Entire device
Power supply voltage
Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds.
√
Check that the main circuit voltage is normal.
√
General Megger check
(between main circuit terminal and ground terminal)
Check that any parts which may need tightening are secure.
Check that no part has indications of overheating.
√
Refer to
"Installation" on page 2-1.
Visual or acoustic inspection
The ambient temperature shall be − 10 to 50 ° C, non-freezing, and the ambient humidity shall be
90% or below, non-condensing.
No faults
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Recorder
Measure the voltage between the Inverter main circuit terminals R/
L1, S/L2 and T/L3.
Remove the I/O wirings of the
Inverter's main circuit terminal block, remove the control terminal block board, and remove the
Inverter's built-in filter function switching shorting bar, and then use a megger to measure between the shorted part of each terminal R/
L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/
T1, V/T2, W/T3,
P/+2, +1, N/ − or
RB and the ground terminal.
Must be within allowable fluctuation of AC voltage.
5 M Ω min.
Tighten securely.
No faults
Tester, digital multimeter
500 V class DC megger
√
√
Visual inspection No faults
8-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection part
Inspection item
Inspection point
Inspection period
Periodic Inspection method
Criteria
Measurement device
Main circuit
Connection conductor and wire
Terminal block
Inverter unit
Converter unit
(including the resistor)
Check that there is no distortion with the conductor.
Check that there is no tearing in the wire coverings.
Check that there is no damage.
Check the resistance between the terminals.
√
√
√
Control circuit
Protection circuit
Smoothing capacitor
*1
Relay
Operation check
Check that there is no liquid leakage.
Check that the safety valve has not come out and that there are no bulges.
Check that there is no abnormal sound during operation.
Check that there is no rough surface on the contact.
Check the balance of output voltage levels between phases in single Inverter run.
Check that there are no errors in protection and display circuits through sequence protection operation.
√
√
√
√
√
√
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Acoustic inspection
Visual inspection
Measure the voltage between
Inverter main circuit terminals
U/T1, V/T2 and
W/T3.
Short-circuit or open the Inverter protection circuit output under simulated conditions.
No faults
No faults
√ Remove the wirings of the Inverter's main circuit terminal block and measure between terminal R/
L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals P/+2, N/ − , and between terminals U/T1, V/
T2, W/T3 and terminal P/+2, N/ − , in the × 1 Ω range.
Refer to
"Checking the
Inverter and
Converter" on page 8-6.
Inverter unit replacement reference
Start/stop: 10 cycles
*3
Visual inspection No faults
6
No faults
No faults
Phase-to-phase voltage balance
200-V class: 4 V max.
400-V class: 8 V max.
Error is found in the sequence.
Analog tester
Capacity meter
Digital multimeter
Rectifier
Voltmeter
8
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 8-4
8
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Inspection part
Inspection item
Inspection point
Inspection period
Periodic Inspection method
Criteria
Measurement device
Cooling system
Fault display
Cooling fan
Cooling
Fin
Fault display
Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds.
Check that the connection parts are secure.
Check that there is no clogging.
Check that the
LED indicators are lit properly.
Cleaning
√
√
Meter Check that the indicated value is normal.
Motor General Check that there are no abnormal vibrations or sounds.
Check that there are no abnormal odors.
√
√
√
√
√
√
Rotate manually when the power is off.
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
Rotation shall be smooth and free from error.
Reference of the replacement period:
10 years
*2 , *3
No clogging.
Visual inspection Check that the
LED indicators are lit.
Clean with a waste cloth.
Check the indicated values on the panel meters.
Acoustic, feeling, and/or visual inspection
The specified or control values must be satisfied.
No faults
Voltage,
Ammeter, etc.
Insulation resistance
Megger check
(Between the collective motor terminals and ground terminal)
Check that there is no abnormal odor caused by damage or overheating.
√ Disconnect
Inverter main circuit terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3, and shortcircuit the motor wires (3 phases).
Then, use a megger to measure the resistance between the motor wires and ground terminal.
No faults
5 M Ω min.
500 V class DC megger
*1.Smoothing capacitor life depends on ambient temperature.
Refer to " Appendix-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve" for the replacement reference.
*2.The life of the cooling fan varies depending on the environmental conditions, such as ambient temperature and/or dust. Check the operation through daily inspections.
*3.The replacement reference (year/cycles) and diagram of smoothing capacitor life are based on the expected design life, which is not guaranteed.
8-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Megger Test
For a megger test of the external circuit, be sure to disconnect all the terminals of the Inverter and not to apply the test voltage to the Inverter. Use a 500 V DC megger for a megger test.
Conduct the megger test for the Inverter's main circuit after short-circuiting terminals R/L1, S/
L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, RB, +1, P/+2 and N/ − using wires, as shown below.
Conduct an Inverter megger test only to the main circuit, not to the control circuit.
Use a high resistance tester for a power distribution test of the control circuit. Do not use a megger or buzzer.
R/L1 S/L2
RB +1 P/+2 N/ −
T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Ground terminal
500 VDC megger
Do not connect the power supply wires.
Power supply
IM
Do not connect to the motor.
Motor
Withstand Voltage Test
Do not conduct a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter.
Doing the test may cause damage or deteriorate to the parts inside the Inverter.
Checking the Inverter and Converter
The quality of the Inverter and converter can be checked using a tester.
Preparation
1. Disconnect the externally connected power supply wires (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), the motor connection wires (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3), and the generation control resistance
(P/+2, RB).
2. Prepare a tester. (Usable range is 1 Ω measurement resistance.)
Checking method
The quality can be judged by measuring the conduction state of Inverter main circuit terminal blocks R/L1, S/L2, T/L3U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, RB, P/+2, and N/ − while alternating the tester polarity.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 8-6
8
8
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Before checking, measure the voltage between P/+2 and N/ − at DC voltage range in advance, and confirm that the smoothing capacitor is sufficiently discharged.
A nearly infinite value is shown in a no-conduction state. (The value shows the range from a few to a few dozen Ω in a conduction state.)
However, the value may not be infinite if the momentous conduction occurs through the influence of the smoothing capacitor.
The Inverter or converter is in good shape if the values from various parameters are nearly equal, though they are not consistent depending on the types of elements or testers.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
TR1
TR2
TR3
TR4
TR5
TR6
Tester polarity
+
(red)
−
(black)
Measurement value
R/L1 +1 No conduction
+1 R/L1 Conduction
S/L2 +1 No conduction
+1 S/L2 Conduction
T/L3 +1 No conduction
+1 T/L3 Conduction
R/L1 N/ − Conduction
N/ − R/L1 No conduction
S/L2 N/ − Conduction
N/ − S/L2 No conduction
T/L3 N/ − Conduction
N/ − T/L3 No conduction
U/T1 P/+2 No conduction
P/+2 U/T1 Conduction
V/T2 P/+2 No conduction
P/+2 V/T2 Conduction
W/T3 P/+2 No conduction
P/+2 W/T3 Conduction
U/T1 N/ − Conduction
N/ − U/T1 No conduction
V/T2 N/ − Conduction
N/ − V/T2 No conduction
W/T3 N/ − Conduction
N/ − W/T3 No conduction
RB P/+2 No conduction
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Converter unit
+1 P/+2
Regenerative braking unit
RB
Inverter unit
TR1 TR2
D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
C
N/
−
TR7
TR4 TR5
TR7
P/+2 RB Conduction
RB N/ − No conduction
N/ − RB No conduction
TR3
TR6
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
8-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Measurement Methods of I/O Voltage, Current, and Electric Power
Below is a general measurement device for input/output voltages, current, and electric power.
R
I
R
W
I1
R U I
U
W
O1
U
E
R
E
U
Power supply
S
I
S W
I2
S V I
V
V
Motor
E
S
E
V
T
I
T
W
I3
T W I
W
W
O2
W
E
T
E
W
Measurement item
Measurement point Measurement device Note
Power supply voltage
E
IN
Power supply current
I
IN
Between R/L1 and S/
L2 (E
R
)
Between S/L2 and T/
L3 (E
S
)
Between T/L3 and R/
L1(E
T
)
Current of R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
(I
R
),(I
S
),(I
T
)
Moving iron voltmeter or commutating voltmeter
Moving iron ammeter
All effective values
All effective values
Input electric power
W
IN
Power factor of power supply
Pf
IN
Between R/L1 and S/
L2 (W
I1
)
Between S/L2 and T/
L3 (W
I2
)
Between T/L3 and R/
L1(W
I3
)
Electrodynamic wattmeter
All effective values
Calculated from the measured values of power supply voltage
E
IN
, power supply current I
IN
, and input electric power W
IN
.
Pf
IN
=
W
3 · E
IN
IN
· I
IN
×
100 (%)
Measurement value reference
200 V class: 200 to 240 V,
50/60Hz
400 V class: 380 to 480 V,
50/60Hz
When the input current is not balanced
I
IN
= (I
R
+ I
S
+ I
T
)/3
Three-wattmeter method
(W
I1
) + (W
I2
) + (W
I3
)
−
Output voltage
E
OUT
Output current
I
OUT
Output power
W
OUT
Between U/T1 and V/
T2 (E
U
)
Between V/T2 and W/
T3 (E
V
)
Between W/T3 and U/
T1 (E
W
)
Current of U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
(I
U
),(I
V
),(I
W
)
Between U/T1 and V/
T2 (W
O1
)
Between V/T2 and W/
T3 (W
O2
)
Refer to the figure on the next page,
or commutating voltmeter
Fundam ental wave
Effective value
Moving iron ammeter
Electrodynamic wattmeter
All effective values
All effective values
−
−
Two-wattmeter method
(or three-wattmeter method)
(W
O1
) + (W
O2
)
8
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 8-8
8
8-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Measurement item
Measurement point Measurement device Note
Output power factor
Pf
OUT
Calculated from the measured values of output voltage E
OUT
, output current I
OUT
, and output electric power W
OUT
W
OUT
Pf
OUT
=
3 · E
OUT
· I
OUT
×
100 (%)
Measurement value reference
−
Note 1. For output voltage, use a measurement device that displays effective values of fundamental wave.
For current and electric power, use a measurement device that displays all effective values.
Note 2. The Inverter output waveform, under PWM control, may have a margin of error, especially at a low frequency. Testers (general-purpose type) are not applicable in many cases because of noise.
R
Measurement method of output voltage
U
Motor
S V
T W
Diode
600 V, 0.1 A max.
(200V class) 1,000 V, 01.
A max. (400V class)
Effective value of fundamental wave
V
AC
= 1.1 × V
DC
V
AC
2 W 220 k
Ω
+
V
DC
−
Moving-coil type
300 V (200V class)
600 V (400V class)
8-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Specifications
Describes the standard specification list classified by input power supply, as well as external dimensions for different capacities.
9-1 Standard Specification List.................................................. 9-1
9-2 External Dimensions ............................................................ 9-6
9
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
9
9-1 Standard Specification List
9-1 Standard Specification List
Data of standard motors are shown. Take note that the actual torque characteristics vary depending on the motor used.
Three-phase 200 V Class
CT: Heavy load, VT: Light load
Function name 3-phase 200 V
Model name
(3G3MX2-)
A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150
Applicable motor capacity kW CT 0.1
VT 0.2
HP CT 1/8
0.2
0.4
1/4
0.4
0.75
1/2
0.75
1.1
1
1.5
2.2
2
2.2
3.0
3
3.7
5.5
5
5.5
7.5
7 1/2
7.5
11
10
11
15
15
15
18.5
20
VT 1/4
Rated output capacity
[kVA]
200 V CT 0.2
VT 0.4
240 V CT 0.3
1/2
0.5
0.6
0.6
1
1.0
1.2
1.2
1 1/2
1.7
2.0
2.0
3
2.7
3.3
3.3
4
3.8
4.1
4.5
7 1/2
6.0
10
8.6
15
11.4
20
16.2
25
20.7
6.7
10.3
13.8
19.3
23.9
7.2
10.3
13.7
19.5
24.9
VT 0.4
0.7
1.4
2.4
3.9
4.9
8.1
12.4
16.6
23.2
28.6
Rated input voltage 3-phase 200 V − 15% to 240 V + 10%, 50/60 ± 5%
Rated output current [A]
CT 1.0
VT 1.2
1.6
1.9
3.3
3.9
6.0
7.2
9.0
10.8
12.7
13.9
20.5
23.0
30.8
37.0
39.6
48.0
57.1
68.0
62.6
72.0
3-phase 200 to 240 V (The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage).
Rated output voltage
Rated output current [A]
CT
VT
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.9
3.0
3.5
5.0
6.0
8.0
9.6
11.0
12.0
17.5
19.6
25.0
30.0
33.0
40.0
47.0
56.0
60.0
69.0
Short-time deceleration braking torque (%)
(Discharge Resistor not connected)
Regenerative braking
Braking
Resistor circuit *1
Min. connectable resistance
[ Ω ]
Weight [kg]
Dimensions (width
× height) [mm]
Dimensions (depth)
[mm]
50
100
1.0
109
50
100
1.0
68 ×
50
100
1.1
128
50
50
1.2
122.5 145.5
50
50
1.6
108 ×
170.5
20
35
1.8
128
20 20 20 10
Built-in Braking Resistor circuit (separate Discharge Resistor)
35
2.0
140 ×
128
170.5
20
3.3
140 ×
155
17
3.4
260
17
5.1
180 ×
296
175
10
10
7.4
220 ×
350
*1. The BRD usage is 10%.
9-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
9-1 Standard Specification List
Three-phase 400 V Class
CT: Heavy load, VT: Light load
Function name
Model name
(3G3MX2-)
Applicable motor capacity kW CT
VT
0.4
0.75
HP CT 1/2
VT 1
0.75
1.5
1
2
1.5
2.2
2
3
2.2
3.0
3
4
3-phase 400 V
A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4030
3.0
4.0
4
5
A4040
4.0
5.5
5
7 1/2
A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150
5.5
7.5
7 1/2
10
7.5
11
10
15
11
15
15
20
15
18.5
20
25
Rated output capacity
[kVA]
380 V CT 1.1
VT 1.3
480 V CT 1.4
2.2
2.6
2.8
3.1
3.5
3.9
3.6
4.5
4.5
4.7
5.7
5.9
6.0
7.3
7.6
9.7
11.5
11.8
15.1
15.7
20.4
20.4
25.0
12.3
14.9
19.9
25.7
VT 1.7
3.4
4.4
5.7
7.3
9.2
14.5
19.1
25.7
31.5
Rated input voltage 3-phase 380 V − 15% to 480 V + 10%, 50/60 ± 5%
Rated output current [A]
CT 1.8
VT 2.1
3.6
4.3
5.2
5.9
6.5
8.1
7.7
9.4
11.0
13.3
16.9
18.8
29.4
35.9
20.0
24.0
38.0
44.0
3-phase 380 to 480 V (The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage).
Rated output voltage
Rated output current [A]
CT
VT
1.8
2.1
3.4
4.1
4.8
5.4
5.5
6.9
7.2
8.8
9.2
11.1
14.8
17.5
18.0
23.0
24.0
31.0
31.0
38.0
Short-time deceleration braking torque (%)
(Discharge Resistor not connected)
Regenerative braking
Braking
Resistor circuit
*1
Min. connectable resistance
[ Ω ]
Weight [kg]
Dimensions (width
× height) [mm]
Dimensions (depth)
[mm]
50
180
1.5
143.5
50 20 20 20
Built-in Braking Resistor circuit (separate Discharge Resistor)
180
1.6
50
180
1.8
108 × 128
170.5
100
1.9
100
1.9
100
2.1
140 ×
128
170.5
20
70
3.5
140 × 260
155
20
70
3.5
10
70
4.7
180 ×
175
10
35
5.2
296
*1. The BRD usage is 10%.
9
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9-2
9
9-1 Standard Specification List
Single-phase 200 V class
CT: Heavy load, VT: Light load
Function name
Model name
(3G3MX2-)
Applicable motor capacity kW CT
VT
HP CT
VT
AB001
0.1
0.2
1/8
1/4
AB002
0.2
0.4
1/4
1/2
1-phase 200 V
AB004
0.4
0.55
1/2
3/4
AB007
0.75
1.1
1
1 1/2
AB015
1.5
2.2
2
3
AB022
Rated output capacity
[kVA]
200 V CT
VT
240 V CT
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.7
2.0
2.0
2.7
3.3
3.3
VT 0.4
0.7
1.4
2.4
3.9
Rated input voltage 1-phase 200 V − 15% to 240 V + 10%, 50/60 Hz ± 5%
Rated output current [A]
CT
VT
1.3
2.0
3.0
3.6
6.3
7.3
11.5
13.8
16.8
20.2
3.8
4.1
4.5
4.9
22.0
24.0
3-phase 200 to 240 V (The output cannot exceed the incoming voltage).
Rated output voltage
Rated output current [A]
CT
VT
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.9
3.0
3.5
5.0
6.0
8.0
9.6
11.0
12.0
Short-time deceleration braking torque (%)
(Discharge Resistor not connected)
Regenerative braking
Braking
Resistor circuit
*1
Min. connectable resistance
[ Ω ]
Weight [kg]
Dimensions (width
× height) [mm]
Dimensions (depth)
[mm]
50
100
1.0
109
68
50
100
1.0
× 128
50 50 50
Built-in Braking Resistor circuit (separate Discharge Resistor)
100
1.1
122.5
50
1.6
50
1.8
108 × 128
170.5
20
35
1.8
2.2
3.0
3
4
*1. The BRD usage is 10%.
9-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
9-1 Standard Specification List
Common Specifications
Function name
Enclosure ratings
*1
Control method
Output frequency range
*2
Frequency precision
*3
Frequency setting resolution
Voltage/Frequency characteristics
Overload current rating
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Acceleration/
Deceleration time
Carrier frequency adjustment range
Starting torque
External DC injection braking
Open type (IP20)
Phase-to-phase sinusoidal modulation PWM
0.10 to 400 Hz (or 1,000 Hz in the high-frequency mode; restrictions apply)
Digital command: ±
Specifications
0.01% of the max. frequency, Analog command: the max. frequency (25 ° C ± 10 ° C)
± 0.2% of
Digital setting: 0.01 Hz, Analog setting: One-thousandth of the maximum frequency
V/f characteristics (constant/reduced torque)
Sensorless vector control, V/f control with speed feedback
Heavy load rating (CT): 150%/60 s
Light load rating (VT): 120%/60 s
200% of the value of heavy load rating (CT)
0.01 to 3600 s (linear/curve selection), acceleration/deceleration 2 setting available
2 to 15 kHz (with derating)
Protective functions
Frequency settings
200%/0.5 Hz (sensorless vector control)
Starts at a frequency lower than that in deceleration via the STOP command, at a value set lower than that during operation, or via an external input. (Level and time settable).
Overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, electronic thermal, temperature error, ground fault overcurrent at power-on status, rush current prevention circuit, overload limit, incoming overvoltage, external trip, memory error, CPU error,
USP error, communication error, overvoltage suppression during deceleration, protection upon momentary power outage, emergency cutoff, etc.
Digital Operator
External analog input signal: Variable resistance/0 to 10 VDC/4 to 20 mA,
Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU)
RUN/STOP command
Digital Operator
External digital input signal (3-wire input supported), Modbus communication
(Modbus-RTU)
Multi-function input 7 points (Selectable from 59 functions)
Analog input 2 points (Voltage FV terminal: 10 bits/0 to 10 V, Current FI terminal: 10 bits/4 to 20 mA)
Pulse input
Multi-function output
Relay output
1 point (RP terminal: 32 kHz max., 5 to 24 VDC)
2 points (P1/EDM, P2; selectable from 43 functions)
1 point (1c contact: MC, MA, MB; selectable from 43 functions)
1 point (AM terminal: Voltage 10 bits/0 to 10 V) (Frequency, current selectable) Analog output
(Frequency monitor)
Pulse output
RS-422
RS-485
USB
1 point (MP terminal: 32 kHz max., 0 to 10 V)
RJ45 connector (for Digital Operator)
Control circuit terminal block, Modbus communication (Modbus-RTU)
USB1.1, mini-B connector
9
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9-4
9
9-1 Standard Specification List
Function name Specifications
AVR function, V/f characteristics switching, upper/lower limit, 16-step speeds, starting frequency adjustment, jogging operation, carrier frequency adjustment, PID control, frequency jump, analog gain/bias adjustment, S shape acceleration/deceleration, electronic thermal characteristics, level adjustment, restart function, torque boost function, fault monitor, soft lock function, frequency conversion display, USP function, motor 2 control function, UP/DWN, Overcurrent suppression, etc.
Ambient temperature
Ambient storage temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Location
Options
−
−
10 to 50
20 °
° C (However, derating is required).
C to 65 ° C (short-time temperature during transport)
20% to 90% RH (with no condensation)
5.9 m/s
2
(0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
At a maximum altitude of 1,000 m; indoors (without corrosive gases or dust)
DC reactor, AC reactor, radio noise filter, input noise filter, output noise filter, regenerative braking unit, Braking Resistor, EMC noise filter, etc.
*1. Protection method complies with JEM 1030.
*2. To operate the motor at over 50/60 Hz, contact the motor manufacturer to find out the maximum allowable speed of revolution.
*3. For the stable control of the motor, the output frequency may exceed the maximum frequency set in
A004 (A204) by 2 Hz max.
Note 1. The applicable motor is a 3-phase standard motor. For using any other type, be sure that the rated current does not exceed that of the Inverter.
Note 2. Output voltage decreases according to the level of the power supply voltage.
Note 3. The braking torque at the time of capacitor feedback is an average deceleration torque at the shortest deceleration (when it stops from 50 Hz). It is not a continuous regeneration torque. Also, the average deceleration torque varies depending on the motor loss. The value is reduced in operation over 50 Hz.
9-5 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
9-2 External Dimensions
68
56
φ
4.5
8.8.8.8.
9-2 External Dimensions
5
Power supply
1-phase
200 V
3-phase
200 V
Model
3G3MX2-AB001
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-A2001
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
68 128
109
122.5
109
122.5
145.5
13.5
27
13.5
27
50
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9-6
9
9-2 External Dimensions
108
96
8.8.8.8.
2-
φ
4.5
5
9
Power supply
1-phase
200 V
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
Model
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A4004
3G3MX2-A4007
3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
108
170.5
128
143.5
170.5
55
28
55
9-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
140
128
8.8.8.8.
2-
φ
4.5
5
9-2 External Dimensions
Power supply
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
Model
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A4040
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
140 128 170.5
55
9
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9-8
9-2 External Dimensions
140
122
2-
φ
6
8.8.8.8.
6
9
Power supply
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
Model
3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
140 260 155 73.3
9-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
180
160
2-
φ
7
8.8.8.8.
7
9-2 External Dimensions
Power supply
3-phase
200 V
3-phase
400 V
Model
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
180 296 175 97
9
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) 9-10
9-2 External Dimensions
220
192
2-
φ
7
8.8.8.8.
7
9
Power supply
3-phase
200 V
Model
3G3MX2-A2150
W [mm] H [mm] D [mm] D1 [mm]
220 350 175 84
9-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix
Describes the derating chart, capacitor life curve, and compliance with EC directives and UL/cUL standards.
Appendix-1 Derating Table..............................................Appendix-1
Appendix-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve................Appendix-7
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output ........................................Appendix-8
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL
Standards.....................................................Appendix-9
EC Directives
Notes on UL/cUL Standards
A
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
A
Appendix-1 Derating Table
Appendix-1 Derating Table
In the following table, derate the output current according to the graph shown below if any model denoted by "Derating required" is used in an environment of 40 ° C or above in ambient temperature or if multiple Inverters are installed side by side (side-by-side installation). (The ambient temperature for side-by-side installation is specified as − 10 to 40 ° C.)
Set a derating output current value as electronic thermal (b012/b212). For electronic thermal level, refer to "Electronic Thermal Function" on page 5-110.
Derating Need Correspondence Table
Rated voltage Model
3-phase 200 VAC
1-phase 200 V AC
3-phase 400 VAC
3G3MX2-A2001
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-AB001
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
3G3MX2-A4004
3G3MX2-A4007
3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
√ : Derating required −: Derating not required
Required/
Not required
√
−
−
−
√
−
−
−
√
√
√
−
−
−
√
√
−
√
√
√
−
−
−
√
−
−
√
The output current need not be derated for models denoted as "Not required" in the above table. Use each model within the specified/rated ranges.
Appendix-1 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-1 Derating Table
100 %
Models Not Requiring Derating
Heavy load rating
40 ° C Side-by-side
50 ° C Normal installation
100 %
80 %
60 %
80 %
60 %
40 %
20 %
40 %
20 %
Light load rating
40 ° C Side-by-side
50 ° C Normal installation
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 kHz
2.0
Models Requiring Derating
3G3MX2-A2002
Heavy load rating (1.6 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
2.0
1.5
1.5
40
°
C Normal installation (Individual installation)
40
°
C Side-by-side installation
50
°
C Normal installation (Individual installation)
Light load rating (1.9 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
1.0
1.0
3.6
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
3G3MX2-AB004
Heavy load rating (3.0 A)
3.6
0 2 4 6 8 10
Carrier frequency
12 14 kHz
Light load rating (3.5 A)
3.0
3.0
A
2.0
2.0
1.0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
1.0
0 2 4 6 8 10
Carrier frequency
12 14 kHz
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-2
Appendix-1 Derating Table
3.6
3G3MX2-A2004
Heavy load rating (3.0 A)
3.0
40
°
C Normal installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
50 ° C Normal installation
2.0
2.0
3.6
3.0
Light load rating (3.5 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
1.0
0
4.4
4.0
2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
1.0
0
3G3MX2-A4007
Heavy load rating (3.4 A)
4.4
4.0
2 4 6 8 10
Carrier frequency
12 14 kHz
Light load rating (4.1 A)
A
3.0
3.0
40
°
C Side-by-side
50
°
C Normal installation
18
17
16
15
14
2.0
2.0
20
19
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
3G3MX2-A2037
Heavy load rating (17.5 A)
20
19
0
18
17
16
15
14
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
Light load rating (19.6 A)
0 2 4 6 8 10
Carrier frequency
12 14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10
Carrier frequency
12 14 kHz
Appendix-3 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-1 Derating Table
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
3G3MX2-A4040
Heavy load rating (9.2 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Light load rating (11.1 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
38
36
34
32
30
42
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
3G3MX2-A2075
Heavy load rating (33.0 A)
14 16 kHz
42
0
40 40
38
36
34
32
30
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
Light load rating (40.0 A)
40 °
C Normal installation
40 °
C Side-by-side
22
20
18
16
14
26
24
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
3G3MX2-A4075
Heavy load rating (18.0 A)
26
24
0
22
20
18
16
14
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
Light load rating (23.0 A)
40 ° C Normal installation
50
°
C Normal installation
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
Appendix-4
A
Appendix-1 Derating Table
A
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
3G3MX2-A2110
Heavy load rating (47.0 A)
40
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
Light load rating (56.0 A)
28
26
24
22
20
32
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
3G3MX2-A4110
Heavy load rating (24.0 A)
14 16kHz
32
0
30 30
40
°
C Normal installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
50
°
C Normal installation
28
26
24
22
20
2 4 6 8 10 12 14kHz
Carrier frequency
Light load rating (31.0 A)
50
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
65
60
55
50
45
75
70
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
3G3MX2-A2150
Heavy load rating (60.0 A)
75
70
0
50
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
65
60
55
50
45
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
Light load rating (69.0 A)
50
°
C Normal installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz
Appendix-5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-1 Derating Table
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
3G3MX2-A4150
Heavy load rating (31.0 A)
40
50
°
C Normal
installation
40
°
C Side-by-side
35
30
25
20
15
10
Light load rating (38.0 A)
50
°
C Normal installation
40 ° C Side-by-side
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Carrier frequency
14 16 kHz 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 kHz
Carrier frequency
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-6
A
A
Appendix-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve
Appendix-2 Smoothing Capacitor Life
Curve
Ambient temperature ( ° C)
50
40
30
20
10
Power supplied 24 hours a day, load factor 80%
Power supplied 24 hours a day, load factor 100%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Capacitor life (year)
Note 1: Ambient temperature refers to the temperature measured at the location approximately 5 cm from the bottom center of the Inverter.
Panel interior temperature is applied if the Inverter is stored in a control panel.
Note 2: The smoothing capacitor, which will deteriorate because of the chemical reaction caused by the temperatures of the parts, should normally be replaced once every 10 years (which is the expected design life, and not guaranteed).
However, if the ambient temperature is high, or the Inverter is used with its rated current exceeded, for example, under overload conditions, its life will be significantly shortened.
Appendix-7 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output
Appendix-3 Life Alarm Output
When the product life becomes close to the end for limited life parts including the on-board smoothing capacitor or cooling fan, but excluding the main circuit smoothing capacitor, an alarm can be output through the self-diagnostic function. Use it as a reference of the parts replacement period.
This alarm is output through the self-diagnosis based on the expected design life (not a guaranteed value). Therefore, it has a margin of error depending on your environment or operation conditions.
For details, refer to "Life Assessment Monitor [d022]" on page 5-9, "Multi-function Output
Terminal Selection" on page 5-32 and "Multi-function Output Terminal Contact Selection" on page 5-34.
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-8
A
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC
Directives and UL/cUL Standards
A
EC Directives
Notes on EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
CE-EMC Installation Guidelines
You are required to satisfy the EMC directive (2004/108/EC) when using a 3G3MX2 inverter in an EU country.
To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard, you need to use a dedicated EMC filter suitable for each model, and follow the guidelines in this section. Following table shows the compliance condition for reference.
Table 1. Condition for the compliance
Model
All 3G3MX2 series
Cat.
C1
Carrier f
2kHz
Motor cable
20m (Shielded)
Table 2. Applicable EMC filter
Input class
3-phase 200V class
1-phase 200V class
Inverter model
3G3MX2-A2001
3G3MX2-A2002
3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-AB001
3G3MX2-AB002
3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
Filter model (Schaffner)
FS24829-8-07
FS24829-16-07
FS24829-25-07
FS24829-50-07
FS24829-70-07
FS24829-75-07
FS24828-8-07
FS24828-27-07
Appendix-9 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
Input class
3-phase 400 V class
Inverter model
3G3MX2-A4004
3G3MX2-A4007
3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
Filter model (Schaffner)
FS24830-6-07
FS24830-12-07
FS24830-15-07
FS24830-29-07
FS24830-48-07
* 3G3MX2-A2110 and A4150 needs to be installed in a metal cabinet and add ferrite core at the input cable to meet category C1. Unless otherwise category C2.
Important notes
1. Input choke or other equipment is required if necessary to comply with EMC directive from the harmonic distortion point of view (IEC 61000-3-2 and 4).
2. If the motor cable length exceeds 20m, use output choke to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable (such as malfunction of the thermal relay, vibration of the motor, etc.).
3. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable frequency inverter, filter, and ground is as small as possible.
Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas
(zinc-plated mounting plates).
4. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large areas.
Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or noise-prone conductors.
5. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.
Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible; i.e., do not strip away the shield (screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary.
With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is communicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the same control cabinet and they are connected at the same ground + PE-potential), connect the shields of the control lines to ground + PE (protective earth) at both ends. With distributed systems (for example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems), we recommend connecting the shield of the control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter. If possible, route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or host computer. The shield conductor of the motor cables always must connected to ground + PE at both ends.
To achieve a large area contact between shield and ground + PE-potential, use a PG screw with a metallic shell, or use a metallic mounting clip.
Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type "CY") with 85% coverage.
The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use of reactors, contactors, terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary, the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible.
Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very often, the terminal boxes, and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections, are painted.
Make sure there is always a good metallic connection between the shielding of the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the terminal box, and the motor housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces.
A
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-10
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
6. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables.
Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference. A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances. If two cables intersect
(one crosses over the other), the interference is smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90 ° .
Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables, intermediate circuit cables, or the wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances.
7. Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink
(interference- threatened device), thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on the interference sink.
You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance of 0.25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter.
8. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
If using external EMC filter, ensure that the ground terminal (PE) of the filter is properly connected to the ground terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter, or solely via cable shield, is not permitted as a protective conductor connection. The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs.
To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm2 cross-sectional area.
Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal parallel to the protective conductor. (The cross section of each single protective conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load).
A
Appendix-11 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
Installation for 3G3MX2 series (example of ABxxx models)
Model A2xxx (3-phase 200 V class) and A4xxx (3-phase 400 V class) are the same concept for the installation.
Power supply
1-ph. 200 V
Metal plate (earth)
The filter is a footprint type, so it is located between the inverter and the metal plate.
Remove the insulation material coating of the earth contact portions so to obtain good grounding condition.
PE
EMC filter
(Foot-print)
8.8.8.8.
L1,N
Earth line is connected to the heatsink of the inverter
(or PE terminal for bigger models)
U,V,W
Cable clamp *
Shielded cable
Metal plate (earth)
Cable clamp *
Motor
3~
*) Both earth portions of the shielded cable must be connected to the earth point by cable clamps.
Input choke or equipment to reduce harmonic current is necessary for CE marking (IEC 61000-3-2 and
IEC61000-3-4) from the harmonic current point of view, even conducted emission and radiated emission passed without the input choke.
A
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-12
A
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
EMC Recommendations
Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and conditions.
1. The power supply to 3G3MX2 inverters must meet these specifications:
Voltage fluctuation 10% or less
Voltage imbalance ± 3% or less
Frequency variation ± 4% or less
Voltage distortion THD = 10% or less
2. Installation measure:
Use a filter designed for 3G3MX2 inverter. Refer to the instruction of the applicable external
EMC filter.
3. Wiring:
Shielded wire (screened cable) is required for motor wiring, and the length must be 20 meter or less.
If the motor cable length exceeds the value shown above, use output choke to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage current from the motor cable.
The carrier frequency setting must be 2 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements.
Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal/process circuit wiring.
4. Environmental conditions-when using a filter, follow these guidelines:
Ambient temperature: − 10 to 50 ° C (Derating is required when the ambient temperature exceeds 40 ° C)
Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration: 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G) 10-55Hz
Location: 1000 meters or less altitude, indoors (no corrosive gas or dust)
Note on Low-voltage Directive
Ensure correct installation and wiring by following the instructions provided in Chapter 2
"Design" of this User's Manual.
Appendix-13 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
Notes on UL/cUL Standards
UL Cautions
The warnings and instructions in this section summarizes the procedures necessary to ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories guidelines.
Use 60/75 ° C Cu wire only.
(For models: 3G3MX2-A2001, -A2002, -A2004, -A2007, -AB015, -AB022, -A4004, -A4007,
-A4015, -A4022 and -A4030)
Use 75 ° C Cu wire only.
(For models: 3G3MX2-AB001, -AB002, -AB004, -AB007, -A2015, -A2022, -A2037, -A2055,
-A2075, -A2110, -A2150, -A4040, -A4055, -A4075, -A4110 and -A4150)
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 rms Symmetrical
Amperes, 240 or 480 Volts Maximum.
When Protected by CC, G, J, or R Class Fuses, or when Protected By A Circuit Breaker Having
An Interrupting Rating Not Less Than 100,000 rms Symmetrical Amperes, 240 or 480 Volts
Maximum.
Install device in pollution degree 2 environment.
Maximum surrounding air temperature rating of 50 ° C.
Solid State motor overload protection reacts with max. 150% of FLA.
Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and any additional local codes.
Fuse Size
The Inverter shall be connected with a UL Listed Cartridge Nonrenewable fuse, rated 600Vac with the current ratings as shown in the table below.
Model No.
3G3MX2-AB001, 3G3MX2-AB002, 3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015
3G3MX2-AB022
3G3MX2-A2001, 3G3MX2-A2002, 3G3MX2-A2004
3G3MX2-A2007, 3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037, 3G3MX2-A2055
3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-A4004, 3G3MX2-A4007, 3G3MX2-A4015, 3G3MX2-A4022
3G3MX2-A4030, 3G3MX2-A4040, 3G3MX2-A4055
3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110
3G3MX2-A4150
Type
Class J
Rating
10 A, AIC 200 kA
15A, AIC 200 kA
20A, AIC 200 kA
30A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
15A, AIC 200 kA
20A, AIC 200 kA
30A, AIC 200 kA
40A, AIC 200 kA
60A, AIC 200 kA
80A, AIC 200 kA
10 A, AIC 200 kA
15A, AIC 200 kA
20A, AIC 200 kA
30A, AIC 200 kA
40A, AIC 200 kA
A
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ ) Appendix-14
A
Appendix-4 Notes on Compliance with EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards
Terminal Symbols and Screw Size
Model No.
3G3MX2-AB001, 3G3MX2-AB002, 3G3MX2-AB004
3G3MX2-AB007
3G3MX2-AB015, 3G3MX2-AB022
3G3MX2-A2001, 3G3MX2-A2002, 3G3MX2-A2004,
3G3MX2-A2007
3G3MX2-A2015
3G3MX2-A2022
3G3MX2-A2037
3G3MX2-A2055, 3G3MX2-A2075
3G3MX2-A2110
3G3MX2-A2150
3G3MX2-A4004, 3G3MX2-A4007, 3G3MX2-A4015
3G3MX2-A4022, 3G3MX2-A4030,
3G3MX2-A4040
3G3MX2-A4055, 3G3MX2-A4075
3G3MX2-A4110, 3G3MX2-A4150
M3.5
M6
M8
M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M4
M5
M6
Screw
Size
M3.5
M4
M4
Required
Torque(N • m)
1.0
1.4
1.4
Wire Range
AWG16 (1.3mm
2
)
AWG12 (3.3mm
2
)
AWG10 (5.3mm
2
)
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.9 to 5.1
5.9 to 8.8
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.9 to 5.1
AWG16 (1.3mm
2
)
AWG14 (2.1mm
2
)
AWG12 (3.3mm
2
)
AWG10 (5.3mm
2
)
AWG6 (13mm
2
)
AWG4 (21mm
2
)
AWG2 (34mm
2
)
AWG16 (1.3mm
2
)
AWG14 (2.1mm
2
)
AWG12 (3.3mm
2
)
AWG10 (5.3mm
2
)
AWG6 (13mm
2
)
Appendix-15 SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
INDEX
SYSDRIVE MX2 Series USER'S MANUAL (3G3MX2-A @@@@ )
I
I
INDEX
Numerics
0 Hz ..................................................................... 5-125
2CH ....................................................................... 5-66
2-step acceleration/deceleration function .... 5-66
3-wire input function .......................................... 5-56
A
Acceleration/Deceleration pattern ................. 5-68
Acceleration/Deceleration time ...................... 5-24
ADD ....................................................................... 5-71
AHD ....................................................................... 5-39
AL ........................................................................ 5-119
Alarm signal ...................................................... 5-119
AM ................................................................. 2-8 , 5-44
Analog input ........................................................ 5-37
Analog input adjustment .................................. 5-40
Analog input filter ............................................... 5-38
Analog command held function ..................... 5-39
Automatic carrier frequency reduction function ................................................................. 5-52
Automatic energy-saving operation function ................................................................. 5-79
Automatic torque boost .................................... 5-50
AVR function ....................................................... 5-27
B
Base frequency .................................................. 5-26
Basic display ....................................................... 5-90
BER ..................................................................... 5-143
Binary operation ................................................. 5-64
Bit operation ........................................................ 5-65
BOK ..................................................................... 5-143
Brake control function ..................................... 5-142
BRK ..................................................................... 5-143
Ǫ
Capacitor life warning ..................................... 5-126
Carrier frequency ............................................... 5-51
ǃ
CF1 to CF4 .......................................................... 5-63
Çø
Commercial Switch ........................................... 5-79
Communication disconnection detection signal .................................................................. 5-128
Constant torque characteristics ........ 5-46 , 5-111
Control circuit terminals ..................................... 2-7
Control method ................................................... 5-46
INDEX-2
Controlled deceleration on power loss ....... 5-106
Cooling fan life signal ..................................... 5-127
Cooling fan operation ..................................... 5-127
Cooling fin overheat warning level .............. 5-129
CP1/CP2/CP3 .................................................. 5-164
CS .......................................................................... 5-79
Current position monitor .................................... 5-9
D
Data comparison display ................................. 5-89
DB ........................................................................ 5-135
DC voltage monitor ........................................... 5-12
Digital operator ............................................. 3-1 , 3-7
Disconnection detection FVdc/FIdc ............ 5-132
DISP ...................................................................... 5-91
Display fixed ........................................................ 5-91
Display selection ................................................ 5-88
DWN ..................................................................... 5-71
E
EB ............................................................................ 2-9
EDM ............................................................ 2-9 , 5-171
EDM function selector switch ............... 2-5 , 5-170
Electronic thermal function ............................ 5-110
Electronic thermal load rate monitor ............. 5-12
Encoder connection ........................................ 5-158
End frequency .................................................... 5-40
End ratio ............................................................... 5-40
Error code .............................................................. 7-2
EXT ..................................................................... 5-120
External DC injection braking .......... 5-135 , 5-136
External frequency start/end ........................... 5-40
External trip ....................................................... 5-120
F
F/R ......................................................................... 5-56
FA1 to FA5 ........................................................ 5-122
Fatal fault signal ............................................... 5-131
Fault Counter ...................................................... 5-11
Fault monitor .......................................... 5-11 , 5-176
FBV ....................................................................... 5-78
Feedback selection ........................................... 5-76
FI .................................................................... 2-7 , 5-37
FIdc ..................................................................... 5-132
Fin temperature monitor .................................... 5-8
Forced operator function ................................. 5-85
Forced terminal block function ....................... 5-85
FR ........................................................................ 5-128
Free setting ....................................................... 5-112
Free V/f setting ................................................... 5-47
Free-run stop function .................................... 5-103
FREF .................................................................. 5-133
Frequency addition function ............................ 5-71
Frequency arrival signal ................................. 5-122
Frequency command source ........................ 5-133
Frequency conversion coefficient .................... 5-4
Frequency jump function ................................. 5-61
Frequency limit ................................................... 5-60
Frequency matching restart ............................ 5-94
Frequency operation function ......................... 5-70
Frequency pull-in restart .................................. 5-94
Frequency reference selection ....................... 5-15
FRS ..................................................................... 5-103
FS ............................................................................ 2-7
F-TM ..................................................................... 5-85
FV .................................................................. 2-7 , 5-37
FVdc .................................................................... 5-132
FW ......................................................................... 5-22
FWR .................................................................... 5-130
G
GS1 ......................................................................... 2-8
GS2 ......................................................................... 2-8
H
Heavy load/light load selection ...................... 5-13
High-frequency mode ..................................... 5-179
I
Initial screen automatic switching function .. 5-87
Initial screen selection ...................................... 5-86
Initialization setting .......................................... 5-174
Input power monitor ............................................ 5-7
Input terminal response time .......................... 5-32
Integrated power monitor .................................. 5-7
Internal DC injection braking ........................ 5-138
Inverter mode monitor ...................................... 5-10
Inverter mode selection .................................. 5-178
IRDY ................................................................... 5-130
J
JG .......................................................................... 5-59
Jogging operation .............................................. 5-59
K
KHC ......................................................................... 5-7
L
LAC ....................................................................... 5-24
LAD cancel .......................................................... 5-24
Life assessment monitor .................................... 5-9
INDEX
LOC ..................................................................... 5-129
LOG1 to LOG3 ................................................. 5-125
Low current signal ........................................... 5-129
M
Main circuit terminal ............................................ 2-7
Main panel display selection ........................... 5-87
Manual torque boost ......................................... 5-49
Maximum frequency ......................................... 5-28
MJA ..................................................................... 5-131
Modbus-RTU terminal resistor selector switch .............................................................. 2-5 , 6-2
Momentary power interruption/undervoltage 5-96
Monitor 2 control ................................................ 5-54
Monitor 2 selection .......................................... 5-134
Motor parameter selection ............................ 5-145
MP ................................................................. 2-9 , 5-42
Multi-function input monitor ............................... 5-3
Multi-function input operation selection ....... 5-31
Multi-function output monitor ............................ 5-3
Multi-function output terminal contact selection ............................................................... 5-34
Multi-function output terminal selection ....... 5-32
Multi-function relay output terminal ............... 5-35
Multi-step position switching function ......... 5-164
Multi-step speed operation function .............. 5-63
N
NDc ..................................................................... 5-128
O
OD ......................................................................... 5-78
Offline auto-tuning function ........................... 5-146
OHF ..................................................................... 5-129
OL ........................................................................ 5-115
OL2 ...................................................................... 5-115
OLR ..................................................................... 5-114
ONT ..................................................................... 5-124
OPE ....................................................................... 5-85
Operation method ................................................ 3-7
Operation ready ............................................... 5-130
OTQ .................................................................... 5-152
Output current monitor ....................................... 5-1
Output frequency monitor .................................. 5-1
Output frequency monitor
(after conversion) ................................................. 5-4
Output frequency setting ................................. 5-15
Output signal delay/hold function .................. 5-36
Output signal logic operation ........................ 5-125
Output torque monitor ........................................ 5-6
Output voltage gain ........................................... 5-72
Output voltage monitor ....................................... 5-6
INDEX-3
I
I
INDEX
Overcurrent suppression function ............... 5-116
Overload limit .................................................... 5-114
Overload warning ............................................ 5-115
Overtorque ........................................................ 5-152
Overvoltage suppression function during deceleration ...................................................... 5-117
Overvoltage/overcurrent restart ..................... 5-96
P
P24 .......................................................................... 2-8
Password function ............................................. 5-91
PID feedback value monitor .............................. 5-2
PID function ........................................................ 5-73
PIDC ..................................................................... 5-78
Position command monitor ............................... 5-9
Power ON time ..................................................... 5-8
Power ON time over ....................................... 5-124
Power recovery restart prevention function ............................................................... 5-105
PSC ......................................................................... 2-8
Pulse train frequency input ............................. 5-82
R
Real frequency monitor ...................................... 5-5
Reduced torque characteristics ........ 5-47 , 5-111
Reduced voltage startup selection ................ 5-58
REF ..................................................................... 5-133
Regenerative braking function ..................... 5-141
Regenerative braking load rate monitor ...... 5-12
Remote operation function .............................. 5-71
Reset .................................................................. 5-100
Reverse rotation prevention function .......... 5-157
RNT ..................................................................... 5-124
Rotation direction limit selection .................... 5-23
Rotation direction monitor ................................. 5-2
RP ............................................................................ 2-9
RS ........................................................................ 5-100
RUN .................................................................... 5-121
RUN command selection ................................. 5-22
RUN command source ................................... 5-133
RUN direction selection ................................... 5-23
RUN permission signal .................................... 5-63
RUN time over .................................................. 5-124
RV .......................................................................... 5-22
RVR ..................................................................... 5-131
S
Safety function .................................................. 5-170
Safety function selector switch ............. 2-5 , 5-170
SC ............................................................................ 2-7
Selection of operation on digital operator disconnection ...................................................... 5-86
INDEX-4
Sensorless vector control .............................. 5-144
SET ....................................................................... 5-54
SETM .................................................................. 5-134
SF1 to SF7 .......................................................... 5-63
SFT ........................................................................ 5-84
Signal during forward operation ................... 5-130
Signal during reverse operation ................... 5-131
Signal during RUN ........................................... 5-121
Simple position control mode ....................... 5-160
Sink logic ............................................................. 2-19
Soft lock function ............................................... 5-84
Source logic ........................................................ 2-19
Speed/position switching function ............... 5-167
STA ....................................................................... 5-56
Stabilization parameter .................................... 5-81
Start frequency ................................................... 5-40
Start ratio ............................................................. 5-40
Start selection ..................................................... 5-40
User selection ..................................................... 5-88
Starting contact signal .................................... 5-128
Starting frequency ............................................. 5-57
STOP key selection .......................................... 5-84
Stop selection ..................................................... 5-24
STP ....................................................................... 5-56
T
Test Run .............................................................. 3-10
TH ................................................................ 2-8 , 5-120
Thermal warning .............................................. 5-113
Thermistor trip function .................................. 5-120
Torque bias function ....................................... 5-156
Torque bias monitor ............................................ 5-6
Torque boost ....................................................... 5-49
Torque control .................................................. 5-156
Torque LADSTOP function ........................... 5-155
Torque limit function ....................................... 5-153
Torque monitor function ................................. 5-151
Torque reference monitor .................................. 5-5
Total RUN time ..................................................... 5-8
Trip ................................................................ 3-12 , 7-1
TRQ ..................................................................... 5-154
U
UDC ...................................................................... 5-71
Undertorque ...................................................... 5-152
UP .......................................................................... 5-71
User parameter automatic setting function ............................................................... 5-177
User parameter manual setting function ... 5-177
User selection monitor ..................................... 5-10
USP ..................................................................... 5-105
UV .......................................................................... 5-97
V
V/f control with speed feedback ..................... 5-83
W
WAC .................................................................... 5-126
WAF .................................................................... 5-127
Warning .................................................................. 7-7
Warning monitor ................................................ 5-11
WCFI ................................................................... 5-132
WCFV ................................................................. 5-132
Window comparator ........................................ 5-132
Wiring the main circuit terminals .................... 2-10
Z
Zero return function ......................................... 5-168
ZS ........................................................................ 5-125
INDEX
INDEX-5
I
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Automation & Drive Division
Automation Department 1
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7084/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
Authorized Distributor:
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 2009 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. I570-E1-02
Descargar
Enlace público actualizado
Se ha actualizado el enlace público a tu chat. Puedes ver y gestionar tus enlaces de chat después del registro aquí.
Enlace público del documento
Anuncio